122 documents and 56 registers. Every document is an original template: replace the items in square brackets, remove what does not apply, and have the approver sign before use. A template is not evidence of compliance.
ISO/IEC 27701
Privacy information management, the PIMS extension
Guide: ISO/IEC 27701 Annex A (controller) and Annex B (processor) controls and where the kit covers each
A reading aid that lists every control in Annex A and Annex B of ISO/IEC 27701 with a short theme in plain words and the kit documents that implement it, and explains how the clause 5 and clause 6 extensions change an existing ISMS, for use when extending the Statement of Applicability.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27701 Annex A; ISO/IEC 27701 Annex B; ISO/IEC 27701 clause 5.4.1.3. Owner: Privacy Officer.
1. How to use this guide
ISO/IEC 27701 does not stand alone. It extends an information security management system built on ISO/IEC 27001 and ISO/IEC 27002 so that it also manages personal data, and it calls the result a privacy information management system. The 2019 edition has four working parts. Clause 5 adds privacy requirements to each ISO/IEC 27001 clause, mostly by saying that wherever the security standard says information security, you read information security and privacy, and by requiring you to decide whether you act as a controller, a processor, or both. Clause 6 adds privacy guidance to the ISO/IEC 27002 controls, for example on training, classification, backups, logs, test data, suppliers and incidents. Clause 7 gives guidance for controllers and clause 8 for processors. Annex A lists the controller controls and Annex B the processor controls; these two annexes are normative, which means your Statement of Applicability must cover them in the same way it covers the ISO/IEC 27001 Annex A controls.
Which annex applies depends on the role decision under PIMS-PRO-01. A pure controller applies Annex A; a pure processor applies Annex B; an organisation that is both, which is most product companies, applies both, and the justification column of ISMS-REG-01 says for which processing activities each applies.
The tables below give each control number a theme written in this kit's own words. The themes are a memory aid, not the standard's titles; read the standard itself for the requirement. The third column names the kit documents that implement the control, the first being the primary one. Use the tables in three places:
- ISMS-REG-01 Statement of Applicability. Add the Annex A and Annex B rows under the ISO/IEC 27001 rows, decide Applicable Yes or No for each, justify, set the implementation status, and copy the kit IDs you actually use.
- ISMS-REG-02 Control implementation tracker. Add the same rows with owner, evidence, test method and the effectiveness grade from PIMS-PRO-07.
- Gap analysis in step 5 of PB-05. Walk the tables with the Processing Owners and mark what exists, what exists informally and what does not exist.
2. Annex A: controls for controllers
| Control |
Theme |
Kit documents |
| A.7.2.1 |
Purpose identified and recorded before processing |
PIMS-REG-01, GDPR-PRO-01 |
| A.7.2.2 |
Lawful basis determined and recorded |
PIMS-REG-01, PIMS-PRO-05, GDPR-TPL-07 |
| A.7.2.3 |
Deciding when and how consent is needed |
PIMS-PRO-05 |
| A.7.2.4 |
Obtaining and recording consent |
PIMS-PRO-05, PIMS-REG-04, GDPR-TPL-06 |
| A.7.2.5 |
Privacy impact assessment |
PIMS-PRO-02, PIMS-TPL-01, PIMS-REG-08 |
| A.7.2.6 |
Written contracts with processors |
PIMS-TPL-02, GOV-PRO-06, PIMS-REG-06 |
| A.7.2.7 |
Joint controller arrangements |
PIMS-PRO-01 |
| A.7.2.8 |
Records of processing |
PIMS-REG-01, GDPR-PRO-01 |
| A.7.3.1 |
Working out the duties owed to individuals |
PIMS-PRO-03, GOV-REG-04, GOV-PRO-25 |
| A.7.3.2 |
Deciding what individuals must be told |
PIMS-PRO-05, GDPR-TPL-01 |
| A.7.3.3 |
Giving individuals the information |
PIMS-PRO-05, GDPR-TPL-01, GDPR-TPL-02, GDPR-TPL-03, GDPR-TPL-04 |
| A.7.3.4 |
Changing or withdrawing consent |
PIMS-PRO-05, PIMS-REG-04 |
| A.7.3.5 |
Objecting to processing |
PIMS-PRO-03, GDPR-TPL-07 |
| A.7.3.6 |
Access, correction and erasure |
PIMS-PRO-03, PIMS-REG-02, GDPR-TPL-05 |
| A.7.3.7 |
Telling third parties about corrections and erasures |
PIMS-PRO-03 |
| A.7.3.8 |
Providing a copy of the data |
PIMS-PRO-03, GDPR-TPL-05 |
| A.7.3.9 |
Handling requests within set times |
PIMS-PRO-03, PIMS-REG-02 |
| A.7.3.10 |
Decisions made by automated means |
PIMS-PRO-03, PIMS-PRO-02, AI-POL-02 |
| A.7.4.1 |
Collecting only what is needed |
PIMS-PRO-06 |
| A.7.4.2 |
Processing only what the purpose needs |
PIMS-PRO-06, PIMS-POL-01 |
| A.7.4.3 |
Accuracy and quality of data |
PIMS-PRO-06, PIMS-PRO-03 |
| A.7.4.4 |
Minimisation objectives set and measured |
PIMS-PRO-06, PIMS-PRO-07, ISMS-PLN-01 |
| A.7.4.5 |
De-identification or deletion when the purpose ends |
PIMS-POL-02, PIMS-PRO-06 |
| A.7.4.6 |
Temporary files removed |
PIMS-PRO-06, PIMS-POL-02 |
| A.7.4.7 |
Retention limited and justified |
PIMS-POL-02, PIMS-REG-07 |
| A.7.4.8 |
Secure disposal |
PIMS-POL-02, GOV-PRO-16, GOV-REG-20 |
| A.7.4.9 |
Controls on transmission of data |
GOV-PRO-23, GOV-PRO-20 |
| A.7.5.1 |
Basis for transfers between countries |
PIMS-POL-03, PIMS-REG-05 |
| A.7.5.2 |
Permitted destination countries recorded |
PIMS-POL-03, PIMS-REG-05, GDPR-TPL-08 |
| A.7.5.3 |
Records of transfers |
PIMS-REG-05, GDPR-REG-02 |
| A.7.5.4 |
Records of disclosures to third parties |
PIMS-REG-01, PIMS-PRO-03, GOV-PRO-25 |
3. Annex B: controls for processors
| Control |
Theme |
Kit documents |
| B.8.2.1 |
Written agreement with the customer |
PIMS-TPL-02, GOV-PRO-06 |
| B.8.2.2 |
No processing for the processor's own purposes |
PIMS-TPL-02, PIMS-PRO-01 |
| B.8.2.3 |
No use for marketing or advertising without consent |
PIMS-TPL-02, PIMS-PRO-05 |
| B.8.2.4 |
Flagging instructions that would break the law |
PIMS-TPL-02, PIMS-PRO-01 |
| B.8.2.5 |
Helping the customer meet its own obligations |
PIMS-TPL-02, PIMS-PRO-03, PIMS-PRO-04, PIMS-PRO-02 |
| B.8.2.6 |
Processor's own records of processing |
PIMS-REG-01 |
| B.8.3.1 |
Supporting the customer's duties to individuals |
PIMS-PRO-03, PIMS-TPL-02 |
| B.8.4.1 |
Temporary files removed |
PIMS-PRO-06, PIMS-POL-02 |
| B.8.4.2 |
Return, transfer or disposal at the end of service |
PIMS-TPL-02, PIMS-POL-02 |
| B.8.4.3 |
Controls on transmission of data |
GOV-PRO-23, GOV-PRO-20 |
| B.8.5.1 |
Basis for transfers between countries |
PIMS-POL-03, PIMS-REG-05 |
| B.8.5.2 |
Permitted destination countries recorded |
PIMS-POL-03, PIMS-REG-05 |
| B.8.5.3 |
Records of disclosures to third parties |
PIMS-REG-05, PIMS-REG-01 |
| B.8.5.4 |
Telling the customer about disclosure requests |
PIMS-POL-03, GOV-PRO-25 |
| B.8.5.5 |
Legally binding disclosures handled lawfully |
PIMS-POL-03, GOV-PRO-25 |
| B.8.5.6 |
Sub-processors disclosed to the customer |
PIMS-REG-06, PIMS-TPL-02 |
| B.8.5.7 |
Engaging a sub-processor only with authorisation and terms |
GOV-PRO-06, PIMS-REG-06, PIMS-TPL-02 |
| B.8.5.8 |
Notifying changes of sub-processor |
PIMS-REG-06, ISMS-PLN-02, PIMS-TPL-02 |
4. What clause 5 and clause 6 change in an existing ISMS
The annexes are the visible part. An auditor spends as much time on the clause 5 extensions, because they change documents the ISMS already has. The table lists the extensions most organisations have to act on and the kit document that carries the change.
| Clause |
What changes, in plain words |
Kit documents |
| 5.2.1 |
The organisation decides and records whether it is a controller, a processor or both, and considers privacy law and contracts as part of its context |
PIMS-PRO-01, ISMS-PRO-01, GOV-REG-04 |
| 5.2.2 |
Individuals whose data is processed, and privacy regulators, become interested parties with requirements |
ISMS-REG-03 |
| 5.2.3 |
The scope statement says which processing of personal data is covered |
ISMS-STM-01 |
| 5.3.2 |
The security policy, or a policy beside it, commits to the protection of personal data |
PIMS-POL-01, GOV-POL-03 |
| 5.3.3 |
A role is accountable for privacy, with the independence and resources it needs |
GOV-POL-01, PIMS-POL-01 |
| 5.4.1.2 |
Risk assessment considers the harm to individuals, not only to the organisation |
GOV-PRO-05, PIMS-PRO-02 |
| 5.4.1.3 |
The Statement of Applicability covers Annex A and Annex B |
ISMS-REG-01, this guide |
| 5.4.2 |
Objectives include privacy objectives |
ISMS-PLN-01, GOV-REG-21 |
| 5.5.3 and 5.5.4 |
Competence and awareness cover privacy |
ISMS-PRO-02, GOV-PRO-08, GDPR-REG-05 |
| 5.7.1 |
Performance evaluation measures privacy controls |
PIMS-PRO-07 |
| 5.7.2 and 5.7.3 |
Internal audit and management review cover the privacy extension |
ISMS-PLN-03, GOV-PRO-02, GOV-PRO-03 |
| 6.4.2.2 |
Training covers the consequences of breaching privacy obligations |
GOV-PRO-08 |
| 6.5.2 |
Classification identifies personal data as a category |
GOV-PRO-16 |
| 6.9.3.1 |
Backups respect retention and can be restored without reviving deleted data |
GOV-PRO-12, PIMS-POL-02 |
| 6.9.4 |
Logs record access to personal data and are themselves protected and retention-limited |
GOV-PRO-14 |
| 6.11.3 |
Test data contains no live personal data without controls |
GOV-PRO-15, PIMS-PRO-06 |
| 6.12.1.2 |
Supplier agreements cover personal data |
GOV-PRO-06, PIMS-TPL-02 |
| 6.13.1.5 |
Incident response includes breach assessment and notification |
PIMS-PRO-04 |
| 6.15.1.1 |
Applicable privacy law is identified |
GOV-PRO-25, GOV-REG-04 |
5. Editions and numbering
This guide uses the numbering of the 2019 edition of ISO/IEC 27701, in which the standard is an extension to ISO/IEC 27001:2013 and ISO/IEC 27002:2013 and the controller and processor controls sit in Annex A and Annex B as listed above. A later edition restructures the standard so that it can be certified on its own and renumbers its clauses and annexes; the themes above survive the restructuring, the numbers do not. Before building your Statement of Applicability, confirm with your certification body which edition it audits against, add a column to ISMS-REG-01 for that edition's numbering, and map each theme row once. The kit document IDs do not change; only the control reference in the first column does. Keep the mapping with GOV-REG-01 as an external document reference so that the next auditor can follow it.
6. Related documents
- ISMS-REG-01 Statement of Applicability
- ISMS-REG-02 Control implementation tracker
- ISMS-GDE-01 Guide: the 93 Annex A controls and where the kit covers each
- PIMS-POL-01 Privacy information management policy
- PIMS-PRO-01 Determining controller and processor roles
- PIMS-PRO-07 Privacy control effectiveness monitoring procedure
- PB-05 Playbook: adding ISO/IEC 27701 privacy management to an existing ISMS
Privacy information management policy
The top-level commitment that extends the information security management system to the protection of personal data, the principles every processing activity must satisfy, and the roles that make them happen.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27701 clause 5.3.2; ISO/IEC 27701 clause 5.2.1; ISO/IEC 27701 clause 6.2.1.1; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 5.2; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 5.34; GDPR Article 5; GDPR Article 24. Owner: Privacy Officer.
1. Purpose
This policy extends [Organisation]'s information security management system into a privacy information management system. It states the principles that every processing of personal data must satisfy, names the roles accountable for them, and commits [Organisation] to the procedures and records that prove the principles are applied.
2. Scope
It applies to all personal data that [Organisation] processes within the scope in ISMS-STM-01, whether as a controller, a processor, or both, in every system, service, office and supplier arrangement, and to every employee, contractor and supplier who handles that data. Personal data means any information relating to an identified or identifiable individual, including identifiers, online identifiers and data that becomes identifying when combined.
3. Roles and responsibilities
| Role |
Responsibility |
| Chief Executive Officer |
Approves this policy, provides the Privacy Officer with resources and direct access, and accepts residual privacy risk rated high. |
| Privacy Officer |
Owns this policy and the privacy procedures, advises on obligations, monitors compliance, runs assessments, handles requests and breaches, and is the contact point for individuals and the supervisory authority. Reports to the Chief Executive Officer and is not instructed on how to perform these tasks. |
| Information Security Manager |
Integrates privacy requirements into the risk method, the Statement of Applicability, the audit programme and the management review. |
| Processing Owner |
The manager accountable for a processing activity in PIMS-REG-01. Keeps its entry current, applies this policy to it and answers for it in assessments and audits. |
| System Owner |
Implements the technical measures a processing activity needs in the system that supports it, including retention, access and rights support. |
| Head of Engineering |
Applies PIMS-PRO-06 to every product and feature that processes personal data. |
| Human Resources |
Applies this policy to employee and applicant data and runs privacy training through GOV-PRO-08. |
| All staff and contractors |
Handle personal data only for the recorded purpose, report suspected breaches and requests from individuals immediately, and complete privacy training. |
4. Policy statements
4.1 Lawfulness, fairness and transparency. Every processing activity has a lawful basis recorded in PIMS-REG-01 before it starts, and the individuals concerned are told about it through a notice managed under PIMS-PRO-05. No personal data is processed in a way the individuals would not reasonably expect from that notice.
4.2 Purpose limitation. Personal data is collected for the specific purposes recorded in PIMS-REG-01 and is not used for a new purpose unless the Privacy Officer confirms in writing that the new purpose is compatible or that a new lawful basis and notice are in place.
4.3 Minimisation. Each processing activity collects and keeps only the data fields the recorded purpose needs. The Processing Owner confirms this at the privacy by design review in PIMS-PRO-06 and at every inventory review.
4.4 Accuracy. Personal data is kept accurate and up to date in proportion to the harm an error could cause. Individuals can correct their data through PIMS-PRO-03, and corrections reach every system and recipient that holds the data.
4.5 Storage limitation. Personal data is kept no longer than the period in PIMS-REG-07, set under PIMS-POL-02, and is then deleted, anonymised or returned, including copies in backups and logs within their own cycle.
4.6 Integrity and confidentiality. Personal data is protected by the controls in the Statement of Applicability ISMS-REG-01, selected through GOV-PRO-05 with the harm to individuals treated as an impact in its own right. Access is granted under GOV-PRO-10 on a need to know basis only.
4.7 Accountability. [Organisation] can show that each statement in this policy is met, through the registers in section 5, the assessments in PIMS-REG-08 and the monitoring report produced quarterly under PIMS-PRO-07.
4.8 Roles decided first. Before any new processing activity, contract or supplier arrangement starts, the Privacy Officer records under PIMS-PRO-01 whether [Organisation] acts as controller, joint controller or processor, because the obligations differ.
4.9 Privacy risk and impact assessment. Every new or changed processing activity is screened under PIMS-PRO-02 before design approval, and a data protection impact assessment is completed and approved before processing that is likely to result in a high risk to individuals begins.
4.10 Rights of individuals. Requests from individuals are handled under PIMS-PRO-03 within one month of receipt, free of charge, with every request and its outcome recorded in PIMS-REG-02.
4.11 Breaches. A suspected personal data breach is reported immediately through the incident channel in GOV-PRO-07 and assessed under PIMS-PRO-04, with the supervisory authority notified within 72 hours of awareness where the risk to individuals requires it and the controller notified without undue delay where [Organisation] is a processor.
4.12 Processors and sharing. Personal data is shared with a processor only under written terms that meet GDPR Article 28, based on PIMS-TPL-02, after approval under GOV-PRO-06, and the processor is listed in PIMS-REG-06.
4.13 International transfers. Personal data leaves the region in which [Organisation] is established only under a mechanism approved in PIMS-POL-03 and recorded in PIMS-REG-05.
4.14 Privacy by design and by default. Every product, feature, system and procurement that processes personal data passes the review in PIMS-PRO-06, and the default configuration offered to individuals is the most privacy-protective option available.
4.15 Training. Every person completes privacy training at induction and annually under GOV-PRO-08, with role-based content for people who design systems, handle requests or respond to incidents, recorded in GDPR-REG-05.
4.16 One management system. Privacy controls are selected, implemented, audited and reviewed through the same processes as security controls: GOV-PRO-05 for risk, ISMS-REG-01 for applicability of the ISO/IEC 27701 Annex A and Annex B controls, GOV-PRO-02 for internal audit and GOV-PRO-03 for management review. The Privacy Officer attends every management review.
4.17 Consequences. A breach of this policy is handled under the disciplinary process in GOV-PRO-18, and for a supplier under the contract.
5. Records and evidence
- PIMS-REG-01 Personal data processing inventory, with roles, purposes, bases and retention.
- PIMS-REG-02 Data subject request register and PIMS-REG-03 Personal data breach register.
- PIMS-REG-04 Consent record register, PIMS-REG-05 International transfer register and PIMS-REG-06 Processor and sub-processor register.
- PIMS-REG-07 Retention schedule with check results and PIMS-REG-08 DPIA register.
- ISMS-REG-01 Statement of Applicability showing the Annex A and Annex B controls that apply.
- Quarterly privacy monitoring reports under PIMS-PRO-07 and GOV-REG-23 acknowledgements of this policy.
6. Exceptions
No exception to statements 4.1 to 4.7 is possible, because they restate legal obligations. An exception to any other statement is requested under GOV-PRO-24 with the Privacy Officer's written assessment of the effect on individuals and is approved by the Chief Executive Officer.
7. Review and maintenance
The Privacy Officer reviews this policy annually, after a personal data breach notified to a supervisory authority, after a change in applicable privacy law recorded in GOV-REG-04, after a change in [Organisation]'s role under PIMS-PRO-01, and after an audit finding against it. Changes follow GOV-PRO-01 and are communicated under ISMS-PLN-02.
8. Related documents
- GOV-POL-01 Information security and privacy governance framework
- GOV-POL-03 Information security policy
- GDPR-POL-01 Data protection policy
- PIMS-PRO-01 Determining controller and processor roles
- PIMS-PRO-02 Privacy risk and data protection impact assessment procedure
- PIMS-PRO-03 Data subject rights handling procedure
- PIMS-PRO-04 Personal data breach assessment and notification procedure
- PIMS-PRO-05 Consent and privacy notice management procedure
- PIMS-PRO-06 Privacy by design and by default procedure
- PIMS-PRO-07 Privacy control effectiveness monitoring procedure
- PIMS-POL-02 Data retention and disposal policy
- PIMS-POL-03 International transfer policy
- PIMS-GDE-01 Guide to the ISO/IEC 27701 Annex A and Annex B controls
- PB-05 Playbook: adding ISO/IEC 27701 privacy management to an existing ISMS
Data retention and disposal policy
The rules that decide how long each category of information is kept, what starts the clock, how it is disposed of, how legal holds suspend disposal, and how backups and logs are treated, with the schedule itself held in PIMS-REG-07.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27701 clause 7.4.7; ISO/IEC 27701 clause 7.4.8; ISO/IEC 27701 clause 7.4.5; ISO/IEC 27701 Annex A 7.4.7; ISO/IEC 27701 Annex A 7.4.8; ISO/IEC 27701 Annex B 8.4.2; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 5.33; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 8.10; GDPR Article 5. Owner: Privacy Officer.
1. Purpose
This policy keeps information for as long as it is needed and no longer. Over-retention increases the harm of every breach, makes requests from individuals harder to answer and breaks the storage limitation principle; under-retention loses records that the law, a contract or a dispute requires.
2. Scope
It applies to all information that [Organisation] holds, in every system, backup, archive, log, mailbox, device, paper file and supplier service, with particular rules for personal data. Where [Organisation] is a processor, the client's instructions and the agreement take precedence over the schedule, and the policy governs what happens at the end of the service.
3. Roles and responsibilities
| Role |
Responsibility |
| Privacy Officer |
Owns this policy and PIMS-REG-07, approves every period and its justification, imposes and lifts legal holds with the legal adviser. |
| Processing Owner |
Proposes the period and trigger for each category they own and confirms the quarterly check. |
| System Owner |
Configures retention and deletion in their system, runs manual disposal where configuration is impossible, and records the result. |
| Information Security Manager |
Sets the retention of security logs and backups under GOV-PRO-14 and GOV-PRO-12 and supplies the disposal methods for media under GOV-PRO-16. |
| Legal adviser |
Confirms statutory periods and limitation periods recorded in GOV-REG-04. |
4. Policy statements
4.1 The schedule. Every category of information is listed in PIMS-REG-07 with its systems, its retention period, the trigger that starts the period, the reason for the period, the disposal method and the owner. A category not in the schedule is added within thirty days of being found, and until then is treated as held for the default in 4.3.
4.2 Justified periods. Each period is justified by one of: a statutory retention requirement, a contractual requirement, the limitation period for legal claims, or a documented operational need, in that order of preference. The justification names the source in GOV-REG-04 where it is legal or contractual. "We might need it" is not a justification.
4.3 Default period. Personal data with no entry in the schedule is deleted [Number] months after the purpose for which it was collected ends, and at most twelve months after.
4.4 Triggers. Periods run from a defined event (end of contract, last activity, decision date, end of employment, financial year end, closure of a case, creation of the record), never from an undefined "when no longer needed". The trigger is recorded in the system where possible.
4.5 Configured disposal. Where a system can enforce retention, the System Owner configures it and records where. Where it cannot, the System Owner runs a disposal at least quarterly and records the run. The Privacy Officer samples each category at least annually and records Pass, Fail or To confirm in PIMS-REG-07.
4.6 Disposal methods. Personal data is disposed of by secure deletion, by irreversible anonymisation, or by return to the controller or individual. Paper is cross-cut shredded or placed in confidential waste. Media and devices are wiped or destroyed under GOV-PRO-16 and recorded in GOV-REG-20. Deleting a reference, a link or an index entry while the data remains is not disposal.
4.7 Anonymisation. Data counts as disposed of by anonymisation only when no party, using means reasonably likely to be used, can re-identify the individuals, and the Privacy Officer has recorded the assessment. Pseudonymised data remains personal data and stays in the schedule.
4.8 Copies and derived data. Disposal covers every copy: primary stores, replicas, exports, reports, caches, temporary files, search indexes, analytics data sets, test environments and data held by processors. The Processing Owner lists the locations from GOV-REG-25 and PIMS-REG-06 and confirms each.
4.9 Backups. Backups are kept for the period set under GOV-PRO-12 and recorded in PIMS-REG-07, so that data deleted from a primary system leaves the backups within that period without a separate deletion. Data restored from backup during recovery that had been deleted from the primary system is deleted again within five working days of the restore.
4.10 Logs. Logs are kept for the period set under GOV-PRO-14 and recorded in PIMS-REG-07. Logs are personal data where they identify an individual and are disposed of on the same terms; they are not kept longer than the security purpose needs because they might one day be useful.
4.11 Legal hold. When litigation, an investigation, an authority enquiry or a complaint is reasonably anticipated, the Privacy Officer or the legal adviser issues a written legal hold naming the categories, systems, individuals and custodians affected. Disposal of the named information is suspended, custodians are instructed in writing, configured deletion is paused for the affected data, and the hold is reviewed every ninety days and lifted in writing. Legal holds are listed in PIMS-REG-07.
4.12 End of a processor service. When [Organisation] stops acting as processor for a client, it returns or deletes the client's personal data as the agreement based on PIMS-TPL-02 requires, within the time it states, and provides written confirmation of deletion. When a supplier stops processing for [Organisation], the supplier owner obtains the same confirmation under GOV-PRO-06 and records it in PIMS-REG-06.
4.13 Requests and breaches. Erasure requests under PIMS-PRO-03 override the schedule unless an exemption applies. Records of requests, breaches, assessments and consents are themselves in the schedule, because they prove compliance.
4.14 Schedule examples. The following rows illustrate the form of PIMS-REG-07. Every period is an example for [Organisation] to replace from its own obligations in GOV-REG-04; none is a legal statement.
| Category |
Trigger |
Period |
Disposal |
| Customer account and contract data |
End of contract |
[Number] years, set by the limitation period |
Secure deletion, anonymised aggregates may remain |
| Prospect and marketing contacts |
Last meaningful interaction |
[Number] months |
Secure deletion and suppression entry kept |
| Support tickets and chat transcripts |
Ticket closure |
[Number] years |
Secure deletion |
| Employee records |
End of employment |
[Number] years, set by employment and tax law |
Secure deletion, paper shredded |
| Unsuccessful applicant data |
Recruitment decision |
[Number] months |
Secure deletion |
| Payroll and tax records |
End of the tax year |
As set by tax law in GOV-REG-04 |
Secure deletion |
| Building access and visitor logs |
Entry date |
[Number] months |
Secure deletion |
| Security logs |
Event date |
Period set under GOV-PRO-14 |
Automatic expiry |
| Backups |
Backup creation |
Period set under GOV-PRO-12 |
Automatic expiry |
| Data subject request records |
Request closure |
[Number] years |
Secure deletion |
| Personal data breach records |
Breach closure |
[Number] years |
Secure deletion |
| Consent records |
Withdrawal or end of processing |
Period set by the limitation period |
Secure deletion |
| Impact assessments and processing inventory |
Processing ceases |
Life of the processing plus [Number] years |
Archive then secure deletion |
5. Records and evidence
- PIMS-REG-07 Retention schedule: every category with its period, trigger, configuration, check results and legal holds.
- Configuration exports showing retention settings in each system.
- Disposal run records and GOV-REG-20 Media and equipment disposal log.
- Deletion confirmations from processors and to clients.
- Legal hold notices, custodian instructions and lift notices.
6. Exceptions
An extension beyond the schedule for a named data set is approved by the Privacy Officer for a stated reason and a stated end date of no more than twelve months, recorded in PIMS-REG-07, and reviewed at the end date. A legal hold is not an exception; it is a suspension under 4.11.
7. Review and maintenance
The Privacy Officer reviews this policy and the schedule annually, after a change in statutory periods in GOV-REG-04, after a new system or processor starts holding personal data, and after a breach or request that revealed over-retention. Changes follow GOV-PRO-01.
8. Related documents
- PIMS-REG-07 Retention schedule
- PIMS-POL-01 Privacy information management policy
- PIMS-PRO-03 Data subject rights handling procedure
- PIMS-TPL-02 Data processing agreement template
- GOV-PRO-12 Backup and restore testing procedure
- GOV-PRO-14 Logging, monitoring and alert handling procedure
- GOV-PRO-16 Asset management, classification and handling procedure
- GOV-REG-20 Media and equipment disposal log
- GOV-REG-04 Legal, regulatory and contractual register
- GOV-PRO-25 Legal, regulatory and contractual compliance procedure
International transfer policy
The rules under which personal data may leave the region in which [Organisation] is established, the transfer mechanisms in plain words, the assessment required before a transfer relies on contractual safeguards, and the register that records every transfer.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27701 clause 7.5.1; ISO/IEC 27701 clause 7.5.2; ISO/IEC 27701 clause 7.5.3; ISO/IEC 27701 clause 8.5.1; ISO/IEC 27701 Annex A 7.5.1; ISO/IEC 27701 Annex A 7.5.2; ISO/IEC 27701 Annex A 7.5.3; ISO/IEC 27701 Annex B 8.5.1; ISO/IEC 27701 Annex B 8.5.2; ISO/IEC 27701 Annex B 8.5.4; ISO/IEC 27701 Annex B 8.5.5; GDPR Article 44; GDPR Article 45; GDPR Article 46; GDPR Article 47; GDPR Article 49. Owner: Privacy Officer.
1. Purpose
This policy keeps the protection that individuals have at home attached to their data when it goes abroad. A transfer without a recognised mechanism is unlawful regardless of how secure the recipient is, and a mechanism applied without assessing the destination can be unlawful too.
2. Scope
It applies to every movement of personal data from [Organisation] to a recipient in another country or international organisation, including hosting, backup and support arrangements, remote access by a supplier or employee from abroad, sub-processors of processors, group companies, clients, authorities and any onward transfer by a recipient. It applies whether [Organisation] is controller or processor. The region of establishment is [Region], as recorded in GOV-REG-04.
3. Roles and responsibilities
| Role |
Responsibility |
| Privacy Officer |
Approves every transfer mechanism, runs or reviews transfer impact assessments, keeps PIMS-REG-05 and monitors changes in law. |
| Processing Owner |
Identifies transfers in their processing activities and keeps the PIMS-REG-01 transfer column current. |
| Supplier owner |
Establishes the processing locations of each supplier and its sub-processors before contract. |
| Legal adviser |
Confirms the mechanism, the clause version and the derogation reasoning. |
| System Owner |
Configures hosting regions and support access under GOV-PRO-26 and provides the evidence. |
4. Policy statements
4.1 What counts as a transfer. Personal data is transferred when it is sent to, stored in, or made accessible from another country, including remote viewing by a support engineer, replication to a backup region, and processing by a sub-processor abroad. Transit through another country with no access and no storage is not a transfer. The Privacy Officer decides doubtful cases.
4.2 No transfer without a recorded mechanism. Personal data leaves the region of establishment only after the Privacy Officer has approved a mechanism in 4.3 and recorded the transfer in PIMS-REG-05 with the importer, the destination, the data, the mechanism and its reference. A transfer found without an entry is stopped or regularised within ten working days and recorded as a nonconformity under GOV-PRO-04.
4.3 Mechanisms in plain words. The Privacy Officer selects the first of these that applies:
| Mechanism |
What it means |
When [Organisation] uses it |
| Adequacy |
The relevant authority has formally recognised the destination as giving protection equivalent to home law, so the data may flow as if it stayed in the region |
Any destination on the current adequacy list recorded in GOV-REG-04; the entry is reviewed if the recognition is withdrawn |
| Standard contractual clauses |
Contract wording approved by the authority that binds the importer to protections; the right module is chosen for the roles of the parties and the wording is not altered except to add protections |
The usual mechanism for suppliers, sub-processors and clients outside adequate destinations; always with a transfer impact assessment |
| Binding corporate rules |
Group-wide rules approved by an authority that bind every group company to the same protections |
Transfers between group companies where such rules have been approved |
| Approved codes or certifications |
A code of conduct or certification approved by an authority, with binding commitments by the importer |
Where the importer holds one and the Privacy Officer has verified it |
| Derogations |
Narrow exceptions for occasional transfers: the individual's explicit informed consent, a contract with or in the interest of the individual, important public interest, legal claims, or the individual's vital interests |
Last resort, for a specific non-repetitive transfer, never for routine processing, and only with the legal adviser's written confirmation |
4.4 Transfer impact assessment. Before a transfer relies on standard contractual clauses, binding corporate rules or a code or certification, the Privacy Officer completes GDPR-TPL-08: the data and the individuals; the importer and its role; the law and practice of the destination, including access by public authorities and the remedies available to individuals; the importer's own experience of such access; and the supplementary measures that close any gap, such as encryption with keys held only in the region of establishment, pseudonymisation before export, split processing, or contractual commitments to challenge and notify access requests. The assessment is approved before the first transfer, referenced in PIMS-REG-05, and repeated every [Number] months and whenever the destination's law, the importer or the data changes.
4.5 Supplementary measures. Where the assessment finds that the destination's law undermines the clauses and no supplementary measure closes the gap, the transfer does not take place. Measures are implemented and evidenced before the transfer starts, not promised.
4.6 Suppliers and sub-processors. The supplier owner establishes under GOV-PRO-06, before contract, every country in which the supplier and its sub-processors store, process, back up or access the data, records them in PIMS-REG-06 and GOV-REG-07, and obtains notice of any change. Hosting regions are chosen under GOV-PRO-26 to avoid transfers where a regional option exists at reasonable cost.
4.7 Onward transfers. An importer may pass personal data to another country only under a mechanism that gives equivalent protection and that is recorded in the contract. Sub-processor chains are followed to the last link.
4.8 Transfers where [Organisation] is a processor. [Organisation] transfers a client's personal data only on the client's documented instruction, under the mechanism the client has approved, and notifies the client of every country involved and every change. A request from a client to transfer without a lawful mechanism is declined and recorded.
4.9 Working from abroad. An employee or contractor accessing personal data from outside the region of establishment is a transfer; approval under GOV-POL-05 includes the Privacy Officer's confirmation of the mechanism and the device and network controls that apply.
4.10 Requests from foreign authorities. A legally binding request from a public authority outside the region for personal data is handled under GOV-PRO-25 by the Privacy Officer and the legal adviser: its validity is checked, the minimum data is disclosed, the controller is told where [Organisation] is a processor and the law allows, and individuals are told where the law allows. Each request and response is recorded in PIMS-REG-05 as a disclosure.
4.11 Individuals informed. Every notice under PIMS-PRO-05 states that data is transferred, where, under which mechanism, and how the individual can see the safeguards.
4.12 Records. PIMS-REG-05 records every transfer and every disclosure to a foreign authority; PIMS-REG-01 and GDPR-REG-02 cross-reference it. Signed clauses, assessments and approvals are kept for the life of the transfer plus the period in PIMS-REG-07.
4.13 Change in law. When an adequacy recognition is withdrawn, a clause set is replaced, or a court decision changes the assessment of a destination, the Privacy Officer reviews every affected PIMS-REG-05 entry within thirty days and reports to the next management review.
5. Records and evidence
- PIMS-REG-05 International transfer register with the mechanism, reference and assessment for every transfer.
- Completed GDPR-TPL-08 transfer impact assessments and their reviews.
- Signed standard contractual clauses or other instruments, with the version and the module used.
- PIMS-REG-06 and GOV-REG-07 location entries for suppliers and sub-processors.
- GOV-PRO-26 region evidence and GOV-POL-05 approvals for working abroad.
6. Exceptions
A derogation under 4.3 is the only exception and is used as that row describes. No transfer proceeds on the basis that a mechanism will be put in place later.
7. Review and maintenance
The Privacy Officer reviews this policy annually, after any change in transfer law or adequacy recognitions recorded in GOV-REG-04, after a request from a foreign authority, and after an audit finding. Changes follow GOV-PRO-01.
8. Related documents
- GDPR-TPL-08 Transfer impact assessment template
- PIMS-REG-05 International transfer register
- PIMS-REG-06 Processor and sub-processor register
- PIMS-REG-01 Personal data processing inventory
- PIMS-TPL-02 Data processing agreement template
- PIMS-PRO-05 Consent and privacy notice management procedure
- GOV-PRO-06 Supplier and third party security procedure
- GOV-PRO-26 Cloud services security procedure
- GOV-PRO-25 Legal, regulatory and contractual compliance procedure
- GOV-POL-05 Remote and mobile working policy
- GDPR-REG-02 Data flow and transfer map
Determining controller and processor roles
The test applied to every processing activity and every counterparty to decide whether [Organisation] acts as controller, joint controller or processor, how the decision is recorded, and what obligations follow from it.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27701 clause 5.2.1; ISO/IEC 27701 clause 7.2.6; ISO/IEC 27701 clause 7.2.7; ISO/IEC 27701 clause 8.2.1; ISO/IEC 27701 Annex A 7.2.7; ISO/IEC 27701 Annex B 8.2.1; GDPR Article 4; GDPR Article 26; GDPR Article 28. Owner: Privacy Officer.
1. Purpose
This procedure makes the role decision explicit and recorded, because the role decides which obligations apply: a controller answers to individuals and the supervisory authority for the whole processing, a processor answers to the controller for following instructions, and joint controllers must agree who does what. Getting the role wrong leaves obligations unowned.
2. Scope
It applies to every processing activity in PIMS-REG-01, every supplier that receives personal data, every client contract under which [Organisation] receives personal data, every group company arrangement and every data sharing agreement, from the first proposal until the processing ends.
3. Roles and responsibilities
| Role |
Responsibility |
| Privacy Officer |
Runs the test, records the decision and its reasoning, decides disputed cases with the legal adviser, and re-assesses on change. |
| Processing Owner |
Supplies the facts about who decided the processing, its purpose and its means, and applies the resulting obligations. |
| Supplier owner |
Raises the test for every new supplier under GOV-PRO-06 before personal data is shared. |
| Sales or account lead |
Raises the test for every client contract that involves personal data before signature. |
| Legal adviser |
Confirms contract wording matches the decided role. |
4. Procedure
4.1 Trigger. The Processing Owner, supplier owner or account lead asks the Privacy Officer for a role decision when a processing activity is proposed, when a supplier or client arrangement involving personal data is proposed, when the purpose or the parties of an existing activity change, and at the annual review of PIMS-REG-01. No personal data flows under a new arrangement until the decision is recorded.
4.2 Facts gathered. The requester provides, in writing: the parties involved, who initiated the processing, what each party gets out of it, which party chose the data items, the individuals concerned, the retention period and the recipients, which party could stop the processing, and whether any party may use the data for anything of its own.
4.3 The decision test. The Privacy Officer answers five questions for each party.
| Question |
Points to controller |
Points to processor |
| Why does the processing happen? |
The party decided it should happen for its own ends |
The party does it only because another party engaged it |
| Who decides the purpose? |
The party sets or shares the purpose |
The purpose is set entirely by the other party |
| Who decides the essential means? |
The party decides which data, which individuals, how long and who receives |
The party decides only technical or organisational detail within instructions |
| Does the party gain beyond a fee? |
Yes, a commercial, legal or operational benefit of its own |
No, it is paid for the service and nothing more |
| Could the party use the data for anything else? |
Yes, or it already does |
No, contract and practice forbid it |
Three or more answers in the controller column make the party a controller. A party that decides the purpose is always a controller, however the other answers fall. A party that processes only within another party's documented instructions, decides nothing essential and gains nothing beyond its fee is a processor.
4.4 Joint controllership. Where two or more parties are controllers of the same processing, the Privacy Officer asks whether they decided the purposes and means together, including the case where each party's decision depends on the other's so that the processing could not happen without both. If so they are joint controllers and an arrangement is required. If each party pursues its own purpose with its own means on the same data, they are independent controllers and a data sharing agreement is used instead.
4.5 Recurring cases. The Privacy Officer applies the test, not a label, but records the usual outcome for recurring patterns in a short table kept with this procedure: cloud hosting and software providers acting on instruction (processor); payroll providers and benefits administrators (usually processor); professional advisers, auditors and regulators using data for their own professional duties (controller); payment and banking services (usually controller); staff augmentation working under [Organisation]'s direction (part of [Organisation], not a separate party); a group company providing a shared service to other group companies (processor for that service); a client that sends personal data for [Organisation] to deliver a service (client is controller, [Organisation] is processor); a client that buys data [Organisation] collected for its own purposes (both controllers). A pattern never overrides facts that point the other way.
4.6 Documenting the decision. The Privacy Officer records in PIMS-REG-01 the role for each processing activity and, in a note on the row, the reasoning in no more than three sentences and the date. For a supplier the role is also recorded in PIMS-REG-06 and the processor terms flag in GOV-REG-07. For a client contract the role is recorded in the contract summary held by the account lead and in PIMS-REG-01.
4.7 Consequences for [Organisation] as controller. The Processing Owner applies the full set: a lawful basis and a notice (PIMS-PRO-05), inventory entry (PIMS-REG-01), impact assessment screening (PIMS-PRO-02), rights handling (PIMS-PRO-03), breach notification to the authority and individuals (PIMS-PRO-04), processor terms with every processor (PIMS-TPL-02), transfer mechanisms (PIMS-POL-03) and retention (PIMS-POL-02).
4.8 Consequences for [Organisation] as processor. The Processing Owner applies: processing only on the controller's documented instructions and flagging any instruction that appears unlawful; confidentiality commitments from staff; the security measures in the agreement; no sub-processor without the controller's authorisation and no change without notice (PIMS-REG-06); assistance with rights requests, security, breaches and assessments; notification of breaches to the controller without undue delay (PIMS-PRO-04); deletion or return at the end of the service; processor records in PIMS-REG-01; and making information available for the controller's audits. [Organisation] does not use the data for its own purposes, including product improvement, analytics or marketing, unless the agreement allows it and [Organisation] becomes a controller for that use.
4.9 Consequences for joint controllers. The Privacy Officer agrees a written arrangement with the other controllers that allocates the notice, the rights handling, the breach notification, the contact point for individuals and the record keeping, and makes the essence of the arrangement available to individuals through the notice. Each controller remains answerable to individuals regardless of the allocation.
4.10 Contract alignment. The legal adviser confirms before signature that the contract wording matches the decided role: processor terms based on PIMS-TPL-02 for a processor, a joint controller arrangement for joint controllers, a data sharing agreement for independent controllers. A contract that labels a party a processor while the facts make it a controller is corrected, not signed.
4.11 Disputed cases. Where the counterparty disagrees with the role decision, the Privacy Officer records both positions and the reasons, and the legal adviser decides. Until the dispute is settled, [Organisation] applies the controller obligations, which are the wider set.
4.12 Re-assessment. The decision is re-assessed when the purpose, the parties, the data items or the benefit to any party changes, when a processor starts using data for its own ends, and at the annual inventory review under GDPR-PRO-01. A changed decision is recorded with the date and triggers a contract review within thirty days.
5. Records and evidence
- PIMS-REG-01 Personal data processing inventory: the role column and the reasoning note on each row.
- PIMS-REG-06 Processor and sub-processor register and GOV-REG-07 Supplier register entries.
- Signed processor terms, joint controller arrangements and data sharing agreements.
- The recurring-case table kept with this procedure, with the date of its last review.
6. Exceptions
No exception applies. A processing activity without a recorded role is not started, and an existing one found without a role is assessed within five working days of discovery.
7. Review and maintenance
The Privacy Officer reviews this procedure annually, after guidance from a supervisory authority or a court decision that changes how roles are assessed, and after any dispute under step 4.11. Changes follow GOV-PRO-01.
8. Related documents
- PIMS-POL-01 Privacy information management policy
- PIMS-REG-01 Personal data processing inventory
- PIMS-REG-06 Processor and sub-processor register
- PIMS-TPL-02 Data processing agreement template
- GOV-PRO-06 Supplier and third party security procedure
- GOV-REG-07 Supplier register
- GDPR-PRO-01 Data mapping and records of processing procedure
- GDPR-TPL-09 Supplier GDPR assessment questionnaire
Privacy risk and data protection impact assessment procedure
How every new or changed processing activity is screened for privacy risk, when a full data protection impact assessment is required, how risks to individuals are scored and treated, who approves the residual risk, and when the supervisory authority is consulted first.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27701 clause 7.2.5; ISO/IEC 27701 clause 5.4.1.2; ISO/IEC 27701 Annex A 7.2.5; GDPR Article 35; GDPR Article 36. Owner: Privacy Officer.
1. Purpose
This procedure finds the harm a processing activity could do to the individuals concerned before the activity starts, reduces that harm by design, and records the decision so that [Organisation] can show it considered the risk. It also satisfies the legal duty to assess, and where necessary consult the authority about, processing likely to result in a high risk.
2. Scope
It applies to every new processing activity, every significant change to an existing one (new purpose, new data items, new individuals, new technology, new recipient, new country), every system or feature that handles personal data, and every procurement of a service that will process personal data. It applies whether [Organisation] is controller or processor; as a processor [Organisation] assists the controller's assessment rather than approving its own.
3. Roles and responsibilities
| Role |
Responsibility |
| Processing Owner |
Completes the screening, drafts the assessment with the project team, implements the measures and owns the residual risk at low or medium. |
| Privacy Officer |
Decides whether a full assessment is required, advises throughout, challenges the risk scoring, records the outcome in PIMS-REG-08 and prepares any consultation with the authority. |
| Information Security Manager |
Supplies the security measures and links the privacy risks to GOV-REG-05. |
| Head of Engineering or System Owner |
Confirms that technical measures are built and tested before go-live. |
| Chief Executive Officer |
Approves residual risk rated high and decides whether to proceed to prior consultation. |
4. Procedure
4.1 Screening at concept stage. Before design approval, the Processing Owner completes section 1 of PIMS-TPL-01, answering each screening trigger Yes or No with one line of justification, and sends it to the Privacy Officer. The triggers are:
- evaluation or scoring of individuals, including profiling and prediction of behaviour, location, health, interests or reliability;
- decisions made about individuals by automated means that have legal or similarly significant effects;
- systematic monitoring of individuals, including monitoring of a publicly accessible area, employee monitoring and tracking of location or online behaviour;
- special categories of data, criminal offence data or data of a highly personal nature such as financial detail or private communications;
- processing on a large scale, judged by the number of individuals, the volume and range of data, the duration and the geographical extent;
- matching or combining data sets from different sources or collected for different purposes;
- data about individuals who may be vulnerable or have little choice, including children, patients, employees and applicants;
- use of new or innovative technology, including machine learning, biometrics, connected devices and AI features;
- processing that could deny individuals a service, a contract, a benefit or access, or could lead to discrimination, exclusion or physical harm;
- data obtained without the individuals' direct involvement where a notice is impractical;
- transfer of personal data outside the region where [Organisation] is established;
- any processing type that the supervisory authority has listed as requiring an assessment, as recorded in GOV-REG-04.
4.2 Screening decision. Within five working days the Privacy Officer records the outcome in PIMS-REG-08. A full assessment is required when two or more triggers apply, when trigger 2, 4 or 12 applies on its own, or when the Privacy Officer judges any single trigger to carry a high risk. A decision that no assessment is required is recorded with reasons, and the processing still passes the privacy by design review in PIMS-PRO-06.
4.3 Stage gates. A required assessment advances through four gates, each recorded in PIMS-REG-08: gate 1, description and necessity complete before build starts; gate 2, risks scored and measures agreed before the go-live gate in PB-07; gate 3, residual risk approved before any personal data is processed in production; gate 4, review at the interval in step 4.11. A project does not pass a gate on a promise; a measure not yet built is a To confirm item with an owner and a due date.
4.4 Description of the processing. The Processing Owner completes section 2 of PIMS-TPL-01: nature (how data is collected, used, stored, shared and deleted, with a data flow referenced in GOV-REG-25 or GDPR-REG-02), scope (data items, special categories, volume, individuals, retention, geography), context (relationship with the individuals, their expectations, prior concerns, technology novelty) and purposes (the benefit to [Organisation], to the individuals and to others).
4.5 Necessity and proportionality. The Processing Owner and the Privacy Officer record in section 3 why the purpose cannot be achieved with less data or less intrusion, the lawful basis, how each principle in PIMS-POL-01 is met, the alternatives considered and rejected, how individuals are informed and how they exercise rights, the processors involved and the transfer mechanism.
4.6 Consultation. The Privacy Officer decides who is consulted and records it in section 4: the Information Security Manager always; the individuals or their representatives, through user research, a survey, a works council or a client advisory group, unless the Privacy Officer records why that is not practicable; processors, for the measures they operate; and the legal adviser where the lawful basis or a transfer is in question. Views received, and whether they changed the design, are recorded.
4.7 Identifying risks to individuals. The project team lists risks from the individual's point of view, not the organisation's: loss of control over their data, unauthorised disclosure, re-identification, inaccurate data leading to a wrong decision, discrimination, financial loss, identity theft, reputational damage, physical danger, loss of a service, distress, and inability to exercise rights. Each risk names its source (an event, an actor or a design weakness).
4.8 Scoring. Each risk is scored on the 1 to 5 likelihood scale in GOV-PRO-05 and on a severity scale for individuals: 1 negligible (inconvenience, easily overcome); 2 limited (annoyance, minor cost, short-lived); 3 significant (real difficulty, financial loss, distress, recoverable with effort); 4 severe (lasting harm, serious financial or psychological consequence, hard to recover from); 5 critical (danger to life, irreversible harm, loss of liberty). Score is likelihood multiplied by severity, banded as in GOV-PRO-05: 1 to 4 low, 5 to 9 medium, 10 to 15 high, 16 to 25 critical.
4.9 Measures and residual risk. For every risk at medium or above the team records the measures that remove the source, reduce likelihood or reduce severity (less data, pseudonymisation, encryption, access limits, shorter retention, transparency, human review, opt-out, contractual terms), the owner and the date. The risk is re-scored after the measures. Every measure becomes a backlog item or a contract clause, and every medium or higher residual risk also appears in GOV-REG-05 with a cross-reference to the assessment.
4.10 Approval of residual risk. Residual low or medium is approved by the Processing Owner with the Privacy Officer's written agreement. Residual high is approved only by the Chief Executive Officer after written advice from the Privacy Officer, and is reviewed every six months. Residual critical is not approved; the processing is redesigned or abandoned. The approval, the approver and the date are recorded in section 7 of PIMS-TPL-01 and in PIMS-REG-08.
4.11 Prior consultation with the supervisory authority. Where a residual high risk cannot be reduced further, the Privacy Officer prepares a consultation containing the assessment, the roles of the parties, the purposes, the measures and the Privacy Officer's contact details, and submits it to the authority. The processing does not start until the authority responds or the period set by law expires without a response. The Chief Executive Officer decides whether to consult or to abandon the processing.
4.12 Review. The Processing Owner reviews a completed assessment annually where residual risk is high, every two years otherwise, and immediately when a change in step 2 occurs, a breach affects the processing, a complaint is received about it, or the law or authority guidance changes. The review outcome is recorded even when nothing changes.
4.13 Processor assistance. Where [Organisation] is a processor, the Processing Owner supplies the controller, within the time in the agreement, with the description of the processing, the security measures and the sub-processors involved, and implements the measures the controller's assessment requires.
5. Records and evidence
- PIMS-REG-08 DPIA register: every screening outcome and every assessment with its gate dates, residual rating, approver and next review.
- Completed PIMS-TPL-01 documents, stored with the project record and retained for the life of the processing plus the period in PIMS-REG-07.
- GOV-REG-05 entries for medium and higher residual risks; backlog items and contract clauses for measures.
- Consultation records and any correspondence with the supervisory authority.
6. Exceptions
An activity may start before gate 3 only in a declared Severity 1 or 2 incident under GOV-PRO-07 where the processing is needed to contain harm, and then only with the Privacy Officer's recorded agreement; the assessment is completed within ten working days afterwards. No other exception applies.
7. Review and maintenance
The Privacy Officer reviews this procedure annually, after any prior consultation, after new authority guidance on assessments, and after an audit finding. Changes follow GOV-PRO-01.
8. Related documents
- PIMS-TPL-01 Data protection impact assessment template
- PIMS-REG-08 DPIA register
- PIMS-POL-01 Privacy information management policy
- PIMS-PRO-06 Privacy by design and by default procedure
- GOV-PRO-05 Risk assessment and treatment methodology
- GOV-REG-05 Information security risk register
- GOV-REG-25 Data flow and interface inventory
- GDPR-REG-02 Data flow and transfer map
- PB-07 Playbook: the go-live security and privacy gate for a software project
- AI-PRO-01 AI risk assessment procedure
Data subject rights handling procedure
How a request from an individual about their personal data is received, verified, logged, answered within one month and recorded, right by right, including when a request may be refused and what [Organisation] does when it is a processor.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27701 clause 7.3.1; ISO/IEC 27701 clause 7.3.6; ISO/IEC 27701 clause 7.3.9; ISO/IEC 27701 clause 8.3.1; ISO/IEC 27701 Annex A 7.3.5; ISO/IEC 27701 Annex A 7.3.6; ISO/IEC 27701 Annex A 7.3.7; ISO/IEC 27701 Annex A 7.3.8; ISO/IEC 27701 Annex A 7.3.9; ISO/IEC 27701 Annex A 7.3.10; ISO/IEC 27701 Annex B 8.3.1; GDPR Article 12; GDPR Article 15; GDPR Article 16; GDPR Article 17; GDPR Article 18; GDPR Article 20; GDPR Article 21; GDPR Article 22. Owner: Privacy Officer.
1. Purpose
This procedure gets every request from an individual answered correctly and on time, by named people following the same steps, so that individuals get what the law gives them and [Organisation] can prove it.
2. Scope
It applies to every request, however phrased and through whatever channel, in which an individual asks about or wants something done with personal data that [Organisation] holds about them as a controller: access, rectification, erasure, restriction, portability, objection, review of an automated decision and withdrawal of consent. It also sets what [Organisation] does with a request it receives as a processor.
3. Roles and responsibilities
| Role |
Responsibility |
| All staff |
Recognise a request in any form, forward it to the privacy mailbox the same working day, and never answer it themselves. |
| Request handler |
A person trained for the role and named by the Privacy Officer. Logs, verifies, coordinates, drafts and sends the response, and keeps PIMS-REG-02 current. |
| Privacy Officer |
Decides extensions, refusals, fees, complex scope questions and disputes; reviews every refusal before it is sent. |
| System Owner |
Searches their system, extracts, corrects, restricts or deletes within the time the handler sets, and confirms in writing. |
| Processor |
Assists within the time in its agreement and does not answer the individual directly. |
4. Procedure
4.1 Intake. Requests arrive through the privacy mailbox and web form published in the notice, by post, through customer support, through account managers, through Human Resources, or verbally to any employee. Every channel counts. A request made verbally is written down by the person who received it, with the date, and confirmed back to the individual. A request does not have to cite the law or use any particular words.
4.2 Logging. The request handler records the request in PIMS-REG-02 within one working day of receipt: date received, channel, requester type, the rights exercised, and the clock start. The one month period runs from the day of receipt and ends on the same date of the following month, or the last day of that month if there is no such date.
4.3 Identity verification. The handler confirms identity in proportion to the sensitivity of the data. Where the individual writes from the contact details held on their account, or is signed in to their account, no further proof is requested. Otherwise the handler asks, within three working days and using the GDPR-TPL-05 verification letter, for the minimum extra information that confirms identity, and records in PIMS-REG-02 the date it arrives; the period then runs from that date. Identity documents received are deleted once checked. A request made by a representative is honoured only with written authority from the individual.
4.4 Acknowledgement and scope. Within three working days of logging, the handler sends the GDPR-TPL-05 acknowledgement with the expected response date. Where the request is broad, the handler may ask the individual to clarify what they want, without stopping the clock; if no answer arrives within ten working days the handler responds to the request as reasonably understood.
4.5 Extension. Where the request is complex or the individual has made several, the Privacy Officer may extend the period by up to two further months. The extension and its reasons are sent to the individual before the first month ends, using the GDPR-TPL-05 extension letter, and are recorded in PIMS-REG-02.
4.6 Locating the data. The handler identifies every system and processor that may hold the individual's data from PIMS-REG-01 and PIMS-REG-06, instructs each System Owner and processor in writing with a deadline of no more than ten working days, and records the confirmations. Searches cover primary systems, support tools, email and messaging where the individual is a subject, derived data, and backups where restorable within the period.
4.7 Handling each right.
| Right |
What the handler does |
| Access |
Collates the data, removes or redacts other people's data and material covered by an exemption, and provides a copy together with the purposes, categories, recipients, retention, source, the existence of automated decision making and its logic, the right to complain and the other rights. Delivered securely in a commonly used electronic format, or through the account portal where one exists. |
| Rectification |
Checks the correction against evidence where accuracy matters, applies it in every system within five working days, tells every recipient the data was shared with, and confirms to the individual. Disputed accuracy is recorded alongside the data until resolved. |
| Erasure |
Confirms a ground applies (purpose ended, consent withdrawn, objection upheld, unlawful processing, legal obligation, child's data from an online service), checks no exemption applies (legal obligation to retain, legal claims, freedom of expression, public interest), then deletes or anonymises across primary systems, derived data and processors under PIMS-POL-02, records that backup copies expire within their cycle, informs recipients, and confirms to the individual. |
| Restriction |
Marks the data so that it is stored but not otherwise processed, in every system, for as long as the ground applies (accuracy contested, processing unlawful but erasure declined, data needed for legal claims, objection pending), tells recipients, and informs the individual before lifting the restriction. |
| Portability |
Where the data was provided by the individual and processed by automated means on the basis of consent or contract, exports it in a structured, commonly used and machine-readable format, and transmits it directly to another controller where technically feasible and requested. |
| Objection |
For direct marketing, stops the processing without exception and records the suppression. For processing based on legitimate interests or public task, stops unless the Privacy Officer records compelling grounds that override the individual's interests, using GDPR-TPL-07, and tells the individual the outcome with reasons. |
| Automated decisions |
Where a decision with legal or similarly significant effect was made solely by automated means, arranges a review of the decision by a competent person, explains the logic and the main factors in plain words, lets the individual put their point of view, and records the reviewed decision. |
| Withdrawal of consent |
Actions the withdrawal under PIMS-PRO-05 step 4.5 and confirms it, without affecting processing that took place before. |
4.8 Refusal and limitation. A request is refused or limited only on a ground the Privacy Officer confirms in writing: the request is manifestly unfounded or excessive, in particular because it repeats a recent request; the data is covered by an exemption in the law recorded in GOV-REG-04; or disclosure would adversely affect the rights of another person. The refusal letter in GDPR-TPL-05 states the reasons, the right to complain to the supervisory authority and the right to seek a judicial remedy, and is sent within the period. A partial refusal still answers the rest of the request.
4.9 Fees. Responses are free. A reasonable fee covering administrative cost is charged only for further copies or for a request the Privacy Officer has recorded as manifestly unfounded or excessive, and the individual is told the fee before work continues.
4.10 Response. The handler sends the response using the GDPR-TPL-05 response letter through a channel that matches the sensitivity of the content: the account portal, encrypted file transfer or password-protected archive with the password sent separately. Paper responses go by tracked post. The response is written in plain language and, where the individual is a child, in language a child can understand.
4.11 Requests received as a processor. Where the request concerns data [Organisation] processes for a client, the handler forwards it to the client within two working days, tells the individual that it has been passed to the controller, takes no other action unless the client instructs it, and records it in PIMS-REG-02 with the client named. Assistance requested by the client is provided within the time in the agreement.
4.12 Closure and records. The handler records in PIMS-REG-02 the outcome, the date closed and whether the deadline was met, and files the correspondence and the search confirmations with the request. Request records are retained for the period in PIMS-REG-07. A complaint about the handling is recorded and reviewed by the Privacy Officer within five working days.
4.13 Monitoring. The Privacy Officer reports the number of requests, the proportion answered on time, extensions, refusals and complaints quarterly under PIMS-PRO-07. Two late responses in a quarter raise a corrective action in GOV-REG-03.
5. Records and evidence
- PIMS-REG-02 Data subject request register: every request with dates, rights, handler, outcome and timeliness.
- The correspondence for each request, including GDPR-TPL-05 letters sent and identity verification records.
- Written confirmations from System Owners and processors for each search, correction, restriction or deletion.
- Privacy Officer decisions on extensions, refusals, fees and objections, with reasons.
6. Exceptions
Where a search cannot be completed within the extended period because data is held in an archive that cannot be restored in time, the handler provides everything found, states what remains outstanding and when it will follow, and the Privacy Officer records the case. No other exception applies.
7. Review and maintenance
The Privacy Officer reviews this procedure annually, after any complaint to a supervisory authority about request handling, after a change in law or authority guidance on rights, and after a new system or processor changes where personal data is held. Changes follow GOV-PRO-01.
8. Related documents
- GDPR-TPL-05 Data subject request response letters
- PIMS-REG-02 Data subject request register
- PIMS-REG-01 Personal data processing inventory
- PIMS-REG-06 Processor and sub-processor register
- PIMS-PRO-05 Consent and privacy notice management procedure
- PIMS-POL-02 Data retention and disposal policy
- GDPR-TPL-07 Legitimate interests assessment template
- PIMS-PRO-07 Privacy control effectiveness monitoring procedure
Personal data breach assessment and notification procedure
What happens from the moment an incident is found to involve personal data: the 72 hour clock, the assessment of risk to individuals, the decision whether to notify the supervisory authority and the individuals, the processor duty to tell the controller, and the record kept whether or not anyone is notified.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27701 clause 6.13.1.1; ISO/IEC 27701 clause 6.13.1.5; ISO/IEC 27701 Annex B 8.2.5; GDPR Article 33; GDPR Article 34. Owner: Privacy Officer.
1. Purpose
This procedure turns an incident involving personal data into a documented assessment and, where required, a notification made within the legal deadline, so that individuals can protect themselves, the authority is told what the law requires, and [Organisation] can show its reasoning afterwards.
2. Scope
It applies to every breach of security leading to the accidental or unlawful destruction, loss, alteration, unauthorised disclosure of, or access to, personal data that [Organisation] holds as controller or processor, including breaches at a processor or sub-processor. It runs alongside GOV-PRO-07, which handles the technical response; this procedure handles the assessment, the notification decisions and the privacy record.
3. Roles and responsibilities
| Role |
Responsibility |
| Incident Lead |
Informs the Privacy Officer the moment personal data is suspected to be involved and records the time of awareness. |
| Privacy Officer |
Runs this procedure, assesses the risk to individuals, drafts notifications, keeps PIMS-REG-03 and is the contact point for the authority. |
| Legal adviser |
Confirms the notification duties in each jurisdiction and reviews the wording of notifications. |
| Chief Executive Officer |
Approves notification to individuals and any public statement; is informed of every notification to an authority before it is sent. |
| Processing Owner and System Owners |
Supply the facts about the data, the individuals and the systems, within the times below. |
| Communications lead |
Prepares the channels for notifying individuals and handles enquiries, under GOV-PRO-07. |
4. Procedure
4.1 Trigger and time of awareness. GOV-PRO-07 step 4.4 triggers this procedure. The Incident Lead records the time at which [Organisation] became aware, meaning the time at which a person in [Organisation] had a reasonable degree of certainty that a breach of personal data had occurred, not the time the investigation finished. For a breach reported by a processor, awareness is the time the processor's report is received. The 72 hour clock runs from this time, including outside working hours.
4.2 Register entry. Within two hours of the trigger the Privacy Officer opens an entry in PIMS-REG-03 with the GOV-REG-08 reference, the time of awareness and the 72 hour deadline, and sets the status to Under assessment.
4.3 Facts within 24 hours. The Privacy Officer obtains from the Incident Lead and the Processing Owner, within 24 hours of awareness: what happened and how; whether the breach affects confidentiality, integrity, availability or several; the categories and approximate number of individuals and of records; whether special categories, financial data, credentials or children's data are involved; whether the data was encrypted or pseudonymised and whether the keys are safe; who received or could access the data and whether it has been recovered; whether the breach is ongoing; and which processing activities in PIMS-REG-01 are affected. Facts not yet known are recorded as unknown with the time they are expected.
4.4 Role check. For each affected data set the Privacy Officer confirms from PIMS-REG-01 whether [Organisation] is controller or processor. A single incident can put [Organisation] in both roles for different data; each role follows its own path below.
4.5 Processor path. Where [Organisation] is a processor, the Privacy Officer notifies each affected controller without undue delay and in any case within the time in the agreement, or within 24 hours of awareness where no time is agreed, using the contact in PIMS-REG-06 or the contract. The notification gives the facts known, states what is still being established, and promises updates at the agreed cadence. [Organisation] does not notify the authority or the individuals for the controller's data unless the controller instructs it in writing, and gives the controller the assistance it needs to meet its own deadline.
4.6 Risk assessment to individuals. Where [Organisation] is a controller, the Privacy Officer assesses the risk to the individuals using the likelihood and severity scales in PIMS-PRO-02 step 4.8, considering: the type of breach; the nature, sensitivity and volume of the data; how easily individuals can be identified; the severity of the consequences (identity theft, fraud, financial loss, discrimination, reputational damage, physical harm, distress, loss of control); whether the individuals are vulnerable; the number affected; the nature of the recipient, if known; and the measures already in place, such as encryption with uncompromised keys, or taken since, such as recovery of the data before it was read. The outcome is one of three: risk unlikely, risk likely, high risk likely.
4.7 Decision table. The Privacy Officer applies the table within 48 hours of awareness and records the decision, the reasoning and the legal adviser's confirmation in PIMS-REG-03.
| Outcome |
Supervisory authority |
Individuals |
Record |
| Risk to individuals unlikely |
Not notified; reasoning recorded |
Not notified |
PIMS-REG-03 entry with facts, effects, measures and the reasons for not notifying |
| Risk likely |
Notified within 72 hours of awareness |
Not required; may be informed where it helps them |
PIMS-REG-03 entry plus the notification and any authority correspondence |
| High risk likely |
Notified within 72 hours of awareness |
Notified without undue delay, unless an exemption in step 4.9 applies |
PIMS-REG-03 entry plus both notifications, the exemption reasoning if used, and enquiries received |
4.8 Notification to the authority. The Privacy Officer completes GDPR-TPL-10 with the nature of the breach, the categories and approximate numbers of individuals and records, the contact point, the likely consequences and the measures taken or proposed, informs the Chief Executive Officer, and submits it through the authority's published channel within 72 hours of awareness. Where the facts are incomplete, the notification is made in phases: the initial notification within 72 hours with what is known, and further information as soon as it is available. A notification made after 72 hours states the reasons for the delay. Where individuals in more than one jurisdiction are affected, the legal adviser identifies the lead authority and any further authorities from GOV-REG-04.
4.9 Notification to individuals. Where high risk is likely, the Privacy Officer drafts a notice in plain language stating what happened, the contact point, the likely consequences, the measures [Organisation] has taken and the steps individuals can take to protect themselves. The Chief Executive Officer approves it and the communications lead sends it directly to each individual by the most reliable channel available. Direct notification may be replaced by a public communication only where the Privacy Officer records that one of these applies: the data was made unintelligible to any unauthorised person, for example by encryption with keys not compromised; measures taken since mean the high risk is no longer likely to materialise; or individual contact would involve disproportionate effort. The authority may require notification even where [Organisation] decided against it.
4.10 Other notifications. The Privacy Officer and legal adviser check GOV-REG-07 for clients with contractual notification rights, GOV-REG-04 for other regulators and sector obligations, the insurance policy for its notification time, and decide with the Incident Lead whether law enforcement is informed. Each is recorded in PIMS-REG-03.
4.11 Record keeping. Every breach, notified or not, is recorded in PIMS-REG-03 with the facts, the effects, the measures taken, the assessment outcome and the reasoning behind each decision. The record is retained for the period in PIMS-REG-07 and is available to the authority on request.
4.12 Review and corrective action. The post-incident review under GOV-PRO-07, using GOV-TPL-11, includes the Privacy Officer and covers whether the time of awareness was set correctly, whether the deadlines were met and whether the notifications were adequate. Corrective actions go to GOV-REG-03; the affected risks in GOV-REG-05 and any assessment in PIMS-REG-08 are updated within thirty days.
4.13 Timeline summary. From awareness: register entry within 2 hours; facts within 24 hours; processor notification to controller within the agreed time or 24 hours; decision within 48 hours; authority notification within 72 hours; individuals without undue delay once high risk is established; post-incident review within ten working days of closure.
5. Records and evidence
- PIMS-REG-03 Personal data breach register: one entry per breach with the times, the assessment, the decisions and their reasoning.
- GOV-REG-08 Incident register entry and GOV-TPL-05 incident report for the technical response.
- Completed GDPR-TPL-10 forms, authority acknowledgements and correspondence.
- Notices sent to individuals and controllers, with the approval record and the distribution evidence.
- GOV-TPL-11 post-incident review and GOV-REG-03 corrective actions.
6. Exceptions
No exception applies to the deadlines. Where a deadline is missed, the reasons are recorded in PIMS-REG-03 and in the notification itself, and the miss is reported at the next management review.
7. Review and maintenance
The Privacy Officer reviews this procedure annually, after every breach notified to an authority, after an annual breach exercise run with GOV-PRO-13, and after a change in notification law or authority guidance. Changes follow GOV-PRO-01.
8. Related documents
- GOV-PRO-07 Information security incident management procedure
- GOV-REG-08 Incident register
- GOV-TPL-05 Incident report form
- GOV-TPL-11 Post-incident review template
- GDPR-TPL-10 Personal data breach notification form
- PIMS-REG-03 Personal data breach register
- PIMS-REG-01 Personal data processing inventory
- PIMS-REG-06 Processor and sub-processor register
- PIMS-TPL-02 Data processing agreement template
- ISMS-PLN-02 Communication plan
Consent and privacy notice management procedure
When consent is the right basis, what makes it valid, how it is captured, recorded and withdrawn, what every privacy notice must contain and when it must be shown, and how notices are changed under control.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27701 clause 7.2.3; ISO/IEC 27701 clause 7.2.4; ISO/IEC 27701 clause 7.3.2; ISO/IEC 27701 clause 7.3.3; ISO/IEC 27701 clause 7.3.4; ISO/IEC 27701 Annex A 7.2.3; ISO/IEC 27701 Annex A 7.2.4; ISO/IEC 27701 Annex A 7.3.2; ISO/IEC 27701 Annex A 7.3.3; ISO/IEC 27701 Annex A 7.3.4; GDPR Article 7; GDPR Article 12; GDPR Article 13; GDPR Article 14. Owner: Privacy Officer.
1. Purpose
This procedure makes consent provable and notices accurate. A consent that cannot be shown to have been given freely, specifically and knowingly is no basis at all, and a notice that does not match what actually happens to the data is a transparency failure that every other control inherits.
2. Scope
It applies to every processing activity in PIMS-REG-01 where [Organisation] is a controller, to every point at which personal data is collected from or about an individual, to every privacy notice, cookie notice and consent form published by [Organisation], and to the systems that record consent and withdrawal.
3. Roles and responsibilities
| Role |
Responsibility |
| Privacy Officer |
Decides the lawful basis, approves every consent capture and notice, owns the notice versions and runs the annual check. |
| Processing Owner |
Proposes the basis, designs the capture point with the product team, keeps the PIMS-REG-04 entry current and actions withdrawals. |
| Head of Engineering or System Owner |
Builds the capture, the record, the withdrawal mechanism and the suppression, and provides the sample exports for checks. |
| Legal adviser |
Reviews notices and consent wording before first publication and after a material change. |
| Marketing lead |
Applies the marketing rules in this procedure and the suppression list. |
4. Procedure
4.1 Choosing the basis. For each purpose the Processing Owner proposes a lawful basis and the Privacy Officer confirms it in PIMS-REG-01. Consent is used only where the individual has a genuine choice and can refuse or withdraw without detriment. It is not used for processing needed to deliver a contract, to meet a legal obligation, or that [Organisation] would carry out regardless of the answer. For employees and applicants consent is used only for genuinely optional matters, such as a voluntary benefit, because the imbalance of power makes other consent unreliable. Where legitimate interests are proposed, GDPR-TPL-07 is completed first.
4.2 Conditions for valid consent. A consent capture approved under this procedure meets all of these: the request is separate from other terms and written in plain language; the purpose is specific, and each distinct purpose has its own choice; the individual is told who is asking, what data, for what purpose, that they can withdraw at any time and how, and what happens if they refuse; consent is given by a clear affirmative act, never by a pre-ticked box, silence, inactivity or continued use; refusing has no effect on the service beyond the part that depends on the consent; and withdrawing is as easy as giving. For special categories the consent is explicit: a statement or a ticked statement that names the category and the purpose. For children below the age set in GOV-REG-04 for the jurisdiction, consent is given or authorised by the holder of parental responsibility, verified in proportion to the risk.
4.3 Designing a capture point. Before a capture point goes live the Processing Owner records it in PIMS-REG-04 with the purpose, the audience, the mechanism, the notice version shown, the consent wording version, where the records are stored and the withdrawal method, and obtains the Privacy Officer's approval. Forms are based on GDPR-TPL-06. Cookie and tracker consent follows GDPR-TPL-04 and the inventory in GDPR-REG-04, with non-essential trackers blocked until consent is given.
4.4 Recording consent. The system records, for each consent: who gave it, when, through which capture point, the version of the notice and of the wording shown, which purposes were accepted and which refused, and the evidence of the affirmative act. Records are kept in the system of record for the life of the processing plus the period in PIMS-REG-07, protected against alteration, and exportable for a request under PIMS-PRO-03 or an authority enquiry. A consent whose record cannot be produced is treated as not given.
4.5 Withdrawal. Withdrawal is available through at least the channel through which consent was given, and always through the privacy mailbox. The Processing Owner actions a withdrawal within two working days, and for marketing within 72 hours: processing for that purpose stops, the suppression is applied so that the individual is not re-added by a later import, processors are instructed within the same time, and the data is deleted under PIMS-POL-02 unless another recorded basis applies to it. The withdrawal is recorded with the date and confirmed to the individual. Processing that took place before withdrawal remains lawful.
4.6 Refreshing consent. The Processing Owner reviews each capture point every twelve months and records it in PIMS-REG-04. Consent is obtained again when the purpose, the data or the recipients change materially, when the wording that was shown would no longer meet step 4.2, and for marketing where there has been no contact for [Number] months.
4.7 Notice content. Every notice covers, for data collected from the individual: the identity and contact details of [Organisation] and of the Privacy Officer; each purpose and its lawful basis; the legitimate interests relied on; the recipients and categories of recipients; transfers outside the region and the safeguard used; the retention period or the criteria that set it; the rights, including withdrawal of consent and the right to complain to the supervisory authority; whether providing the data is a legal or contractual requirement and what happens if it is not provided; and the existence, logic and significance of any automated decision making. For data not collected from the individual the notice also states the categories of data and their source. The templates GDPR-TPL-01, GDPR-TPL-02, GDPR-TPL-03 and GDPR-TPL-04 contain these elements.
4.8 Notice timing. A notice is provided at the point of collection where data comes from the individual, with a layered summary at the form and the full notice one step away. Where data comes from elsewhere, the notice is provided within one month, or at the first communication with the individual, or before the first disclosure to another recipient, whichever is earliest, unless the Privacy Officer records that the individual already has the information or that providing it is impossible or would involve disproportionate effort, in which case the information is published instead.
4.9 Notice form. Notices are written in plain language, structured under headings that match the content list, readable on a small screen, available in the languages [Organisation] serves its individuals in, and in language a child can understand where children are the audience. Each notice shows its version and effective date, and every previous version is retained.
4.10 Notice change control. A change to a notice is drafted by the Privacy Officer from a change in PIMS-REG-01, PIMS-REG-05 or PIMS-REG-06, reviewed by the legal adviser, approved by the Privacy Officer and published under GOV-PRO-01 with a new version number. A change that adds a purpose, a recipient, a transfer or a longer retention is communicated to the affected individuals before it takes effect, through the channel in ISMS-PLN-02, and consent is obtained again where the change affects a consented purpose. Notice versions are listed in GOV-REG-01.
4.11 Annual check. Once a year the Privacy Officer compares every published notice against PIMS-REG-01, PIMS-REG-05, PIMS-REG-06 and GDPR-REG-04, samples consent records from each capture point, tests a withdrawal end to end, and records the results in PIMS-REG-04. A notice that does not match the registers is corrected within thirty days and the gap is recorded in GOV-REG-03.
5. Records and evidence
- PIMS-REG-04 Consent record register: every capture point with its versions, record location, checks and status.
- Consent records in the systems of record, exportable per individual.
- Published notices with version history and approval records in GOV-REG-01.
- GDPR-REG-04 Cookie and tracker inventory and the consent configuration of the website.
- Withdrawal confirmations and suppression list exports.
6. Exceptions
A capture point may go live with a notice summary rather than the full notice only where the full notice is reachable from it in one step. No exception applies to the conditions in step 4.2.
7. Review and maintenance
The Privacy Officer reviews this procedure annually, after a complaint about consent or transparency, after authority guidance on consent or cookies, and after a new product or channel starts collecting personal data. Changes follow GOV-PRO-01.
8. Related documents
- GDPR-TPL-01 Privacy notice template (customers and website)
- GDPR-TPL-02 Employee privacy notice template
- GDPR-TPL-03 Job applicant privacy notice template
- GDPR-TPL-04 Cookie and tracking technologies notice template
- GDPR-TPL-06 Consent form templates (customers and employees)
- GDPR-TPL-07 Legitimate interests assessment template
- GDPR-REG-04 Cookie and tracker inventory
- PIMS-REG-04 Consent record register
- PIMS-REG-01 Personal data processing inventory
- PIMS-PRO-03 Data subject rights handling procedure
- ISMS-PLN-02 Communication plan
Privacy by design and by default procedure
The checklist that every product, feature, system and procurement involving personal data passes through the development and purchasing lifecycle, so that minimisation, protective defaults, access limits, retention, transparency, security and rights support are built in rather than added later.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27701 clause 7.4.1; ISO/IEC 27701 clause 7.4.2; ISO/IEC 27701 clause 7.4.3; ISO/IEC 27701 clause 7.4.4; ISO/IEC 27701 clause 7.4.5; ISO/IEC 27701 clause 7.4.6; ISO/IEC 27701 clause 7.4.9; ISO/IEC 27701 clause 8.4.1; ISO/IEC 27701 Annex A 7.4.1; ISO/IEC 27701 Annex A 7.4.2; ISO/IEC 27701 Annex A 7.4.4; ISO/IEC 27701 Annex B 8.4.1; GDPR Article 25. Owner: Privacy Officer.
1. Purpose
This procedure puts privacy decisions at the points where they are cheap: in the backlog, the design review, the supplier selection and the go-live gate. It turns the principles in PIMS-POL-01 into checks with evidence, and makes the most protective setting the one an individual gets without doing anything.
2. Scope
It applies to every new product, feature, system, integration, report, internal tool and AI feature that processes personal data, to every significant change to one, and to every procurement of a service that will process personal data, whether [Organisation] is controller or processor. It works alongside GOV-PRO-15 for development, GOV-PRO-06 for suppliers, GOV-PRO-09 for changes and PB-07 for the go-live gate.
3. Roles and responsibilities
| Role |
Responsibility |
| Product Owner or Processing Owner |
Raises the privacy requirements at the start, completes the checklist with the team and owns the evidence. |
| Head of Engineering and System Owner |
Design and build to the checklist, verify defaults by test, and keep test environments free of production personal data. |
| Privacy Officer |
Reviews the checklist at each gate, decides To confirm items, screens for an impact assessment under PIMS-PRO-02 and records the review. |
| Supplier owner |
Applies the procurement path for a service that processes personal data. |
| Information Security Manager |
Confirms the security checks against the Statement of Applicability. |
4. Procedure
4.1 Entry points. The procedure starts when: a product or feature involving personal data enters the backlog; a change request under GOV-TPL-08 answers Yes to personal data processing changed; a supplier is proposed under GOV-PRO-06 for a service that processes personal data; an AI feature or tool is proposed under AI-POL-02; or an existing system is found processing personal data without a record. The Product Owner opens a privacy review record with the project reference and the PIMS-REG-01 processing ID, new or existing.
4.2 Privacy requirements. At the same time as the security requirements in GOV-PRO-15 step 4.1, the Product Owner writes privacy requirements as backlog items with acceptance criteria: which data items are needed and why, the retention period and deletion mechanism, which settings are on by default, how individuals are informed, how each right is supported, and who may access what. The Privacy Officer screens the processing under PIMS-PRO-02 step 4.1 at this point.
4.3 The checklist. The team completes the checklist below at design and again before go-live, attaching evidence for each check. Each check is Verified, To confirm (with owner and date), Not implemented or Not applicable (with reason).
| Area |
Checks |
Evidence |
| Minimisation |
Each data item is traced to a purpose; optional fields are marked optional; free text fields are limited where structured data suffices; identifiers are pseudonymised where the purpose allows; data is aggregated or anonymised for analytics. |
Data dictionary with purpose per field; schema review record |
| Defaults |
The most protective option is active without user action; optional sharing, profiling, marketing and public visibility are off until the individual turns them on; location, contacts and device permissions are requested only when needed and explained; settings are reversible. |
Screenshots of a fresh account; configuration export; test case results |
| Access |
Access to personal data is by role and least privilege under GOV-PRO-10; administrative access to personal data is logged; support staff see only what the case needs; bulk export is restricted and logged. |
Role matrix; log sample; GOV-REG-12 review |
| Retention |
Retention and deletion are configured per PIMS-REG-07; deletion covers derived data, caches, search indexes and processor copies; temporary files and exports are removed on a schedule; backups expire within their cycle. |
Configuration export; deletion test result; PIMS-REG-07 row |
| Transparency |
The notice covers the processing and is shown at collection; in-product explanations exist where data use would surprise; changes to the notice are versioned under PIMS-PRO-05. |
Notice version reference; screenshots of the collection point |
| Security |
Data is encrypted in transit and at rest under GOV-PRO-20; environments are separated and test environments hold no production personal data; secrets are managed under GOV-PRO-15; logging under GOV-PRO-14 does not capture personal data it does not need; transfers use an approved channel under GOV-PRO-23. |
ISMS-REG-01 references; configuration evidence; test data confirmation |
| Rights support |
The system can find all data about one individual, export it in a machine-readable format, correct it, delete it, restrict it and suppress marketing, each within the times in PIMS-PRO-03; automated decisions can be reviewed by a person. |
Demonstration record of each function; PIMS-PRO-03 reference |
| Accuracy |
Data is validated at entry; individuals can correct their own data; stale data is flagged or expired; sources of data not from the individual are recorded. |
Validation rules; correction flow test |
4.4 Registers updated. Before gate 2 of PIMS-PRO-02, or before go-live where no assessment is required, the Product Owner updates PIMS-REG-01 (purpose, basis, data, retention, recipients), GOV-REG-25 and GDPR-REG-02 (flows and interfaces), PIMS-REG-06 (processors) and PIMS-REG-05 (transfers), and records any new risk in GOV-REG-05.
4.5 Test data. Development, test and staging environments use synthetic or irreversibly masked data. A request to use production personal data outside production is an exception under GOV-PRO-24, approved by the Privacy Officer only with the same controls as production and a deletion date of no more than thirty days.
4.6 Procurement path. For a supplier service, the supplier owner applies the checklist to the service as offered, using GDPR-TPL-09 and the supplier's documentation and configuration options as evidence, records the result in the supplier assessment under GOV-PRO-06, and the Privacy Officer confirms processor terms based on PIMS-TPL-02 and a transfer mechanism under PIMS-POL-03 before any personal data is sent.
4.7 Default verification. Before go-live the System Owner creates a fresh account or tenant, records every privacy-relevant setting at its default, and attaches the record. A default that exposes data or enables optional processing without an affirmative act is a blocker at the gate in PB-07.
4.8 Go-live gate. The Privacy Officer reviews the completed checklist and the register updates at the gate in PB-07. Any Not implemented check in Minimisation, Defaults, Retention or Rights support stops production use of personal data until fixed; a To confirm item needs an owner and a date within thirty days; the review and its outcome are recorded on the privacy review record.
4.9 Operation and change. The checklist is repeated for a significant change under GOV-PRO-09 and at the assessment review in PIMS-PRO-02. New data items added through configuration, integrations or forms without a review are treated as a nonconformity under GOV-PRO-04.
4.10 Decommissioning. When a system or feature is retired, the System Owner exports what the schedule requires, deletes the rest under PIMS-POL-02, obtains deletion confirmation from processors, and the Product Owner sets the PIMS-REG-01 status to Ceased with the date.
5. Records and evidence
- The privacy review record for each project with the completed checklist, its evidence and the Privacy Officer's gate reviews.
- Updated rows in PIMS-REG-01, PIMS-REG-05, PIMS-REG-06, PIMS-REG-07, GOV-REG-25 and GDPR-REG-02.
- Default verification records and test data confirmations.
- GOV-REG-29 go-live checklist entries and GOV-TPL-12 verdict notes for the privacy area.
6. Exceptions
A check may be marked Not applicable only with a reason the Privacy Officer accepts. Production personal data in a non-production environment is permitted only under step 4.5. No other exception applies.
7. Review and maintenance
The Privacy Officer reviews this procedure annually, after a breach or complaint traced to a design decision, after a change in the development lifecycle under GOV-PRO-15, and after authority guidance on privacy by design. Changes follow GOV-PRO-01.
8. Related documents
- PIMS-POL-01 Privacy information management policy
- PIMS-PRO-02 Privacy risk and data protection impact assessment procedure
- PIMS-PRO-03 Data subject rights handling procedure
- PIMS-PRO-05 Consent and privacy notice management procedure
- PIMS-POL-02 Data retention and disposal policy
- PIMS-POL-03 International transfer policy
- GOV-PRO-15 Secure development lifecycle procedure
- GOV-PRO-06 Supplier and third party security procedure
- GOV-PRO-09 Change management procedure
- GOV-TPL-08 Change request form
- GDPR-TPL-09 Supplier GDPR assessment questionnaire
- PB-07 Playbook: the go-live security and privacy gate for a software project
- AI-POL-02 AI system development, procurement and deployment policy
Privacy control effectiveness monitoring procedure
The measures that show whether the privacy controls work, how they are collected and graded each quarter, the structure of the quarterly privacy report, and how the results reach the management review and the corrective action process.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27701 clause 5.7.1; ISO/IEC 27701 clause 5.7.3; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 9.1; GDPR Article 24. Owner: Privacy Officer.
1. Purpose
This procedure replaces the feeling that privacy is under control with numbers that are collected the same way every quarter, graded against targets, and acted on. It gives the management review the privacy performance input it needs and gives the Privacy Officer early warning before a missed deadline becomes a regulatory matter.
2. Scope
It applies to every privacy procedure and register in the kit, to the ISO/IEC 27701 Annex A and Annex B controls marked applicable in ISMS-REG-01, and to the processing activities in PIMS-REG-01. It extends ISMS-PRO-04, which covers security measurement, and uses the same reporting cycle.
3. Roles and responsibilities
| Role |
Responsibility |
| Privacy Officer |
Owns the measure set, collects or receives the values, grades effectiveness, writes the quarterly report and presents it. |
| Processing Owners and System Owners |
Provide register exports and configuration evidence by the fifth working day after quarter end. |
| Information Security Manager |
Supplies security measures that bear on privacy and records control test results in ISMS-REG-02. |
| Internal Auditor |
Uses the reports to focus the audit programme and tests a sample of reported values. |
| Chief Executive Officer |
Receives the report, decides on resources and accepts or rejects proposed actions at the management review. |
4. Procedure
4.1 The measure set. The Privacy Officer maintains the measures below in GOV-REG-21 with their targets. Each has a defined formula, a named source register and a frequency, so that two people computing it get the same number.
| Measure |
How it is calculated |
Source |
Target |
| Requests answered on time |
Requests closed within the deadline divided by requests closed in the quarter |
PIMS-REG-02 |
100 percent |
| Median days to close a request |
Median of days from receipt to closure |
PIMS-REG-02 |
[Number] days or fewer |
| Requests refused or extended |
Count of refusals and extensions, each with a recorded reason |
PIMS-REG-02 |
Every one has a Privacy Officer decision |
| Breaches assessed within 48 hours |
Breaches with a decision within 48 hours of awareness divided by breaches in the quarter |
PIMS-REG-03 |
100 percent |
| Authority notifications within 72 hours |
Notifications sent within 72 hours divided by notifications required |
PIMS-REG-03 |
100 percent |
| Breaches per quarter and trend |
Count by nature and root cause against the previous four quarters |
PIMS-REG-03, GOV-REG-08 |
Downward or stable trend |
| Privacy training completion |
People with current training divided by people in scope |
GDPR-REG-05, GOV-REG-09 |
95 percent or more |
| Assessments completed before go-live |
Processing activities that started with an approved assessment or a recorded screening divided by activities that started |
PIMS-REG-08, PIMS-REG-01 |
100 percent |
| Assessment reviews overdue |
Count of assessments past their next review date |
PIMS-REG-08 |
Zero |
| Processors with signed terms |
Processors with terms signed divided by processors active |
PIMS-REG-06 |
100 percent |
| Transfers with a current assessment |
Transfers relying on contractual safeguards with an assessment within its review period divided by such transfers |
PIMS-REG-05 |
100 percent |
| Retention checks passed |
Categories checked with result Pass divided by categories checked |
PIMS-REG-07 |
95 percent or more, no Fail older than one quarter |
| Consent withdrawals actioned in time |
Withdrawals actioned within the time in PIMS-PRO-05 divided by withdrawals received |
PIMS-REG-04, system exports |
100 percent |
| Notices reviewed in the last twelve months |
Published notices with a recorded review within twelve months divided by notices published |
PIMS-REG-04, GOV-REG-01 |
100 percent |
| Inventory rows reviewed in the last twelve months |
PIMS-REG-01 rows with a review date within twelve months divided by active rows |
PIMS-REG-01 |
100 percent |
| Privacy corrective actions overdue |
Open GOV-REG-03 actions with a privacy source past their due date |
GOV-REG-03 |
Zero |
4.2 Collection. By the fifth working day after each quarter end, owners send the register exports and evidence named in the source column. The Privacy Officer computes each value, records it in GOV-REG-21 with the date and the export used, and files the exports under the evidence rules in PB-09 so that the Internal Auditor can recompute any value.
4.3 Sampling. Each quarter the Privacy Officer samples, in addition to the measures: five closed requests from PIMS-REG-02 for correctness of the response; every breach entry for the quality of the risk assessment; three processing activities from PIMS-REG-01 for a match between the notice, the inventory row and the system; and one withdrawal tested end to end. Sample results are recorded with the report.
4.4 Control effectiveness grades. For each applicable Annex A and Annex B control in ISMS-REG-01, the Privacy Officer records in ISMS-REG-02 a grade from the measures and samples that bear on it: Effective, the measures are at target and the sample found no exception; Largely effective, one measure is below target or one sample exception was found, with an action open; Partly effective, two or more measures are below target, a sample found a repeated exception, or any statutory deadline was missed; Not effective, the control is not operating or the exceptions are systemic. Partly effective and Not effective raise a corrective action in GOV-REG-03 within ten working days.
4.5 The quarterly privacy report. The Privacy Officer issues the report by the fifteenth working day after quarter end, with these sections: 1 Overall grade and the three things management must know; 2 Measures against targets with the trend over four quarters; 3 Breaches and incidents involving personal data, notifications made and lessons; 4 Requests from individuals, complaints and authority contact; 5 Assessments completed, overdue and the significant changes in processing; 6 Processors, sub-processor changes and transfers; 7 Training and awareness; 8 Audit findings, corrective actions and their status; 9 Risks changed in GOV-REG-05 and decisions required from management. The overall grade uses the scale in step 4.4 applied to the programme as a whole.
4.6 Distribution and action. The report goes to the Chief Executive Officer, the Information Security Manager and the steering committee under GOV-POL-01, and forms the privacy input to the management review under GOV-PRO-03, where decisions on resources and improvements are minuted in GOV-TPL-03 and tracked in GOV-REG-22.
4.7 Annual consolidation. The fourth quarter report includes the year's trend for every measure, the effectiveness grade for every applicable control, the outcome of the annual notice check under PIMS-PRO-05 and the annual retention sampling under PIMS-POL-02, and proposes targets for the following year for approval at the management review.
4.8 Changing the measure set. A measure is added, changed or retired by the Privacy Officer with the Information Security Manager's agreement, recorded in GOV-REG-21 with the reason, and never within a quarter already being reported, so that trends stay comparable.
5. Records and evidence
- GOV-REG-21 Security objectives and measures tracker: the privacy measures, their targets and each quarter's values.
- Quarterly privacy reports with the register exports and sample records behind them.
- ISMS-REG-02 Control implementation tracker: effectiveness grades for Annex A and Annex B controls.
- GOV-REG-03 Corrective action log entries raised from the grades.
- GOV-TPL-03 Management review minutes recording the privacy input and decisions.
6. Exceptions
A measure whose source register holds no items in the quarter is reported as Not applicable for that quarter with the reason, not as 100 percent. No other exception applies.
7. Review and maintenance
The Privacy Officer reviews this procedure annually at the fourth quarter consolidation, after a management review that changed the measure set, and after an audit finding about performance evaluation. Changes follow GOV-PRO-01.
8. Related documents
- ISMS-PRO-04 Monitoring, measurement, analysis and evaluation procedure
- GOV-REG-21 Security objectives and measures tracker
- ISMS-REG-01 Statement of Applicability
- ISMS-REG-02 Control implementation tracker
- GOV-PRO-03 Management review procedure
- GOV-PRO-04 Nonconformity and corrective action procedure
- GOV-REG-03 Corrective action log
- PB-09 Playbook: evidence management that survives an audit
- PIMS-POL-01 Privacy information management policy
Data protection impact assessment template
The form used under PIMS-PRO-02 to screen a processing activity, describe it, test its necessity, record consultation, score the risks to individuals before and after measures, and obtain approval of the residual risk.
Serves: GDPR Article 35; ISO/IEC 27701 clause 7.2.5; ISO/IEC 27701 Annex A 7.2.5. Owner: Privacy Officer.
Guidance notes are in italics. One assessment per processing activity or project. The reference is assigned by the Privacy Officer from PIMS-REG-08. Complete section 1 at concept stage; the remaining sections only when section 1 results in "assessment required". Write for a reader who was not in the project: an auditor or the supervisory authority may read this document.
1. Screening
| Field |
Entry |
| Assessment reference |
[DPIA ID from PIMS-REG-08] |
| Processing activity |
[Name], PIMS-REG-01 reference [Processing ID] |
| Project or system |
[System name] |
| Processing Owner |
[Name], [Role] |
| Date of screening |
[Date] |
| Role of [Organisation] |
[Controller, Joint controller, Processor], decided under PIMS-PRO-01 |
| Trigger |
Applies? |
Justification |
| 1. Evaluation, scoring or profiling of individuals |
[Yes or No] |
|
| 2. Automated decisions with legal or similarly significant effect |
[Yes or No] |
|
| 3. Systematic monitoring, tracking or surveillance |
[Yes or No] |
|
| 4. Special categories, criminal offence data or highly personal data |
[Yes or No] |
|
| 5. Large scale processing |
[Yes or No] |
|
| 6. Matching or combining data sets |
[Yes or No] |
|
| 7. Vulnerable individuals or individuals with little choice |
[Yes or No] |
|
| 8. New or innovative technology, including AI features |
[Yes or No] |
|
| 9. Could deny a service, benefit or access, or cause discrimination |
[Yes or No] |
|
| 10. Data obtained without the individuals' involvement |
[Yes or No] |
|
| 11. Transfer outside the region of establishment |
[Yes or No] |
|
| 12. Listed by the supervisory authority as requiring an assessment |
[Yes or No] |
|
| Field |
Entry |
| Screening outcome |
[Assessment required, Assessment not required] |
| Reasons |
Apply the rule in PIMS-PRO-02 step 4.2. If not required, state why the risk is low and which review under PIMS-PRO-06 still applies. |
| Decided by |
Privacy Officer, [Date] |
2. Description of the processing
Describe what will actually happen to the data. Reference a data flow in GOV-REG-25 or GDPR-REG-02 rather than drawing a new one here.
| Aspect |
Description |
| Purposes |
Each purpose in one sentence, and the benefit to [Organisation], to the individuals and to any third party. |
| Nature |
How data is collected, used, stored, shared and deleted. Who has access. Which processors and systems are involved. |
| Data items |
List each field or category. Mark special categories and identifiers. |
| Individuals |
Who they are, approximately how many, and the relationship to [Organisation]. |
| Scale and duration |
Volume, frequency, retention period from PIMS-REG-07, and geographical extent. |
| Context |
What individuals would reasonably expect. Prior complaints or concerns about similar processing. Any imbalance of power. Novelty of the technology. |
| Recipients and transfers |
Internal teams, processors (PIMS-REG-06 references), other controllers, and any destination outside the region with its PIMS-REG-05 reference. |
| Technology |
Systems, hosting, any machine learning or AI component (AI-REG-01 reference), any tracking technology (GDPR-REG-04 reference). |
3. Necessity and proportionality
| Question |
Answer |
| Lawful basis |
The basis for each purpose; for legitimate interests attach GDPR-TPL-07; for consent describe the capture under PIMS-PRO-05. |
| Does the processing achieve the purpose? |
Evidence that it works, not an assumption. |
| Is there a less intrusive way? |
Alternatives considered: less data, aggregated or pseudonymised data, shorter retention, opt-in design. Why each was rejected. |
| Minimisation |
Which data items were removed during design. Why each remaining item is needed. |
| Accuracy |
How data is kept accurate and how errors are corrected. |
| Retention |
Period, trigger and how deletion is configured, with the PIMS-REG-07 reference. |
| Transparency |
Which notice tells individuals, when they see it, and what changed in it for this processing. |
| Rights |
How access, rectification, erasure, restriction, portability and objection are supported in the system, and how automated decisions can be contested. |
| Processors |
Terms signed based on PIMS-TPL-02 and the PIMS-REG-06 references. |
| International transfers |
Mechanism and transfer impact assessment reference under PIMS-POL-03. |
4. Consultation
| Who |
When and how |
What they said |
Response |
| Privacy Officer |
|
|
|
| Information Security Manager |
|
|
|
| Individuals or their representatives |
Or the reason it was not practicable. |
|
|
| Processors |
|
|
|
| Legal adviser |
|
|
|
| Others, for example works council |
|
|
|
5. Risks to individuals
Write each risk from the individual's point of view. Score likelihood 1 to 5 and severity 1 to 5 as defined in PIMS-PRO-02 step 4.8. Score is likelihood multiplied by severity. Bands: 1 to 4 low, 5 to 9 medium, 10 to 15 high, 16 to 25 critical.
| ID |
Risk to individuals and its source |
Likelihood |
Severity |
Score and band |
| R1 |
|
|
|
|
| R2 |
|
|
|
|
| R3 |
|
|
|
|
| R4 |
|
|
|
|
6. Measures and residual risk
One row per risk at medium or above. Each measure has an owner and a due date and exists as a backlog item, a configuration, a contract clause or a procedure. A measure not yet in place is To confirm until evidence is attached.
| ID |
Measures, owner and status |
Residual likelihood |
Residual severity |
Residual score and band |
| R1 |
|
|
|
|
| R2 |
|
|
|
|
| R3 |
|
|
|
|
| R4 |
|
|
|
|
| Field |
Entry |
| Highest residual band |
[Low, Medium, High, Critical] |
| GOV-REG-05 references |
For every medium or higher residual risk. |
| Prior consultation required? |
[Yes or No]. Yes when a high residual risk cannot be reduced further; see PIMS-PRO-02 step 4.11. |
7. Approval and sign-off
| Field |
Entry |
| Privacy Officer's advice |
Proceed, proceed with conditions, or do not proceed, with reasons. Conditions are listed with owners and dates. |
| Advice accepted? |
[Yes or No]. If No, the reasons for departing from the advice are recorded here and reported at the next management review. |
| Approver |
Processing Owner for low or medium residual; Chief Executive Officer for high residual. [Name], [Role] |
| Decision |
[Approved, Approved with conditions, Not approved] |
| Date |
[Date] |
| Signature |
[Signature] |
| PIMS-REG-08 status set to |
[Approved, Prior consultation, Rejected] |
8. Review log
| Date |
Reviewer |
Trigger |
Outcome |
| [Date] |
[Role] |
[Scheduled, Change, Breach, Complaint, Guidance] |
No change, or a summary of what changed and which sections were updated. |
9. Related documents
- PIMS-PRO-02 Privacy risk and data protection impact assessment procedure
- PIMS-REG-08 DPIA register
- PIMS-REG-01 Personal data processing inventory
- PIMS-PRO-06 Privacy by design and by default procedure
- GOV-PRO-05 Risk assessment and treatment methodology
- GOV-REG-05 Information security risk register
- GDPR-TPL-07 Legitimate interests assessment template
- GDPR-TPL-08 Transfer impact assessment template
Data processing agreement template
Plain-English processing terms, with placeholders, covering every element a contract between a controller and a processor must contain, for [Organisation] to use when it engages a processor or when it acts as a processor for a client, together with the three annexes that describe the processing, the security measures and the approved sub-processors.
Serves: GDPR Article 28; ISO/IEC 27701 clause 7.2.6; ISO/IEC 27701 clause 8.2.1; ISO/IEC 27701 Annex A 7.2.6; ISO/IEC 27701 Annex B 8.2.1; ISO/IEC 27701 Annex B 8.5.6; ISO/IEC 27701 Annex B 8.5.7. Owner: Privacy Officer.
Guidance notes are in italics. This template is a starting point for the legal adviser, not legal advice; the legal adviser confirms the wording against the law of each jurisdiction in GOV-REG-04 before signature. Use it in two directions: as the terms [Organisation] requires from a processor it engages, and as the terms [Organisation] offers when it is the processor. The word Controller below means the party that decides the purposes and means under PIMS-PRO-01, and Processor means the party that processes on the Controller's instructions. Where standard contractual clauses are needed for an international transfer under PIMS-POL-03, they are attached as a further annex and take precedence over any conflicting term here.
1. Parties and roles
| Field |
Entry |
| Controller |
[Organisation name], [registered address], [registration number] |
| Processor |
[Organisation name], [registered address], [registration number] |
| Main agreement |
The service contract these terms attach to, with its date. [Reference], [Date] |
| Effective date |
[Date] |
| Controller's privacy contact |
[Role], [contact channel] |
| Processor's privacy contact |
[Role], [contact channel] |
1.1 These terms form part of the main agreement and apply whenever the Processor processes personal data on behalf of the Controller in performing it. If these terms conflict with the main agreement on the processing of personal data, these terms prevail.
1.2 The parties agree that, for the processing described in Annex 1, the Controller determines the purposes and means and the Processor acts only on the Controller's behalf. Each party remains responsible for its own compliance with the law that applies to it.
2. Definitions
2.1 Personal data, processing, data subject, personal data breach, supervisory authority and special categories have the meanings given to them in the data protection law that applies to the Controller, named in Annex 1.
2.2 Sub-processor means any third party engaged by the Processor to process personal data under these terms. Instructions means the Controller's written instructions, including the main agreement, Annex 1 and any later instruction given through the contact in section 1.
3. Subject matter, duration, nature and purpose
3.1 The subject matter, duration, nature and purpose of the processing, the types of personal data and the categories of data subjects are set out in Annex 1. The Processor processes personal data only to the extent and for the duration needed to provide the services.
3.2 The processing lasts for the term of the main agreement and for the deletion or return period in section 13 after it ends.
4. Instructions
4.1 The Processor processes personal data only on the Controller's documented instructions, including with regard to transfers to another country, unless the law that applies to the Processor requires otherwise. In that case the Processor tells the Controller of the legal requirement before processing, unless that law prohibits the notice on important grounds of public interest.
4.2 The Processor tells the Controller without delay if, in its opinion, an instruction infringes data protection law. The Processor may suspend the instruction concerned until the Controller confirms or withdraws it.
4.3 The Processor does not process personal data for its own purposes, including product improvement, analytics, marketing, profiling or the training of any model, unless Annex 1 expressly allows a specific use and the Controller has confirmed the lawful basis for it.
4.4 Instructions are given by the Controller's privacy contact or a person the Controller names in writing. The Processor may ask for an instruction to be confirmed in writing before acting.
5. Confidentiality
5.1 The Processor allows access to personal data only to people who need it to provide the services, who are bound by a written confidentiality obligation or a statutory duty of confidentiality, and who have received training in the protection of personal data.
5.2 The Processor keeps a record of the people and roles authorised to access the Controller's personal data and makes it available to the Controller on request.
6. Security
6.1 The Processor implements and maintains the technical and organisational measures in Annex 2, and any further measures needed to provide a level of security appropriate to the risk, taking into account the state of the art, the cost of implementation, and the nature, scope, context and purposes of the processing and the risks to individuals.
6.2 The Processor may update the measures in Annex 2 provided the level of protection does not fall below what Annex 2 provides, and gives the Controller notice of material changes.
6.3 The Processor assists the Controller in meeting the Controller's own security obligations, taking into account the nature of the processing and the information available to the Processor.
7. Sub-processors
7.1 The Processor engages a sub-processor only with the Controller's authorisation. The parties choose one of the following: [Specific authorisation: each sub-processor is approved in writing before engagement] or [General authorisation: the sub-processors in Annex 3 are approved, and the Processor gives the Controller at least [Number] days' written notice of any addition or replacement, during which the Controller may object on reasonable grounds relating to data protection].
7.2 Where the Controller objects under a general authorisation and the parties cannot resolve the objection within [Number] days, the Controller may terminate the affected services without penalty.
7.3 The Processor imposes on every sub-processor, by written contract, data protection obligations no less protective than these terms, in particular the security measures in Annex 2. The Processor remains fully liable to the Controller for the sub-processor's performance.
7.4 The Processor keeps Annex 3 current, including the location of each sub-processor's processing, and provides it to the Controller on request.
8. Assistance with the rights of individuals
8.1 The Processor assists the Controller, by appropriate technical and organisational measures and so far as possible, in responding to requests from individuals to exercise their rights, including access, rectification, erasure, restriction, portability, objection and the review of automated decisions.
8.2 The Processor forwards to the Controller, within [Number] working days of receipt, any request from an individual that concerns the Controller's personal data, and does not respond to the individual except to say the request has been passed to the Controller, unless the Controller instructs otherwise.
8.3 The Processor provides the assistance in section 8.1 within [Number] working days of the Controller's request, or sooner where the Controller's legal deadline requires it.
9. Assistance with assessments and consultation
9.1 The Processor assists the Controller with data protection impact assessments and with any prior consultation with a supervisory authority, by providing the information about the processing, the security measures and the sub-processors that the Controller reasonably requests, within [Number] working days.
10. Personal data breach
10.1 The Processor notifies the Controller without undue delay, and in any case within [Number] hours, after becoming aware of a personal data breach affecting the Controller's personal data, through the Controller's privacy contact.
10.2 The notification describes, so far as known, the nature of the breach, the categories and approximate numbers of individuals and records concerned, the likely consequences, the measures taken or proposed, and a contact point. Information not available at first is provided in phases without undue delay.
10.3 The Processor cooperates with the Controller's investigation, preserves evidence, takes the containment measures the Controller reasonably instructs, and does not notify a supervisory authority, individuals or the public about the Controller's data unless the Controller instructs it in writing or the law requires the Processor to do so.
11. International transfers
11.1 The Processor does not transfer personal data to, or allow access from, a country outside [Region] except as set out in Annex 1 or Annex 3, or on the Controller's documented instruction, and only under a transfer mechanism that satisfies the applicable law.
11.2 Where a transfer relies on standard contractual clauses or similar safeguards, the parties execute them as an annex to these terms and the Processor cooperates with any transfer impact assessment the Controller performs.
11.3 The Processor tells the Controller of any legally binding request for the Controller's personal data from a public authority, before disclosure where the law allows, discloses only the minimum the request lawfully requires, and records every such request and disclosure.
12. Audits and information
12.1 The Processor makes available to the Controller all information necessary to demonstrate compliance with these terms, including relevant certifications and independent assurance reports where they exist.
12.2 The Processor allows and contributes to audits and inspections conducted by the Controller or an auditor mandated by the Controller, no more than once in any twelve months unless a breach or a supervisory authority requires otherwise, on at least [Number] days' notice, during business hours, under reasonable confidentiality terms and without unreasonable disruption to the Processor's operations. The Controller may rely on an independent assurance report in place of an on-site audit where the report covers the services and the period.
12.3 The Processor informs the Controller immediately if an audit reveals that an instruction or a part of the services infringes data protection law.
13. Deletion or return
13.1 At the end of the services, or earlier on the Controller's instruction, the Processor, at the Controller's choice, deletes or returns all personal data to the Controller in a commonly used format, and deletes existing copies, within [Number] days, unless the law that applies to the Processor requires storage of the personal data. In that case the Processor tells the Controller what is retained, under which law and for how long, and continues to protect it under these terms.
13.2 The Processor provides written confirmation of deletion, including deletion by sub-processors, and confirms that backup copies expire within [Number] days under the Processor's normal backup cycle and are not restored to production.
14. Records and demonstration of compliance
14.1 The Processor keeps a record of the categories of processing carried out on behalf of the Controller containing the information the law requires, and makes it available to the supervisory authority on request.
14.2 Each party keeps these terms, the annexes and the records they generate for the term of the main agreement and the period required by its retention schedule.
15. Liability and indemnity
15.1 Placeholder for the legal adviser. State how liability for breaches of these terms relates to the liability provisions of the main agreement, whether any cap applies to data protection claims, and the indemnity, if any, that each party gives the other for regulatory fines and third party claims arising from its own breach. [Liability and indemnity wording]
16. Term, termination and precedence
16.1 These terms start on the effective date and continue until the Processor has deleted or returned all personal data under section 13.
16.2 Either party may terminate the affected services if the other party is in material breach of these terms and does not remedy it within [Number] days of written notice.
16.3 Changes to these terms are made in writing and signed by both parties. The parties review these terms when the law, the services, the data or the sub-processors change, and at least every [Number] months.
17. Signatures
| Controller |
Processor |
| [Name], [Role] |
[Name], [Role] |
| [Signature] |
[Signature] |
| [Date] |
[Date] |
Annex 1: Processing details
| Field |
Entry |
| Applicable data protection law |
[Law and jurisdiction] |
| Subject matter of the processing |
The services under which personal data is processed, in one sentence. |
| Duration |
Term of the main agreement plus the deletion period. |
| Nature of the processing |
Collection, storage, hosting, analysis, transmission, support access, deletion, as applicable. |
| Purpose of the processing |
What the Controller uses the services for. |
| Types of personal data |
Categories, for example contact details, account identifiers, usage data, content uploaded by users; identify any special categories. |
| Categories of data subjects |
For example the Controller's customers, employees, end users. |
| Permitted uses by the Processor beyond the instructions |
None, or a specific listed use with its basis. |
| Processing locations |
Countries where data is stored, processed, backed up and accessed, including support. |
| Transfer mechanism |
Not applicable, adequacy, standard contractual clauses with module and date, binding corporate rules, other. |
| Controller's instructions |
Any standing instructions beyond the main agreement. |
Annex 2: Technical and organisational security measures
Describe the measures in place, not aspirations. Where the Processor holds a certification or an assurance report, reference it and still describe the measures. Suggested headings:
| Area |
Measures |
| Governance and policies |
Security management system, policies, roles, risk assessment. |
| Personnel |
Screening, confidentiality, training, disciplinary process. |
| Access control |
Identity management, least privilege, multi-factor authentication, privileged access, periodic review, logging of access to personal data. |
| Encryption |
In transit, at rest, key management, who holds the keys. |
| Pseudonymisation and minimisation |
Where applied. |
| Physical security |
Data centre and office controls, or reliance on a hosting provider's controls. |
| Operations |
Change management, vulnerability and patch management, malware protection, logging and monitoring, time synchronisation. |
| Availability and resilience |
Backups, restore testing, redundancy, continuity plans, recovery objectives. |
| Environment separation |
Production separated from test; no production personal data in test. |
| Incident management |
Detection, response, breach notification path and timing. |
| Supplier management |
How sub-processors are assessed and contracted. |
| Data deletion |
Deletion and return process, media disposal, backup expiry. |
| Assurance |
Internal audits, penetration tests, certifications, independent reports, with dates. |
Annex 3: Approved sub-processors
| Sub-processor |
Service provided |
Processing location |
Transfer mechanism |
Date approved |
| [Name] |
[Service] |
[Country] |
[Mechanism] |
[Date] |
| [Name] |
[Service] |
[Country] |
[Mechanism] |
[Date] |
Related documents
- PIMS-PRO-01 Determining controller and processor roles
- PIMS-REG-06 Processor and sub-processor register
- PIMS-POL-03 International transfer policy
- PIMS-PRO-04 Personal data breach assessment and notification procedure
- PIMS-PRO-03 Data subject rights handling procedure
- PIMS-POL-02 Data retention and disposal policy
- GOV-PRO-06 Supplier and third party security procedure
- GOV-TPL-04 Supplier security and privacy questionnaire
- GDPR-TPL-09 Supplier GDPR assessment questionnaire
- GDPR-TPL-08 Transfer impact assessment template
Personal data processing inventory
One row per processing activity, recording what personal data is processed, why, on what basis, who receives it, where it goes and how long it is kept. This is the record of processing that the organisation keeps as a controller, and the operational source for notices, assessments and requests.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27701 clause 7.2.8; ISO/IEC 27701 Annex A 7.2.8; GDPR Article 30.
Columns:
- Processing ID: Permanent identifier for the activity.
- Activity
- Role
- Purpose
- Lawful basis
- Special category: Health
- Data subjects
- Data categories
- Recipients: Internal functions and third parties
- Transfers outside region: Countries outside the home jurisdiction
- Safeguard: Mechanism for any transfer
- Retention: Period and trigger
- Owner (role)
- DPIA reference: PIMS-REG-08 row
- Last review
- Notes
Data subject request register
One row per request from an individual to exercise a right over their personal data. Records the clock, the identity check, the outcome and the proof, so that the one-month deadline is met and the handling can be shown.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27701 clause 7.3; GDPR Article 12.
Columns:
- Request ID
- Received: Starts the one-month clock.
- Requester
- Right requested
- Identity verified
- Due: One month from receipt
- Extension taken
- Outcome
- Refusal basis: Required when the outcome is a refusal or a partial fulfilment.
- Closed
- Owner (role)
- Evidence reference
- Status
- Notes
Personal data breach register
One row per personal data breach, whether or not it was notifiable. Records the awareness time that starts the seventy-two hour clock, the assessment of risk to individuals, and the notification decisions, so that accountability can be shown even when no notification was required.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27701 clause 6.13.1.5; GDPR Article 33; GDPR Article 34.
Columns:
- Breach ID
- Detected
- Awareness time: Starts the seventy-two hour clock for the authority.
- Summary
- Data subjects affected
- Data categories
- Risk to individuals
- Authority notified
- Authority notified at
- Individuals notified
- Containment
- Corrective action: GOV-REG-03 reference.
- Owner (role)
- Status
- Notes
Consent record register
One row per consent given, where consent is the lawful basis. Records what was consented to, how, when and the wording shown, so that valid consent can be demonstrated and withdrawal honoured.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27701 clause 7.2.3; GDPR Article 7.
Columns:
- Consent ID
- Data subject
- Processing: PIMS-REG-01 activity the consent covers.
- Purpose consented
- Method: How consent was captured
- Notice version: Version of the privacy notice shown at the time.
- Given at
- Withdrawn at
- Owner (role)
- Evidence reference
- Status
- Notes
International transfer register
One row per transfer of personal data outside the home jurisdiction. Records the destination, the mechanism that makes the transfer lawful and the assessment behind it, so that transfers can be shown to be governed rather than incidental.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27701 clause 7.5; GDPR Article 44.
Columns:
- Transfer ID
- Processing: PIMS-REG-01 activity.
- Exporter
- Importer
- Destination
- Data categories
- Mechanism
- Assessment done: Transfer impact assessment
- Supplementary measures
- Owner (role)
- Review date
- Status
- Notes
Processor and sub-processor register
One row per processor and sub-processor that handles personal data on the organisation's behalf. Records the data they access, the contract terms that bind them and the assurance held, linking to the wider supplier register.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27701 clause 7.2.6; GDPR Article 28.
Columns:
- Processor ID
- Name
- Role
- Service
- Processing: PIMS-REG-01 activities served.
- Data categories
- Location
- Processing terms: Article 28 terms in place
- Assurance: Certification
- Supplier register: GOV-REG-07 row.
- Owner (role)
- Last review
- Status
- Notes
Retention schedule
One row per category of personal data, recording how long it is kept, what triggers the clock, how it is disposed of and where that is configured. Checked on a cycle so that data is not kept longer than its basis allows.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27701 clause 7.4.7; GDPR Article 5.
Columns:
- Category
- System
- Retention period
- Trigger: The event that starts the retention clock.
- Disposal method
- Where configured: Where the rule is enforced
- Last check
- Result
- Deviation action: GOV-REG-03 reference where the check failed.
- Owner (role)
- Status
- Notes
Data protection impact assessment register
One row per data protection impact assessment, recording the processing it covered, the screening outcome, the residual risk and the approval. The index to the assessments held as PIMS-TPL-01.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27701 clause 7.2.5; GDPR Article 35.
Columns:
- DPIA ID
- Processing: PIMS-REG-01 activity assessed.
- Trigger: Why a DPIA was required.
- Screening outcome
- Residual risk
- Decision
- Approved by (role)
- Approved date
- Review date
- Owner (role)
- Evidence reference: The completed PIMS-TPL-01.
- Status
- Notes
GDPR
Operational privacy for a product or service that processes personal data
Guide: a GDPR operating model for a product or service team
How GDPR works as a day-to-day operating model for a team that builds or runs a product handling personal data, told through the life of the data and the register each stage updates.
Serves: GDPR Article 5; GDPR Article 24; GDPR Article 25; GDPR Article 30; GDPR Article 32. Owner: Privacy Officer.
1. Accountability in four things
GDPR is built on accountability: you must not only comply but be able to show it. In practice that means four things kept current. A map of the personal data you process. The operating processes that handle it. The evidence that those processes ran. Consistent statements to the outside world. This guide shows how each stage of the data lifecycle feeds those four things.
2. The roles
A product team usually needs a privacy owner who runs the programme, an approver for external statements, an engineering owner who knows where data actually lives, a support owner who handles requests, and leadership who owns the commitments. One person can hold several of these in a small team, but each must be named.
3. The lifecycle, stage by stage
Each stage below ends with the register it updates. The discipline is simple: when something happens to personal data, a register changes.
3.1 Sign-up or contract. A new customer or user brings personal data into scope. Record the processing, its purpose and its lawful basis, and make sure a privacy notice was shown. Updates: processing inventory (PIMS-REG-01), lawful basis, notice version.
3.2 Data arrives. Documents, uploads and integrations bring data in. Record where it flows and how it is protected in transit, and classify it. Updates: data flow map (GDPR-REG-02), asset register, classification.
3.3 Processing, including any AI feature. The product does something with the data. Where the processing is high risk, or an AI feature makes automated decisions, assess it. Record retention for inputs and outputs. Updates: DPIA register (PIMS-REG-08), AI inventory where relevant, retention schedule.
3.4 Sharing and suppliers. Data goes to a processor or a third party. Confirm the Article 28 terms are in place and that any transfer outside the region has a lawful mechanism. Updates: processor register (PIMS-REG-06), transfer register (PIMS-REG-05).
3.5 A request from a person. Someone asks to see, correct or delete their data. Verify identity, start the one-month clock, act, and respond. Updates: request register (PIMS-REG-02).
3.6 An incident. Data is lost or exposed. Contain it, assess the risk to individuals, and decide within seventy-two hours of awareness whether to notify the authority and the people affected. Record it either way. Updates: breach register (PIMS-REG-03).
3.7 End of the relationship. The customer leaves or the retention period ends. Delete the data across primary storage, derived data, backups and logs, not just the front-end record. Updates: retention schedule (PIMS-REG-07).
4. The cadence
Weekly, work through requests, incidents and supplier changes, and close a few outstanding items. Monthly, export the evidence that controls ran and reconcile the retention and vendor registers. Quarterly, refresh assessments and run an exercise. Annually, review the whole programme. The no-assumption rule holds throughout: every unknown becomes a line with an owner and a due date, and every gap becomes a corrective action.
5. Safe statements
Say what is true and nothing more. You process personal data under recorded lawful bases. You keep a record of processing. You have the processes and evidence to meet your obligations. Avoid "fully compliant" and "GDPR certified"; neither is a thing you can truthfully claim, and both invite a question you do not want.
6. Related documents
- GDPR-POL-01 Data protection policy
- GDPR-PRO-01 Data mapping and records of processing
- PIMS-REG-01 Personal data processing inventory
- GDPR-REG-01 GDPR gap assessment
- PB-04 GDPR operations in ten steps
Guide: GDPR articles mapped to the kit
The operational GDPR articles, each stated in plain words with the kit documents and registers that help you meet it. Read the regulation for the authoritative text.
Serves: GDPR Article 5; GDPR Article 30. Owner: Privacy Officer.
1. How to read this
Each row names an article, the obligation in plain words, and the kit documents or registers that address it. This is a map, not the law: the authoritative wording is in the regulation, and the map covers the articles a controller or processor operates against, not the whole text.
2. Principles and lawfulness
| Article |
Obligation in plain words |
Kit documents |
| Article 5 |
Process data lawfully, fairly, transparently, for a purpose, minimally, accurately, no longer than needed, securely, and show it. |
GDPR-POL-01; PIMS-REG-01; PIMS-REG-07 |
| Article 6 |
Have a recorded lawful basis for every activity. |
PIMS-REG-01; GDPR-TPL-07 |
| Article 7 |
Make consent freely given, recorded and easy to withdraw. |
PIMS-PRO-05; PIMS-REG-04 |
| Article 8 |
Handle children's data and parental consent where services reach children. |
PIMS-PRO-05 |
| Article 9 |
Process special category data only under a recorded condition. |
PIMS-REG-01 |
| Article 10 |
Process criminal offence data only where law allows. |
PIMS-REG-01 |
| Article 11 |
Do not collect more data just to identify a person. |
PIMS-PRO-03 |
3. Rights of the individual
| Article |
Obligation in plain words |
Kit documents |
| Article 12 |
Handle requests within a month, free, in plain language. |
PIMS-PRO-03; PIMS-REG-02 |
| Articles 13 and 14 |
Tell people how their data is used, at collection and when obtained elsewhere. |
GDPR-TPL-01; GDPR-TPL-02; GDPR-TPL-03 |
| Article 15 |
Give people access to their data and information about its use. |
PIMS-PRO-03; GDPR-TPL-05 |
| Article 16 |
Correct inaccurate data. |
PIMS-PRO-03 |
| Article 17 |
Erase data where a ground applies. |
PIMS-PRO-03; PIMS-POL-02 |
| Article 18 |
Restrict processing while a dispute is resolved. |
PIMS-PRO-03 |
| Article 20 |
Provide data in a portable format. |
PIMS-PRO-03 |
| Article 21 |
Honour objections, including to direct marketing. |
PIMS-PRO-03; GDPR-TPL-05 |
| Article 22 |
Govern solely automated decisions with legal effect. |
AI-POL-02; PIMS-PRO-02 |
4. Controller and processor duties
| Article |
Obligation in plain words |
Kit documents |
| Article 24 |
Implement and review measures that put the principles into practice. |
GDPR-POL-01; GOV-POL-01 |
| Article 25 |
Build privacy in by design and make defaults protective. |
PIMS-PRO-06 |
| Article 26 |
Set out joint controller responsibilities in writing. |
PIMS-PRO-01 |
| Article 28 |
Engage processors under a written contract with the required terms. |
PIMS-TPL-02; PIMS-REG-06 |
| Article 30 |
Keep a record of processing activities. |
PIMS-REG-01; GDPR-PRO-01 |
| Article 32 |
Make security appropriate to the risk, and test it. |
GOV-PRO-05; GOV-CHK-02; ISMS-REG-01 |
| Article 33 |
Notify the authority of notifiable breaches within seventy-two hours. |
PIMS-PRO-04; PIMS-REG-03; GDPR-TPL-10 |
| Article 34 |
Tell affected individuals about high-risk breaches. |
PIMS-PRO-04 |
| Article 35 |
Carry out an impact assessment for high-risk processing. |
PIMS-PRO-02; PIMS-TPL-01; PIMS-REG-08 |
| Article 36 |
Consult the authority where residual risk stays high. |
PIMS-PRO-02 |
| Articles 37 to 39 |
Appoint and resource a data protection officer where required. |
GDPR-POL-01 |
5. International transfers
| Article |
Obligation in plain words |
Kit documents |
| Article 44 |
Transfer outside the region only under a lawful mechanism. |
PIMS-POL-03; PIMS-REG-05 |
| Article 45 |
Identify transfers to adequate countries. |
PIMS-REG-05 |
| Article 46 |
Use appropriate safeguards where there is no adequacy. |
PIMS-POL-03; GDPR-TPL-08 |
| Article 49 |
Rely on a derogation only occasionally and record it. |
PIMS-POL-03 |
6. HR and marketing
| Area |
Obligation in plain words |
Kit documents |
| Employment data |
Handle recruitment, employment and monitoring data lawfully. |
GDPR-PRO-02; GDPR-TPL-02; GDPR-TPL-03 |
| Direct marketing |
Offer and honour an easy opt-out. |
GDPR-TPL-05; GDPR-REG-04 |
7. Related documents
- GDPR-GDE-01 A GDPR operating model for a product team
- GDPR-REG-01 GDPR gap assessment
- PB-04 GDPR operations in ten steps
Data protection policy
The organisation-wide rules for handling personal data lawfully, the responsibilities that make the rules work, and the records that show they are followed.
Serves: GDPR Article 5; GDPR Article 24; GDPR Article 32; ISO/IEC 27701 clause 5.2; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 5.34. Owner: Privacy Officer.
1. Purpose
This policy states how [Organisation] handles personal data about customers, users, staff, applicants, suppliers and anyone else whose data it holds, so that every person who touches personal data knows the rules and so that the organisation can demonstrate that it meets GDPR Article 5 and Article 24.
2. Scope
It applies to every employee, contractor and temporary worker, to every system, service and paper record that holds personal data, and to every processing activity in which [Organisation] acts as a controller, a joint controller or a processor. Where [Organisation] acts as a processor, the customer's documented instructions take precedence over any statement in section 4 that would conflict with them, and PIMS-PRO-01 records which role applies.
3. Roles and responsibilities
| Role |
Responsibility |
| Chief Executive Officer |
Approves this policy, provides the resources it needs, and is accountable for the organisation's compliance. |
| Privacy Officer |
Owns the policy, advises on every statement below, keeps PIMS-REG-01, runs the rights and breach processes, and reports to the steering committee under GOV-POL-01. |
| Data Protection Officer |
Where one is designated under GDPR Article 37, performs the independent tasks in Article 39 and is the contact point for the supervisory authority. The role may be held by the Privacy Officer only where independence can be shown. |
| System Owner |
Applies the statements to the systems they own, supports data subject requests and deletion, and keeps GDPR-REG-02 current for their flows. |
| Head of each function |
Confirms once a year that the processing in their function is recorded in PIMS-REG-01 and has a lawful basis. |
| Information Security Manager |
Operates the technical and organisational measures required by statement 4.9 under GOV-POL-03. |
| All staff |
Follow this policy, complete the training in statement 4.12, and report concerns and suspected breaches at once. |
4. Policy statements
4.1 Lawfulness, fairness and transparency. Every processing activity has one lawful basis recorded in PIMS-REG-01 before it starts, and the people concerned are told about it through a notice built from GDPR-TPL-01, GDPR-TPL-02 or GDPR-TPL-03 at the point of collection, or within one month where the data was not collected from them.
4.2 Purpose limitation. Personal data is used only for the purposes stated in the notice and the inventory. A new purpose needs the Privacy Officer's written compatibility assessment, and, where the assessment fails, a new lawful basis and an updated notice before the new use begins.
4.3 Data minimisation. Teams collect only the data fields the recorded purpose needs. Every new form, field, integration and feature is checked against this statement under PIMS-PRO-06 before release.
4.4 Accuracy. Owners of systems that hold personal data provide a way for the people concerned, or staff acting for them, to correct it, and correct or delete inaccurate data within one month of learning that it is wrong.
4.5 Storage limitation. Every category of personal data has a retention period and a trigger recorded in PIMS-REG-07 under PIMS-POL-02. Data past its period is deleted or anonymised across primary storage, derived copies, backups and logs within the windows that schedule sets, and the deletion is recorded.
4.6 Special category and criminal offence data. Data about health, ethnic origin, political opinions, religious or philosophical beliefs, trade union membership, genetics, biometrics, sex life or sexual orientation, and data about criminal convictions, is processed only where the Privacy Officer has recorded a condition under GDPR Article 9 or Article 10 in PIMS-REG-01, with access limited to named roles.
4.7 Consent. Where consent is the basis, it is collected with a form built from GDPR-TPL-06, recorded in PIMS-REG-04, and withdrawable as easily as it was given. Consent is never bundled with terms of service and is never a condition of a service that does not need the data. Consent from a child is handled under PIMS-PRO-05.
4.8 Legitimate interests. Where legitimate interests is the basis, a completed GDPR-TPL-07 assessment is approved by the Privacy Officer and recorded in GDPR-REG-03 before processing starts, and the people concerned can object.
4.9 Security. Personal data is protected by the controls in GOV-POL-03 and the procedures it mandates, proportionate to the risk recorded in GOV-REG-05 and, where a data protection impact assessment exists, in PIMS-REG-08. Restricted personal data is encrypted at rest and in transit under GOV-PRO-20.
4.10 Data subject rights. Every request to exercise a right under GDPR Articles 15 to 22 is logged in PIMS-REG-02 on the day it arrives and answered under PIMS-PRO-03 within one month, using the letters in GDPR-TPL-05. No request is refused without the Privacy Officer's written reasons.
4.11 Breaches. Anyone who suspects that personal data has been lost, altered, disclosed or made unavailable reports it immediately through the channel in GOV-PRO-07. The Privacy Officer assesses the breach under PIMS-PRO-04, notifies the supervisory authority within 72 hours of awareness where the risk test is met, using GDPR-TPL-10, and records every breach in PIMS-REG-03 whether or not it is notified.
4.12 Training. Every person completes privacy training at induction and annually, and people who handle requests, breaches, HR data or special category data complete role-based training, all recorded in GDPR-REG-05 under GOV-PRO-08.
4.13 Processors and sharing. Personal data is shared with a processor only under a contract that meets GDPR Article 28, built from PIMS-TPL-02 and recorded in PIMS-REG-06, after an assessment using GDPR-TPL-09 under GOV-PRO-06. Sharing with another controller is recorded in PIMS-REG-01 with its basis.
4.14 International transfers. Personal data leaves the region only under a mechanism in PIMS-POL-03, recorded in PIMS-REG-05, and, for transfers relying on contractual safeguards, after a transfer impact assessment using GDPR-TPL-08.
4.15 Privacy by design and impact assessment. Every project, feature and procurement that processes personal data is screened under PIMS-PRO-02 and, where a trigger applies, a data protection impact assessment using PIMS-TPL-01 is completed and approved before go-live, as checked at the gate in PB-07.
4.16 Records. The Privacy Officer keeps PIMS-REG-01 as the record of processing activities required by GDPR Article 30, reviewed under GDPR-PRO-01 at least quarterly.
4.17 Consequences. Breach of this policy is handled under the disciplinary process in GOV-PRO-18. Deliberate misuse of personal data may be gross misconduct and may be reported to the authorities.
5. Records and evidence
- PIMS-REG-01 Personal data processing inventory, with lawful bases and special category conditions.
- PIMS-REG-02 Data subject request register, PIMS-REG-03 Personal data breach register, PIMS-REG-04 Consent record register.
- GDPR-REG-03 Legitimate interests assessment register, PIMS-REG-05 International transfer register, PIMS-REG-06 Processor and sub-processor register.
- PIMS-REG-07 Retention schedule and the deletion records it requires.
- PIMS-REG-08 DPIA register.
- GDPR-REG-05 Privacy training register and GOV-REG-23 Policy acknowledgement register.
- Minutes of the steering committee showing the Privacy Officer's reports.
6. Exceptions
A legal obligation, a court order or a request from a competent authority may require processing outside a statement above. The Privacy Officer records the obligation, the data disclosed and the date in PIMS-REG-01 and informs the Chief Executive Officer. No other exception applies; a team that cannot meet a statement raises it under GOV-PRO-24.
7. Review and maintenance
The Privacy Officer reviews this policy annually, after a supervisory authority decision or guidance that affects the organisation, after a reportable breach, and after a change in the services offered or the regions served. Changes follow GOV-PRO-01 and are communicated to all staff with a new acknowledgement in GOV-REG-23.
8. Related documents
- PIMS-POL-01 Privacy information management policy
- PIMS-POL-02 Data retention and disposal policy
- PIMS-POL-03 International transfer policy
- PIMS-PRO-01 Determining controller and processor roles
- PIMS-PRO-02 Privacy risk and data protection impact assessment procedure
- PIMS-PRO-03 Data subject rights handling procedure
- PIMS-PRO-04 Personal data breach assessment and notification procedure
- PIMS-PRO-05 Consent and privacy notice management procedure
- PIMS-PRO-06 Privacy by design and by default procedure
- GDPR-PRO-01 Data mapping and records of processing procedure
- GDPR-PRO-02 HR data handling procedure
- GDPR-GDE-01 Guide: a GDPR operating model for a product or service team
- GOV-POL-03 Information security policy
- GOV-PRO-06 Supplier and third party security procedure
- GOV-PRO-07 Information security incident management procedure
- GOV-PRO-08 Security and privacy awareness and training procedure
Data mapping and records of processing procedure
How the organisation discovers, records and keeps current every processing activity and every flow of personal data, so that PIMS-REG-01 and GDPR-REG-02 are a true record of processing at any moment.
Serves: GDPR Article 30; GDPR Article 5(2); ISO/IEC 27701 clause 7.2.8; ISO/IEC 27701 Annex A 7.2.8; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 5.9. Owner: Privacy Officer.
1. Purpose
This procedure produces and maintains the two records that every other privacy process depends on: the processing inventory in PIMS-REG-01, which is the record of processing activities that GDPR Article 30 requires, and the flow and transfer map in GDPR-REG-02, which shows where each item of personal data comes from, where it goes and under what safeguard. Without them a request cannot be answered completely, a breach cannot be scoped, a retention rule cannot be applied and a notice cannot be accurate.
2. Scope
It applies to every function, system, service, supplier relationship and paper process in which [Organisation] processes personal data as a controller, joint controller or processor, including trials, internal tools, analytics, backups, support tooling and features that use machine learning.
3. Roles and responsibilities
| Role |
Responsibility |
| Privacy Officer |
Runs the procedure, facilitates the workshops, owns both registers, decides which activities are distinct, and signs the quarterly review. |
| Head of each function |
Names a function representative, confirms the completeness of the function's rows once a year. |
| Function representative |
Attends the workshop for their function, supplies the facts for each activity, and reports changes within the triggers in step 4.9. |
| System Owner |
Confirms the systems, storage locations, retention settings and integrations for each flow that touches their system, and keeps the GDPR-REG-02 rows for those flows current. |
| Information Security Manager |
Supplies the security measures column from the Statement of Applicability and the controls in GOV-REG-25. |
| Processor customers' contacts |
Where [Organisation] is a processor, supply the categories and instructions needed for the processor rows. |
4. Procedure
4.1 Plan the mapping round. The Privacy Officer schedules one workshop per function (for example product, engineering, sales and marketing, customer support, people, finance) in the first mapping round, and one per changed function in later rounds. Each workshop has a function representative, the owners of the systems that function uses, and the Privacy Officer. The invitation lists the questions in step 4.3 so that representatives arrive with answers.
4.2 Collect the system view first. Before the workshop the Privacy Officer exports the asset list from GOV-REG-10, the supplier list from GOV-REG-07 and the interface list from GOV-REG-25, filters each to items that hold or move personal data, and brings the filtered lists to the workshop as a prompt. A system that holds personal data and appears in no activity is a gap to resolve in the workshop, not a line to delete.
4.3 Identify activities. In the workshop the Privacy Officer walks through what the function does to people, in the people's own terms: who they are (customers, users, staff, applicants, contacts, visitors), what happens to them (sign-up, billing, support, marketing, recruitment, monitoring), and why. Each distinct purpose with its own data set is one activity. Two purposes that use the same data are two activities. The same purpose across several systems is one activity with several systems. The test is whether a reader of the notice would recognise it as a separate thing the organisation does with their data.
4.4 Record each activity. For every activity the representative supplies, and the Privacy Officer records in PIMS-REG-01: the role of [Organisation] (controller, joint controller or processor, decided under PIMS-PRO-01); the purpose; the lawful basis, and the condition where special category or criminal offence data is involved; the categories of data subjects and of data; the source; the recipients, internal and external; whether data leaves the region and the safeguard; the retention period and trigger from PIMS-REG-07; the security measures by reference; the owner; and any DPIA reference from PIMS-REG-08. A row with any of these blank is marked Incomplete in its status and given an owner and a date.
4.5 Trace the flows. For every activity the System Owners trace the data from entry to deletion: the system or party it enters from, each system it is stored in or passed to, each third party it is sent to, and where backups and logs containing it are kept. Each hop is one row in GDPR-REG-02 with the data items that move, the direction, whether the destination is internal or external, the country, the transfer method, the safeguard, the controls on the hop (encryption, authentication, access restriction) and the owner. The team draws the flow as a simple diagram during the workshop and files the diagram against the activity in the evidence folder described in PB-09.
4.6 Resolve the gaps the trace exposes. Three findings are common and each has a fixed response. A flow to a supplier not in PIMS-REG-06 goes to the Privacy Officer, who starts GOV-PRO-06 and marks the flow Under review. A flow out of the region with no safeguard goes to PIMS-POL-03 and a GDPR-TPL-08 assessment, and the flow is suspended if it carries Restricted data. An activity with no lawful basis the representative can state is suspended until the Privacy Officer records one, or records the decision to stop the activity.
4.7 Check against the external statements. The Privacy Officer compares the completed rows with the current privacy notices built from GDPR-TPL-01, GDPR-TPL-02 and GDPR-TPL-03, the cookie inventory in GDPR-REG-04 and the customer-facing processing descriptions. Any activity, recipient, retention period or transfer in the registers that the notices do not describe is raised to PIMS-PRO-05 for a notice change, with the processing recorded as Partial in GDPR-REG-01 until the notice is published.
4.8 Approve the round. The head of each function confirms in writing that the rows for their function are complete and accurate. The Privacy Officer sets the status of each confirmed row to Current, records the round date, and reports the counts (activities, incomplete rows, flows under review, transfers without safeguard) to the steering committee under GOV-POL-01.
4.9 Triggers for an update between rounds. A function representative or System Owner reports to the Privacy Officer within five working days, and the Privacy Officer updates the registers within ten working days, when any of the following happens: a new product feature, form or integration that collects or sends personal data; a new or changed supplier; a new purpose for existing data; a new country of storage, support or processing; a change in retention; a change in the role of [Organisation] for a customer; a merger, acquisition or new entity; a data subject request or breach that reveals an unrecorded activity. The go-live gate in PB-07 and the change procedure in GOV-PRO-09 both ask whether the registers were updated, so a feature cannot ship with an unrecorded flow.
4.10 Quarterly review. Each quarter the Privacy Officer samples at least ten activities, checks each against the live system (a field list, an integration configuration, a supplier console, a retention setting) and records the result. A sample that fails on a material fact (an unrecorded recipient, transfer or data category) triggers a workshop for that function within thirty days.
4.11 Annual round. Once a year the full set of workshops in step 4.1 is repeated. The annual round also retires activities that have stopped, with the stop date recorded and the deletion confirmed under PIMS-POL-02.
4.12 Producing the Article 30 record. When a supervisory authority, an auditor or a customer asks for the record of processing, the Privacy Officer exports PIMS-REG-01 filtered to the role requested (controller rows or processor rows), dated, with the version of the register, and files a copy of what was sent.
5. Records and evidence
- PIMS-REG-01 Personal data processing inventory, with a status and round date on every row.
- GDPR-REG-02 Data flow and transfer map, with a diagram per activity in the evidence folder.
- Workshop attendance notes and the function heads' written confirmations.
- Quarterly sample records and any workshops they triggered.
- Copies of every Article 30 export provided to an external party.
- GDPR-REG-01 rows for Article 30 updated with the evidence reference.
6. Exceptions
An activity may remain Incomplete for no more than sixty days while a supplier or customer supplies a fact only they hold, with the Privacy Officer's agreement noted on the row. No activity runs without a recorded lawful basis.
7. Review and maintenance
The Privacy Officer reviews this procedure annually, after an audit finding or supervisory authority enquiry about the record of processing, and after a change in the organisation's structure. Changes follow GOV-PRO-01.
8. Related documents
- PIMS-REG-01 Personal data processing inventory
- GDPR-REG-02 Data flow and transfer map
- PIMS-PRO-01 Determining controller and processor roles
- PIMS-PRO-05 Consent and privacy notice management procedure
- PIMS-POL-02 Data retention and disposal policy
- PIMS-POL-03 International transfer policy
- GDPR-TPL-08 Transfer impact assessment template
- GOV-PRO-06 Supplier and third party security procedure
- GOV-PRO-09 Change management procedure
- GOV-REG-10 Information asset register
- GOV-REG-25 Data flow and interface inventory
- PB-07 Playbook: the go-live security and privacy gate for a software project
- PB-09 Playbook: evidence management that survives an audit
- GDPR-GDE-01 Guide: a GDPR operating model for a product or service team
HR data handling procedure
How personal data about applicants, employees, contractors and former staff is collected, used, protected, retained and deleted at each stage from recruitment to after departure.
Serves: GDPR Article 5; GDPR Article 6; GDPR Article 9; GDPR Article 88; ISO/IEC 27701 Annex A 7.2.2; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 6.1. Owner: Privacy Officer.
1. Purpose
This procedure gives the people function and line managers a single set of steps for handling the personal data of the workforce, so that recruitment, employment, monitoring, references and leaving are all done on a recorded lawful basis, with the minimum data, for a defined period, and with special category data under tighter control.
2. Scope
It applies to data about job applicants, employees, contractors, temporary workers, interns and former members of any of those groups, in every system and paper file that holds it, including the HR system, payroll, recruitment tools, email, shared drives, access control and monitoring systems, and the files that managers keep.
3. Roles and responsibilities
| Role |
Responsibility |
| Head of People |
Owns the HR processing activities in PIMS-REG-01, approves the retention periods for HR categories, and is the approver for the disclosures in step 4.8. |
| HR Administrator |
Performs the day-to-day steps, keeps the HR system current and runs the retention checks in step 4.10. |
| Line manager |
Collects only the data the steps allow, keeps no shadow files, and routes requests and concerns to the people function. |
| Privacy Officer |
Advises on lawful basis and special category conditions, approves monitoring and new HR tools, handles rights requests from the workforce under PIMS-PRO-03. |
| Information Security Manager |
Applies access control, logging and encryption to HR systems and approves any monitoring configuration. |
| Payroll and benefits providers |
Act as processors under PIMS-TPL-02 terms recorded in PIMS-REG-06. |
4. Procedure
4.1 Recruitment: collection. The HR Administrator publishes the applicant notice built from GDPR-TPL-03 on every application channel before any data is entered. Application forms ask only for the data needed to assess suitability for the advertised role. Equal opportunities monitoring questions are optional, kept separate from the application, and seen only in aggregate. Social media and public sources are searched only where the Head of People has recorded the need for the role, and the applicant is told.
4.2 Recruitment: assessment. Interviewers record their notes in the recruitment system, not in personal files, limit them to evidence against the role criteria, and are told at interview training that the candidate may obtain the notes under a request. Tests and assessments are used only where PIMS-PRO-02 screening shows no automated decision in the sense of GDPR Article 22, or where a human reviews every rejection.
4.3 Pre-employment checks. Checks are proportionate to the role and recorded in GOV-PRO-18. Identity and right to work checks are kept as the law requires. Criminal record checks are run only for roles where the law permits them and the Privacy Officer has recorded the condition in PIMS-REG-01. Reference requests are sent only after the candidate agrees to them, and references received are held on the employee file.
4.4 Unsuccessful applicants. The HR Administrator deletes the data of unsuccessful applicants [Number] months after the decision, no later than twelve, unless the applicant has agreed in writing to be kept in a talent pool for a stated period. The deletion covers the recruitment system, email folders and interviewers' notes.
4.5 Employment records. On joining, the HR Administrator creates one employee record in the HR system, gives the employee the notice built from GDPR-TPL-02 with the contract, and records in GDPR-REG-05 the induction privacy training completed under GOV-PRO-08. Managers hold no local copies of contracts, pay details, absence reasons or performance records; they work in the HR system. Emergency contact details are collected with the contact's name, relationship and number only, and the employee is asked to tell the contact.
4.6 Special category data. Health data (absence reasons, adjustments, occupational health reports), trade union membership, and any other special category data is held in a restricted section of the HR system that only the people function and the Privacy Officer can read. Managers see fitness to work and adjustments needed, not diagnoses. Such data is processed under an employment law condition recorded in PIMS-REG-01, or with explicit consent collected with GDPR-TPL-06 where the law allows and the employee is free to refuse.
4.7 Monitoring. Monitoring of email, internet, devices, access logs or location is introduced only after the Privacy Officer and the Information Security Manager approve a written purpose and scope, the screening in PIMS-PRO-02 is complete, and staff have been told through the notice and GOV-POL-02. Monitoring is targeted at the purpose (security, legal compliance, safety), is not continuous surveillance of individuals, and covert monitoring is used only for a specific suspected serious offence, authorised by the Chief Executive Officer, for a fixed period, and recorded.
4.8 Disclosures. Workforce data is disclosed outside the people function only: to processors in PIMS-REG-06; to tax, social security and other authorities where the law requires; to a prospective employer giving a reference, limited to dates, role and, where the organisation's reference policy allows, factual performance statements; to a customer or client where the contract requires named staff details, limited to name, role and qualifications; to insurers and pension providers for the scheme concerned. Any other disclosure needs the Head of People's written approval and a lawful basis recorded by the Privacy Officer.
4.9 Rights of the workforce. Requests from applicants, employees and former staff follow PIMS-PRO-03. Access requests from employees are common in grievances and disciplinary processes; the HR Administrator searches the HR system, email of the people function and the relevant managers, and shared drives, and applies the exemptions for third party data and confidential references with the Privacy Officer.
4.10 Leavers. On the last day the HR Administrator triggers the offboarding tasks in GOV-CHK-01, moves the employee record to the leaver status, and records the leaving date as the retention trigger. Within thirty days the HR Administrator removes the person from distribution lists, internal directories and any system where their account was not removed by GOV-PRO-10, and confirms to the Privacy Officer.
4.11 Retention and deletion. Each HR category has a period in PIMS-REG-07: the employee file for [Number] years after leaving as employment and tax law require, payroll records for the statutory period, recruitment records under step 4.4, health and safety records for the period the law sets, monitoring records for no more than [Number] months unless part of an investigation. The HR Administrator runs the retention report quarterly, deletes expired records in the HR system, email and shared drives, asks processors in PIMS-REG-06 to confirm their deletion, and records the run.
4.12 New HR tools and changes. A new recruitment, HR, payroll, survey, wellbeing or monitoring tool goes through GOV-PRO-06 and GDPR-TPL-09, PIMS-PRO-02 screening, and the processing inventory update in GDPR-PRO-01 before any workforce data is entered.
5. Records and evidence
- PIMS-REG-01 rows for recruitment, employment administration, payroll, benefits, performance, absence and health, monitoring and references.
- GDPR-REG-05 Privacy training register showing induction and HR handler training.
- Retention report runs and deletion records under PIMS-REG-07.
- PIMS-REG-02 entries for workforce requests.
- Monitoring approvals and, where used, covert monitoring authorisations.
- Disclosure approvals under step 4.8.
- GOV-CHK-01 completed checklists for joiners and leavers.
6. Exceptions
Records subject to a legal hold, a live grievance, disciplinary case, claim or investigation are kept until the Head of People and the Privacy Officer release the hold in writing, and the hold is recorded on the retention report. No other exception applies.
7. Review and maintenance
The Privacy Officer and the Head of People review this procedure annually, after a change in employment or data protection law affecting the workforce, after a workforce-related breach or complaint, and after the introduction of a new HR system or monitoring tool. Changes follow GOV-PRO-01.
8. Related documents
- GDPR-TPL-02 Employee privacy notice template
- GDPR-TPL-03 Job applicant privacy notice template
- GDPR-TPL-06 Consent form templates (customers and employees)
- GDPR-TPL-09 Supplier GDPR assessment questionnaire
- GDPR-PRO-01 Data mapping and records of processing procedure
- PIMS-PRO-02 Privacy risk and data protection impact assessment procedure
- PIMS-PRO-03 Data subject rights handling procedure
- PIMS-POL-02 Data retention and disposal policy
- PIMS-TPL-02 Data processing agreement template
- GOV-PRO-18 Human resources security procedure
- GOV-PRO-10 Access management procedure (joiners, movers, leavers, privileged access, reviews)
- GOV-POL-02 Acceptable use policy
- GOV-CHK-01 Onboarding and offboarding security checklist
- GOV-PRO-14 Logging, monitoring and alert handling procedure
Privacy notice template (customers and website)
The customer and website privacy notice with every element GDPR Articles 13 and 14 require, as sections with placeholders and guidance notes, maintained under PIMS-PRO-05.
Serves: GDPR Article 12; GDPR Article 13; GDPR Article 14; ISO/IEC 27701 Annex A 7.3.2; ISO/IEC 27701 Annex A 7.3.3. Owner: Privacy Officer.
Guidance notes are in italics and are removed before publication. Every section below corresponds to an element the law requires; do not delete a section, write "not applicable" with a reason instead. Write for the reader, not the regulator: short sentences, no legal citations in the body, a reading age of about twelve. Each fact in this notice must match a row in PIMS-REG-01; the Privacy Officer checks the match before publication and after every change, and records the version in GOV-REG-01. Where data is obtained from someone other than the person, the notice is provided within one month, or at first contact or first disclosure if earlier.
1. Who we are
[Organisation], [registered address], is the controller of the personal data described in this notice. If a representative is appointed under GDPR Article 27, name it here with contact details. If the organisation acts as a processor for business customers, say so and point readers to the customer who decides how their data is used.
You can contact us about anything in this notice at [contact channel]. Where a Data Protection Officer is designated, give the DPO's contact details here; they may be a role mailbox rather than a name.
2. What this notice covers
This notice explains what we do with personal data when you visit [website or application], create an account, use [Product or service], contact us, or receive marketing from us. List every audience the notice covers. Employees and applicants have their own notices built from GDPR-TPL-02 and GDPR-TPL-03. Cookies and similar technologies are covered in the notice built from GDPR-TPL-04 and may be linked from here.
3. The data we collect and where it comes from
One row per category of data. The "source" column satisfies the Article 14 requirement for data not collected from the person; include publicly available sources where used.
| Category |
Examples |
Source |
| Account and contact details |
[Name, email address, telephone number, organisation, role] |
You, when you register or contact us |
| Content you provide |
[Files, messages, settings and other material you upload to the service] |
You |
| Usage and device information |
[Pages viewed, features used, device type, browser, IP address, approximate location derived from it] |
Collected automatically when you use the service |
| Transaction and billing data |
[Plan, invoices, payment status; card details are held by our payment provider, not by us] |
You and our payment provider |
| Support and communications |
[Support tickets, call notes, survey responses] |
You |
| Data from other sources |
[Business contact data from a data provider, information from a partner that referred you, public professional profiles] |
[Named category of source] |
4. Why we use your data and the legal basis
One row per purpose. Each purpose needs exactly one basis from: performance of a contract, legal obligation, legitimate interests (state the interest), consent, vital interests, public task. Where legitimate interests is the basis, the interest named here must match the GDPR-REG-03 entry. Where consent is the basis, say how to withdraw it.
| Purpose |
Data used |
Legal basis |
| Providing [Product or service], including creating your account and delivering the features you use |
Account details, content, usage information |
Performance of our contract with you |
| Billing and collecting payment |
Account details, transaction data |
Performance of our contract; legal obligation for tax and accounting records |
| Keeping the service secure, detecting fraud and abuse |
Usage and device information, account details |
Our legitimate interest in protecting the service and its users |
| Improving the service and understanding how it is used |
Usage information, aggregated where possible |
Our legitimate interest in improving what we offer; consent for analytics cookies where required |
| Responding to your questions and support requests |
Contact details, support communications |
Performance of our contract, or our legitimate interest in answering enquiries |
| Sending you marketing about our products |
Contact details, usage information |
Consent, or our legitimate interest in marketing to existing customers where the law allows, with an opt-out in every message |
| Complying with the law and responding to lawful requests |
Any category, as required |
Legal obligation |
| [Features that use machine learning, for example suggestions or classification] |
[Content and usage data described precisely] |
[Basis]. Say whether the data is used to train models, and if so on what basis; say whether a human reviews outputs that affect you. |
5. Automated decisions
Required where decisions with legal or similarly significant effects are made solely by automated means. If none, keep the first sentence.
We do not make decisions about you based solely on automated processing that have legal or similarly significant effects on you. [If this changes, we will tell you how the decision is made, why it matters and how to ask for a person to review it.]
6. Who we share your data with
List categories of recipients, and name them where the reader would reasonably expect it. Every processor listed here is in PIMS-REG-06. Sharing between group companies counts as sharing.
- Service providers that act on our instructions: [hosting, email delivery, payment processing, customer support tools, analytics]. They may only use your data to provide their service to us.
- [Group companies], for [purpose].
- Professional advisers, insurers and auditors, where needed.
- Authorities, regulators and courts, where the law requires or allows it.
- A buyer or successor, if our business or part of it is sold or reorganised, under confidentiality terms.
We do not sell your personal data.
7. Where your data is stored and international transfers
Your data is stored in [country or region]. State every country where data is stored, supported from or processed, including by processors; this must match PIMS-REG-05 and GDPR-REG-02.
Where we transfer your data outside [region], we rely on [an adequacy decision by the relevant authority, standard contractual clauses approved by the relevant authority, binding corporate rules, or a derogation such as your explicit consent or the performance of your contract]. You can ask us for a copy of the safeguards we use at the contact in section 1. Name the mechanism per destination; never write "appropriate safeguards" alone.
8. How long we keep your data
One row per category, matching PIMS-REG-07. Where a fixed period cannot be stated, give the criteria used to decide it.
| Category |
Period |
| Account and content |
For as long as your account is open, then deleted within [Number] days of closure, except where we must keep it longer by law |
| Billing and transaction records |
[Number] years after the transaction, as tax and accounting law require |
| Usage and device logs |
[Number] months |
| Support communications |
[Number] years after the ticket is closed |
| Marketing preferences and consent records |
Until you withdraw consent or object, and then a record of your choice for [Number] years so that we respect it |
9. Your rights
You have the right to ask us for access to your personal data, to correct it, to delete it, to restrict how we use it, to receive it in a portable format, and to object to processing based on our legitimate interests. Where we rely on your consent, you may withdraw it at any time without affecting what was done before. You may object to direct marketing at any time and we will stop.
To exercise a right, contact us at [contact channel]. We will respond within one month and tell you if we need longer. We may ask you to confirm your identity. The response process is PIMS-PRO-03; the letters are in GDPR-TPL-05.
You also have the right to complain to a supervisory authority. Ours is [name of supervisory authority]. We would appreciate the chance to resolve your concern first, but you may contact the authority at any time.
10. Whether you must provide your data
Required where data is collected from the person. State what is needed for the contract or by law and what happens if it is not provided.
To open an account and use [Product or service] you must give us [the data marked as required on the sign-up form]. Without it we cannot provide the service. All other data is optional, and we tell you when it is.
11. Children
[Product or service] is not intended for children under [Number]. We do not knowingly collect data from them. Where the service is offered to children, describe the age check and how parental consent is obtained, under PIMS-PRO-05.
12. Changes to this notice
We will post any change here, with the date, and will tell you by [channel] before a change that affects how we use data we already hold about you. Material changes follow PIMS-PRO-05 and are recorded in GOV-REG-01 with the previous versions kept.
Version [Number], effective [Date].
13. Related documents
- PIMS-PRO-05 Consent and privacy notice management procedure
- PIMS-REG-01 Personal data processing inventory
- PIMS-REG-05 International transfer register
- PIMS-REG-06 Processor and sub-processor register
- PIMS-REG-07 Retention schedule
- GDPR-REG-03 Legitimate interests assessment register
- GDPR-TPL-04 Cookie and tracking technologies notice template
- GDPR-TPL-05 Data subject request response letters
- PIMS-PRO-03 Data subject rights handling procedure
Employee privacy notice template
The notice given to employees, contractors and temporary workers with their contract, describing how [Organisation] uses workforce data under GDPR-PRO-02.
Serves: GDPR Article 13; GDPR Article 88; ISO/IEC 27701 Annex A 7.3.2. Owner: Privacy Officer.
Guidance notes are in italics and are removed before issue. Give this notice with the employment contract or engagement letter, record the issue in the employee file, and re-issue it after any material change. Each statement must match the HR rows in PIMS-REG-01 and the periods in PIMS-REG-07. Where a works council, staff association or collective agreement exists, consult it before changes to sections 5 and 7.
1. Who we are and who to contact
[Organisation], [registered address], is the controller of the personal data we hold about you as a member of our workforce. Questions about this notice go to [the people function contact channel] or to [the Privacy Officer or Data Protection Officer contact].
2. Who this notice covers
This notice applies to employees, contractors, temporary and agency workers, interns and volunteers, during your engagement and afterwards for as long as we keep your records. Applicants have a separate notice given during recruitment.
3. The data we hold
| Category |
Examples |
| Identity and contact |
Name, address, date of birth, personal contact details, emergency contacts, identification documents, right to work evidence |
| Engagement |
Contract, role, grade, working pattern, location, start and end dates, manager, notice period |
| Pay and benefits |
Bank details, salary, tax and social security references, pension, expenses, benefits elections |
| Performance and development |
Objectives, appraisals, training records, qualifications, promotions, disciplinary and grievance records |
| Absence and health |
Holiday, sickness absence and reasons, medical certificates, occupational health reports, adjustments (special category data, see section 6) |
| Security and systems |
Account identifiers, access rights, building access records, device records, logs generated by using our systems |
| Monitoring records |
[Email and internet logs, access logs, CCTV images where installed] as described in section 7 |
| Equality monitoring |
Ethnic origin, disability, religion, sexual orientation, where you choose to give them (optional, special category) |
Most of this data comes from you. Some comes from your manager, from colleagues (for example in appraisals), from referees, from background check providers, and from the systems you use.
4. Why we use your data and on what basis
| Purpose |
Legal basis |
| Running your contract: paying you, managing holiday, benefits, performance and development |
Performance of your contract |
| Meeting legal duties: tax, social security, right to work, health and safety, statutory leave |
Legal obligation |
| Managing the workplace: planning, resourcing, communications, internal directories |
Our legitimate interest in running the organisation |
| Keeping systems, premises and information secure, including the monitoring in section 7 |
Our legitimate interest in security and legal compliance |
| Handling grievances, disciplinary matters, investigations and legal claims |
Our legitimate interest in managing the workforce and defending claims; legal obligation where it applies |
| Equality monitoring and reporting |
Your explicit consent, or a legal obligation where the law requires reporting |
| Occupational health, adjustments and sickness management |
Employment and social security law, and the assessment of your working capacity |
Where we rely on legitimate interests we have recorded an assessment and you may object; contact us at the channel in section 1.
5. Who we share your data with
- Payroll, pension, benefits, HR system, training and occupational health providers, who act on our instructions.
- Tax, social security and other authorities, where the law requires.
- Customers and clients, where a contract requires your name, role and qualifications.
- Prospective employers, for references after you leave, limited to [dates, role and factual statements].
- Professional advisers, insurers and auditors, where needed.
- [Group companies], for [purpose].
6. Special category data
Health data, trade union membership and the equality monitoring data you choose to give are held in a restricted part of the HR system that only the people function and [Privacy Officer] can read. Your manager sees what they need to support you at work, such as adjustments and fitness to work, not medical detail. We never use this data for any purpose other than the ones in section 4.
7. Monitoring
We monitor the use of our systems for security, to meet legal duties and to protect our information, as set out in the acceptable use policy. Monitoring covers [email and internet logs, system access logs, device management records, building access records, CCTV in the areas marked]. It is not continuous observation of individuals. Covert monitoring is used only to investigate a suspected serious offence, is authorised at the highest level, and is time-limited. The monitoring described here must match the approvals recorded under GDPR-PRO-02 step 4.7 and GOV-POL-02.
8. Where your data is kept
Your data is held in [country or region]. Where a provider processes it outside [region], we rely on [named transfer mechanism] and you may ask for a copy of the safeguards.
9. How long we keep it
| Category |
Period |
| Employee file |
[Number] years after you leave |
| Payroll and tax records |
[Number] years, as the law requires |
| Health and safety records |
[Number] years, as the law requires |
| Disciplinary and grievance records |
[Number] years after the matter closes, unless needed for a claim |
| Monitoring logs |
[Number] months, unless part of an investigation |
| Equality monitoring data |
Anonymised within [Number] months of collection |
10. Your rights
You may ask for access to your data, correct it, ask for deletion where we no longer need it, restrict or object to some uses, and withdraw any consent you gave. Contact [channel]. We respond within one month. You may complain to [supervisory authority] at any time.
11. Your obligations
You must keep your personal details current in [HR system], treat colleagues' data in line with GDPR-POL-01, and report any suspected breach at once.
12. Changes
We will tell you by [channel] before any change that affects how we use your data. Version [Number], effective [Date].
13. Related documents
- GDPR-PRO-02 HR data handling procedure
- GDPR-POL-01 Data protection policy
- GOV-POL-02 Acceptable use policy
- PIMS-REG-01 Personal data processing inventory
- PIMS-REG-07 Retention schedule
- PIMS-PRO-03 Data subject rights handling procedure
Job applicant privacy notice template
The notice shown to candidates on every application channel before they submit data, covering what [Organisation] collects during recruitment, from whom, why, who sees it and for how long.
Serves: GDPR Article 13; GDPR Article 14; ISO/IEC 27701 Annex A 7.3.2. Owner: Privacy Officer.
Guidance notes are in italics and are removed before publication. Publish this notice on the careers page, link it from every job advertisement and application form, and give it to recruitment agencies to pass to candidates they introduce. Where data is obtained from a referee, an agency, a background check provider or a public source, this notice must reach the candidate within one month, which the application step achieves. The facts must match the recruitment rows in PIMS-REG-01 and the periods in PIMS-REG-07.
1. Who we are and who to contact
[Organisation], [registered address], is the controller of the personal data we collect about you when you apply to work with us. Questions go to [recruitment contact channel] or [the Privacy Officer or Data Protection Officer contact].
2. The data we collect
| Category |
Examples |
Source |
| Identity and contact |
Name, contact details, right to work status |
You |
| Application |
CV, cover letter, application form answers, work history, education, qualifications |
You |
| Assessment |
Interview notes, test and exercise results, scores against the role criteria |
Our interviewers and assessors |
| References |
Statements from referees you name |
Your referees, contacted only after you agree |
| Background checks |
[Identity, right to work, qualification, employment history, criminal record where the role requires and the law permits] |
You and [category of check provider], after a conditional offer |
| Public professional information |
[Professional profile content relevant to the role] |
[Public professional networks], only where recorded for the role and disclosed to you |
| Equality monitoring |
Ethnic origin, disability, gender, age band, where you choose to give them |
You, optional, kept separate from your application |
| Agency data |
Your details as submitted by a recruitment agency |
The agency, which has its own notice |
3. Why we use your data and on what basis
| Purpose |
Legal basis |
| Assessing your application and deciding whether to offer you a role |
Steps at your request before entering a contract; our legitimate interest in selecting suitable staff |
| Verifying identity, right to work and qualifications |
Legal obligation; our legitimate interest in verifying what you have told us |
| Criminal record checks for [roles listed] |
[The specific legal condition that permits the check], recorded in our processing inventory |
| Communicating with you about your application and future vacancies you ask about |
Our legitimate interest; consent for a talent pool |
| Equality monitoring and reporting in aggregate |
Your explicit consent |
| Defending legal claims about recruitment decisions |
Our legitimate interest |
4. Automated decisions
We do not make recruitment decisions based solely on automated means. [Where we use screening tests or tools, a member of the recruitment team reviews every decision to reject a candidate.] If this is not true, describe the automated step, its logic in plain terms, its significance and how to request human review, and complete a PIMS-PRO-02 screening first.
5. Who sees your data
The recruitment team, the hiring manager, interviewers and assessors for the role, the people function, and, after an offer, [the background check provider]. Our recruitment system is provided by [category of provider] acting on our instructions. We share your data with referees only to confirm you named them. We do not share applications with other employers.
6. Where your data is kept
[Country or region]. Where a provider processes data outside [region] we rely on [named transfer mechanism].
7. How long we keep your data
| Outcome |
Period |
| Unsuccessful application |
[Number] months after the decision, then deleted, including interview notes |
| Talent pool, where you agree to it |
[Number] months, then we ask whether you wish to stay |
| Successful application |
Your application becomes part of your employee file, covered by the employee privacy notice |
| Equality monitoring data |
Anonymised within [Number] months of collection |
8. Your rights
You may ask for a copy of the data we hold about you, including interview notes, correct it, ask for deletion, object to processing based on our legitimate interests, and withdraw consent to the talent pool or equality monitoring at any time. Contact [channel]. We respond within one month. You may complain to [supervisory authority].
9. Whether you must provide data
You must provide the data marked as required on the application form; without it we cannot consider your application. Equality monitoring answers and talent pool consent are optional and do not affect your application.
10. Changes
Version [Number], effective [Date]. We will post changes on this page.
11. Related documents
- GDPR-PRO-02 HR data handling procedure
- GDPR-TPL-02 Employee privacy notice template
- GOV-PRO-18 Human resources security procedure
- PIMS-REG-01 Personal data processing inventory
- PIMS-REG-07 Retention schedule
- PIMS-PRO-03 Data subject rights handling procedure
Cookie and tracking technologies notice template
The public notice for cookies, local storage, pixels and software development kits, with the categories table, how consent is collected and withdrawn, and the link to the inventory in GDPR-REG-04 that keeps it true.
Serves: GDPR Article 6; GDPR Article 7; GDPR Article 13; ISO/IEC 27701 Annex A 7.2.3. Owner: Privacy Officer.
Guidance notes are in italics and are removed before publication. The ePrivacy rules require consent before any storage or reading on a device that is not strictly necessary for a service the person asked for; GDPR sets the standard of that consent. This notice is generated from GDPR-REG-04: every tracker in the inventory appears in the table below, and nothing appears here that is not in the inventory. The Privacy Officer re-runs the site scan and reconciles the table at least quarterly and before every release that adds a script, tag or SDK.
1. What this notice covers
This notice explains the cookies and similar technologies we use on [website or application], what they do, and how you can control them. "Similar technologies" means anything that stores or reads information on your device: local storage, pixels and web beacons, software development kits in our mobile applications, and scripts that read device characteristics.
2. The categories we use
| Category |
What it does |
Consent |
| Strictly necessary |
Lets the site work: keeping you signed in, remembering your consent choice, protecting against attacks, balancing load |
Not required; you cannot switch these off |
| Functional |
Remembers choices you make, such as language or display settings |
Required (or "Not required" where the choice was explicitly requested by the user and the storage serves only that choice) |
| Analytics |
Measures how the site is used so that we can improve it |
Required |
| Advertising |
Builds a profile of your interests and shows you advertising on our site and elsewhere, including measuring whether advertising worked |
Required |
| Social media |
Lets you share content and lets the social network record that you visited |
Required |
3. The cookies and trackers we use
Reproduce the current GDPR-REG-04 export, one row per tracker. Keep the table under six columns; split by category if long.
| Name |
Set by |
Category |
Purpose |
Duration |
| [Name] |
[Organisation or named third party] |
[Category] |
[Plain words] |
[Session, or a period] |
| [Name] |
[Organisation or named third party] |
[Category] |
[Plain words] |
[Session, or a period] |
Third parties that set cookies through our site act as [controllers in their own right or our processors]. Their own notices are linked in the table where they are controllers. Where a third party receives data outside [region], the transfer relies on [named mechanism], recorded in our transfer register.
4. How we ask for your consent
When you first visit, a banner asks you to choose. Nothing in the Functional, Analytics, Advertising or Social media categories is set until you accept it. The banner offers "Accept all", "Reject all" and "Choose" with equal prominence, and no category is pre-ticked. Closing the banner without choosing, scrolling or continuing to browse is not consent, and only strictly necessary technologies run.
Your choice is recorded, with the date, the version of this notice and the categories you accepted, in a strictly necessary cookie and in our consent record, so that we can show what you agreed to. Record the consent in PIMS-REG-04 or the consent platform's log, keep the log for the period in PIMS-REG-07, and keep the banner wording of each version under GOV-REG-01.
We ask again when we add a new category or a new third party, or after [Number] months, whichever comes first.
5. How to withdraw or change your choice
Open [the "Cookie settings" link in the footer] at any time, change the categories and save. Withdrawing consent stops the technologies in that category from the moment you save; data already collected is handled as described in the privacy notice. Withdrawal is as easy as giving consent: the same number of clicks, no account needed.
You can also delete cookies and block storage in your browser or device settings. If you do, our consent record is deleted too and the banner will appear again.
6. Do Not Track and similar signals
[We honour the Global Privacy Control signal from your browser as a rejection of Advertising and Social media categories.] Delete or adjust to match what the site actually does; never claim to honour a signal that is not implemented.
7. Mobile applications
Our [application name] uses software development kits from [named providers] for [crash reporting, analytics, advertising]. The application asks for the same categories of consent at first launch and in [Settings, Privacy]. Operating system permissions, such as location or advertising identifier access, are requested separately by the device and can be withdrawn in its settings.
8. Contact and complaints
Questions about this notice go to [contact channel]. You may complain to [supervisory authority]. Our full privacy notice explains your other rights.
Version [Number], effective [Date].
9. Related documents
- GDPR-REG-04 Cookie and tracker inventory
- GDPR-TPL-01 Privacy notice template (customers and website)
- GDPR-TPL-06 Consent form templates (customers and employees)
- PIMS-PRO-05 Consent and privacy notice management procedure
- PIMS-REG-04 Consent record register
- PIMS-REG-05 International transfer register
Data subject request response letters
Five letters used under PIMS-PRO-03 at the fixed points of a request: acknowledgement, identity verification, extension, response with data, and refusal with reasons and the complaint route.
Serves: GDPR Article 12; GDPR Article 15; GDPR Article 16; GDPR Article 17; GDPR Article 18; GDPR Article 20; GDPR Article 21; GDPR Article 22; ISO/IEC 27701 Annex A 7.3.9. Owner: Privacy Officer.
Guidance notes are in italics. Each letter is sent by the Privacy Officer or the person handling the request, on the day the step in PIMS-PRO-03 is reached, through the channel the requester used unless they asked for another. Record the date sent and the letter used in PIMS-REG-02. Replace every placeholder; delete the guidance; never add legal citations the requester did not ask for. The one month clock runs from the day the request is received, not from the day identity is confirmed, unless the request cannot be acted on without identification and the requester was told without delay.
1. Letter A: acknowledgement
Send within three working days of receipt. Use for every right, changing the second paragraph to name the right.
Dear [Name],
Thank you for your request, which we received on [Date]. Our reference is [PIMS-REG-02 reference]; please quote it in any further message.
We understand that you are asking us to [provide a copy of the personal data we hold about you / correct the following data / delete your personal data / restrict how we use your data / provide your data in a portable format / stop processing your data for the following purpose / review a decision made about you]. If we have misunderstood, please tell us.
We will respond by [Date, one month from receipt]. If your request is complex or you have made several requests, we may need up to two further months, and we will tell you before [Date] if that is the case, with the reason.
We do not charge for handling requests unless a request is clearly unfounded or excessive, in which case we will tell you before doing anything.
If we need to confirm your identity or to ask what data you are looking for, we will write to you separately.
Yours sincerely,
[Name], [Role]
[Organisation]
2. Letter B: identity verification request
Send only when the identity of the requester cannot be confirmed from the channel used (for example a request from an authenticated account needs no further check). Ask for the least intrusive evidence that resolves the doubt. Never ask for more than the organisation already holds about the person. Tell the requester that the clock does not run while identification is outstanding only where that is the organisation's documented position.
Dear [Name],
Thank you for your request of [Date], reference [Reference].
Before we act on it we need to be sure that we are dealing with the person the data is about, so that we do not disclose or change someone's data at the request of another person.
Please [sign in to your account and resubmit the request from the request page / reply from the email address registered on your account / provide [one specific item, for example the postcode and the last four digits of the telephone number registered on the account] / provide a copy of one identity document with everything except your name, photograph and date of birth covered].
[If you are acting for someone else, please also provide the written authority of the person the data is about, or evidence of your legal authority to act for them.]
We will delete the identification evidence [Number] days after your request is closed and will not use it for any other purpose.
We will respond within one month of receiving this evidence. If we do not hear from you within [Number] days we will close the request, and you may make a new one at any time.
Yours sincerely,
[Name], [Role]
3. Letter C: extension notice
Send before the one month deadline, never after. The reason must be true and specific: volume, complexity or number of requests. "We are busy" is not a reason. Record the new date in PIMS-REG-02.
Dear [Name],
We are writing about your request of [Date], reference [Reference], which we would normally answer by [original date].
We need more time because [the request covers [Number] years of records across [Number] systems and the search must be completed and reviewed by hand / you have made [Number] separate requests which we are handling together / the request requires us to review material that includes other people's data]. We expect to respond by [new date, no more than two further months after the original date].
We have already [state what has been done]. If it would help, you may narrow the request to [a period, a system or a type of data] and we may be able to respond sooner.
We apologise for the delay.
Yours sincerely,
[Name], [Role]
4. Letter D: response with data (access request)
Attach the data as a structured export where possible, in a commonly used format, through a secure channel; never by unencrypted email. Include the supplementary information below: it is part of the right, not an optional cover note. Where the response also answers another right (correction, deletion, portability, objection), add a paragraph stating what was done and when, and keep the same structure.
Dear [Name],
Thank you for your request of [Date], reference [Reference]. We have completed our search and enclose the personal data we hold about you.
What we searched. [Named systems, email of the named functions, paper files], covering [period]. We searched using [your name, email address, account identifier, customer reference].
What is enclosed. [A file in [format] containing [Number] records, organised by [system or category].] Where a document contains information about other people, we have removed that information or the document, as the law allows; we have noted where this was done.
Why we hold this data and on what basis. [Short list of purposes and bases, matching the privacy notice.]
Where it came from. [You, and the sources named in the enclosed summary.]
Who we have shared it with. [Categories of recipients, and named recipients where known.]
How long we keep it. [The periods, or the criteria used.]
International transfers. [None / The data is processed in [country] under [mechanism], and you may ask for a copy of the safeguards.]
Automated decisions. [We do not make decisions about you by solely automated means. / A description of the logic, significance and consequences of the decision concerned.]
Your other rights. You may ask us to correct or delete this data, to restrict or object to our use of it, or to receive it in a portable format. You may complain to [supervisory authority] if you are unhappy with our response.
[Paragraph for other rights, where applicable: We have corrected [field] on [Date]. / We deleted your personal data from [systems] on [Date]; copies in backups will be removed within [Number] days under our backup cycle and cannot be restored to live use. / We have restricted [data] and will use it only for [purpose]. / We have stopped [processing] on [Date]. / We told the recipients listed above of the correction or deletion on [Date].]
Yours sincerely,
[Name], [Role]
5. Letter E: refusal with reasons and complaint route
A refusal, in whole or in part, needs the Privacy Officer's written approval in PIMS-REG-02 before it is sent. State the specific ground; the common ones are: the request is clearly unfounded or excessive (give the facts); the data is needed for a legal obligation or legal claims; deletion would conflict with a retention duty; the data is a confidential reference or concerns another person who has not agreed; the right does not apply to the lawful basis used (for example portability where the basis is legitimate interests). Where part of the request is granted, combine with Letter D and state what was and was not done.
Dear [Name],
Thank you for your request of [Date], reference [Reference], asking us to [right requested].
We have considered your request carefully, and we are not able to [act on it / act on the following part of it: [part]].
The reason is that [specific ground in plain words, for example: we are required by tax law to keep invoice records for [Number] years, and the data you have asked us to delete forms part of those records. We will delete it when that period ends on [Date]. / the records you asked for contain information about other people who have not agreed to its disclosure, and we cannot separate it from your information. / you have made [Number] requests for the same data since [Date] and we provided it on [Date]; we consider a further copy excessive. If you believe the data has changed since then, please tell us what you expect to find.]
[We have done the following instead: [what was done].]
If you disagree with this decision, you may ask us to review it by writing to [contact], and a person who was not involved in the original decision will review it within [Number] days. You also have the right to complain to [supervisory authority, contact details] and to seek a remedy through the courts.
Yours sincerely,
[Name], [Role]
6. Related documents
- PIMS-PRO-03 Data subject rights handling procedure
- PIMS-REG-02 Data subject request register
- GDPR-TPL-01 Privacy notice template (customers and website)
- GDPR-POL-01 Data protection policy
Consent form templates (customers and employees)
Two consent forms, one for customers and users and one for employees, each containing the elements that make consent valid, with the record that PIMS-REG-04 keeps for every consent given or withdrawn.
Serves: GDPR Article 7; GDPR Article 4; GDPR Article 9(2)(a); ISO/IEC 27701 Annex A 7.2.3; ISO/IEC 27701 Annex A 7.2.4. Owner: Privacy Officer.
Guidance notes are in italics and are removed before use. Consent is the right basis only when the person has a real choice and the organisation would accept a refusal; PIMS-PRO-05 records that decision before a form is used. A valid consent is freely given, specific to a stated purpose, informed, and shown by a clear affirmative act. It is never a pre-ticked box, silence, inactivity or a condition buried in terms. The form must be as easy to withdraw as to give, and the organisation must be able to show, for each person, what they consented to, when, how and under which version of the wording.
1. Customer and user consent form
Use one form per purpose, or one form with one separately tickable box per purpose. Each box is unticked by default. The service must work without the box being ticked unless the data is genuinely needed for it, in which case consent is the wrong basis.
[Organisation] would like your permission
We would like to [state the purpose in one sentence, for example: send you a monthly newsletter about new features and offers by email].
To do this we will use [the data concerned, for example: your name and email address]. We will not use it for anything else without asking you.
[Where relevant: We will share it with [named recipient] so that they can [purpose]. / We will keep it for [period] or until you withdraw your permission.]
You do not have to agree. If you do not, [state the consequence, which must be none for the core service, for example: you can still use your account exactly as before].
You can withdraw your permission at any time by [the mechanism, for example: clicking the link at the bottom of any message, or changing the setting at Account, Preferences]. Withdrawing does not affect anything we did before.
[ ] Yes, I agree that [Organisation] may [purpose] using [data]. (one box per purpose; unticked by default)
[ ] Yes, I agree that [Organisation] may share my [data] with [named recipient] for [purpose]. (only where sharing is itself consented to)
Our privacy notice at [location] explains your rights. Questions: [contact].
Where the data is special category data (for example health data in a wellbeing feature), the box must say "explicit" consent in substance: name the type of data, state the purpose and ask the person to confirm. Where the person is a child below the age set by the applicable law, obtain and verify the consent of the holder of parental responsibility under PIMS-PRO-05 and record how it was verified.
2. Employee consent form
Consent from an employee is valid only where refusal carries no detriment and the organisation can show that. Do not use consent for anything the employment contract, a legal duty or a legitimate interest already covers; use it for genuinely optional matters such as a photograph on the public website, participation in a wellbeing programme, equality monitoring, or a reference beyond the standard factual one. Collect it on paper or in the HR system, never by a reply to a group email.
Optional permission request
Name: [Name] Role: [Role] Date: [Date]
[Organisation] would like your permission to [purpose, for example: publish your name, role and photograph on the team page of our public website].
This is optional. Saying no has no effect on your employment, your pay, your development or how you are treated. If you say nothing, we will treat that as no.
The data involved is [data]. It will be seen by [recipients] and kept [for the period, or until you withdraw permission]. It will not be used for any other purpose.
You can withdraw your permission at any time by telling [the people function contact] in writing. We will [action on withdrawal, for example: remove the photograph within five working days]. Withdrawal does not affect anything done before.
[ ] I give my permission for the use described above.
[ ] I do not give my permission.
Signature: [Signature] Date: [Date]
For special category data (for example health data for a wellbeing programme or an occupational health referral beyond the legal duty), add: "I understand that this involves information about my [health / ethnic origin / other] and I explicitly agree to its use for the purpose above and no other."
3. The consent record
For every consent given or withdrawn, create or update one entry in PIMS-REG-04 with the fields below. Where consent is collected in a product, the product must capture the same fields; a boolean flag without the wording version and timestamp is not a record. Keep the wording of every version of each form under GOV-REG-01 so that the record can be read back.
| Field |
Entry |
| Person identifier |
[Account identifier, employee number, or email address] |
| Purpose consented to |
[The purpose as worded on the form] |
| Form and version |
[GDPR-TPL-06 derived form reference and version] |
| Method |
[Web form tick, signed paper, HR system tick, verified parental consent] |
| Date and time given |
[Date and time] |
| Evidence |
[Signed form reference, system event reference] |
| Withdrawn on |
[Date and time, or blank] |
| Withdrawal method |
[Link, settings change, written notice] |
| Action taken on withdrawal |
[What stopped, and when] |
4. Checks before a form is used
The Privacy Officer confirms each item and records the check in PIMS-REG-04 or the form's approval record.
- The purpose is one the organisation would accept a refusal for.
- One box per purpose, none pre-ticked, consent not bundled with terms.
- The data, recipients and retention named on the form match PIMS-REG-01.
- Withdrawal takes no more effort than giving consent, and the withdrawal action is implemented and tested.
- The record in section 3 is captured automatically or by a defined manual step.
- For employees, the detriment statement is true and the manager is not the person collecting the form.
5. Related documents
- PIMS-PRO-05 Consent and privacy notice management procedure
- PIMS-REG-04 Consent record register
- GDPR-TPL-01 Privacy notice template (customers and website)
- GDPR-TPL-04 Cookie and tracking technologies notice template
- GDPR-PRO-02 HR data handling procedure
- GDPR-POL-01 Data protection policy
Legitimate interests assessment template
The three-part test (purpose, necessity, balancing) completed before any processing relies on legitimate interests, with the outcome, safeguards and review date recorded in GDPR-REG-03.
Serves: GDPR Article 6(1)(f); GDPR Article 21; ISO/IEC 27701 Annex A 7.2.2. Owner: Privacy Officer.
Guidance notes are in italics. One assessment per processing activity, completed by the activity owner with the Privacy Officer, approved before the processing starts, and entered in GDPR-REG-03. Legitimate interests is not available for processing by public authorities in the performance of their tasks, and is never a substitute for a condition under Article 9 where special category data is involved. Write for a reader who was not in the room: an auditor or a supervisory authority will read this if the processing is challenged.
1. The processing
| Field |
Entry |
| Reference |
[GDPR-REG-03 reference] |
| Processing activity |
[PIMS-REG-01 reference and name] |
| Owner |
[Name], [Role] |
| Assessor |
[Name], [Role] |
| Date |
[Date] |
| Description |
What is done, with what data, about whom, by which systems, for how long. Two to five sentences. |
| Data subjects |
[Customers, users, employees, website visitors, business contacts, other] |
| Data categories |
[List]. If any special category or criminal offence data is involved, stop: a separate condition is required and this assessment cannot supply it. |
| Why consent or contract is not the basis |
One or two sentences. For example: the processing is not necessary to deliver what the person asked for, and asking for consent would be impractical or would produce an unreliable basis because the processing must continue regardless. |
2. Purpose test: is there a legitimate interest?
| Question |
Answer |
| What interest is being pursued? |
State it specifically. "Business interests" fails; "detecting accounts created to abuse the free tier" passes. |
| Whose interest is it? |
[The organisation, a third party (name the category), both] |
| Is the interest lawful, clearly articulated and real rather than speculative? |
[Yes or No], with reasons |
| What benefit does the processing bring, and to whom? |
The organisation, the people whose data is used, third parties, the public. |
| What would happen if the processing did not take place? |
The loss or harm avoided by the processing. |
| Is the processing something the people concerned would reasonably expect, given the relationship and the notice they received? |
[Yes, Partly, No], with reasons |
Purpose test outcome: [Passed, Failed]. A failed purpose test ends the assessment; find another basis or do not process.
3. Necessity test: is the processing necessary for that interest?
| Question |
Answer |
| Does the processing actually help achieve the interest? |
[Yes or No], with the reasoning |
| Could the interest be achieved with less data, less intrusive data, or a shorter retention? |
List the alternatives considered and why each was rejected. "No alternative considered" fails the test. |
| Could it be achieved without processing personal data at all, for example with aggregated or anonymised data? |
[Yes or No], with reasons |
| Is the data limited to what the purpose needs, and is the retention period the shortest that works? |
[Yes or No], with the fields and the period |
Necessity test outcome: [Passed, Failed].
4. Balancing test: do the interests and rights of the people override the interest?
Consider the nature of the data, the reasonable expectations of the people, the likely impact on them, and the safeguards that reduce it. Be honest about impact; an assessment that finds no impact at all is rarely credible.
| Factor |
Assessment |
| Nature of the data |
Ordinary business contact data, behavioural data, financial data, data about children, location data, data that reveals something sensitive without being special category. |
| Relationship with the people |
Existing customer, former customer, prospect never contacted, employee (note the imbalance of power), member of the public. |
| Reasonable expectations |
What the notice told them, what the service implies, what practice in the sector is. Processing that would surprise a reasonable person weighs heavily against. |
| Possible impact on the people |
Loss of control, nuisance, financial loss, discrimination, distress, exposure, chilling effect. Rate it Low, Medium or High and say why. |
| Likelihood of that impact |
[Low, Medium, High], with reasons |
| Vulnerable people |
Children, employees, people in financial difficulty, people with health conditions. State whether any are included and the effect on the balance. |
| Safeguards applied |
Pseudonymisation, aggregation, access restriction, short retention, no use for decisions about the person, no sharing, a clear opt-out, human review. Each safeguard must be real and implemented, not planned. |
| Opt-out |
Is an objection mechanism offered? For direct marketing it is mandatory and unconditional. Describe it and where it is presented. |
| Transparency |
Where the people are told about this processing and the interest, with the notice reference. |
Balancing test outcome: [The interest prevails, The interest prevails with the safeguards above, The rights of the people prevail].
5. Decision
| Field |
Entry |
| Outcome |
[Approved: legitimate interests may be relied on, Approved with conditions, Not approved] |
| Conditions |
Safeguards that must be in place before processing starts, and who confirms them. |
| Wording of the interest for the privacy notice |
The sentence that will appear in the notice built from GDPR-TPL-01 or GDPR-TPL-02. It must match section 2. |
| Objection handling |
How an objection is received and actioned under PIMS-PRO-03, and the compelling grounds, if any, that the organisation would rely on to continue after an objection. For direct marketing there are none. |
| Approved by |
[Name], Privacy Officer, [Date] |
| Next review |
[Date]. Twelve months, or earlier on a change to the data, the purpose, the recipients, the technology, or on a complaint or objection trend. |
6. Review record
| Review date |
Reviewer |
Change in processing or context |
Outcome |
Next review |
| [Date] |
[Name], [Role] |
[None, or the change] |
[Confirmed, Revised: new reference, Withdrawn] |
[Date] |
7. Related documents
- GDPR-REG-03 Legitimate interests assessment register
- PIMS-REG-01 Personal data processing inventory
- PIMS-PRO-03 Data subject rights handling procedure
- PIMS-PRO-05 Consent and privacy notice management procedure
- GDPR-TPL-01 Privacy notice template (customers and website)
- GDPR-POL-01 Data protection policy
Transfer impact assessment template
The assessment completed under PIMS-POL-03 before personal data is transferred to a country without an adequacy decision on the strength of contractual or corporate safeguards, recording the importer, the destination law, the risk to the data, the supplementary measures and the decision.
Serves: GDPR Article 44; GDPR Article 45; GDPR Article 46; GDPR Article 49; ISO/IEC 27701 Annex A 7.5.1; ISO/IEC 27701 Annex B 8.5.1. Owner: Privacy Officer.
Guidance notes are in italics. Complete one assessment per transfer or per group of transfers to the same importer under the same safeguard, before the transfer starts, and record the result in PIMS-REG-05. The assessment is needed where the safeguard is standard contractual clauses, binding corporate rules or another Article 46 instrument; it is not needed for a destination covered by an adequacy decision, and it does not legitimise a transfer that relies on a derogation under Article 49, which must be occasional and documented separately. Onward transfers by the importer to its own sub-processors are part of this assessment. Revisit the assessment when the law of the destination, the importer, the data or the measures change.
1. The transfer
| Field |
Entry |
| Reference |
[PIMS-REG-05 reference] |
| Exporter |
[Organisation], acting as [controller, processor] |
| Importer |
[Category of organisation and its role: processor, sub-processor, controller, group company] |
| Processing activity |
[PIMS-REG-01 reference] |
| Flows covered |
[GDPR-REG-02 flow references] |
| Destination country or countries |
[List], including the countries from which the importer provides support or holds backups |
| Onward transfers by the importer |
[Named sub-processor categories and countries, from the importer's list] |
| Data categories and subjects |
[List], with the volume and whether any special category or criminal offence data is included |
| Purpose and duration of the transfer |
[Purpose]; [continuous, periodic, one-off]; [period] |
| Format |
[Plain, pseudonymised, encrypted in transit only, encrypted at rest with keys held by the exporter] |
| Transfer mechanism |
[Standard contractual clauses (module and date signed), binding corporate rules (approval reference), other Article 46 instrument] |
| Assessor |
[Name], [Role], [Date] |
2. Assessment of the destination law and practice
Answer from public sources: the laws of the destination, published decisions, the importer's transparency reporting, reputable analyses. Record the sources used in section 6. Where an answer is "unknown", treat it as an adverse answer until resolved.
| Question |
Answer and source |
| Does the destination have a general data protection law, and is it enforced by an independent authority? |
|
| Can public authorities compel the importer to disclose personal data, and under what conditions (court order, administrative demand, secret order)? |
|
| Is such access limited to what is necessary and proportionate, with independent oversight? |
|
| Can the importer challenge a demand, and can it tell the exporter about it? |
|
| Do the people whose data is transferred have an effective remedy against the authorities of the destination? |
|
| Is there a law requiring the importer to build in access for authorities, to retain data for them, or to hand over encryption keys? |
|
| Has the importer received demands of this kind, and what does its transparency reporting say? Ask the importer directly where no reporting exists. |
|
| Is the importer, or its sector, a likely target of surveillance given the type of data and the authorities' known practice? |
|
| Are there relevant adequacy findings, authority guidance or court rulings about this destination? |
|
Conclusion on the destination: [The law and practice do not impinge on the effectiveness of the mechanism, The law and practice impinge on the mechanism and supplementary measures are required, The law and practice impinge and no measures can address it].
3. Assessment of the risk to the data
| Factor |
Assessment |
| Sensitivity of the data |
[Low, Medium, High], with reasons |
| Volume and number of people |
|
| Likelihood that the data is of interest to the destination's authorities |
[Low, Medium, High], with reasons |
| Consequence for the people if accessed |
|
| Importer's own safeguards |
Certifications, audit reports, encryption, access controls, internal policy on government demands. |
4. Supplementary measures
Required where section 2 found that the law impinges. Technical measures are the ones that can address state access; contractual and organisational measures support them but rarely suffice alone. State for each measure whether it is in place, how it is verified and who verifies it.
| Measure |
Type |
In place |
Verified by |
| Encryption in transit with current protocols and verified configuration |
Technical |
[Yes or No] |
[Role, evidence] |
| Encryption at rest with keys held only by the exporter or a party outside the destination, so that the importer cannot read the data |
Technical |
[Yes or No] |
|
| Pseudonymisation before transfer with the key held by the exporter |
Technical |
[Yes or No] |
|
| Split processing so that no single party in the destination holds identifiable data |
Technical |
[Yes or No] |
|
| Importer's contractual duty to challenge demands, notify the exporter where lawful, and provide only the minimum |
Contractual |
[Yes or No] |
|
| Importer's transparency reporting and a warrant canary where lawful |
Contractual |
[Yes or No] |
|
| Strict access control, logging and least privilege at the importer, with audit rights exercised |
Organisational |
[Yes or No] |
|
| Internal policy at the importer for handling government demands, reviewed by the exporter |
Organisational |
[Yes or No] |
|
| Data minimisation: reducing the fields and the retention at the importer |
Organisational |
[Yes or No] |
|
Are the measures sufficient to make the mechanism effective in practice? [Yes, No], with reasons.
5. Decision
| Field |
Entry |
| Outcome |
[Transfer may proceed under the mechanism, Transfer may proceed with the supplementary measures above, Transfer must not proceed] |
| Conditions |
Measures to be implemented before the first transfer, with owner and date; verification method; the PIMS-REG-06 row to update for a processor. |
| Notice |
Where the destination is named in the privacy notice built from GDPR-TPL-01 or GDPR-TPL-02 and whether the notice needs a change. |
| Approved by |
[Name], Privacy Officer, [Date] |
| Escalation |
Where the outcome is "must not proceed" and the business wishes to continue, the matter goes to the Chief Executive Officer under GOV-PRO-24, and a suspension of the transfer is the default until decided. |
| Next review |
[Date]. Twelve months, or on a change in destination law, in the importer, in its sub-processors, in the data, or on a demand received. |
6. Sources and evidence
| Source |
Date consulted |
What it supported |
| [Public source description] |
[Date] |
[Section 2 question] |
| [Importer questionnaire response, GDPR-TPL-09 reference] |
[Date] |
[Section 3 or 4 item] |
7. Related documents
- PIMS-POL-03 International transfer policy
- PIMS-REG-05 International transfer register
- PIMS-REG-06 Processor and sub-processor register
- GDPR-REG-02 Data flow and transfer map
- GDPR-TPL-09 Supplier GDPR assessment questionnaire
- PIMS-TPL-02 Data processing agreement template
- GOV-PRO-24 Exception and risk acceptance procedure
Supplier GDPR assessment questionnaire
The questionnaire sent to any supplier that will process personal data for [Organisation], used with GOV-TPL-04 under GOV-PRO-06 to decide whether the supplier can be engaged as a processor, on what terms, and what must be fixed first.
Serves: GDPR Article 28; GDPR Article 44; ISO/IEC 27701 clause 7.2.6; ISO/IEC 27701 Annex B 8.5.6; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 5.19. Owner: Privacy Officer.
Guidance notes are in italics. Send to every prospective supplier that will store, access or transmit personal data on the organisation's behalf, and to existing suppliers at their annual review. The security questions in GOV-TPL-04 are not repeated here; send both. Each answer needs evidence: a document, a screenshot, a contract clause or a certificate reference. An answer without evidence is scored as "not demonstrated". The Privacy Officer scores the outcome in section 8 and records it in GOV-REG-07 and, where the supplier is engaged, in PIMS-REG-06.
1. Organisation facts
| # |
Question |
Answer |
Evidence |
| 1.1 |
Legal name, registered address and country of incorporation of the entity that will sign the contract. |
|
|
| 1.2 |
The role you will have for this service: processor acting on our instructions, independent controller, or both (explain). |
|
|
| 1.3 |
Do you have a Data Protection Officer or privacy lead? Give the role and contact channel. |
|
|
| 1.4 |
Have you been subject to a supervisory authority investigation, enforcement action or fine in the last five years? Describe. |
|
|
| 1.5 |
Have you had a personal data breach notified to an authority or to customers in the last three years? Describe the cause and the fix. |
|
|
| 1.6 |
Which privacy or security certifications or assurance reports do you hold, with scope and date? |
|
|
2. Personal data facts
| # |
Question |
Answer |
Evidence |
| 2.1 |
Which categories of our personal data will you process, and for which purposes? |
|
|
| 2.2 |
Will you use any of our personal data for your own purposes, including analytics, product improvement or training models? If yes, on what basis and can it be switched off? |
|
|
| 2.3 |
Will you process any special category data or data about children? What additional controls apply? |
|
|
| 2.4 |
Do you keep a record of processing activities covering the service? Provide the relevant extract. |
|
|
| 2.5 |
How do you apply data minimisation and retention limits within the service? What is retained after we delete a record or close the account? |
|
|
| 2.6 |
Can you return and then delete all our personal data at the end of the contract, within what period, and how do you confirm deletion, including from backups? |
|
|
3. Security of personal data
| # |
Question |
Answer |
Evidence |
| 3.1 |
Describe the technical and organisational measures that protect our data: encryption at rest and in transit, access control, logging, segregation between customers. |
|
|
| 3.2 |
How is access to our data by your staff restricted, logged and reviewed? Can we see the logs on request? |
|
|
| 3.3 |
Is personal data pseudonymised or encrypted so that your staff cannot read it without a recorded need? |
|
|
| 3.4 |
How do you test the effectiveness of your measures (independent testing, audits), and how often? |
|
|
| 3.5 |
Are all staff with access bound by confidentiality and trained in data protection? Provide the completion rate. |
|
|
4. Sub-processing
| # |
Question |
Answer |
Evidence |
| 4.1 |
List every sub-processor that will process our data, with its role, location and the data it receives. |
|
|
| 4.2 |
How do you tell us before adding or replacing a sub-processor, how much notice is given, and can we object? |
|
|
| 4.3 |
Do your sub-processor contracts impose the same obligations that our contract imposes on you? Provide a template clause. |
|
|
| 4.4 |
Do you audit your sub-processors, and how often? |
|
|
5. Location and transfers
| # |
Question |
Answer |
Evidence |
| 5.1 |
In which countries will our data be stored, including replicas and backups? |
|
|
| 5.2 |
From which countries will your staff or sub-processors access our data, including support and operations? |
|
|
| 5.3 |
Can we choose the storage region, and is that choice enforced technically? |
|
|
| 5.4 |
For each transfer outside [region], which mechanism applies, and will you sign the standard contractual clauses in the module we specify? |
|
|
| 5.5 |
Have you assessed the laws of each destination country and can you share that assessment? Have you received government demands for customer data, and do you publish a transparency report? |
|
|
6. Assistance and rights
| # |
Question |
Answer |
Evidence |
| 6.1 |
How do you help us respond to data subject requests (access, deletion, portability) within our one month deadline? Is there a self-service export and delete? |
|
|
| 6.2 |
Within how many hours of becoming aware will you notify us of a personal data breach affecting our data, and what will the notification contain? |
|
|
| 6.3 |
Will you support our data protection impact assessments and prior consultation with an authority, and on what terms? |
|
|
| 6.4 |
Will you tell us if an instruction we give appears to infringe data protection law? |
|
|
| 6.5 |
What audit rights do you offer: on-site audit, remote audit, third party reports? What notice and cost apply? |
|
|
7. Contract and exit
| # |
Question |
Answer |
Evidence |
| 7.1 |
Will you sign our data processing agreement, or provide yours for review? Identify any clause you will not accept and why. |
|
|
| 7.2 |
Does your contract require you to act only on our documented instructions, including for transfers? |
|
|
| 7.3 |
What happens to our data at the end of the contract, and in what format is it returned? |
|
|
| 7.4 |
What are your insurance arrangements for data protection liability? |
|
|
| 7.5 |
What is your notice period for changes to the service that affect how personal data is processed? |
|
|
8. Outcome
Completed by the Privacy Officer. A "Block" on any item means the supplier cannot be engaged until it is resolved; the blocks are: use of our data for the supplier's own purposes without a switch-off (2.2); no deletion at exit (2.6); no breach notification commitment within 48 hours (6.2); undisclosed or unlimited sub-processing (4.1, 4.2); a transfer with no mechanism (5.4); refusal to sign processor terms (7.1).
| Field |
Entry |
| Supplier and service |
[Supplier], [service], GOV-REG-07 reference |
| Tier under GOV-PRO-06 |
[Tier] |
| Items not demonstrated |
[List of question numbers] |
| Blocks |
[None, or the list] |
| Transfer impact assessment required |
[Yes or No]; GDPR-TPL-08 reference where Yes |
| Decision |
[Approve as processor, Approve with conditions, Reject] |
| Conditions and dates |
[Each condition, owner and date, for example: signed PIMS-TPL-02 before first data, region lock enabled and verified, sub-processor list added to PIMS-REG-06] |
| Assessed by |
[Name], Privacy Officer, [Date] |
| Next review |
[Date], annually or on a material change |
9. Related documents
- GOV-PRO-06 Supplier and third party security procedure
- GOV-TPL-04 Supplier security and privacy questionnaire
- GOV-REG-07 Supplier register
- PIMS-REG-06 Processor and sub-processor register
- PIMS-TPL-02 Data processing agreement template
- GDPR-TPL-08 Transfer impact assessment template
- PIMS-POL-03 International transfer policy
- AI-PRO-02 AI vendor and model due diligence procedure
Personal data breach notification form (to the supervisory authority)
The content the authority needs under GDPR Article 33(3), prepared under PIMS-PRO-04 so that a notification can be made within 72 hours of awareness, in phases where the facts are not yet complete, with the record kept in PIMS-REG-03 whether or not the authority is notified.
Serves: GDPR Article 33; GDPR Article 34; ISO/IEC 27701 clause 6.13.1.5; ISO/IEC 27701 Annex A 7.3.7. Owner: Privacy Officer.
Guidance notes are in italics. Most supervisory authorities provide their own online form; this template collects every fact that form will ask for, so that the Privacy Officer fills it from here rather than from memory under time pressure. The 72 hour clock starts when the organisation becomes aware that a breach has probably occurred, not when the investigation ends. Where the facts are incomplete at 72 hours, notify with what is known and mark the rest as "to follow": a phased notification is permitted; a late one needs reasons. Keep every version of this form against the PIMS-REG-03 entry. Where [Organisation] is a processor, this form is not sent to the authority; the facts are sent to the controller without undue delay and the controller notifies.
1. Notifier and references
| Field |
Entry |
| Internal reference |
[PIMS-REG-03 reference], linked incident [GOV-REG-08 reference] |
| Organisation |
[Organisation], [registered address], registration or reference number with the authority if any |
| Role |
[Controller, Joint controller (name the other), Processor notifying on behalf of a controller with its authority] |
| Contact point for the authority |
[Role, for example Data Protection Officer or Privacy Officer], [contact channel]. A role mailbox that is monitored outside office hours. |
| Notification type |
[Initial, Phased update number [Number], Final] |
| Date and time of this notification |
[Date and time] |
| Other authorities notified |
[None, or a list where the breach affects people in several jurisdictions, with the lead authority identified] |
2. Timeline
| Event |
Date and time |
Source |
| Breach began (or is believed to have begun) |
|
Log evidence, report, estimate; say which |
| Breach ended or was contained |
|
|
| Organisation became aware |
|
The moment a person with responsibility had reasonable certainty that personal data was compromised |
| Processor informed the controller (if applicable) |
|
|
| This notification |
|
|
Hours from awareness to this notification: [Number]. If more than 72: state the reasons for the delay in section 7; it is mandatory.
3. Nature of the breach
| Field |
Entry |
| What happened |
Plain description in three to six sentences: the system or process involved, the cause (for example misdirected message, lost device, compromised credential, misconfiguration, malicious attack, supplier breach), how it was discovered. |
| Type of breach |
[Confidentiality (data disclosed or accessed), Integrity (data altered), Availability (data lost or made inaccessible), or a combination] |
| Categories of people affected |
[Customers, users, employees, applicants, children, vulnerable people, other], with any that make the risk higher |
| Approximate number of people affected |
[Number], or [minimum] to [maximum] with the basis of the estimate; "not yet known" with the date by which it will be |
| Categories of personal data affected |
[Identity, contact, financial, authentication credentials, location, health or other special category, criminal offence data, content, other] |
| Approximate number of records affected |
[Number], or a range with the basis |
| Was the data protected |
[Encrypted with keys not compromised, Pseudonymised, Hashed credentials, Plain] |
| Is the breach ongoing |
[Yes, No, Unknown] |
| Cross-border element |
[People in other jurisdictions affected: list; main establishment of the organisation] |
4. Likely consequences for the people affected
Assess from the point of view of the people, as PIMS-PRO-04 requires. Describe the harm and its likelihood; do not minimise. This section drives the decision in section 6.
| Field |
Entry |
| Possible harms |
[Identity theft or fraud, financial loss, loss of confidentiality of professional secrecy, discrimination, reputational damage, physical safety, loss of control over data, distress, other] |
| Severity for the people |
[Low, Medium, High], with reasons |
| Likelihood of harm |
[Low, Medium, High], with reasons, including whether the data is in the hands of a known malicious party or was recovered |
| Overall risk to the people |
[Unlikely to result in a risk, Risk, High risk] |
5. Measures taken and proposed
| Field |
Entry |
| Containment |
What stopped the breach and when: credentials reset, access revoked, system isolated, message recalled, device wiped remotely, supplier instructed. |
| Recovery |
What restored the data or service, and whether data was recovered or confirmed deleted by the recipient. |
| Mitigation for the people |
Password resets forced, monitoring offered, accounts frozen, guidance issued. |
| Root cause and correction |
What will stop it recurring, with the GOV-REG-03 corrective action reference and dates. |
| Processor involvement |
If a processor caused or was involved, its name, what it did, and the contractual steps taken. |
6. Communication to the people affected
| Field |
Entry |
| Decision |
[Individuals will be informed, Individuals have been informed on [Date], Individuals will not be informed because the risk is not high, Individuals will not be informed because [the data was encrypted and the keys are safe / subsequent measures mean the high risk is no longer likely / individual contact would involve disproportionate effort and a public communication has been made]] |
| Method and date |
[Email, letter, in-product message, public notice], [Date] |
| Content |
Attach the message. It must describe the breach in plain words, give the contact point, state the likely consequences and the measures taken and recommended. |
| Number informed |
[Number] |
7. Reasons for delay (where more than 72 hours after awareness)
State the facts: for example, the breach was discovered through a third party report that took time to verify; the scope could not be established until forensic analysis was complete; the responsible person was unavailable and the escalation path failed (and what has been fixed). Do not write "due to internal processes".
[Reasons]
8. Information to follow
| Item |
Expected date |
| [Confirmed number of people affected] |
[Date] |
| [Result of forensic analysis] |
[Date] |
| [Outcome of communication to individuals] |
[Date] |
9. Sign-off
| Field |
Entry |
| Prepared by |
[Name], [Role], [Date and time] |
| Approved for submission by |
[Name], Privacy Officer or Data Protection Officer, [Date and time] |
| Executive informed |
[Name], Chief Executive Officer, [Date and time] |
| Submitted via |
[Authority's online form, email, telephone followed by written confirmation], authority reference received [Reference] |
10. Related documents
- PIMS-PRO-04 Personal data breach assessment and notification procedure
- PIMS-REG-03 Personal data breach register
- GOV-PRO-07 Information security incident management procedure
- GOV-TPL-05 Incident report form
- GOV-TPL-11 Post-incident review template
- GOV-REG-08 Incident register
- GOV-REG-03 Corrective action log
GDPR gap assessment
One row per operational GDPR obligation, grouped by chapter and article, with the requirement stated in plain words so that a small team can judge whether it is met. Run it to find the gaps, record the status and evidence, and turn each gap into an action in GDPR-REG-01 and the corrective action log.
Serves: GDPR Article 5; GDPR Article 24.
Columns:
- Chapter
- Article: GDPR article. Read the regulation for the authoritative text.
- Requirement: The obligation in plain words.
- Applies
- Status
- Evidence: Document
- Owner (role)
- Action: What will close the gap.
- Due
Data flow and transfer map
One row per flow of personal data between systems, functions or organisations. The operational companion to the record of processing, showing where personal data moves, how it is protected in transit and which crossings leave the region.
Serves: GDPR Article 30.
Columns:
- Flow ID
- Data items
- From
- To
- Internal or external
- Country
- Transfer method
- Safeguard: PIMS-REG-05 mechanism where the flow leaves the region.
- Controls
- Owner (role)
- Status
- Notes
Legitimate interests assessment register
One row per processing activity that relies on legitimate interests, recording the three-part balancing test behind it. The index to the assessments held as GDPR-TPL-07, kept because legitimate interests must be justified, not assumed.
Serves: GDPR Article 6.
Columns:
- Assessment ID
- Processing: PIMS-REG-01 activity.
- Interest pursued
- Necessity: Why the processing is needed to pursue the interest.
- Balancing outcome
- Measures: Safeguards that tip the balance
- Owner (role)
- Review date
- Status
- Notes
Cookie and tracker inventory
One row per cookie and tracking technology used on the organisation's sites and apps, recording its purpose, whether it needs consent and how long it lasts. The source for the cookie notice and for honouring consent choices.
Serves: GDPR Article 6; GDPR Article 7.
Columns:
- Cookie ID
- Name
- Provider
- Category
- Purpose
- Consent required
- Duration
- Personal data
- Owner (role)
- Last review
- Status
- Notes
Privacy training register
One row per person per privacy training, recording what was delivered, when and the result. Proof that staff who handle personal data know their obligations, and the companion to the security awareness register.
Serves: GDPR Article 39.
Columns:
- Record ID
- Person
- Role
- Training
- Type
- Assigned
- Due
- Completed
- Result: Pass
- Owner (role)
- Status
- Notes
Cross-framework
Playbooks, crosswalks, audit tools and governance documents that serve every framework
Onboarding and offboarding security checklist
The two task lists that Human Resources, the line manager, the IT Manager and the access administrator complete for every person who joins or leaves [Organisation], with the responsible role, due point and evidence for each task.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 6.1; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 6.5; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 5.11; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 5.18; SOC 2 CC6.2; SOC 2 CC6.3. Owner: Human Resources Manager.
1. How to use this checklist
Open one copy per person. Human Resources starts it on the day an offer is accepted or a leaving date is known, enters the person's name, role, start or leave date and line manager at the top, and sends it to the roles named in the tables. Each responsible role marks the task done, writes where the evidence is, and initials it. Human Resources files the completed checklist with the person's record within five working days of the start or leave date and reports any task not done on time to the Information Security Manager. The due points count from the start date for onboarding and from the last working day for offboarding. Where a task does not apply, write "not applicable" and the reason, never leave it blank.
| Field |
Entry |
| Name of person |
[Name] |
| Job role and team |
[Role] |
| Employment type |
Employee / Contractor / Agency / Temporary / Intern |
| Line manager |
[Role] |
| Start date or last working day |
[Date] |
| Screening level for the role |
Standard / Enhanced |
| Checklist opened by and date |
[Role], [Date] |
2. Onboarding checklist
| Task |
Responsible role |
Due |
Done |
Evidence |
| 1. Screening completed at the level set for the role, or a documented interim restriction agreed (GOV-PRO-18). |
Human Resources Manager |
Before start |
|
Screening record reference |
| 2. Contract or engagement terms with confidentiality, policy compliance and asset return clauses signed. |
Human Resources Manager |
Before start |
|
Signed contract on file |
| 3. Confidentiality agreement signed by a contractor or agency worker and recorded in GOV-REG-23. |
Engaging manager |
Before start |
|
GOV-REG-23 entry |
| 4. Starter notified to the Information Security Manager, IT Manager and access administrator with start date, role and line manager. |
Human Resources Manager |
[Number] working days before start |
|
Notification message |
| 5. Access request raised on GOV-TPL-09 for the standard role and approved by each System Owner. |
Line manager |
[Number] working days before start |
|
GOV-TPL-09 reference |
| 6. Device issued, enrolled in device management, encrypted, and recorded against the person in GOV-REG-24. |
IT Manager |
Day 1 |
|
GOV-REG-24 entry |
| 7. Accounts created, one-time credential delivered through a separate channel, multi-factor authentication enrolled (GOV-POL-06). |
Access administrator |
Day 1 |
|
GOV-TPL-09 section 6 |
| 8. Physical access badge issued for the correct zones and recorded (GOV-PRO-17). |
Facilities Manager |
Day 1 |
|
Badge record |
| 9. Induction training completed and recorded in GOV-REG-09 (GOV-PRO-08). |
Line manager |
Within [Number] working days |
|
GOV-REG-09 entry |
| 10. Policies acknowledged (GOV-POL-02, GOV-POL-04, GOV-POL-06 and any role-specific policy) and recorded in GOV-REG-23. |
Human Resources Manager |
Within [Number] working days |
|
GOV-REG-23 entry |
| 11. Access to Confidential or Restricted information activated only after tasks 9 and 10 are complete. |
System Owner |
After induction |
|
GOV-TPL-09 note |
| 12. Role-based training completed before the related duty or access (developers, administrators, personal data handlers). |
Line manager |
Before related access |
|
GOV-REG-09 entry |
| 13. Privileged account, where the role needs one, approved separately, held in a separate account and registered in GOV-REG-13. |
System Owner |
Before first privileged use |
|
GOV-REG-13 entry |
| 14. Remote working agreement signed and GOV-POL-05 acknowledged, where the person will work remotely. |
Line manager |
Before first remote work |
|
Agreement on file |
| 15. Thirty-day check: access matches the role, training complete, no shared credentials in use. |
Line manager |
Day 30 |
|
Note on this checklist |
3. Offboarding checklist
| Task |
Responsible role |
Due |
Done |
Evidence |
| 1. Leaving date notified to the Information Security Manager, IT Manager, access administrator and Facilities Manager. |
Human Resources Manager |
Day leave date is known |
|
Notification message |
| 2. Leaver's access and knowledge of shared secrets assessed, and the time of disabling set (immediately for a dismissal or a privileged holder on notice). |
Information Security Manager |
On notification |
|
Note on this checklist |
| 3. Work files, repositories, documents and ownership of records transferred to the line manager or a named successor. |
Line manager |
Before last day |
|
Transfer confirmation |
| 4. Customers, suppliers and partners for whom the leaver was a named contact told of the new contact. |
Line manager |
Before last day |
|
Message copies |
| 5. All logical access disabled, including remote access, email, cloud consoles, code repositories and collaboration tools (GOV-PRO-10). |
Access administrator |
End of last working day |
|
Disable confirmation per system |
| 6. Privileged accounts disabled and every shared or built-in credential the leaver knew rotated (GOV-REG-13). |
System Owner |
End of last working day |
|
GOV-REG-13 entries |
| 7. Service account credentials and API keys the leaver could read rotated. |
System Owner |
Within one working day |
|
Rotation record |
| 8. Mailbox handled under the employee privacy notice: automatic reply set, delegation to the line manager for [Number] days, then closure. |
IT Manager |
Last working day |
|
Mailbox setting record |
| 9. Removal from distribution lists, groups, on-call rotas, supplier portals and any external system where [Organisation] sponsored the account. |
Access administrator |
Last working day |
|
Removal confirmation |
| 10. Devices, tokens, keys and media returned, checked against GOV-REG-24, and wiped or reissued (GOV-PRO-16). |
IT Manager |
Last working day |
|
GOV-REG-24 entry updated |
| 11. Physical badge and keys returned and disabled; unreturned items reported to the Information Security Manager. |
Facilities Manager |
Last working day |
|
Badge record |
| 12. [Organisation] data removed from any personal device and the removal confirmed in writing by the leaver. |
IT Manager |
Last working day |
|
Signed confirmation |
| 13. Exit meeting held: continuing confidentiality obligations confirmed in writing and asset return confirmed (GOV-PRO-18). |
Human Resources Manager |
Last working day |
|
Signed exit letter |
| 14. Disabled accounts deleted or archived and the leaver's records retained under PIMS-POL-02. |
Access administrator |
Day [Number] after leaving |
|
Deletion record |
| 15. Checklist reviewed for completeness, exceptions escalated, and filed with the person's record. |
Human Resources Manager |
Within five working days |
|
Filed checklist |
4. Sign-off
| Field |
Entry |
| All onboarding or offboarding tasks complete or marked not applicable |
Yes / No |
| Tasks not completed on time and the reason |
|
| Reviewed by Human Resources Manager |
[Role], [Date] |
| Confirmed by Information Security Manager (offboarding of privileged holders only) |
[Role], [Date] |
5. Related documents
- GOV-PRO-18 Human resources security procedure
- GOV-PRO-10 Access management procedure (joiners, movers, leavers, privileged access, reviews)
- GOV-PRO-08 Security and privacy awareness and training procedure
- GOV-PRO-16 Asset management, classification and handling procedure
- GOV-PRO-17 Physical and environmental security procedure
- GOV-TPL-09 Access request and approval form
- GOV-REG-09 Training and awareness register
- GOV-REG-13 Privileged account register
- GOV-REG-23 Policy acknowledgement register
- GOV-REG-24 Software and hardware inventory
- PIMS-POL-02 Data retention and disposal policy
Secure Configuration Baseline Checklist (Server, Workstation, Cloud Account)
Three vendor-neutral checklists that define the minimum secure configuration for a server, a workstation and a cloud account, each check with how to verify it and the evidence to keep.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 8.9; SOC 2 CC6.8; SOC 2 CC7.1. Owner: Head of Engineering.
1. How to use this checklist
Run the relevant table when a server, workstation image or cloud account is built, after a significant change, and at least annually. Record Pass, Fail or Not applicable per check, with the evidence reference. A Fail on a check marked with an asterisk blocks go-live until fixed or covered by a risk acceptance under GOV-PRO-24; any other Fail becomes a finding in GOV-REG-14. Where a configuration management or posture tool enforces a check continuously, its report is the evidence. Keep the completed checklist with the asset's entry in GOV-REG-24.
2. Server baseline
| Ref |
Check |
How to verify |
Evidence to keep |
| S-01 * |
Built from an approved, version-controlled image or definition |
Compare the running build identifier with the approved image list |
Image identifier and build record |
| S-02 |
Only required roles, services and packages are installed |
List running services and installed packages against the role's allowed list |
Service and package listing |
| S-03 * |
Host firewall denies inbound by default; only required ports are open |
Export the host firewall rules and scan open ports from another host |
Rule export and port scan output |
| S-04 * |
Vendor default accounts are removed or disabled and default passwords changed |
List local accounts; attempt sign-in with documented defaults in a test window |
Account listing and test record |
| S-05 |
Local administrative access is limited to named roles; no shared accounts |
Compare local administrator group members with GOV-REG-13 |
Group membership export |
| S-06 * |
Remote administration uses an encrypted protocol with key or multi-factor authentication; password sign-in is disabled |
Inspect the remote access daemon configuration and test a password sign-in |
Configuration excerpt and test record |
| S-07 * |
Security updates apply automatically or on the monthly cycle; last update within the GOV-PRO-11 deadline |
Read the update log and compare with the latest vendor release |
Update log excerpt |
| S-08 |
Time is synchronised to the approved source |
Query the time service status and offset |
Time service output |
| S-09 * |
Events in GOV-PRO-14 section 4.1 are logged and forwarded to the central store |
Trigger a test event and find it in the central store |
Search result with timestamp |
| S-10 |
Endpoint detection or anti-malware agent is installed and reporting (where the platform supports it) |
Check the agent status locally and in the central console |
Console screenshot showing the host |
| S-11 * |
Data volumes are encrypted at rest |
Read the volume encryption status |
Encryption status output |
| S-12 |
Permissions on configuration and secret files restrict read access to the service account |
List permissions on the configuration directory |
Permission listing |
| S-13 * |
No secrets are stored in plain text on disk or in environment files; secrets come from the secrets store |
Search the file system and environment for credential patterns |
Search output |
| S-14 |
Legacy protocols and weak cipher suites are disabled |
Scan exposed services for protocol and cipher support |
Scan output |
| S-15 |
Exploit mitigations and mandatory access controls offered by the platform are enabled |
Read the relevant kernel or system security settings |
Settings output |
| S-16 * |
Backup agent or snapshot policy applies per GOV-PRO-12 |
Confirm the host appears in the backup schedule and the last job succeeded |
Backup job report |
| S-17 |
The host is recorded in GOV-REG-24 with owner, environment and classification |
Look up the host in the inventory |
Inventory row |
| S-18 |
Configuration drift against the baseline is checked at least weekly and deviations alert |
Review the drift report for the host |
Drift report |
| S-19 |
Administrative sessions time out after inactivity and display an authorised-use notice |
Read the session settings and sign in to observe the notice |
Settings excerpt |
| S-20 |
The host is in scope of authenticated vulnerability scanning |
Find the host in the latest scan report |
Scan report row |
3. Workstation baseline
| Ref |
Check |
How to verify |
Evidence to keep |
| W-01 * |
Enrolled in the device management platform and reporting compliant |
Look up the device in the management console |
Console record |
| W-02 * |
Full disk encryption is on and the recovery key is escrowed |
Read encryption status on the device and confirm the key in the console |
Status output and console record |
| W-03 |
Screen locks after at most 10 minutes of inactivity and requires authentication to resume |
Read the applied profile and observe the lock |
Profile excerpt |
| W-04 * |
The user account has no standing administrative rights |
List local administrators |
Group listing |
| W-05 |
Host firewall is enabled |
Read firewall status |
Status output |
| W-06 * |
Malware protection is active, updated within 24 hours and reporting centrally |
Check the agent locally and in the console |
Console record |
| W-07 * |
Operating system is a vendor-supported version with automatic updates on; last update within the GOV-PRO-11 deadline |
Read the version and update history |
Update history |
| W-08 |
Only software from the approved list is installed; application control is enforced where available |
Compare the installed software list with the approved list |
Software inventory |
| W-09 |
The browser is managed, with extensions controlled and password saving disabled |
Read the browser policy |
Policy excerpt |
| W-10 |
Writing to removable media is disabled unless an exception exists |
Read the media policy and test with a device |
Policy excerpt and test record |
| W-11 * |
Remote lock and wipe are enabled and have been tested on the device model |
Confirm the capability in the console and the model test record |
Console record |
| W-12 |
The remote access client is installed and configured per GOV-PRO-21 |
Open the client and read its configuration |
Client configuration |
| W-13 |
Security events are forwarded to the central log store |
Trigger a test event and find it centrally |
Search result |
| W-14 |
No shared or guest local accounts exist |
List local accounts |
Account listing |
| W-15 |
Secure boot is enabled and firmware settings are password protected |
Read the boot security status |
Status output |
| W-16 |
The device is labelled and recorded in GOV-REG-24 with its assigned user |
Look up the asset tag in the inventory |
Inventory row |
| W-17 |
A password manager is deployed and the user has been shown how to use it |
Confirm the application is installed and the training record exists |
Installation record |
| W-18 |
User data is synchronised to the approved storage location |
Read the synchronisation client status |
Client status |
4. Cloud account baseline
| Ref |
Check |
How to verify |
Evidence to keep |
| C-01 * |
The account sits in the organisation hierarchy under the correct unit with purpose and owner tags |
Read the organisation tree and the account tags |
Organisation export |
| C-02 * |
Root or global administrator credentials have hardware multi-factor authentication, no access keys, sealed storage and an alert on use |
Read the root credential report and the alert rule |
Credential report and alert rule |
| C-03 * |
All human users are federated through the central identity provider; no local users beyond break-glass |
List local users and compare with GOV-REG-13 |
User listing |
| C-04 * |
Multi-factor authentication is enforced for all console and API access |
Read the identity provider and account access policies |
Policy export |
| C-05 |
Privileged roles are time-bound and require approval per use |
Read the privileged role configuration and a sample of activations |
Role configuration and activation log |
| C-06 * |
Organisation guardrails are applied: region restriction, logging cannot be disabled, no public storage without exception |
Read the organisation policy set attached to the account |
Policy export |
| C-07 * |
Audit logging is enabled in every region, delivered to the central security account and retained for at least twelve months |
Read the logging configuration and the destination retention setting |
Logging configuration export |
| C-08 |
Log storage is in a separate account and locked against deletion for the retention period |
Read the storage lock and access policy on the log destination |
Policy export |
| C-09 * |
Default network rules deny inbound; no security group allows unrestricted access to administrative ports |
Export security group rules and search for unrestricted sources |
Rule export |
| C-10 * |
No public storage buckets or containers exist outside the approved list |
Run the public access report |
Report output |
| C-11 * |
No public snapshots, images or database instances exist |
Run the public resource inventory |
Inventory output |
| C-12 * |
Encryption at rest is on by default for storage and database services, with customer-managed keys for Restricted data |
Read the encryption defaults and a sample of resources |
Settings export |
| C-13 |
Keys are held in the key management service with rotation enabled and least privilege key policies |
Read the key list and policies and compare with GOV-REG-18 |
Key listing |
| C-14 * |
Application secrets are in the secrets manager; none in plain text in code, configuration or environment variables |
Search definitions and environment configuration for credential patterns |
Search output |
| C-15 |
Posture monitoring is enabled and open Critical and High findings are in GOV-REG-14 |
Read the posture dashboard and compare with the register |
Dashboard export |
| C-16 * |
Backup policies are configured with a copy in a separate account and a restore tested per GOV-PRO-12 |
Read the backup policy and the latest GOV-REG-15 entry |
Policy export and log entry |
| C-17 |
Billing alerts and service quotas are set to detect runaway cost or abuse |
Read the budget alerts and quota settings |
Alert configuration |
| C-18 |
Mandatory tags (owner, system, environment, classification) are enforced |
Run the untagged resource report |
Report output |
| C-19 |
Unused regions and unused services are disabled |
Read the enabled region and service list |
Settings export |
| C-20 |
Workload identities use short-lived credentials; any long-lived key is in GOV-REG-18 and rotated within 90 days |
Read the access key age report |
Key age report |
5. Records and review
A completed checklist is a record under GOV-PRO-22 (workstations) and GOV-PRO-26 (cloud accounts), and supports the server controls in GOV-PRO-21 and GOV-PRO-11. It is kept with the asset in GOV-REG-24 for the life of the asset plus one year. The Head of Engineering reviews the checks annually and when a platform adds or removes a control; the Information Security Manager approves changes.
6. Related documents
- GOV-PRO-22 Endpoint and mobile device security procedure
- GOV-PRO-26 Cloud services security procedure
- GOV-PRO-21 Network security and remote access procedure
- GOV-PRO-11 Vulnerability and patch management procedure
- GOV-PRO-12 Backup and restore testing procedure
- GOV-PRO-14 Logging, monitoring and alert handling procedure
- GOV-PRO-24 Exception and risk acceptance procedure
- GOV-REG-14 Vulnerability register
- GOV-REG-15 Backup and restore test log
- GOV-REG-18 Cryptographic key and certificate inventory
- GOV-REG-24 Software and hardware inventory
- GOV-REG-13 Privileged account register
Pre-audit readiness checklist
Forty-nine yes or no checks, grouped by ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 4 to 10, that [Organisation] runs four weeks before an external audit, each naming the evidence to have ready for the auditor.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 9.2; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 4; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 5; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 6; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 7; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 8; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 9; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 10; SOC 2 CC4.1. Owner: Information Security Manager.
1. How to use this checklist
Run it four weeks before a stage 1, stage 2, surveillance, recertification or SOC 2 audit. The Information Security Manager assigns each check to the role that holds the evidence, collects the answers within five working days, and raises a corrective action in GOV-REG-03 for every "No" with an owner and a due date before the audit date. A "No" that cannot be fixed before the audit is disclosed to the auditor at the opening meeting rather than discovered during it. Keep the completed checklist as a record. Evidence should be exported from the system of record, show the date and the account, and be filed under the numbered area used by PB-09.
2. Clause 4: context and scope
| Ref |
Check |
Evidence to have ready |
Yes or No |
| 4.1 |
Internal and external issues have been analysed and the analysis was reviewed in the last twelve months. |
ISMS-PRO-01 output with review date |
|
| 4.2 |
Interested parties and their requirements are recorded and current. |
ISMS-REG-03 |
|
| 4.3 |
The scope statement is approved, matches the certificate scope requested, and justifies every exclusion. |
ISMS-STM-01 with approval record |
|
| 4.4 |
Interfaces and dependencies with suppliers and cloud providers are described and match the supplier register. |
ISMS-STM-01, GOV-REG-07 |
|
3. Clause 5: leadership
| Ref |
Check |
Evidence to have ready |
Yes or No |
| 5.1 |
The information security policy is signed by the Chief Executive Officer, is the current version, and is published where staff can find it. |
GOV-POL-03, GOV-REG-01 entry |
|
| 5.2 |
The management commitment statement is signed and current. |
GOV-STM-01 |
|
| 5.3 |
Roles, responsibilities and authorities are assigned, communicated and match the organisation chart. |
GOV-POL-01, organisation chart, role descriptions |
|
| 5.4 |
The steering committee has met at the cadence in its charter and the minutes show decisions. |
Charter, minutes for the last four quarters |
|
| 5.5 |
A budget and staffing for the management system were approved for the current year. |
Budget approval record |
|
| 5.6 |
Staff interviewed at random can say where the policy is and how to report an incident. |
Awareness spot check results |
|
4. Clause 6: planning
| Ref |
Check |
Evidence to have ready |
Yes or No |
| 6.1 |
The risk methodology is approved and its criteria (scales, bands, appetite, authorities) are defined. |
GOV-PRO-05 with approval |
|
| 6.2 |
A full risk assessment was performed in the last twelve months and every risk has an owner. |
GOV-REG-05 with dates and owners |
|
| 6.3 |
Every High or Critical risk has an approved treatment plan or a current acceptance. |
GOV-REG-05, GOV-REG-06 |
|
| 6.4 |
Risk owners have approved the treatment plan and residual risks have been accepted by the right authority. |
Signed treatment plan, GOV-TPL-06 forms |
|
| 6.5 |
The Statement of Applicability lists all 93 Annex A controls with justification and implementation status. |
ISMS-REG-01 |
|
| 6.6 |
Every control named in a treatment plan is Applicable in the Statement of Applicability, and no Not applicable control is relied on anywhere. |
Cross-check of GOV-REG-05 against ISMS-REG-01 |
|
| 6.7 |
Information security objectives are measurable, resourced, owned and have a plan. |
ISMS-PLN-01, GOV-REG-21 |
|
| 6.8 |
Changes to the management system in the period were planned and recorded. |
GOV-REG-01 history, GOV-REG-22 |
|
5. Clause 7: support
| Ref |
Check |
Evidence to have ready |
Yes or No |
| 7.1 |
Competence requirements for security and privacy roles are defined and evidence of competence is held. |
ISMS-PRO-02 matrix, certificates, training records |
|
| 7.2 |
Everyone in scope completed induction and the annual refresher; completion rate meets the target. |
GOV-REG-09 with completion report |
|
| 7.3 |
Everyone in scope has acknowledged the policy and the acceptable use policy. |
GOV-REG-23 |
|
| 7.4 |
Internal and external communications about security follow the communication plan. |
ISMS-PLN-02 with examples |
|
| 7.5 |
The master list of documents is current, every document is at an approved version, and owners and review dates are set. |
GOV-REG-01 |
|
| 7.6 |
Withdrawn documents are removed from the live location and no uncontrolled copies are in use. |
Sample of document locations |
|
| 7.7 |
Records are retained for the required period, protected from alteration and retrievable on request. |
PIMS-REG-07, sample retrievals |
|
6. Clause 8: operation
| Ref |
Check |
Evidence to have ready |
Yes or No |
| 8.1 |
Operational procedures are followed as written; a sample of the last three months of records shows no unexplained gaps. |
Samples from access, change and incident records |
|
| 8.2 |
The risk treatment plan is on track and implemented controls have evidence. |
Treatment plan status, control evidence |
|
| 8.3 |
Outsourced and cloud processes are controlled: suppliers are tiered, assessed and reviewed on schedule. |
GOV-REG-07, questionnaires, review records |
|
| 8.4 |
Access reviews were completed on schedule and removals were actioned. |
GOV-REG-12 |
|
| 8.5 |
Vulnerabilities are remediated within the agreed times or have an approved exception. |
GOV-REG-14, GOV-REG-06 |
|
| 8.6 |
Backups run as scheduled and a restore test was performed and recorded in the last quarter. |
GOV-REG-15 |
|
| 8.7 |
Incidents are recorded, classified, reviewed and closed with lessons. |
GOV-REG-08, post-incident reviews |
|
| 8.8 |
Changes are recorded with approval, testing and rollback. |
GOV-REG-11 |
|
| 8.9 |
Business continuity arrangements were exercised in the period. |
GOV-REG-16 |
|
| 8.10 |
The asset inventory is current, owned and classified. |
GOV-REG-10, GOV-REG-24 |
|
| 8.11 |
Active exceptions are within their expiry dates and reviewed. |
GOV-REG-06 |
|
7. Clause 9: performance evaluation
| Ref |
Check |
Evidence to have ready |
Yes or No |
| 9.1 |
What is monitored and measured, how, when and by whom is defined, and results are recorded. |
ISMS-PRO-04, measurement records |
|
| 9.2 |
Objectives have been measured and the tracker shows current values and status. |
GOV-REG-21 |
|
| 9.3 |
The internal audit programme covers every clause and every applicable control within the cycle. |
GOV-REG-02, ISMS-PLN-03 |
|
| 9.4 |
Internal audits were performed by competent auditors independent of the area, and reports were issued. |
GOV-TPL-01 reports, competence records |
|
| 9.5 |
Every internal audit nonconformity has a corrective action with a root cause. |
GOV-REG-03 |
|
| 9.6 |
A management review was held in the last twelve months and every mandatory input was covered. |
GOV-TPL-03 minutes |
|
| 9.7 |
Management review outputs are tracked and the actions are progressing. |
GOV-REG-22 |
|
8. Clause 10: improvement
| Ref |
Check |
Evidence to have ready |
Yes or No |
| 10.1 |
Nonconformities from every source are logged with correction, root cause and corrective action. |
GOV-REG-03, GOV-TPL-02 forms |
|
| 10.2 |
Effectiveness of corrective actions has been verified by someone other than the action owner. |
GOV-REG-03 verification entries |
|
| 10.3 |
Findings from the previous external audit are closed with evidence. |
Previous audit report, closure evidence |
|
| 10.4 |
Trend analysis of nonconformities has been performed and reported. |
Quarterly trend report, steering committee minutes |
|
| 10.5 |
The legal, regulatory and contractual register is current and every obligation has a status. |
GOV-REG-04 |
|
| 10.6 |
Where privacy is in scope, the processing inventory is current and DPIAs exist where required. |
PIMS-REG-01, PIMS-REG-08 |
|
9. Logistics
Confirm the following before the audit date: the audit plan from the certification body has been received and the auditees in it are available; each evidence area has a named owner who can share screens; a room or call with screen sharing is booked; the previous audit report and certificate are to hand; and the Information Security Manager has walked through this checklist with the executive sponsor.
10. Related documents
- GOV-PRO-02 Internal audit procedure
- GOV-PRO-03 Management review procedure
- GOV-PRO-04 Nonconformity and corrective action procedure
- GOV-PRO-05 Risk assessment and treatment methodology
- GOV-REG-03 Corrective action log
- ISMS-GDE-02 Guide: mandatory documented information and records for ISO/IEC 27001:2022
- ISMS-GDE-03 Guide: the certification journey from decision to recertification
- PB-09 Playbook: evidence management that survives an audit
Information security and privacy governance framework
How [Organisation] governs information security and privacy, naming the steering committee, the roles that carry the management system, who decides what, how results are reported, and how one control set serves several frameworks.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 5.1; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 5.3; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 7.4; ISO/IEC 27701 clause 5.3; SOC 2 CC1.1; SOC 2 CC1.2; SOC 2 CC1.3; SOC 2 CC1.4; SOC 2 CC1.5; SOC 2 CC2.1. Owner: Information Security Manager.
1. Purpose
This policy sets out how [Organisation] directs and oversees information security and privacy: the committee, roles, decision rights and recurring mechanisms that keep the management system working between audits.
2. Scope
It applies to the management system defined in ISMS-STM-01, to every framework the organisation has adopted (ISO/IEC 27001, ISO/IEC 27701, SOC 2, GDPR and the AI governance documents in this kit), and to everyone holding a role named below, including contractors.
3. Roles and responsibilities
| Role |
Responsibility |
| Executive sponsor (the Chief Executive Officer or a named executive) |
Chairs the steering committee, signs GOV-POL-03 and GOV-STM-01, approves the risk appetite and the budget. |
| Information Security Manager |
Runs the management system day to day: risk register, control set, audits, measures, management review. |
| Privacy Officer |
Owns the privacy requirements, processing inventory and rights handling; contact point for supervisory authorities; independent of the teams assessed. |
| Asset owners and risk owners |
Protect their assets, own the related risks in GOV-REG-05, decide treatment within their authority, provide evidence. |
| Internal Auditor |
Audits under GOV-PRO-02, reports to the executive sponsor, never audits their own work. |
| All staff |
Follow the policies, complete training, report incidents and weaknesses, cooperate with audits. |
4. Policy statements
4.1 Steering committee. The Information Security and Privacy Steering Committee governs the management system under a charter approved by the Chief Executive Officer. Standing members are the executive sponsor (chair), the Information Security Manager (secretary), the Privacy Officer, the Head of Engineering, the Head of Operations and a Human Resources representative.
4.2 Cadence and quorum. The committee meets at least quarterly. It is quorate when the chair or a deputy named in advance, the Information Security Manager and at least half of the remaining standing members attend. The chair decides after hearing the members; the secretary records the decisions. A decision taken without quorum is provisional until the chair confirms it in writing.
4.3 Decision rights. Each decision is held at the lowest level with the authority below; a decision made higher is recorded with the reason.
| Decision |
Authority |
| Approve GOV-POL-03, GOV-STM-01, the risk appetite and the scope statement |
Chief Executive Officer |
| Approve topic policies and this framework |
Steering committee |
| Approve procedures, templates and registers |
Information Security Manager, or the Privacy Officer for privacy documents |
| Accept a risk or grant an exception |
The authority for the risk band in GOV-PRO-05 and GOV-PRO-24 |
| Declare a major incident and approve external communication about it |
Executive sponsor, advised by the incident lead |
| Approve the internal audit plan and receive audit reports |
Executive sponsor |
4.4 Reporting lines. The Information Security Manager and the Privacy Officer report on management system matters directly to the executive sponsor, whatever their line management. The Internal Auditor reports to the executive sponsor and the committee, never to the manager of the area audited. The executive sponsor reports to the board or owners at least annually on posture, major risks and incidents.
4.5 One control set, several frameworks. The organisation operates a single set of controls, described in the kit documents and declared applicable in ISMS-REG-01. GOV-REG-27 tags each control with the ISO/IEC 27001, ISO/IEC 27701, SOC 2, GDPR and NIST CSF 2.0 references it serves, so evidence is collected once and reused. A requirement from one framework alone is still met through this control set, never a parallel process.
4.6 Communication. The secretary communicates committee decisions, policy changes and management review outcomes through the channels in ISMS-PLN-02 within ten working days.
4.7 Governance mechanisms. The mechanisms below are mandatory. Each produces a record the Internal Auditor can test.
| Mechanism |
Frequency |
Purpose |
Owner |
| Steering committee meeting |
Quarterly |
Direct the programme and decide priorities |
Executive sponsor |
| Management review (GOV-PRO-03) |
At least annually |
Judge whether the system is suitable, adequate and effective |
Chief Executive Officer |
| Internal audit (GOV-PRO-02) |
Per ISMS-PLN-03 |
Independent evidence of conformity and effectiveness |
Internal Auditor |
| Risk review (GOV-PRO-05) |
Quarterly and on trigger |
Keep GOV-REG-05 current and treatment on track |
Information Security Manager |
| Objectives and measures report (GOV-REG-21) |
Quarterly |
Show progress on objectives |
Information Security Manager |
| Compliance obligations review (GOV-PRO-25) |
Twice a year |
Detect changes in law, regulation and contract |
Privacy Officer |
| Corrective action review (GOV-PRO-04) |
Monthly |
Keep GOV-REG-03 moving and spot trends |
Information Security Manager |
| Document review (GOV-PRO-01) |
Annually per document |
Keep documents accurate and approved |
Document owners |
4.8 Resources and conflicts of interest. The executive sponsor approves a budget and staffing for the management system each financial year; a shortfall that prevents a planned treatment or audit is recorded in GOV-REG-22. No person approves their own risk acceptance, audits their own area or verifies their own corrective action; where a role cannot be separated, the executive sponsor records the conflict and the compensating arrangement in the minutes.
5. Records and evidence
- Steering committee charter, agendas, attendance lists and minutes.
- GOV-REG-22 and GOV-REG-21.
- GOV-REG-27 Framework crosswalk.
- The executive sponsor's annual report to the board or owners.
6. Exceptions
The Chief Executive Officer may adjust standing membership and quorum for an organisation of fewer than [Number] staff by a written decision, provided the independence rules in 4.4 and 4.8 are preserved. No other exception applies.
7. Review and maintenance
The Information Security Manager reviews this policy annually, and after a change in executive roles, a merger, acquisition or restructuring, or an audit finding about governance. The steering committee approves changes; GOV-PRO-01 governs publication.
8. Related documents
- GOV-POL-03 Information security policy
- GOV-STM-01 Top management commitment statement
- GOV-PRO-02 Internal audit procedure
- GOV-REG-27 Framework crosswalk
Acceptable use policy
What everyone who uses [Organisation] devices, accounts, email, internet, cloud services, removable media, personal devices and AI tools may and may not do, how use is monitored, how to report a problem, and how the policy is acknowledged.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 5.10; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 6.7; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 8.1; SOC 2 CC1.1; SOC 2 CC6.8. Owner: Information Security Manager.
1. Purpose
This policy tells everyone who uses [Organisation] information, devices, accounts and services what they may and may not do with them, so that ordinary daily work does not become the way an attacker gets in or information gets out.
2. Scope
It applies to employees, contractors, temporary staff, interns and supplier personnel who hold an [Organisation] account or device, at any location, and to personal devices used for work under statement 4.9.
3. Roles and responsibilities
| Role |
Responsibility |
| All users |
Follow this policy, acknowledge it, report incidents and breaches. |
| Information Security Manager |
Owns the policy, keeps the approved services list, investigates suspected breaches with Human Resources. |
| IT Manager |
Configures devices and services so that the policy can be enforced and evidenced. |
| Human Resources |
Records acknowledgements in GOV-REG-23 and runs the disciplinary process. |
4. Policy statements
4.1 Permitted use. [Organisation] information, devices, accounts and services are provided for its business. Limited personal use of internet and email is permitted where it does not interfere with work, break a law or this policy, or expose [Organisation] information.
4.2 Devices. Users work on devices issued and managed by [Organisation], keep the GOV-PRO-22 controls switched on, install no software outside the approved catalogue without the IT Manager's approval, and hold no administrative rights on their own device.
4.3 Locking and loss. Users lock their screen whenever they step away and report a lost or stolen device within one hour under GOV-PRO-07.
4.4 Accounts. Each user uses only accounts issued in their own name, never shares a password, one-time code or signed-in session with anyone, including IT staff, and follows GOV-POL-06.
4.5 Email and messaging. Users send Confidential and Restricted information only through the channels permitted in GOV-PRO-16, never forward work email or information to a personal account, and report suspected phishing through the report button rather than replying or clicking.
4.6 Internet. Users do not access or distribute illegal, discriminatory, harassing or sexually explicit material, bypass web filtering or security monitoring, or download software or media from untrusted sources.
4.7 Cloud services. Users store and process [Organisation] information only in services on the approved list kept by the Information Security Manager; a new service is assessed under GOV-PRO-06 before use. Personal cloud storage, note-taking and messaging services are not used for work information above Public.
4.8 Removable media. Removable media is used only with the Information Security Manager's written approval of the specific need; approved media is encrypted, issued by the IT Manager, recorded in GOV-REG-24 and disposed of under GOV-PRO-16.
4.9 Personal devices. A personal phone or computer is used for work only when enrolled in [Organisation]'s device management under GOV-PRO-22, with a passcode, encryption, current updates, [Organisation]'s ability to remove its data, and no Confidential or Restricted information outside the managed applications. Nobody else uses the device while work data is on it.
4.10 AI tools. Users use AI tools only when approved in AI-REG-04, for the uses listed there, under AI-POL-01. Personal data, customer confidential material, credentials, keys and source code are never entered into such a tool unless the register entry permits it. The user checks any output before relying on it and remains responsible for it.
4.11 Information handling. Users classify, label, store, share, print and dispose of information under GOV-PRO-16, keep desks and screens clear under GOV-POL-04, and work away from the office under GOV-POL-05.
4.12 Intellectual property and testing. Users do not copy licensed software or infringe copyright, do not take [Organisation] information, source code or customer data with them when they leave, and do not probe or attempt to defeat any system's security controls unless authorised in writing.
4.13 Monitoring notice. [Organisation] logs the use of its devices, networks, accounts and services and may inspect that activity to protect security and investigate a suspected breach of policy or law. Monitoring is proportionate, follows GOV-PRO-14 and is described in GDPR-TPL-02. Users have no expectation of privacy on [Organisation] systems beyond what the law requires.
4.14 Reporting. Users report a suspected incident, mistaken disclosure or policy breach immediately under GOV-PRO-07. Prompt reporting of a mistake is expected; concealing one is itself a breach.
4.15 Consequences. A breach is handled under the disciplinary process in GOV-PRO-18 and may lead to withdrawal of access, dismissal, contract termination or referral to law enforcement.
4.16 Acknowledgement. Each user acknowledges this policy at induction, after each material change and yearly thereafter, recorded by Human Resources in GOV-REG-23. Access to Confidential or Restricted information depends on a current acknowledgement.
5. Records and evidence
- GOV-REG-23 Policy acknowledgement register.
- The approved services list and AI-REG-04 AI tool approval register.
- Incident reports in GOV-REG-08 and disciplinary records held by Human Resources.
6. Exceptions
Only the Information Security Manager may grant an exception, in writing, for a named person, a stated reason and a fixed period of at most twelve months, recorded under GOV-PRO-24.
7. Review and maintenance
The Information Security Manager reviews this policy annually, after an incident caused by misuse, and when a new class of service or tool comes into use. Changes follow GOV-PRO-01 and trigger re-acknowledgement under 4.16.
8. Related documents
- GOV-POL-04 Clear desk and clear screen policy
- GOV-POL-05 Remote and mobile working policy
- GOV-POL-06 Authentication, password and multi-factor policy
- GOV-PRO-16 Asset management, classification and handling procedure
- GOV-PRO-18 Human resources security procedure
- AI-POL-01 Acceptable use of AI tools policy
Information security policy
The top-level policy, signed by the Chief Executive Officer, that states what [Organisation] commits to for information security and privacy, the principles every other document follows, and the topic policies and procedures that are mandatory.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 5.1; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 5.2; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 5.1; SOC 2 CC1.1; GDPR Article 32. Owner: Information Security Manager.
1. Purpose
This policy states the intent of [Organisation]'s leadership for information security and privacy. Every other policy, procedure and register in the management system derives from it and may not contradict it.
2. Scope
It applies to all information that [Organisation] owns, processes or is entrusted with, in any form and location; to all systems, networks and services inside the scope defined in ISMS-STM-01; and to every employee, contractor, intern and supplier representative who handles that information.
3. Roles and responsibilities
| Role |
Responsibility |
| Chief Executive Officer |
Signs this policy, sets the risk appetite, provides resources, chairs management review. |
| Information Security Manager |
Maintains this policy and the topic documents, runs the risk process, reports performance. |
| Privacy Officer |
Applies the policy to personal data, advises on legal duties, decides on rights requests and breach notification. |
| Line managers |
Make their staff aware of the policy, check that access matches role, act on breaches. |
| All staff and suppliers |
Follow the policy and the topic documents, report incidents and weaknesses. |
4. Policy statements
4.1 Commitment. [Organisation] protects the confidentiality, integrity and availability of information, and the rights and freedoms of the people whose personal data it processes, in proportion to risk and in line with the legal, regulatory and contractual obligations recorded in GOV-REG-04.
4.2 Principles. Every control decision follows these principles: risk drives priority; least privilege and need to know govern access; security and privacy are designed in before a system or supplier is used; protection never relies on a single control; everyone is accountable for the information they handle; evidence is kept so that conformity can be shown.
4.3 Objectives. The Chief Executive Officer approves measurable information security objectives at least annually through ISMS-PLN-01. Each objective has a measure, a target, an owner and a reporting frequency recorded in GOV-REG-21. The Information Security Manager reports progress to the steering committee quarterly and to management review.
4.4 Risk management. Risks to information are identified, assessed, treated and reviewed using GOV-PRO-05. A risk above the appetite approved by the Chief Executive Officer is treated or formally accepted under GOV-PRO-24; it is never left unrecorded.
4.5 Legal and contractual compliance. The organisation identifies and meets its obligations under GOV-PRO-25, including the security of processing required by GDPR Article 32 and the security terms it has accepted from customers.
4.6 Mandatory topic policies. The following documents carry the force of this policy and bind everyone within their scope.
| Document |
Topic |
| GOV-POL-01 |
Governance framework, roles and decision rights |
| GOV-POL-02 |
Acceptable use of devices, accounts and services |
| GOV-POL-04 |
Clear desk and clear screen |
| GOV-POL-05 |
Remote and mobile working |
| GOV-POL-06 |
Authentication, passwords and multi-factor |
| PIMS-POL-01 |
Privacy information management |
| PIMS-POL-02 |
Data retention and disposal |
| PIMS-POL-03 |
International transfer of personal data |
| GDPR-POL-01 |
Data protection |
| AI-POL-01 |
Acceptable use of AI tools |
| AI-POL-02 |
AI system development, procurement and deployment |
| SOC-POL-01 |
Processing integrity, where that category is in scope |
4.7 Mandatory operating procedures. Access management (GOV-PRO-10), asset classification and handling (GOV-PRO-16), change management (GOV-PRO-09), vulnerability and patch management (GOV-PRO-11), backup (GOV-PRO-12), business continuity (GOV-PRO-13), logging and monitoring (GOV-PRO-14), secure development (GOV-PRO-15), cryptography (GOV-PRO-20), supplier security (GOV-PRO-06) and incident management (GOV-PRO-07) are operated as written. A deviation needs an approved exception under GOV-PRO-24.
4.8 People. Every person receives security and privacy induction within [Number] working days of starting and refresher training at least annually under GOV-PRO-08, and confirms in writing that they have read this policy and GOV-POL-02. Acknowledgements are recorded in GOV-REG-23.
4.9 Incidents. Everyone reports a suspected incident or weakness immediately through the channel in GOV-PRO-07. No one is penalised for a report made in good faith.
4.10 Consequences. A breach of this policy or of a topic document is handled under the disciplinary process in GOV-PRO-18 for staff and under the contract for suppliers. A deliberate or negligent breach may lead to dismissal or termination of contract and, where the law requires it, to referral to the authorities.
4.11 Communication. The Information Security Manager publishes this policy in the approved document location, includes it in induction, and makes it available to interested parties on request. A summary suitable for customers and suppliers is maintained alongside it.
4.12 Continual improvement. Nonconformities, incident lessons, audit results and measurement results feed corrective action under GOV-PRO-04 and management review under GOV-PRO-03.
5. Records and evidence
- The signed copy of this policy and its revision history in GOV-REG-01.
- GOV-REG-23 Policy acknowledgement register.
- GOV-REG-21 Security objectives and measures tracker.
- Management review minutes (GOV-TPL-03) recording the annual review of this policy.
6. Exceptions
No exception to this policy is permitted. Exceptions to topic policies and procedures follow GOV-PRO-24.
7. Review and maintenance
The Information Security Manager reviews this policy annually, and earlier after a major incident, a change in law or contract that affects it, a change in scope, or an audit finding about leadership. The Chief Executive Officer signs the policy again after every change of meaning.
Approved and signed by the Chief Executive Officer: [Name], version [Number], [Date].
8. Related documents
- GOV-POL-01 Information security and privacy governance framework
- GOV-STM-01 Top management commitment statement
- GOV-PRO-03 Management review procedure
- GOV-PRO-04 Nonconformity and corrective action procedure
- GOV-PRO-05 Risk assessment and treatment methodology
- GOV-PRO-24 Exception and risk acceptance procedure
- GOV-PRO-25 Legal, regulatory and contractual compliance procedure
- ISMS-STM-01 ISMS scope statement
- ISMS-PLN-01 Information security objectives and plan
- GOV-REG-21 Security objectives and measures tracker
Clear desk and clear screen policy
The rules that keep information off unattended desks, screens, printers, whiteboards and shared spaces, in the office and at home, and how compliance is checked.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 7.7. Owner: Information Security Manager.
1. Purpose
This policy prevents information from being read, photographed or taken by anyone who should not see it, simply because it was left on a desk, a screen, a printer or a whiteboard.
2. Scope
It applies to everyone who works for [Organisation], in every office, shared workspace, meeting room, home workplace and public place where work is done, and to paper, screens, whiteboards, removable media and printed output.
3. Roles and responsibilities
| Role |
Responsibility |
| All staff |
Apply the statements below every day and leave shared spaces as they found them. |
| Line manager |
Provides lockable storage for their team and acts on repeat findings. |
| Facilities Manager |
Provides lockable storage, confidential waste bins and pull printing, and carries out the monthly check with the Information Security Manager. |
| Information Security Manager |
Owns the policy, records check results and reports trends to the steering committee. |
4. Policy statements
4.1 Screen lock. Every device locks automatically after no more than [Number] minutes of inactivity, and in no case more than ten, and the user locks it manually whenever they leave it, however briefly.
4.2 Paper and media. Paper and removable media holding Confidential or Restricted information are locked in a drawer or cabinet whenever the desk is unattended and at the end of every day. Keys and access cards are not left in locks or on desks.
4.3 Credentials. Passwords, PINs, recovery codes and one-time codes are never written on paper, on a whiteboard or in an unprotected file. The approved password manager is the only place they are stored, under GOV-POL-06.
4.4 Printing. Print jobs are collected immediately. Pull printing is used wherever the device supports it. Anyone who finds an uncollected printout places it in confidential waste. Restricted information is printed only under the conditions in GOV-PRO-16.
4.5 Whiteboards and meeting rooms. Whiteboards and flip charts are wiped or removed at the end of every meeting. Meeting rooms are left with no papers, media or connected devices, and any shared screen is disconnected.
4.6 Confidential waste. Paper that holds Internal information or above goes into a locked confidential waste bin or a cross-cut shredder, never into general waste or recycling.
4.7 Shared and hot desks. A shared desk is cleared completely at the end of each use. Work papers are not stored in unlocked pedestals, trays or lockers.
4.8 Screen positioning. Screens are positioned so that they cannot be read from windows, corridors or visitor areas. A privacy filter is used on any screen that shows Confidential or Restricted information in a public place or an open area shared with other organisations.
4.9 Visitors. No Confidential or Restricted material is visible in a room while a visitor is present. A screen shared with a visitor shows only the content the meeting needs, with notifications switched off.
4.10 Post and deliveries. Incoming post marked Confidential or Restricted is handed unopened to the addressee. Outgoing Confidential post is sealed and tracked.
4.11 Home working. The same rules apply at home under GOV-POL-05. Work papers are kept in a lockable container, and devices are locked whenever another member of the household could reach them.
4.12 Checks. The Facilities Manager and the Information Security Manager walk every office area at least monthly outside working hours, record each item found (area, item, classification, action), secure the item and inform its owner. A person with a second finding in twelve months is referred to their line manager, and a third is handled under the disciplinary process in GOV-PRO-18.
4.13 Acknowledgement. Every person acknowledges this policy at induction and after each change, recorded in GOV-REG-23.
5. Records and evidence
- Monthly clear desk check records with findings and actions.
- GOV-REG-23 Policy acknowledgement register.
- Incident reports in GOV-REG-08 where a finding caused an exposure.
6. Exceptions
A team that must keep Confidential paper out during a working session (for example a records review) works in a room that is locked when unattended and clears it at the end of the day. No standing exception applies.
7. Review and maintenance
The Information Security Manager reviews this policy annually, after a move or refit of premises, and after an incident involving exposed paper or screens. Changes follow GOV-PRO-01.
8. Related documents
- GOV-POL-02 Acceptable use policy
- GOV-POL-05 Remote and mobile working policy
- GOV-POL-06 Authentication, password and multi-factor policy
- GOV-PRO-16 Asset management, classification and handling procedure
- GOV-PRO-17 Physical and environmental security procedure
- GOV-PRO-18 Human resources security procedure
- GOV-REG-23 Policy acknowledgement register
Remote and mobile working policy
The conditions under which [Organisation] staff work from home, while travelling and from other locations, covering devices, networks, physical security, printing, calls, the privacy of household members and incident reporting.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 6.7; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 8.1; SOC 2 CC6.6; SOC 2 CC6.7. Owner: Information Security Manager.
1. Purpose
This policy sets the conditions for working away from [Organisation] premises, so that information receives the same protection at home, in transit and in public places as it does in the office, and so that the people who share those places are not drawn into [Organisation]'s business.
2. Scope
It applies to everyone who works for [Organisation] and performs any work outside its premises, whether regularly from home, occasionally while travelling, or from a co-working space, customer site or other location, on any device that holds or reaches [Organisation] information.
3. Roles and responsibilities
| Role |
Responsibility |
| Remote worker |
Meets the conditions below before working remotely and keeps meeting them. |
| Line manager |
Agrees remote working arrangements and confirms the worker has suitable equipment and storage. |
| Information Security Manager |
Owns the policy, confirms home arrangements for Restricted roles, approves working abroad with Human Resources. |
| IT Manager |
Provides managed devices, the remote access gateway and remote wipe under GOV-PRO-22 and GOV-PRO-21. |
4. Policy statements
4.1 Agreement. Remote working is agreed in writing with the line manager. A role that handles Restricted information from home starts only after the Information Security Manager has confirmed that the home workplace meets statements 4.4 and 4.8.
4.2 Devices. Remote work is done on devices issued and managed by [Organisation] under GOV-PRO-22, or on a personal device enrolled under GOV-POL-02. Nobody other than the assigned user, including family members, uses a device that holds [Organisation] information.
4.3 Connections. Access from outside [Organisation] premises goes through the remote access gateway with multi-factor authentication under GOV-PRO-21. Public or shared wireless networks are used only with the gateway active. A home router has its default administrator password changed, current firmware and current wireless encryption. Shared or public computers are never used for work.
4.4 Physical security at home. The worker chooses a space where the screen cannot be seen through a window or by visitors, locks the device whenever leaving it, and stores devices and papers in a lockable drawer or cabinet when not in use. Devices are never left in a vehicle.
4.5 Travel. Devices travel as hand luggage and are never left unattended. A privacy filter is used in public places. Restricted information is not worked on in public, and Confidential matters are not discussed where they can be overheard. At a border crossing the worker carries only the data the trip needs; if a device is inspected or taken out of sight, the worker reports it on arrival under GOV-PRO-07 so that credentials can be rotated and the device checked.
4.6 Working from another country. Working from outside the country of employment for more than [Number] days in a year needs written approval from Human Resources and the Information Security Manager, because of data transfer rules under PIMS-POL-03, employment and tax law, and systems restricted by country.
4.7 Printing and paper. Printing away from the office is avoided. Where unavoidable, Confidential information is printed only from the managed device, collected immediately, stored locked, and cross-cut shredded or returned to the office confidential waste. Restricted information is never printed away from the office. Work paper never goes into household waste.
4.8 Calls and video. Confidential conversations take place where others cannot overhear, using headphones. Smart speakers and voice assistants are switched off or removed from the room during Confidential calls. The camera background shows no work information. Calls are recorded only with the participants' consent.
4.9 Privacy of household members. [Organisation]'s device management reads device status and work applications only and, on a personal device, no personal content. Monitoring is limited to what GOV-POL-02 describes. The worker does not record household members' personal data in work systems, and cameras are not required in a private space when audio is sufficient.
4.10 Mobile phones. Work accounts are used on a phone only inside the managed profile, with a passcode or biometric lock and automatic locking.
4.11 Incident reporting. A lost or stolen device, a suspected compromise, a mistaken disclosure, an inspection of a device by an authority, or access to work data by a household member is reported within one hour under GOV-PRO-07. [Organisation] may wipe the device remotely and the worker cooperates with the response.
4.12 Equipment. Equipment issued for remote working stays assigned to the worker in GOV-REG-24, is not modified or lent, and is returned on request and on leaving under GOV-PRO-16.
4.13 Acknowledgement. Before first working remotely the worker acknowledges this policy, recorded in GOV-REG-23.
5. Records and evidence
- Written remote working agreements held by Human Resources.
- GOV-REG-23 Policy acknowledgement register.
- GOV-REG-24 entries for equipment assigned to remote workers.
- Approvals for working from another country.
- Incident reports in GOV-REG-08.
6. Exceptions
An exception to statements 4.2, 4.3 or 4.7 is granted only by the Information Security Manager in writing, for a named person and a fixed period, and recorded under GOV-PRO-24.
7. Review and maintenance
The Information Security Manager reviews this policy annually, after an incident involving remote or mobile working, and after a change to the remote access technology. Changes follow GOV-PRO-01.
8. Related documents
- GOV-POL-02 Acceptable use policy
- GOV-POL-04 Clear desk and clear screen policy
- GOV-PRO-16 Asset management, classification and handling procedure
- GOV-PRO-21 Network security and remote access procedure
- GOV-PRO-22 Endpoint and mobile device security procedure
- GOV-PRO-07 Information security incident management procedure
- PIMS-POL-03 International transfer policy
- GOV-REG-23 Policy acknowledgement register
Authentication, password and multi-factor policy
The rules for passwords, password managers, multi-factor authentication, secrets, lockout, initial credentials, recovery and sessions on every [Organisation] system, for people and for services.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 5.17; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 8.5; SOC 2 CC6.1. Owner: Information Security Manager.
1. Purpose
This policy sets how people and services prove who they are to [Organisation] systems, so that a stolen or guessed password is not enough to get in and secrets do not leak through code, chat or documents.
2. Scope
It applies to every account on every system [Organisation] owns, administers or subscribes to, including user, administrator, service and emergency accounts, and to every password, key, token and certificate used to authenticate to them.
3. Roles and responsibilities
| Role |
Responsibility |
| All users |
Choose and protect credentials as stated below, enrol in multi-factor authentication, report suspected exposure. |
| System Owner |
Configures each system to enforce these statements, or records a risk acceptance. |
| IT Manager |
Operates the identity provider, password manager, secrets store and help desk recovery process. |
| Information Security Manager |
Owns the policy, reviews configuration evidence quarterly, approves exceptions. |
4. Policy statements
4.1 One identity per account. Every account belongs to one person or one named service under GOV-PRO-10, and every system above Public classification requires authentication before access.
4.2 Length. A user password or passphrase is at least 14 characters. Systems accept at least 64 characters and impose no rules on mixing character types. A passphrase of several unrelated words is encouraged.
4.3 Screening. A new password is rejected if it appears on a list of known breached or common passwords, or contains the user's or [Organisation]'s name.
4.4 No scheduled expiry. Passwords change only on suspected compromise, when a person who knew a shared or privileged credential leaves, or where a system cannot meet 4.7 and its risk acceptance requires it. The last [Number] passwords may not be reused.
4.5 Unique passwords. Every account has its own password; a work password is never reused for a personal account or another [Organisation] system.
4.6 Password manager. Every user keeps work credentials in the password manager approved by the IT Manager, protected by a passphrase of at least 20 characters and multi-factor authentication. Credentials are not kept in browser stores, documents, spreadsheets or notes.
4.7 Multi-factor authentication. Multi-factor authentication is required for all remote and privileged access and for every other system that supports it, enrolled before first use. Privileged accounts and identity administrators use phishing-resistant methods (hardware security keys or platform authenticators); other users may use an authenticator application; text message codes are a documented fallback only. Users deny and report any prompt they did not initiate.
4.8 Secrets. Passwords, keys, tokens, certificates and connection strings are never placed in source code, committed configuration, tickets, chat, email, documents or spreadsheets. They live in the secrets store under GOV-PRO-20 with a named owner and an expiry date. A secret found exposed is rotated within 24 hours and reported under GOV-PRO-07.
4.9 Service accounts and keys. Service credentials and API keys are generated at random with at least 32 characters, scoped to the minimum permissions, rotated at least annually and when a person who had access leaves, and recorded in GOV-REG-13.
4.10 Lockout. An account locks after no more than ten consecutive failed attempts, for at least 15 minutes or with a progressive delay. Lockouts are logged and repeated lockouts raise an alert under GOV-PRO-14. A privileged account stays locked until an administrator has confirmed the holder's identity.
4.11 Initial credentials. A first or reset credential is unique, delivered through a channel separate from the account name, valid for no more than 24 hours and changed at first use. Default vendor credentials are changed before a device or application connects to the network.
4.12 Recovery. The help desk resets a credential or re-enrols multi-factor authentication only after verifying identity independently of the request (a call back to a registered number, line manager confirmation or an in-person check), never on a single email or chat request. Self-service resets require multi-factor authentication. Recovery codes are kept in the password manager.
4.13 Sessions. Sessions end after no more than [Number] minutes of inactivity, and sooner for privileged sessions as set by the System Owner. Sensitive actions require re-authentication. Users sign out of shared devices.
4.14 Protection of credentials. Credentials travel only over encrypted channels, are stored only as salted hashes from an algorithm family approved under GOV-PRO-20, and are never written to logs.
4.15 Prohibited behaviour. Users do not share credentials, write them down, enter them on a page reached from a message link without checking the address, or use them on an unmanaged device.
4.16 Configuration evidence. Each System Owner keeps an export of the settings that enforce these statements, refreshed after any change and at least yearly, which the Information Security Manager reviews quarterly.
5. Records and evidence
- Authentication configuration exports for each system.
- Multi-factor enrolment, lockout and reset reports from the identity provider and help desk.
- GOV-REG-13 Privileged account register with rotation dates.
- Exposure incidents in GOV-REG-08.
6. Exceptions
A system that cannot meet a statement is recorded with compensating controls under GOV-PRO-24, approved by the Information Security Manager and reviewed at least every twelve months. No exception applies to statement 4.8.
7. Review and maintenance
The Information Security Manager reviews this policy annually, after a credential-related incident, and when the identity provider or password manager changes. Changes follow GOV-PRO-01.
8. Related documents
- GOV-PRO-10 Access management procedure (joiners, movers, leavers, privileged access, reviews)
- GOV-REG-13 Privileged account register
- GOV-PRO-20 Cryptography and key management procedure
- GOV-PRO-14 Logging, monitoring and alert handling procedure
- GOV-PRO-07 Information security incident management procedure
Document Control Procedure
How every policy, procedure, plan and record in the management system is created, identified, approved, published, changed, retained and withdrawn.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 7.5; ISO/IEC 27701 clause 6.5; SOC 2 CC2.2; SOC 2 CC5.3. Owner: Information Security Manager.
1. Purpose
This procedure keeps the management system's documented information under control, so that staff always work from the approved version, auditors can trace every change, and withdrawn documents cannot be mistaken for current ones.
2. Scope
It applies to every document and record that the information security and privacy management system requires: policies, procedures, plans, statements, registers, forms and the records those forms produce. It applies in every format, including word-processed files, spreadsheets, wiki pages, tickets and exported reports.
3. Roles and responsibilities
| Role |
Responsibility |
| Document owner |
Writes and maintains the document, proposes changes, answers questions about it. |
| Reviewer |
Checks the content for accuracy and fit with other documents before approval. |
| Approver |
Authorises the document for use. A policy is approved by the role named in its control block. |
| Information Security Manager |
Runs this procedure, keeps the master list (GOV-REG-01), publishes approved versions, withdraws superseded ones. |
| All staff |
Use only the current version from the approved location and report errors to the owner. |
4. Procedure
4.1 Identification. The owner assigns the next free identifier from the master list in the form [Prefix]-[Type]-[Number], for example ISMS-POL-03. The identifier never changes for the life of the document and is never reused.
4.2 Control block. Every document carries a control block with identifier, title, type, owner role, approver role, classification, version, effective date and next review date, and a revision history table. Registers carry the identifier and purpose in rows 2 to 9 of the workbook.
4.3 Drafting. The owner drafts the document in the approved template, writes a version number of 0.x while it is a draft, and marks the status as Draft in the master list.
4.4 Review. At least one reviewer who did not write the document reads it and records comments. The owner resolves every comment or records why it was declined.
4.5 Approval. The approver confirms the document in writing, by signature or by an approval record in the document system. The owner sets the version to 1.0 for a first issue, or increments the major number for a change of meaning and the minor number for a correction that does not change meaning.
4.6 Publication. The Information Security Manager places the approved version in the single approved location, updates GOV-REG-01 with version, date and location, and announces the change through the channel named in the communication plan. Only the approved location is authoritative; copies elsewhere are uncontrolled.
4.7 Change. A change request names the document, the reason, the proposed text and the requester. Changes follow steps 4.3 to 4.6. A change that affects another document triggers a review of that document within thirty days.
4.8 Review cycle. Each document is reviewed on the date in its control block, at least annually, and earlier after an incident, an audit finding, a change in law or contract, or a change in the organisation that affects the document. The outcome of a review is recorded even when nothing changes.
4.9 Withdrawal. When a document is superseded or no longer needed, the Information Security Manager marks it Withdrawn in GOV-REG-01, removes it from the approved location, and keeps one archived copy marked as withdrawn.
4.10 Records. Records produced by following a document (for example a completed access review, a signed acknowledgement, an audit report) are retained for the period in the retention schedule, protected against alteration, and kept legible and retrievable.
4.11 External documents. Standards, laws, contracts and supplier documents that the management system relies on are listed in GOV-REG-01 with their source and version, and are not altered.
5. Records and evidence
- GOV-REG-01 Master list of documents and records: the index of every controlled document with status, version, owner, location and review dates.
- Approval records for every issued version.
- Review records, including reviews that resulted in no change.
- The archive of withdrawn versions.
6. Exceptions
A document may be issued without a separate reviewer only when the approver reviews it personally and records that fact in the revision history. No other exception applies.
7. Review and maintenance
The Information Security Manager reviews this procedure annually and after any audit finding about documented information. Proposed changes follow section 4.
8. Related documents
- GOV-REG-01 Master list of documents and records
- GOV-POL-01 Information security and privacy governance framework
Internal audit procedure
How [Organisation] plans, performs, reports and follows up internal audits of the management system so that every requirement and every applicable control is independently checked within the audit cycle.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 9.2; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 9.2.1; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 9.2.2; SOC 2 CC4.1; SOC 2 CC4.2. Owner: Information Security Manager.
1. Purpose
This procedure produces independent, evidence-based information about whether the management system conforms to the organisation's own documents and to the frameworks it has adopted, and whether it is effectively implemented and maintained.
2. Scope
It covers every internal audit of the management system: the clause 4 to 10 requirements of ISO/IEC 27001:2022, the applicable Annex A controls in ISMS-REG-01, the ISO/IEC 27701 extensions where adopted, and the SOC 2 criteria in scope. Supplier audits follow GOV-PRO-06. External certification audits are outside this procedure but are prepared for with GOV-CHK-03.
3. Roles and responsibilities
| Role |
Responsibility |
| Executive sponsor |
Approves the audit programme and the annual plan, receives every report, decides on disputed gradings. |
| Information Security Manager |
Maintains the programme in GOV-REG-02, schedules audits, tracks corrective actions. May not audit areas they operate. |
| Internal Auditor |
Plans and performs the audit, grades findings, writes the report, verifies closure. |
| Auditee (the manager of the area audited) |
Provides access, people and evidence, responds to findings, owns corrective actions. |
| Steering committee |
Reviews audit results quarterly and trends annually. |
4. Procedure
4.1 Programme. The Information Security Manager proposes, and the executive sponsor approves, an audit programme covering a cycle of [Number] years (three years is recommended, matching a certification cycle). The programme schedules audits so that every clause 4 to 10 requirement, every control declared applicable in ISMS-REG-01 and every SOC 2 criterion in scope is audited at least once per cycle. Areas with High or Critical risks in GOV-REG-05, open major nonconformities, recent incidents or significant change are audited at least annually. The programme is recorded in GOV-REG-02 and detailed each year in ISMS-PLN-03.
4.2 Independence. An auditor never audits work they performed, managed or designed. Where the organisation cannot find an independent internal auditor for an area, the Information Security Manager engages a competent person from another department or an external auditor. Independence is recorded for each audit in GOV-REG-02.
4.3 Competence. Before leading an audit alone, an auditor has completed training in audit technique, can explain the requirements being audited, and has taken part in at least [Number] audits under an experienced lead. The competence record is held under ISMS-PRO-02. The Internal Auditor keeps their knowledge current through at least one refresher activity a year.
4.4 Planning. At least ten working days before fieldwork, the Internal Auditor issues an audit plan to the auditee stating the scope, the criteria (documents, clauses, controls), the dates, the people to be interviewed, the records to be made available, and the checklist questions drawn from ISMS-REG-04. The auditee confirms availability within three working days.
4.5 Opening meeting. The Internal Auditor opens the audit with the auditee, confirms scope and timing, explains the grading scale in 4.7, and agrees how evidence will be shared and how confidential material will be handled.
4.6 Evidence gathering. The Internal Auditor collects evidence by document review, interview, observation and sampling of records, and records the source of every piece of evidence. Samples are chosen by the auditor, not the auditee, from the full population for the period under review. The minimum sample is one item for a control operating annually, two for quarterly, three for monthly, five for weekly, and twenty-five for daily or continuous controls, or the whole population where it is smaller. Evidence must show the account, system, date and person involved. A statement without evidence is recorded as unverified, not as conforming.
4.7 Grading. Each finding receives one grade.
| Grade |
Meaning |
| Major nonconformity |
A requirement is not implemented, a control has failed systematically, or several minor findings show the same cause. |
| Minor nonconformity |
A single lapse against a requirement that does not undermine the control as a whole. |
| Observation |
Evidence of a weakness that could become a nonconformity if not addressed. |
| Opportunity for improvement |
A way to make a conforming process more effective or efficient. |
A nonconformity is written in four parts: the requirement, the evidence seen, the gap between them, and the grade.
4.8 Closing meeting. The Internal Auditor presents every finding to the auditee before leaving, confirms the facts, and records any disagreement. A disputed grading is referred to the executive sponsor, whose decision is final.
4.9 Report. The Internal Auditor issues the report using GOV-TPL-01 within ten working days of the closing meeting to the auditee, the Information Security Manager and the executive sponsor, and records the finding counts by grade and the report reference in GOV-REG-02.
4.10 Corrective action. The auditee raises a corrective action request using GOV-TPL-02 for every major and minor nonconformity, and the Information Security Manager logs it in GOV-REG-03. The auditee proposes a root cause and a plan within ten working days of the report, or within five working days for a major nonconformity. Observations and opportunities are logged with a decision to act or not act. GOV-PRO-04 governs the rest of the process.
4.11 Follow-up. The Internal Auditor verifies the closure evidence for each nonconformity and records the result. A major nonconformity is re-audited within ninety days of the report. An audit is marked Closed in GOV-REG-02 only when every nonconformity it raised is Verified or Closed in GOV-REG-03.
4.12 Reporting to management. The Information Security Manager summarises audit results, open findings and overdue actions for the steering committee each quarter and for management review under GOV-PRO-03.
5. Records and evidence
- GOV-REG-02 Audit programme and findings: the programme, each audit's status and finding counts.
- ISMS-PLN-03 Annual internal audit plan.
- Audit plans, completed ISMS-REG-04 checklists and evidence files for each audit.
- Audit reports on GOV-TPL-01.
- GOV-REG-03 Corrective action log and the GOV-TPL-02 forms behind it.
- Auditor competence records under ISMS-PRO-02.
6. Exceptions
An audit may be postponed by up to one quarter with the written approval of the executive sponsor, recorded in GOV-REG-02 with the reason. No requirement or applicable control may be left unaudited across a full cycle.
7. Review and maintenance
The Information Security Manager reviews this procedure annually, after any external audit finding about internal audit, and when the scope or the adopted frameworks change. Changes follow GOV-PRO-01.
8. Related documents
- GOV-REG-02 Audit programme and findings
- GOV-TPL-01 Internal audit report template
- GOV-TPL-02 Corrective action request form
- GOV-REG-03 Corrective action log
- GOV-PRO-04 Nonconformity and corrective action procedure
- GOV-PRO-03 Management review procedure
- GOV-CHK-03 Pre-audit readiness checklist
- ISMS-PLN-03 Annual internal audit plan
- ISMS-REG-04 Internal audit checklist
- ISMS-PRO-02 Competence and awareness procedure
- PB-06 Playbook: running your first internal audit cycle
Management review procedure
How top management reviews the management system at planned intervals, which inputs must be considered, which outputs must be decided, and how the resulting actions are recorded and tracked to completion.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 9.3; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 9.3.2; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 9.3.3; SOC 2 CC1.2; SOC 2 CC4.1. Owner: Information Security Manager.
1. Purpose
Management review is where leadership judges whether the management system is still suitable, adequate and effective, and decides what to change and what to fund. This procedure makes the review repeatable and its decisions traceable.
2. Scope
It applies to every management review of the information security and privacy management system, including the privacy elements under ISO/IEC 27701 and the SOC 2 criteria in scope. Steering committee meetings under GOV-POL-01 are not management reviews unless they follow this procedure in full.
3. Roles and responsibilities
| Role |
Responsibility |
| Chief Executive Officer |
Chairs the review, takes the decisions, approves the minutes. |
| Information Security Manager |
Prepares the input pack, acts as secretary, logs and tracks actions in GOV-REG-22. |
| Privacy Officer |
Presents the privacy inputs and the status of data subject rights and breaches. |
| Heads of function (Engineering, Operations, Human Resources, Finance) |
Attend, present inputs for their area, own the actions assigned to them. |
| Internal Auditor |
Presents audit results and the status of corrective actions. |
4. Procedure
4.1 Frequency. The Chief Executive Officer holds a full management review at least once every twelve months. A second review each year is recommended. An additional review is held within thirty days of a major incident, a significant change in scope or organisation, or a major nonconformity from an external audit.
4.2 Attendance. The review is valid when the Chief Executive Officer or a deputy named in writing, the Information Security Manager, the Privacy Officer and at least half of the heads of function attend. The secretary records attendance and apologies on GOV-TPL-03.
4.3 Preparation. Ten working days before the review, the Information Security Manager circulates an input pack with one section per mandatory input in 4.4, each with the data, its source register and a proposed decision where one is needed. Presenters confirm their sections five working days before the review.
4.4 Mandatory inputs. The agenda follows this order and no input may be skipped. Where there is nothing to report, the minutes say so.
| Input |
Source |
| Status of actions from previous reviews |
GOV-REG-22 |
| Changes in external and internal issues and in interested parties' needs |
ISMS-PRO-01, ISMS-REG-03 |
| Nonconformities and corrective actions, with trends |
GOV-REG-03, GOV-PRO-04 |
| Monitoring and measurement results |
ISMS-PRO-04, GOV-REG-21 |
| Internal and external audit results |
GOV-REG-02, GOV-TPL-01 |
| Fulfilment of information security and privacy objectives |
GOV-REG-21, ISMS-PLN-01 |
| Feedback from interested parties, including complaints and customer questionnaires |
ISMS-REG-03, GOV-REG-04 |
| Results of risk assessment and status of the risk treatment plan |
GOV-REG-05, GOV-REG-06 |
| Incidents and personal data breaches, including lessons |
GOV-REG-08, PIMS-REG-03 |
| Supplier performance and assurance |
GOV-REG-07 |
| Compliance with legal, regulatory and contractual obligations |
GOV-REG-04 |
| Opportunities for continual improvement |
All presenters |
4.5 Conduct. For each input the presenter gives a summary, the chair states a decision (accept, act, or investigate), and the secretary records any action with an owner and a due date. The chair confirms or revises the risk appetite, the scope and the objectives for the next period.
4.6 Mandatory outputs. Before closing, the chair records decisions on: opportunities for continual improvement; changes needed to the management system, its policies, scope or objectives; and the resources needed, including budget, people and external support. A decision to provide no additional resource is recorded as a decision, with the reason.
4.7 Minutes. The secretary issues the minutes on GOV-TPL-03 within five working days. The chair approves them within a further five working days. Approved minutes are stored in the approved document location and listed in GOV-REG-01.
4.8 Action tracking. The secretary enters every action in GOV-REG-22 within two working days of the review, with owner, due date and the input it arose from. Owners report progress monthly. An action overdue by more than thirty days is escalated to the chair. An action is marked Completed only when evidence of completion is referenced in the tracker.
4.9 Communication. The Information Security Manager communicates relevant decisions to staff and, where appropriate, to customers and suppliers through ISMS-PLN-02 within ten working days.
5. Records and evidence
- GOV-TPL-03 Management review minutes, approved by the chair, for every review.
- The input pack and the data it drew on.
- GOV-REG-22 Management review action tracker, showing every action from raising to completion with evidence.
- Attendance records.
6. Exceptions
The twelve-month interval may be extended by no more than one month on the written decision of the Chief Executive Officer, recorded in GOV-REG-22 with the reason. No mandatory input may be omitted.
7. Review and maintenance
The Information Security Manager reviews this procedure annually and after any external audit finding about management review. Changes follow GOV-PRO-01.
8. Related documents
- GOV-TPL-03 Management review minutes template
- GOV-REG-22 Management review action tracker
- GOV-POL-01 Information security and privacy governance framework
- GOV-PRO-02 Internal audit procedure
- GOV-PRO-04 Nonconformity and corrective action procedure
- GOV-PRO-05 Risk assessment and treatment methodology
- GOV-REG-21 Security objectives and measures tracker
- ISMS-PRO-04 Monitoring, measurement, analysis and evaluation procedure
- ISMS-PLN-02 Communication plan
Nonconformity and corrective action procedure
How [Organisation] records a nonconformity, contains it, finds its root cause, corrects the cause, verifies that the correction worked, and learns from the pattern across many nonconformities.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 10.1; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 10.2; SOC 2 CC4.2; SOC 2 CC5.3. Owner: Information Security Manager.
1. Purpose
A nonconformity is any failure to meet a requirement of the management system, whether the requirement comes from a kit document, an adopted framework, a law or a contract. This procedure turns each one into a verified improvement rather than a repeated fix.
2. Scope
It applies to every nonconformity, whatever its source, across the information security and privacy management system. Incident response itself follows GOV-PRO-07; this procedure starts when an incident review identifies a failed or missing control.
3. Roles and responsibilities
| Role |
Responsibility |
| Anyone |
Raises a suspected nonconformity. |
| Information Security Manager |
Logs every nonconformity in GOV-REG-03, assigns an owner, runs the monthly review, performs trend analysis, closes minor nonconformities. |
| Action owner |
Contains the problem, leads the root cause analysis, implements the corrective action, provides evidence. |
| Verifier |
A person other than the action owner who checks effectiveness. Usually the Internal Auditor or the Information Security Manager. |
| Executive sponsor |
Closes major nonconformities and decides on actions that need resources beyond the owner's authority. |
| Privacy Officer |
Co-owns nonconformities involving personal data and decides whether a breach assessment under PIMS-PRO-04 is needed. |
4. Procedure
4.1 Sources. Nonconformities arise from internal audits (GOV-PRO-02), external audits, incidents and post-incident reviews (GOV-PRO-07), management review (GOV-PRO-03), monitoring and measurement results (ISMS-PRO-04), complaints from customers or data subjects, supplier reviews, readiness assessments and staff reports. All are handled the same way.
4.2 Raising. The person who finds the problem completes the first part of GOV-TPL-02: what was observed, where, when, and the requirement it appears to breach. The Information Security Manager logs it in GOV-REG-03 within two working days, assigns a reference, a grade (Major, Minor, Observation or Opportunity, as defined in GOV-PRO-02) and an action owner, and sets the status to Open.
4.3 Correction. The action owner first contains the problem: stops the nonconforming activity, restores the control, or limits the consequences. The correction is recorded on GOV-TPL-02 with its date. For a major nonconformity the correction is in place within five working days; for a minor, within twenty.
4.4 Deciding on corrective action. Correction removes the symptom; corrective action removes the cause. The action owner and the Information Security Manager decide whether corrective action is needed by asking whether the problem could recur, whether it has occurred before, whether the same cause could exist elsewhere, and what the impact of recurrence would be. A major nonconformity always needs corrective action. The decision and its reasons are recorded.
4.5 Root cause analysis. The action owner leads the analysis with the people who do the work, using the five whys for a simple failure or a fishbone (cause and effect) diagram where several factors interact. The analysis stops at a cause the organisation can act on, not at "human error". The root cause is written on GOV-TPL-02 and in GOV-REG-03.
4.6 Corrective action plan. The action owner writes the plan on GOV-TPL-02: the actions, the person responsible for each, the resources needed and the due date. The due date is within thirty days of raising for a major nonconformity and within ninety days for a minor, unless the executive sponsor approves a longer period in writing. The Information Security Manager records the plan and sets the status to In progress.
4.7 Extending the check. Before closing the plan, the action owner checks whether the same cause exists in other systems, teams or locations, and raises a linked entry in GOV-REG-03 for each place where it does.
4.8 Implementation. The action owner implements the plan, attaches evidence of each completed action to GOV-TPL-02, and updates any document the change affects through GOV-PRO-01. Where the action changes a risk, the owner updates GOV-REG-05.
4.9 Effectiveness verification. After the corrected process has operated for at least ninety days, or for three operating cycles where the control runs less often, the verifier tests whether the nonconformity has recurred and whether the control now operates as intended. The verifier samples records from the period, interviews the people involved and inspects the configuration or output. The result (Effective or Not effective), the method, the date and the verifier's role are recorded on GOV-TPL-02 and in GOV-REG-03, and the status becomes Verified. A result of Not effective reopens the root cause analysis at 4.5.
4.10 Closure. The Information Security Manager closes a minor nonconformity and the executive sponsor closes a major one, in each case only after the verification is recorded as Effective. The closer signs GOV-TPL-02 and the status becomes Closed. Observations and opportunities are closed when the decision to act or not act is recorded.
4.11 Monthly review. The Information Security Manager reviews GOV-REG-03 monthly, chases overdue actions, and escalates any action more than thirty days overdue to the executive sponsor.
4.12 Trend analysis. Each quarter the Information Security Manager analyses closed and open entries by source, area, requirement and root cause category, identifies repeated causes, and reports the trends with proposed systemic actions to the steering committee and to management review.
5. Records and evidence
- GOV-REG-03 Corrective action log: every nonconformity from raising to closure.
- GOV-TPL-02 Corrective action request forms with evidence attached.
- Quarterly trend analysis reports.
- Updated documents and risk entries resulting from corrective actions.
6. Exceptions
A due date may be extended once, by the executive sponsor in writing, with the reason recorded in GOV-REG-03. The verification period in 4.9 may be shortened only where the control runs continuously and the verifier can test at least twenty-five records.
7. Review and maintenance
The Information Security Manager reviews this procedure annually and after any audit finding about corrective action. Changes follow GOV-PRO-01.
8. Related documents
- GOV-TPL-02 Corrective action request form
- GOV-REG-03 Corrective action log
- GOV-PRO-02 Internal audit procedure
- GOV-PRO-03 Management review procedure
- GOV-PRO-05 Risk assessment and treatment methodology
- GOV-PRO-07 Information security incident management procedure
- PIMS-PRO-04 Personal data breach assessment and notification procedure
Risk assessment and treatment methodology
The single method [Organisation] uses to value assets, identify and score information security and privacy risks, decide how to treat them, link treatment to the Statement of Applicability, and keep the results current.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 6.1.2; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 6.1.3; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 8.2; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 8.3; ISO/IEC 27701 clause 5.4.1.2; SOC 2 CC3.1; SOC 2 CC3.2; SOC 2 CC3.3; SOC 2 CC3.4; GDPR Article 32. Owner: Information Security Manager.
1. Purpose
This methodology makes risk assessment repeatable, puts treatment decisions at the right level, and lets the Statement of Applicability trace back to the risks that justify it.
2. Scope
It applies to every risk to the confidentiality, integrity or availability of information within the scope in ISMS-STM-01, including risks from suppliers, cloud services and AI systems. Risks to individuals follow PIMS-PRO-02; AI threats use the AI-PRO-01 catalogue with these scales.
3. Roles and responsibilities
| Role |
Responsibility |
| Chief Executive Officer |
Approves the criteria and appetite; accepts Critical risks. |
| Executive sponsor |
Accepts High risks; approves the risk treatment plan. |
| Information Security Manager |
Owns this methodology and GOV-REG-05, facilitates assessments, consolidates the treatment plan, maintains ISMS-REG-01. |
| Risk owner |
Manager with authority over the asset or process; decides treatment, accepts Low risks, keeps entries current. |
| Asset owner |
Values the asset; supplies the facts on threats, vulnerabilities and controls. |
| Privacy Officer |
Joins every assessment involving personal data; links results to PIMS-REG-08. |
4. Procedure
4.1 Criteria and appetite. The Chief Executive Officer approves the scales, bands and authorities below as the risk criteria. The appetite: no risk stays High or Critical without an approved treatment plan or a time-limited acceptance under GOV-PRO-24; Medium risks are treated where the cost is proportionate.
4.2 Asset valuation. The asset owner rates each asset in GOV-REG-10 from 1 to 3 on confidentiality, integrity, availability, legal consequence and reputational consequence. The highest rating is the asset value.
| Rating |
Meaning |
| 1 |
Inconvenience absorbed within normal operations. |
| 2 |
Measurable harm: lost working time, a contractual complaint, a correctable legal exposure, local reputational damage. |
| 3 |
Serious harm: regulatory action, loss of a major customer, harm to individuals, public loss of trust. |
4.3 Identifying risks. The Information Security Manager runs a workshop with each area's asset owners at least annually. For each asset or process the group considers seven threat categories (environmental events, technical failure, human error, insider misuse, external attack, supplier failure, legal or contractual change) and six vulnerability categories (technical weakness, missing or weak control, process gap, skill or awareness gap, physical exposure, contractual gap).
4.4 Scenario method. Each risk is a scenario, not a category. The group imagines the incident, asks how it would be detected and by whom, then works back to the causes and the controls that would have prevented it. In GOV-REG-05 the scenario reads: a named threat exploits a named vulnerability on a named asset, with a stated consequence. Each scenario has one owner.
4.5 Likelihood. The group rates the likelihood within twelve months, with the controls operating today.
| Level |
Name |
Definition |
| 1 |
Rare |
No known occurrence in the sector; needs an exceptional combination of events. |
| 2 |
Unlikely |
Seen in comparable organisations; not expected here within five years. |
| 3 |
Possible |
Could occur within one to five years; precursors seen. |
| 4 |
Likely |
Expected within the year; happened here or at a close peer in the last three years. |
| 5 |
Almost certain |
Expected more than once a year, or already occurring. |
4.6 Impact. The group rates the worst credible consequence, considering the asset value and the five dimensions in 4.2.
| Level |
Name |
Definition |
| 1 |
Negligible |
Absorbed within the day; no external party affected; cost below [Number]. |
| 2 |
Minor |
Disruption under one day; a few individuals or one customer affected; no notification. |
| 3 |
Moderate |
Disruption of one to three days; a notifiable breach or contractual breach possible; cost up to [Number]. |
| 4 |
Major |
Disruption over three days; regulatory notification; loss of a key customer; significant harm to individuals. |
| 5 |
Severe |
Threatens the viability of a service or the organisation; enforcement action; serious harm to many individuals. |
4.7 Score, matrix and band. The score is likelihood multiplied by impact: 1 to 4 Low, 5 to 9 Medium, 10 to 15 High, 16 to 25 Critical. GOV-REG-05 calculates both.
| Likelihood and impact |
Impact 1 |
Impact 2 |
Impact 3 |
Impact 4 |
Impact 5 |
| Likelihood 5 |
5 Medium |
10 High |
15 High |
20 Critical |
25 Critical |
| Likelihood 4 |
4 Low |
8 Medium |
12 High |
16 Critical |
20 Critical |
| Likelihood 3 |
3 Low |
6 Medium |
9 Medium |
12 High |
15 High |
| Likelihood 2 |
2 Low |
4 Low |
6 Medium |
8 Medium |
10 High |
| Likelihood 1 |
1 Low |
2 Low |
3 Low |
4 Low |
5 Medium |
4.8 Acceptance authority. One authority per band accepts the risk or approves its treatment plan.
| Band |
Authority |
Condition |
| Low |
Risk owner |
Record the decision; review annually. |
| Medium |
Information Security Manager with the risk owner |
Treat where proportionate, else accept with a reason; review twice a year. |
| High |
Executive sponsor |
Treatment plan required; acceptance only under GOV-PRO-24, at most twelve months; review quarterly. |
| Critical |
Chief Executive Officer |
Treatment starts within thirty days; acceptance only under GOV-PRO-24, at most ninety days; review monthly until High or below. |
4.9 Treatment options. The risk owner records one option in GOV-REG-05: Modify (add or improve controls), Retain (accept at the current rating under 4.8), Avoid (stop or change the activity), or Share (insurance or contract; accountability stays with the organisation).
4.10 Link to the Statement of Applicability. For every Modify treatment the risk owner names the Annex A controls and implementing kit documents in the treatment plan column. The Information Security Manager marks those controls Applicable in ISMS-REG-01 with the risk IDs as justification. A control marked Not applicable may not appear in any treatment plan. Controls applicable for legal or contractual reasons alone cite GOV-REG-04.
4.11 Raw, treated and target ratings. Raw: likelihood and impact today, with existing controls as they actually operate. Treated: the residual values expected once the treatment is implemented and verified. Target: the band the risk owner intends to reach, within appetite. GOV-REG-05 holds both and calculates both scores; the target band is stated in the treatment plan.
4.12 Risk treatment plan. The Information Security Manager consolidates all Modify treatments into one plan with actions, owners, resources, due dates and residual ratings. The executive sponsor approves the plan, risk owners approve their entries, and the authority in 4.8 accepts each residual risk in writing.
4.13 Review and triggers. The Information Security Manager reviews GOV-REG-05 at the frequency in 4.8 and reassesses everything at least annually. Affected scenarios are reassessed within twenty working days of an incident or breach, an audit finding, a new system, supplier or processing activity, a significant change to architecture, location or organisation, a legal or contractual change, credible threat intelligence, or a DPIA result. Each assessment leaves a dated record of attendees, scenarios, ratings and decisions; superseded ratings are kept.
5. Records and evidence
- GOV-REG-05 Information security risk register.
- GOV-REG-06 Risk acceptance and exception register.
- ISMS-REG-01 Statement of Applicability.
- The approved risk treatment plan and workshop records.
6. Exceptions
No alternative scale or band may be used. A unit reporting on a corporate scale maps this scale to it in writing, approved by the Information Security Manager, without changing the ratings here.
7. Review and maintenance
The Information Security Manager reviews this methodology annually, after any audit finding about risk management, and when the appetite, scope or frameworks change. The Chief Executive Officer approves changes to scales, bands or authorities.
8. Related documents
- GOV-REG-05 Information security risk register
- GOV-REG-06 Risk acceptance and exception register
- ISMS-REG-01 Statement of Applicability
- GOV-PRO-24 Exception and risk acceptance procedure
Supplier and Third Party Security Procedure
How suppliers and other third parties are tiered, assessed before use, bound by contract, monitored while in use and exited without losing or exposing information.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 5.19; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 5.20; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 5.21; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 5.22; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 5.23; ISO/IEC 27701 clause 7.2.6; ISO/IEC 27701 Annex B 8.5.6; SOC 2 CC9.2; GDPR Article 28. Owner: Information Security Manager.
1. Purpose
This procedure controls the risk that a supplier, contractor or cloud service brings to [Organisation]'s information, so that the organisation knows which third parties can reach its information, has assessed each in proportion to that reach, holds the right contract terms, and can leave any of them without losing or exposing data.
2. Scope
It applies to every external party that stores, processes, transmits or can access [Organisation]'s information or systems: cloud and software services, hosting and managed service providers, contractors with accounts, advisers who receive confidential material, and their sub-processors. Where [Organisation] is a processor for its clients, client obligations flow down through this procedure. Suppliers of goods with no information access are recorded at Tier 4 only.
3. Roles and responsibilities
| Role |
Responsibility |
| Supplier owner |
The business role that requested the supplier. Tiers it, collects evidence, holds the reviews, runs the exit. |
| Information Security Manager |
Sets tier criteria, assesses due diligence, approves security terms for Tier 1 and Tier 2, keeps GOV-REG-07. |
| Privacy Officer |
Decides whether the supplier is a processor, approves processor terms and transfer safeguards, keeps PIMS-REG-06. |
| Procurement or finance [Role] |
Releases no purchase order or payment for a supplier not Approved or Conditional in GOV-REG-07. |
| Legal [Role] |
Confirms the contract carries the clauses in step 4.5. |
| Supplier |
Answers truthfully, provides evidence, notifies incidents within the contracted time, cooperates with reviews and exit. |
4. Procedure
4.1 Tiering. Before any contract, trial or free account, the supplier owner assigns the highest tier whose criteria apply and records it in GOV-REG-07.
| Tier |
Criteria |
Examples |
| 1 Critical |
Holds Restricted information or personal data of more than [Number] individuals, holds privileged access to production, or its failure stops a critical service within one day |
Hosting platform, identity provider, payroll processor |
| 2 Important |
Holds Confidential information or any personal data, or has user-level access to internal systems |
Collaboration tools, source code hosting, contractor with an account |
| 3 Standard |
Holds Internal information only and is readily replaceable |
Training provider, travel booking |
| 4 Low |
No access to information or systems |
Office supplies, catering |
4.2 Due diligence. The supplier owner collects the evidence for the tier and the Information Security Manager assesses it before approval. Tier 1: the full GOV-TPL-04 questionnaire, a current independent certificate or assurance report covering the service, review of that report under SOC-PRO-02, a penetration test summary from the last twelve months and a financial viability check. Tier 2: the full GOV-TPL-04 questionnaire, or a current certificate whose scope is confirmed to cover the service. Tier 3: the organisation, access control, incident and exit domains of GOV-TPL-04 as a self-attestation. Tier 4: the register entry only. Services with AI features are also assessed under AI-PRO-02. The score and open gaps are recorded in GOV-REG-07.
4.3 Processor determination. The Privacy Officer applies PIMS-PRO-01 to decide whether the supplier processes personal data on [Organisation]'s behalf. Where it does, no personal data is shared until processor terms meeting GDPR Article 28 are signed, using PIMS-TPL-02 or the supplier's own terms reviewed with GDPR-TPL-09. The Privacy Officer records the supplier in PIMS-REG-06, assesses any transfer outside the region under PIMS-POL-03 using GDPR-TPL-08, and records the safeguard in PIMS-REG-05.
4.4 Gaps and risk. Each gap found in due diligence is closed before approval in one of three ways: a remediation commitment with a date written into the contract, a compensating control operated by [Organisation], or an exception accepted under GOV-PRO-24 and recorded in GOV-REG-06. For Tier 1 and Tier 2 the Information Security Manager records the residual supplier risk in GOV-REG-05 using GOV-PRO-05.
4.5 Contract. Before signature the legal [Role] confirms the contract contains, as the tier requires: confidentiality; the security measures the supplier described in its answers; annual assurance evidence, and for Tier 1 a right to audit; notification of incidents affecting [Organisation] within [Number] hours of awareness (24 hours by default for Tier 1, 72 for Tier 2); sub-contracting only with prior notice and the same obligations flowed down; data location and transfer restrictions; return and verified deletion of data at exit within [Number] days; service levels and continuity commitments for Tier 1; and compliance with applicable law. The contract reference is entered in GOV-REG-07.
4.6 Onboarding. The supplier owner requests access under GOV-PRO-10 with named accounts, least privilege, multi-factor authentication and an end date. Contractors sign the confidentiality agreement and policy acknowledgement under GOV-PRO-18. Interfaces are recorded in GOV-REG-25. The Information Security Manager sets the GOV-REG-07 status to Approved, or to Conditional while a contracted remediation is open.
4.7 Monitoring in service. The supplier owner holds a service review quarterly for Tier 1 and annually for Tier 2, covering performance, incidents, service changes and sub-processor notices. The Information Security Manager tracks supplier security notices, records incidents affecting [Organisation] in GOV-REG-08, obtains renewed certificates or reports at expiry, and re-tiers the supplier when its data or access changes. A tier increase repeats step 4.2.
4.8 Annual review. By the next review date in GOV-REG-07 the supplier owner and the Information Security Manager confirm the tier, obtain current assurance, confirm the contract still describes the service, check the supplier's access against GOV-REG-12, review the year's incidents and performance, and record the outcome. The next review is set twelve months ahead, or six months for a Tier 1 supplier with an open finding.
4.9 Supplier incidents. An incident reported by or suspected at a supplier is handled under GOV-PRO-07 with the supplier owner as liaison. Where personal data is involved the Privacy Officer runs PIMS-PRO-04 from the moment [Organisation] becomes aware. A supplier that misses its notification obligation is recorded as a nonconformity in GOV-REG-03 and its tier and status are reviewed.
4.10 Exit. On termination or non-renewal the supplier owner removes access within one working day under GOV-PRO-10, obtains the data in an agreed format, obtains written confirmation of deletion including backups, revokes the keys and interfaces recorded in GOV-REG-18 and GOV-REG-25, and sets the status to Exited with the confirmation reference. Tier 1 suppliers have an exit plan from onboarding, and a data export is tested at least annually under GOV-PRO-26.
4.11 Sub-processors engaged by [Organisation]. Where [Organisation] processes personal data for clients, every supplier that touches that data is approved under this procedure, listed in PIMS-REG-06, and notified to clients as each client contract requires before it starts work.
5. Records and evidence
- GOV-REG-07 Supplier register: one row per supplier with tier, assurance, contract, reviews and status.
- Completed GOV-TPL-04 questionnaires, certificates and assurance reports with assessment notes.
- Signed contracts and processor terms; entries in PIMS-REG-06 and PIMS-REG-05.
- Service review, annual review and exit records with deletion confirmations.
- Supplier risks in GOV-REG-05 and exceptions in GOV-REG-06.
6. Exceptions
A Tier 1 or Tier 2 supplier may start work before due diligence completes only with the Chief Executive Officer's written approval, a completion date within thirty days and an entry in GOV-REG-06. Free, trial and personally registered services that hold Internal or higher information are not exempt. No other exception applies.
7. Review and maintenance
The Information Security Manager reviews this procedure annually, after any Severity 1 or Severity 2 supplier incident, after a change in processor obligations or applicable law, and after an audit finding about suppliers. Changes follow GOV-PRO-01.
8. Related documents
- GOV-TPL-04 Supplier security and privacy questionnaire
- GOV-REG-07 Supplier register
- GOV-PRO-07 Information security incident management procedure
- GOV-PRO-24 Exception and risk acceptance procedure
- GOV-PRO-26 Cloud services security procedure
- PIMS-PRO-01 Determining controller and processor roles
- PIMS-TPL-02 Data processing agreement template
Information Security Incident Management Procedure
How security events are reported, triaged, graded, contained, investigated, recovered from, communicated and reviewed, and when a personal data breach process is started alongside.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 5.24; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 5.25; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 5.26; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 5.27; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 5.28; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 6.8; SOC 2 CC7.3; SOC 2 CC7.4; SOC 2 CC7.5. Owner: Information Security Manager.
1. Purpose
This procedure gets every security event reported quickly, graded consistently and handled by named roles, so that harm is limited, evidence survives, notification duties are met on time and each incident makes the next one less likely.
2. Scope
It covers every event and incident affecting the confidentiality, integrity or availability of [Organisation]'s information, systems, services or people, wherever it occurs, including suspected incidents, near misses and incidents reported by clients or suppliers. Where personal data is involved PIMS-PRO-04 runs alongside this procedure. Where an AI system is involved AI-PRO-03 applies in addition.
3. Roles and responsibilities
| Role |
Responsibility |
| All staff and contractors |
Report events within one hour of noticing, preserve what they see, do not investigate or discuss outside the response team. |
| First responder [Role] |
Logs the report in GOV-REG-08, triages within one hour, escalates to the Incident Lead. |
| Incident Lead |
The Information Security Manager or a named delegate. Declares the incident, sets severity, directs the response, keeps the record, decides closure, chairs the review. |
| Technical lead |
Contains, collects evidence, eradicates and recovers, with system owners. |
| Communications lead |
Drafts internal updates and external statements and holds the single approved version. |
| Privacy Officer and legal adviser |
Decide regulatory, contractual and data subject notifications, set evidence preservation requirements, liaise with authorities. |
| Executive sponsor |
The Chief Executive Officer or delegate. Approves external communication and decisions that stop a service or involve law enforcement. |
4. Procedure
4.1 Reporting. Staff report through [Channel], published in GOV-POL-02 and at induction, within one hour of noticing an event. External parties use the contact published under GOV-PRO-27. Suppliers report within their contracted time. The first responder records every report in GOV-REG-08 with a reference in the form [Prefix]-[Year]-[Number], the reporter, the times detected and reported, and the affected assets.
4.2 Triage. Within one hour the Incident Lead decides whether the report is a false positive (closed with the reason recorded), an event to monitor, or an incident. For an incident the Incident Lead assigns a severity from the matrix, opens a GOV-TPL-05 report and names the response team.
4.3 Severity matrix. Severity is raised as soon as the facts suggest it and lowered only on evidence.
| Severity |
Definition |
Examples |
Response targets |
| 1 Critical |
Confirmed compromise, loss or outage affecting Restricted information or a client-facing production service, a likely regulatory notification, or an attacker still active |
Ransomware on production, exfiltration of client data, compromised privileged account |
Lead engaged within 15 minutes, executive sponsor informed within one hour, updates every two hours |
| 2 High |
Confirmed incident affecting Confidential information or one internal service, limited to few systems or individuals |
Standard account takeover, malware on one endpoint, personal data sent to the wrong recipient |
Lead within one hour, sponsor informed within four hours, daily updates |
| 3 Medium |
Confirmed incident with limited impact and no exposure of personal or confidential information outside [Organisation] |
Lost encrypted laptop, phishing click with no credentials entered, policy breach without exposure |
Lead within four hours, working hours response, closed within ten working days |
| 4 Low |
Event that did not become an incident, or a near miss |
Blocked phishing campaign, vulnerability found before exploitation |
Recorded and trended monthly |
4.4 Personal data breach trigger. When an incident involves personal data, through loss, destruction, alteration, unauthorised disclosure or unauthorised access, the Incident Lead informs the Privacy Officer immediately and records the time [Organisation] became aware. PIMS-PRO-04 starts at that time, including the 72 hour assessment clock and, where [Organisation] is a processor, notification to the controller without undue delay.
4.5 Containment. The technical lead disables accounts, revokes sessions and tokens, blocks indicators and isolates hosts, keeping them powered where memory evidence is needed. Credentials that may have been exposed are rotated. Actions that affect client service need the Incident Lead's approval. Emergency changes are recorded under GOV-PRO-09 within one working day.
4.6 Evidence preservation. Before any action that would alter evidence, the technical lead copies the relevant logs under GOV-PRO-14, images affected systems for Severity 1 and Severity 2, records a hash value for every collected file, keeps a chain of custody record (who, what, when, where stored) and stores everything in a restricted evidence location. Screenshots show the account, system and time. Evidence is retained until closure plus the retention period, or longer under legal hold.
4.7 Investigation and eradication. The technical lead establishes the entry point, the timeline, the accounts and data affected and the extent of spread, then removes the cause: malware, the unauthorised access path, or the vulnerable component, patched under GOV-PRO-11 or reconfigured. Persistence is checked before recovery: new accounts, keys, scheduled tasks, mail rules and changed permissions.
4.8 Recovery. Systems are restored from clean backups under GOV-PRO-12 or rebuilt, verified before return to service, and monitored more closely for [Number] days. The system owner confirms return to normal service. Where recovery exceeds the recovery time objective, GOV-PRO-13 is invoked.
4.9 Communication. The Incident Lead issues internal updates at the severity cadence on a need to know basis. No statement goes to clients, regulators, data subjects, media, insurers, law enforcement or suppliers without the executive sponsor's approval and review by the Privacy Officer and legal adviser. Regulatory and data subject notifications follow PIMS-PRO-04 and GDPR-TPL-10; contractual notifications follow the timelines recorded in GOV-REG-04. Every notification is logged in GOV-TPL-05 with time, recipient and content.
4.10 Closure. The Incident Lead closes the incident when the cause is removed, service is recovered, notifications are complete, evidence is stored, GOV-TPL-05 is complete and GOV-REG-08 holds the containment and resolution times, root cause and lessons.
4.11 Post-incident review. For every Severity 1 and Severity 2 incident, and any Severity 3 incident the Incident Lead selects, the Incident Lead holds a review within ten working days of closure using GOV-TPL-11. Actions are raised in GOV-REG-03 under GOV-PRO-04, GOV-REG-05 is updated, control changes go through GOV-PRO-09, and human factor findings feed GOV-PRO-08.
4.12 Metrics. The Information Security Manager reports monthly: events and incidents by type and severity, time to detect, report, contain and recover, the share of reviews held within ten working days, and overdue actions. The quarterly trend goes to management review under GOV-PRO-03 and to GOV-REG-21.
4.13 Exercise. The Incident Lead runs a tabletop exercise at least annually on a Severity 1 scenario that includes a personal data breach, records it in GOV-REG-16 and raises findings in GOV-REG-03.
5. Records and evidence
- GOV-REG-08 Incident register: every event and incident with times, severity, breach flag, root cause and status.
- GOV-TPL-05 Incident report form per incident, with timeline and notification log.
- GOV-TPL-11 Post-incident review per Severity 1 and Severity 2 incident.
- Evidence files with hash values and chain of custody records.
- PIMS-REG-03 for personal data breaches, GOV-REG-16 for exercises, GOV-REG-03 for actions.
6. Exceptions
There is no exception to reporting. Where a Severity 1 incident makes the normal approval route unavailable, the Incident Lead acts and records the approvals obtained afterwards within one working day.
7. Review and maintenance
The Information Security Manager reviews this procedure annually, after every Severity 1 incident, after each exercise, after an audit finding and after a change in notification law or client contract terms. Changes follow GOV-PRO-01.
8. Related documents
- GOV-TPL-05 Incident report form
- GOV-TPL-11 Post-incident review template
- GOV-REG-08 Incident register
- PIMS-PRO-04 Personal data breach assessment and notification procedure
- GOV-PRO-04 Nonconformity and corrective action procedure
- GOV-PRO-06 Supplier and third party security procedure
- AI-PRO-03 AI incident and model failure handling procedure
Security and privacy awareness and training procedure
How every person who works for [Organisation] receives the security and privacy knowledge their role needs, from induction through annual refreshers, role-based modules and phishing simulation, and how the results are recorded and measured.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 7.2; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 7.3; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 6.3; ISO/IEC 27701 clause 6.4.2.2; SOC 2 CC1.4; SOC 2 CC2.2. Owner: Information Security Manager.
1. Purpose
This procedure sets out how [Organisation] plans, delivers, records and measures security and privacy awareness and training, so that every person understands the policies that apply to them, recognises the attacks they are most likely to face, and knows how to report a problem.
2. Scope
It applies to employees, contractors, temporary staff and interns who hold an account on any [Organisation] system or who handle [Organisation] information. Supplier personnel are covered through the supplier's own training obligations under GOV-PRO-06. It covers induction, the annual refresher, role-based training, phishing simulation and awareness messages.
3. Roles and responsibilities
| Role |
Responsibility |
| Information Security Manager |
Owns the programme, approves content, runs the phishing simulation, keeps GOV-REG-09 and reports results to the steering committee. |
| Privacy Officer |
Writes and approves the privacy modules and the role-based training for staff who handle personal data. |
| Line manager |
Confirms that each new starter completes induction on time, nominates staff for role-based training and follows up overdue training. |
| Human Resources |
Notifies the Information Security Manager of every starter, role change and leaver, and holds the signed acknowledgements. |
| Trainer |
Delivers a session, completes GOV-TPL-10 and returns it within five working days. |
| All staff |
Complete the training assigned to them by the due date and apply it. |
4. Procedure
4.1 Annual plan. Each year the Information Security Manager and the Privacy Officer write a training plan that lists every module, its audience, its delivery method, its due dates and its measure of success. The plan takes its topics from the risk register (GOV-REG-05), the incident register (GOV-REG-08), the previous year's phishing results and any audit finding about competence. The steering committee approves the plan.
4.2 Competence matrix. The Information Security Manager keeps a competence matrix listing each role group, the knowledge it needs, the module that provides it and the evidence of achievement, reviewed with the annual plan and when a new role group is created. ISMS-PRO-02 holds the matrix for roles with management system duties. The minimum content is:
| Role group |
Mandatory modules |
Frequency |
| All staff |
Induction, annual refresher, phishing simulation |
Induction once, refresher yearly, simulation quarterly |
| Developers |
Secure coding, secrets handling, dependency hygiene |
Yearly, and before the first production change |
| System administrators |
Privileged access, logging, change and backup duties |
Yearly, and before privileged access is granted |
| Personal data handlers |
Lawful handling, data subject requests, breach recognition |
Yearly, and before first access to personal data |
| Managers |
Approving access, disciplinary handling, incident escalation |
Yearly |
| Incident responders |
Incident procedure walkthrough, evidence handling |
Yearly, plus one exercise |
4.3 Induction. Human Resources tells the Information Security Manager about each starter before the start date. The starter completes the induction module within [Number] working days of starting, and in every case before being granted access to Confidential or Restricted information. Induction covers GOV-POL-03, GOV-POL-02, GOV-POL-06 and GOV-POL-04, classification and handling under GOV-PRO-16, recognising phishing and social engineering, reporting an incident under GOV-PRO-07, and the basics of personal data protection. The starter signs the policy acknowledgement, which Human Resources records in GOV-REG-23.
4.4 Annual refresher. Every person completes the refresher module within the calendar month set in the plan. It updates the induction topics with the past year's incidents, current phishing patterns and policy changes, and ends with an assessment of at least ten questions; the pass mark is [Number] per cent and a person who fails retakes the module within ten working days.
4.5 Role-based training. The line manager nominates staff for the role-based modules in the competence matrix. Role-based training is completed before the related access or duty is granted, and then yearly. The Privacy Officer delivers or approves the personal data modules. The Head of Engineering confirms each year that the developer and administrator modules reflect the current secure development and operational procedures.
4.6 Phishing simulation. The Information Security Manager runs a simulated phishing exercise at least quarterly, with a different scenario each time. Results are recorded by cohort and never used for disciplinary action on a first failure; anyone who clicked receives a short teaching page within one working day. A person who fails two consecutive simulations completes a targeted module within ten working days. The reporting rate is tracked alongside the click rate, because reporting is the behaviour the programme wants to build.
4.7 Awareness messages. Between formal modules the Information Security Manager issues a short awareness message at least monthly through the channel named in the communication plan: a current scam, a reminder of a rule, or a lesson from an incident with identifying details removed.
4.8 Delivery and recording. A trainer who delivers a live session completes GOV-TPL-10 with the content outline, attendance, assessment results and sign-off. For online modules the learning platform's completion report is the record. The Information Security Manager enters every completion, result and due date in GOV-REG-09 within five working days.
4.9 Overdue training. The Information Security Manager sends each line manager a list of overdue training monthly. Training more than thirty days overdue is reported to the steering committee, and the System Owner may suspend the person's access to Restricted information until the module is completed.
4.10 Measuring effectiveness. Each quarter the Information Security Manager reports: completion rate by module and role group, average assessment score, phishing click rate and reporting rate, the number of incidents reported by staff, and the number caused by a human error that training addresses. A measure that misses its target for two consecutive quarters raises a corrective action under GOV-PRO-04.
4.11 Content review. Every module is reviewed yearly, after a significant incident, after a change of law and after a change to a policy it teaches. The review date and reviewer are recorded against the module in the training plan.
5. Records and evidence
- GOV-REG-09 Training and awareness register: every module, person, due date, completion date and result.
- GOV-TPL-10 Awareness session record and acknowledgement: the record of each live session.
- GOV-REG-23 Policy acknowledgement register: the acknowledgements taken at induction and after policy changes.
- The approved annual training plan and competence matrix.
- Phishing simulation reports by quarter.
- The quarterly effectiveness report to the steering committee.
6. Exceptions
A person who cannot complete induction within the set period because of an absence completes it within [Number] working days of returning and is not granted access to Confidential or Restricted information in the meantime. A request to exempt a role group from a module is handled as a risk acceptance under GOV-PRO-24. No other exception applies.
7. Review and maintenance
The Information Security Manager reviews this procedure annually, after any audit finding about competence or awareness, and after an incident whose root cause was a gap in training. Changes follow GOV-PRO-01.
8. Related documents
- GOV-REG-09 Training and awareness register
- GOV-TPL-10 Awareness session record and acknowledgement
- GOV-REG-23 Policy acknowledgement register
- GOV-PRO-18 Human resources security procedure
- GOV-POL-02 Acceptable use policy
- GOV-POL-03 Information security policy
- GOV-PRO-07 Information security incident management procedure
- ISMS-PRO-02 Competence and awareness procedure
- GDPR-REG-05 Privacy training register
Change Management Procedure
How changes to production systems, infrastructure, configuration and security controls are requested, assessed, approved, tested, implemented, communicated and reviewed.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 8.32; SOC 2 CC8.1. Owner: Head of Engineering.
1. Purpose
This procedure controls change to [Organisation]'s production environment so that every change is assessed for security and service impact before it happens, approved by someone accountable for the affected system, tested, reversible, and traceable to a record that an auditor can follow from request to review.
2. Scope
It applies to changes to production infrastructure, platforms, applications, databases, network and security configuration, identity and access systems, cloud account settings, monitoring rules, and to the controls listed in the Statement of Applicability (ISMS-REG-01). It covers changes made by staff, contractors and suppliers acting on [Organisation]'s instruction. Source code work before release follows GOV-PRO-15; the release itself is a change under this procedure. Routine data entry and content updates within an application's normal use are not changes.
3. Roles and responsibilities
| Role |
Responsibility |
| Change requester |
Completes GOV-TPL-08, supplies the assessment, test and rollback material, and answers the approver's questions. |
| System Owner |
Approves changes to the system they own at Low risk, co-approves at Medium risk, and confirms the post-implementation result. |
| Head of Engineering |
Chairs the change advisory group, approves Medium and High risk changes, and authorises emergency changes. |
| Information Security Manager |
Reviews every security-relevant change, sits on the change advisory group, and samples GOV-REG-11 quarterly. |
| Implementer |
Carries out the change exactly as approved and records the outcome. Never approves their own change. |
| Tester or reviewer |
Executes the test plan or reviews the configuration before approval. Is not the implementer. |
4. Procedure
4.1 Change types. Every change is one of three types.
| Type |
Definition |
Approval |
| Standard |
A repeatable, low risk change with a documented, tested procedure that the change advisory group has pre-approved and listed in the standard change catalogue. |
Pre-approved. Each execution is still logged. |
| Normal |
Any change that is not standard and is not an emergency. |
Per the authority table in 4.4, before implementation. |
| Emergency |
A change needed within hours to resolve an incident or remove an imminent security risk. |
Head of Engineering or on-call deputy, recorded. Retrospective record within two working days. |
4.2 Request. The requester raises a change record in the change system, or on GOV-TPL-08, with: description, reason, systems and data affected, data classification, risk and impact assessment, test plan and evidence, rollback plan, implementation window, communication plan and the implementer's name. A request without a rollback plan is returned to the requester.
4.3 Risk and impact assessment. The requester rates the change Low, Medium or High using four criteria: the number of users or customers affected, the classification of data touched, whether a security control is changed, and how easily the change can be reversed. The highest criterion sets the rating. A change is security-relevant when it alters authentication, authorisation, network exposure, encryption, logging, backup, or a data flow to an external party. The Information Security Manager reviews every security-relevant change regardless of rating.
4.4 Approval authority.
| Rating |
Approver |
Lead time |
| Low |
System Owner |
Before implementation |
| Medium |
System Owner and Head of Engineering |
At least two working days before the window |
| High |
Change advisory group (Head of Engineering, Information Security Manager, affected System Owners), which meets at least weekly |
At least five working days before the window |
The approver is never the implementer. Approval is recorded with name, date and any conditions.
4.5 Standard change catalogue. The change advisory group admits a procedure to the catalogue only after it has succeeded at least three times as a normal change. The catalogue names the procedure, the systems it applies to, the roles allowed to run it and the checks performed. The group reviews the catalogue annually and removes any entry that has failed in the period.
4.6 Testing. The tester runs the test plan in a non-production environment that matches production configuration, attaches the results to the change record and states whether the change is ready. Configuration and infrastructure definition changes are peer reviewed and approved before they are merged. A change with failed or missing tests is not approved.
4.7 Scheduling and communication. The implementer schedules the change within the published maintenance windows. Affected users are told at least [Number] working days before a Medium or High change. Customer-facing notice follows the contractual commitment for each service.
4.8 Implementation. The implementer follows the approved plan and records start time, end time and result in the change record. If the success criteria are not met within the window, or an unplanned effect appears, the implementer executes the rollback plan and informs the approver. Any deviation from the approved plan stops the change until the approver agrees to the deviation in writing.
4.9 Emergency change. The implementer obtains approval from the Head of Engineering or the on-call deputy through any recorded channel, states the incident or risk that justifies it, implements with a second person present or observing where possible, and completes GOV-TPL-08 within two working days. The change advisory group reviews every emergency change at its next meeting.
4.10 Post-implementation review. The System Owner reviews every High and emergency change within five working days, and a sample of at least [Number] Low and Medium changes each month, confirming that the change achieved its purpose, caused no incidents and left documentation current. A failed change with a process cause raises a corrective action under GOV-PRO-04.
4.11 Related updates. Before the change is closed, the implementer updates the affected entries in GOV-REG-24, GOV-REG-25 and GOV-REG-10, and any network diagram or runbook the change affects. The Information Security Manager samples GOV-REG-11 quarterly to confirm each change has an approval, test evidence and a recorded result.
4.12 Supplier-initiated changes. The System Owner assesses a change notified by a supplier under its contract as a normal change and records the supplier's reference in the change record.
5. Records and evidence
- GOV-REG-11 Change log: one row per change with type, rating, approver, dates and result.
- GOV-TPL-08 Change request form, or the equivalent change record, with test evidence and rollback plan attached.
- The standard change catalogue and its annual review record.
- Change advisory group minutes.
- Post-implementation review records and the quarterly sample review.
6. Exceptions
The emergency path in 4.9 is the only exception to prior approval. A change found in production without a change record is recorded as a nonconformity under GOV-PRO-04 and, where it touched a security control, assessed as an incident under GOV-PRO-07.
7. Review and maintenance
The Head of Engineering reviews this procedure annually, after any change that caused an incident at one of the two highest severity levels in GOV-PRO-07, after an audit finding about change control, and when the deployment platform or change tooling is replaced. Changes to this procedure follow GOV-PRO-01.
8. Related documents
- GOV-TPL-08 Change request form
- GOV-REG-11 Change log
- GOV-PRO-15 Secure development lifecycle procedure
- GOV-PRO-07 Information security incident management procedure
- GOV-PRO-04 Nonconformity and corrective action procedure
- GOV-PRO-01 Document control procedure
- GOV-REG-24 Software and hardware inventory
- GOV-REG-25 Data flow and interface inventory
Access management procedure (joiners, movers, leavers, privileged access, reviews)
How access to [Organisation] systems and information is requested, approved, granted, changed, reviewed and removed for joiners, movers, leavers, privileged users, break-glass accounts and service accounts.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 5.15; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 5.16; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 5.17; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 5.18; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 8.2; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 8.3; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 8.5; ISO/IEC 27701 clause 6.6.2; SOC 2 CC6.1; SOC 2 CC6.2; SOC 2 CC6.3. Owner: Information Security Manager.
1. Purpose
This procedure controls who can reach which systems and information at [Organisation], so that every account belongs to an identified person or an approved service, carries only the rights its role needs, is reviewed on a fixed cycle, and is removed as soon as it is no longer needed.
2. Scope
It applies to every account on every system that [Organisation] owns or administers: cloud consoles, applications, databases, network devices, code repositories, collaboration tools and the physical access system. It covers employees, contractors, supplier personnel with access and automated services.
3. Roles and responsibilities
| Role |
Responsibility |
| Line manager |
Requests access for their staff, confirms the business need, reports movers and leavers on the day they are known. |
| System Owner |
Defines the access roles for the system, approves requests, runs the periodic access review. |
| Access administrator |
Grants, changes and removes access exactly as approved, records the action, holds no approval rights. |
| Information Security Manager |
Owns the procedure, keeps GOV-REG-12 and GOV-REG-13, checks that reviews happen, reports the metrics in 4.14. |
| Human Resources |
Provides the start, move and leave dates that drive the joiner, mover and leaver steps. |
| Account holder |
Uses only their own account, protects credentials under GOV-POL-06, reports access they can reach but should not. |
4. Procedure
4.1 Access model. Each System Owner defines the access roles for their system (for example reader, editor, administrator), the permissions each role carries and the job roles entitled to each. Access is granted by role, never by copying another user's rights. The role definitions are the baseline for every review.
4.2 Principles. Every account identifies one person or one named service. Shared accounts are prohibited; where a product offers only one built-in administrator account, its credential is held in the password vault, checked out by name and rotated after each use. Access follows least privilege and need to know.
4.3 Request. The line manager completes GOV-TPL-09 naming the person, the systems, the access role, the business justification and, for temporary access, the end date. A request for Restricted information also records the data owner's agreement.
4.4 Approval. The System Owner approves or declines in writing within two working days. Approval is never given by the person who will hold the access or by the administrator who will grant it. A request for more than the standard role of the job role also needs the Information Security Manager's approval.
4.5 Joiner. Human Resources gives the access administrator the start date at least [Number] working days ahead. Standard access for the job role is provisioned to work on the first day and no earlier than one working day before, and the administrator records the grant on GOV-TPL-09. Access to Confidential or Restricted information is activated only after induction training is recorded in GOV-REG-09.
4.6 Mover. When a person changes role, team or line manager, the new line manager raises a new GOV-TPL-09 within five working days. The access administrator removes the rights of the old role before adding the rights of the new one, so that rights do not accumulate. The old and new System Owners both confirm the change.
4.7 Leaver. Human Resources, or the engaging manager for a contractor, tells the access administrator the last working day as soon as it is known. All access, including remote access, email, cloud consoles, code repositories, physical tokens and any shared secret the person knew, is disabled by the end of the last working day and never later than one working day after it. For a dismissal, or a person on notice who holds privileged access, access is disabled at notification. Disabled accounts are deleted or archived after [Number] days. The remaining tasks follow GOV-CHK-01.
4.8 Privileged access. Administrative rights sit in a separate, identifiable account from the one used for email and daily work. Privileged accounts require multi-factor authentication under GOV-POL-06, are listed in GOV-REG-13 with holder, system, justification, approver and review date, and are reviewed quarterly. Privileged sessions are logged under GOV-PRO-14. Standing privileged access is granted only where time-bound elevation is not possible.
4.9 Break-glass access. Each critical system has at least one emergency account whose credential is stored sealed in the password vault, retrievable only by the System Owner or the Information Security Manager. It is used only when normal privileged access is unavailable during an incident. Every use is logged automatically, reported to the Information Security Manager within one working day, followed by a credential rotation, and recorded in GOV-REG-13.
4.10 Service accounts. Each service account has a named human owner, a documented purpose, the minimum permissions for that purpose, no interactive login where the platform allows it, and a credential kept in the approved secrets store and rotated at least annually and whenever a person who knew it leaves. Service accounts appear in GOV-REG-13 and are reviewed with privileged accounts.
4.11 Supplier access. Supplier personnel receive named accounts for a defined period under GOV-PRO-06, sponsored by a System Owner who raises the leaver step when the engagement ends.
4.12 Access reviews. Each System Owner reviews every account and its rights quarterly for systems holding Confidential or Restricted information and for all privileged accounts, and annually for every other system. The review compares an account export taken on the review date with the current staff list and the role definitions in 4.1, and marks each account keep, change or remove. The access administrator applies the changes within five working days. The Information Security Manager records the review, the counts and the export location in GOV-REG-12. A review without an export is not a review.
4.13 Authentication. Accounts are created with a one-time credential that must be changed at first use, multi-factor authentication is enrolled before first remote or privileged use, and all other rules follow GOV-POL-06.
4.14 Metrics. The Information Security Manager reports quarterly: the percentage of leavers disabled within one working day, reviews completed on time, accounts removed or changed by reviews, and privileged accounts without a current justification.
5. Records and evidence
- GOV-TPL-09 Access request and approval form for every grant and change.
- GOV-REG-12 Access review log with the export reference for each review.
- GOV-REG-13 Privileged account register, including service and break-glass accounts.
- Leaver notifications and the administrator's disable confirmations.
- Break-glass use reports and rotation records.
6. Exceptions
Temporary access outside this procedure is permitted only during an incident declared under GOV-PRO-07, is granted by the System Owner, lasts no longer than the incident, and is recorded in GOV-REG-13 within one working day. Any other departure, including a standing shared account, needs a risk acceptance under GOV-PRO-24.
7. Review and maintenance
The Information Security Manager reviews this procedure annually, after any audit finding about access control, after an incident involving misuse of access, and when a new class of system is introduced. Changes follow GOV-PRO-01.
8. Related documents
- GOV-TPL-09 Access request and approval form
- GOV-REG-12 Access review log
- GOV-REG-13 Privileged account register
- GOV-POL-06 Authentication, password and multi-factor policy
- GOV-PRO-18 Human resources security procedure
- GOV-CHK-01 Onboarding and offboarding security checklist
- GOV-PRO-14 Logging, monitoring and alert handling procedure
- GOV-PRO-21 Network security and remote access procedure
- GOV-PRO-06 Supplier and third party security procedure
- GOV-PRO-24 Exception and risk acceptance procedure
Vulnerability and Patch Management Procedure
How technical vulnerabilities in [Organisation]'s systems are discovered, rated, assigned, fixed within a severity-based deadline, verified and reported.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 8.8; SOC 2 CC7.1. Owner: Information Security Manager.
1. Purpose
This procedure finds technical vulnerabilities in [Organisation]'s systems before an attacker uses them, and fixes them within a deadline set by severity, with evidence that the fix worked.
2. Scope
It applies to every asset in GOV-REG-24 and GOV-REG-10 that runs software: servers, virtual machines, containers and their images, cloud services and their configuration, network devices, workstations and mobile devices, application code and its third party components, and software as a service that [Organisation] administers. Supplier-hosted systems are covered through the supplier's obligations under GOV-PRO-06; this procedure governs how [Organisation] tracks the supplier's remediation.
3. Roles and responsibilities
| Role |
Responsibility |
| Information Security Manager |
Owns the programme, runs or commissions scanning, triages findings, assigns owners, approves severity adjustments and reports the metrics. |
| System Owner |
Remediates findings on their systems within the deadline, or requests an exception before the deadline passes. |
| Head of Engineering |
Provides patching capacity and approves emergency patch changes. |
| Platform and endpoint administrators |
Apply operating system, platform and endpoint updates on the cycle in 4.7. |
| Developers |
Fix code and dependency findings through GOV-PRO-15. |
4. Procedure
4.1 Coverage. The Information Security Manager assigns every asset class in GOV-REG-24 a discovery method and cadence from the table in 4.3, and confirms quarterly that every production asset appears in at least one scan or inventory report from the period. An asset with no discovery method is itself recorded as a finding.
4.2 Sources. Findings come from authenticated vulnerability scans of hosts and network devices, container image and cloud configuration scans, dependency analysis in build pipelines (GOV-PRO-15), vendor and provider security advisories, threat intelligence and external reports handled under GOV-PRO-27, penetration tests, and incident investigations. Every source feeds the same register, GOV-REG-14.
4.3 Cadence by asset class.
| Asset class |
Method |
Minimum cadence |
| Internet-facing hosts and services |
Authenticated and unauthenticated scan |
Weekly |
| Internal servers, virtual machines and cloud workloads |
Authenticated scan |
Monthly |
| Container images |
Image scan |
Every build, and weekly for images running in production |
| Application dependencies |
Dependency analysis |
Every build |
| Cloud account configuration |
Configuration assessment |
Continuous, or at least weekly |
| Workstations and mobile devices |
Device management compliance report |
Monthly |
| Network devices |
Authenticated scan or configuration review |
Quarterly |
| Whole environment |
Penetration test |
Annually, and before go-live of a new internet-facing service |
4.4 Triage and severity. The Information Security Manager, or a delegate, reviews new findings within two working days, removes confirmed false positives with a written reason, and assigns a severity from the CVSS base score: Critical 9.0 to 10.0, High 7.0 to 8.9, Medium 4.0 to 6.9, Low 0.1 to 3.9. The severity is raised one band when the asset is internet-facing and holds Confidential or Restricted data, or when exploitation in the wild is reported. It is lowered one band only with a written justification approved by the Information Security Manager.
4.5 Deadlines. The found date is the date the source first reported the finding, not the date of triage. GOV-REG-14 calculates the deadline from severity and found date.
| Severity |
Fix deadline |
| Critical |
7 calendar days |
| High |
30 calendar days |
| Medium |
90 calendar days |
| Low |
Next scheduled maintenance cycle, and no later than 180 calendar days |
A finding under active exploitation on an internet-facing asset is assessed within 24 hours and mitigated within 72 hours by patch, configuration change or removal of exposure, whichever is fastest.
4.6 Remediation. The System Owner fixes the finding by patch, upgrade, configuration change or removal of the vulnerable component, through a change under GOV-PRO-09. Critical and actively exploited findings may use the emergency change path. Where no fix exists, the owner applies a compensating control (network restriction, feature disablement, additional monitoring) and records it against the finding.
4.7 Routine patching cycle. Administrators apply operating system and platform updates at least monthly, and endpoint updates automatically as they are released (GOV-PRO-22). A system that cannot receive updates because it is out of vendor support is recorded in GOV-REG-24 with its end of support date and a replacement plan, and is isolated on the network until replaced (GOV-PRO-21).
4.8 Exceptions. When a deadline cannot be met, the System Owner raises a risk acceptance under GOV-PRO-24 before the deadline passes, naming the compensating controls and an expiry no more than twelve months away. The exception reference is recorded in GOV-REG-14. An overdue finding without an approved exception is reported to the Head of Engineering weekly until fixed.
4.9 Verification. A finding moves to Fixed only when a rescan shows it absent, or when the Information Security Manager confirms the fix by inspection where a rescan is not possible. The verifier and date are recorded. A finding that reappears is reopened with its original found date.
4.10 Metrics. The Information Security Manager reports monthly: open findings by severity, findings past deadline, mean days to fix by severity, assets not scanned in the period, and exceptions in force. The report goes to the Head of Engineering and feeds management review (GOV-PRO-03) and the objectives tracker (GOV-REG-21).
4.11 Retention. Scan and analysis reports are retained for at least twelve months. GOV-REG-14 is retained for the life of the management system.
5. Records and evidence
- GOV-REG-14 Vulnerability register: every finding with source, severity, deadline, owner, status and verification.
- Scan, image and dependency analysis reports.
- Penetration test reports and retest evidence.
- Risk acceptances in GOV-REG-06 for findings past deadline.
- Monthly metrics reports and the quarterly coverage confirmation.
6. Exceptions
Only the risk acceptance route in 4.8 applies. Nobody may close a finding without verification, or defer one without a recorded risk acceptance.
7. Review and maintenance
The Information Security Manager reviews this procedure annually, after any incident that exploited a known vulnerability, after an audit finding, and when a customer contract sets different deadlines. Changes follow GOV-PRO-01.
8. Related documents
- GOV-REG-14 Vulnerability register
- GOV-PRO-09 Change management procedure
- GOV-PRO-15 Secure development lifecycle procedure
- GOV-PRO-21 Network security and remote access procedure
- GOV-PRO-22 Endpoint and mobile device security procedure
- GOV-PRO-27 Threat intelligence and vulnerability disclosure handling procedure
- GOV-PRO-24 Exception and risk acceptance procedure
- GOV-REG-06 Risk acceptance and exception register
- GOV-REG-24 Software and hardware inventory
- GOV-PRO-06 Supplier and third party security procedure
- GOV-PRO-03 Management review procedure
Backup and Restore Testing Procedure
What is backed up, how often and for how long, how backups are protected from the events that threaten the originals, and how restores are tested so that recovery is known to work before it is needed.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 8.13; SOC 2 A1.2. Owner: Head of Engineering.
1. Purpose
This procedure keeps [Organisation]'s information recoverable. It defines the scope, frequency, retention and protection of backups, and a restore testing cycle whose results are recorded, so that recovery objectives are met in practice.
2. Scope
It applies to all production data and the configuration needed to rebuild production services: databases, file and object storage, application configuration, infrastructure definitions, identity and access configuration, logs held for retention, source code repositories, and the administrative data of software as a service where the provider does not back it up on [Organisation]'s behalf. Personal devices and non-production environments are out of scope unless they hold the only copy of a controlled record.
3. Roles and responsibilities
| Role |
Responsibility |
| System Owner |
Decides what is backed up for their system, its frequency, retention and recovery objectives, and signs off restore tests. |
| Backup administrator |
Configures and monitors backup jobs, performs restores and restore tests, records results in GOV-REG-15. |
| Information Security Manager |
Approves the protection design, reviews GOV-REG-15 quarterly, confirms alignment with the retention schedule. |
| Head of Engineering |
Owns this procedure, provides capacity and runs the annual recovery exercise. |
| Privacy Officer |
Confirms that retention and deletion of personal data in backups meet PIMS-POL-02. |
4. Procedure
4.1 Backup requirements. For every system in GOV-REG-10, the System Owner records the data sets to back up, the recovery point objective and recovery time objective from the business impact analysis (GOV-TPL-07), and the retention period from the retention schedule (PIMS-REG-07). The backup administrator designs the schedule to meet them and records the design with the system.
4.2 Default frequency and retention. Unless the System Owner records a stricter requirement:
| Data set |
Frequency |
Retention |
| Production databases |
Continuous or point-in-time capable, with a daily full copy |
35 daily copies and 12 monthly copies |
| File and object storage |
Daily |
90 days, with versioning where the platform supports it |
| Configuration, infrastructure definitions, identity configuration |
On every change and daily |
12 months |
| Source code repositories |
Daily export to a separate account |
90 days |
| Software as a service administrative data |
Weekly export where the provider offers it |
12 months |
Retention never exceeds the period the retention schedule allows for the data, except under a recorded legal hold.
4.3 Protection. Backups are encrypted at rest with keys managed under GOV-PRO-20, stored in a separate account, subscription or physical location from the systems they protect, and at least one copy is immutable or offline for its retention period. Credentials that can delete or alter backups are separate from production administration, require multi-factor authentication, and are listed in GOV-REG-13. Backup storage is logged under GOV-PRO-14.
4.4 Monitoring. The backup administrator reviews job results every working day. A failed job is investigated the same day and rerun. Two consecutive failures for a data set with a recovery point objective of 24 hours or less are reported as an incident under GOV-PRO-07.
4.5 Quarterly restore test. Each quarter the backup administrator restores at least one data set from every system rated priority 1 or 2 in the business impact analysis, and a rotating sample of the rest so that every data set is tested at least annually. The test restores to an isolated environment; verifies integrity by record counts, checksums, application start-up and a sample of records read by the System Owner; measures the time taken against the recovery time objective; and confirms the age of the data against the recovery point objective. The result, time, verifier and defects are recorded in GOV-REG-15. A failed test raises a corrective action under GOV-PRO-04 and a retest within 30 days.
4.6 Annual recovery exercise. Once a year the Head of Engineering recovers a complete critical service from backups and infrastructure definitions into a clean environment, as part of the exercise programme in GOV-PRO-13. The exercise is recorded in GOV-REG-16 and GOV-REG-15.
4.7 Operational restores. A restore into production requires the System Owner's written request, is performed as a change under GOV-PRO-09 (emergency path during an incident), and is recorded in GOV-REG-15 with the reason. Restored data is checked for records deleted since the backup was taken; deletions required by the retention schedule or by a data subject request are re-applied within five working days.
4.8 Personal data in backups. Backups are listed in the retention schedule as a storage location. Personal data in a backup is deleted when the backup expires rather than by selective deletion, and privacy notices and request responses say so. The Privacy Officer confirms this annually.
4.9 Decommissioned systems. When a system is retired, its final backup is retained for the retention period of its data, then deleted and recorded in GOV-REG-20. Keys needed to read a retained backup are retained for the same period (GOV-REG-18).
4.10 Supplier-held backups. Where a provider performs backups, the System Owner obtains the provider's backup and restore commitments in the contract (GOV-PRO-06) and tests an export or restore at least annually, recording it in GOV-REG-15.
5. Records and evidence
- GOV-REG-15 Backup and restore test log: every restore test and operational restore with time against objective.
- Backup requirement entries per system, with the recovery objectives.
- Backup job reports and failure tickets.
- Restore requests and approvals.
- Annual recovery exercise record in GOV-REG-16.
6. Exceptions
A data set may be excluded from backup only when the System Owner records in GOV-REG-10 that it can be regenerated from another backed-up source within the recovery time objective. Shortened retention or a missed quarterly test requires a risk acceptance under GOV-PRO-24.
7. Review and maintenance
The Head of Engineering reviews this procedure annually, after a failed restore test, after any incident involving data loss or destructive malware, when the backup platform changes, and when the retention schedule changes. Changes follow GOV-PRO-01.
8. Related documents
- GOV-REG-15 Backup and restore test log
- GOV-TPL-07 Business impact analysis worksheet
- GOV-PRO-13 Business continuity and ICT readiness procedure
- GOV-REG-16 Business continuity exercise log
- GOV-PRO-20 Cryptography and key management procedure
- GOV-REG-18 Cryptographic key and certificate inventory
- PIMS-POL-02 Data retention and disposal policy
- PIMS-REG-07 Retention schedule
- GOV-PRO-14 Logging, monitoring and alert handling procedure
- GOV-PRO-07 Information security incident management procedure
- GOV-PRO-09 Change management procedure
- GOV-REG-20 Media and equipment disposal log
- GOV-REG-13 Privileged account register
- GOV-PRO-06 Supplier and third party security procedure
Business Continuity and ICT Readiness Procedure
How business impact is analysed, how continuity and ICT recovery strategies are chosen and planned, how security is maintained during a disruption, and how plans are exercised and improved.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 5.29; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 5.30; SOC 2 A1.2; SOC 2 A1.3. Owner: Information Security Manager.
1. Purpose
This procedure prepares [Organisation] to keep delivering its critical services, and to keep information secure, through a disruption. It sets how business impact is analysed, how strategies and plans are built, what the plans contain, how they are exercised and how lessons are applied.
2. Scope
It applies to all processes and systems in the management system scope (ISMS-STM-01), the people and suppliers they depend on, and the offices and remote working arrangements through which they are delivered. It covers disruptions from loss of a site, loss of a cloud provider or region, loss of a key supplier, loss of staff availability, and attacks that take systems offline.
3. Roles and responsibilities
| Role |
Responsibility |
| Crisis lead (Chief Executive Officer or named deputy) |
Activates plans, takes decisions beyond delegated authority, approves external communication. |
| Business continuity coordinator (Information Security Manager) |
Runs this procedure, maintains the plans, schedules exercises, keeps GOV-REG-16. |
| Head of Engineering |
Owns ICT readiness: recovery designs, runbooks and technical exercises. |
| Process owners and System Owners |
Complete the business impact analysis, maintain their recovery runbooks, take part in exercises. |
| Communications lead |
Prepares and issues internal and external messages approved by the crisis lead. |
4. Procedure
4.1 Business impact analysis. Each process owner completes GOV-TPL-07 for their process annually and when the process changes materially. The worksheet records dependencies (systems, data, people, suppliers, facilities), impact at four hours, one day, three days and one week, the maximum tolerable period of disruption, the recovery time objective, the recovery point objective and the minimum resources needed to operate. The coordinator consolidates the worksheets into a prioritised list of critical processes and systems, which the steering committee approves.
4.2 Strategy selection. For each critical process the coordinator and the process owner identify the options that meet the objectives (redundant infrastructure, alternative provider, manual workaround, reduced service, alternative workplace, cross-trained staff), estimate the cost and recovery time of each, and record the chosen strategy with the reason. The steering committee approves the strategies and the budget they need. A strategy that cannot meet its objective is recorded as a risk in GOV-REG-05.
4.3 ICT readiness. The Head of Engineering designs each critical system so that the approved strategy is achievable: redundancy across failure zones (GOV-PRO-19), backups that meet the recovery point objective (GOV-PRO-12), infrastructure definitions that can rebuild the service, and a documented recovery runbook stating the order of recovery, the people authorised to run it and the credentials they need, held under the break-glass arrangements in GOV-REG-13. Runbooks are reviewed after every change to the system under GOV-PRO-09.
4.4 Plan content. The business continuity plan and each recovery runbook contain: activation criteria and who may activate; roles and deputies; a contact tree held outside the primary systems; the recovery sequence and its dependencies; the minimum service to restore first; message templates for staff, customers and suppliers, and the inputs PIMS-PRO-04 needs where personal data is involved; and the point at which the plan is stood down and normal operation confirmed.
4.5 Security during disruption. Access control, logging, encryption and change control stay in force during recovery. Any relaxation (a shared recovery account, a temporary network opening, a manual process without logging) requires the crisis lead's approval, is recorded in the incident record with an expiry, and is reversed and verified before the incident closes.
4.6 Activation. A disruption is first handled as an incident under GOV-PRO-07. The incident lead recommends activation when the recovery time objective of a critical process is at risk; the crisis lead decides, and the decision and its time are recorded.
4.7 Exercise programme.
| Exercise |
Cadence |
Minimum content |
| Tabletop walkthrough of the business continuity plan |
Annually |
Scenario, decisions, communication, gaps found |
| Technical recovery test of each critical system |
Annually, may be combined with the restore test in GOV-PRO-12 |
Recovery from backups and definitions into a clean environment, time measured against the objective |
| Full exercise with relocation or remote operation |
Every two years |
End-to-end recovery of at least one critical service |
| New critical system |
Within six months of go-live |
Technical recovery test |
The coordinator sets objectives for each exercise in advance and records the outcome, the time achieved against the recovery time objective and the findings in GOV-REG-16.
4.8 Lessons and actions. Within ten working days of an exercise or a real disruption, the coordinator holds a review, records what worked and what did not, and raises each gap as an action in GOV-REG-03 with an owner and due date. Plans are updated within 30 days of the review.
4.9 Maintenance. The coordinator confirms the contact tree quarterly and reviews the plans after a change to a critical system or supplier, after an exercise or disruption, and at least annually.
5. Records and evidence
- Completed GOV-TPL-07 worksheets and the consolidated priority list with steering committee approval.
- GOV-REG-16 Business continuity exercise log: every exercise and activation with objectives, time achieved and findings.
- The business continuity plan and recovery runbooks with version history.
- Review records and the resulting GOV-REG-03 actions.
- Records of security relaxations approved during a disruption and their reversal.
6. Exceptions
A critical system may go live without a technical recovery test only under a risk acceptance in GOV-PRO-24 that fixes the test date within six months of go-live.
7. Review and maintenance
The Information Security Manager reviews this procedure annually, after any activation, after an exercise that missed its objectives, and when the critical process list changes. Changes follow GOV-PRO-01.
8. Related documents
- GOV-TPL-07 Business impact analysis worksheet
- GOV-REG-16 Business continuity exercise log
- GOV-PRO-12 Backup and restore testing procedure
- GOV-PRO-19 Capacity and availability management procedure
- GOV-PRO-07 Information security incident management procedure
- PIMS-PRO-04 Personal data breach assessment and notification procedure
- GOV-REG-05 Information security risk register
- GOV-REG-03 Corrective action log
- GOV-REG-13 Privileged account register
- GOV-PRO-24 Exception and risk acceptance procedure
- ISMS-STM-01 ISMS scope statement
Logging, Monitoring and Alert Handling Procedure
Which events every system must record, how logs are synchronised, protected and retained, how alerts are triaged and reviewed, and the limits that keep monitoring proportionate to staff privacy.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 8.15; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 8.16; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 8.17; SOC 2 CC7.2. Owner: Information Security Manager.
1. Purpose
This procedure makes security-relevant activity visible. It defines the minimum events every system records, how logs are protected and kept, how alerts are triaged within set times, how often logs are reviewed, and the privacy limits on monitoring.
2. Scope
It applies to every system in GOV-REG-24 that authenticates users, holds Confidential or Restricted data, provides a network or security function, or forms part of the production environment, including cloud control planes, identity providers, endpoints and software as a service with audit log export. Logs produced by a supplier for [Organisation]'s tenancy are in scope where export is available.
3. Roles and responsibilities
| Role |
Responsibility |
| Information Security Manager |
Owns the logging standard and the alert use cases, runs the review cadence, approves any monitoring that targets an individual. |
| Security analyst or on-call engineer |
Triages alerts within the response times in 4.6 and escalates incidents. |
| System Owner |
Connects their system's logs, maintains its event list, acts on findings. |
| Platform team |
Operates the central log store, time synchronisation and retention. |
| Privacy Officer |
Reviews monitoring use cases for proportionality and approves the staff notice. |
4. Procedure
4.1 Minimum events. Every in-scope system records at least the following.
| Event category |
Examples |
| Authentication |
Success and failure, multi-factor challenge results, password and token changes, account lockout |
| Privilege use |
Elevation to administrator, use of break-glass accounts, run-as actions |
| Account and permission changes |
Create, modify, disable, delete; group and role membership changes |
| Configuration changes |
Security settings, network rules, logging settings, deployments |
| Access to Restricted data |
Read, export, download, bulk query and sharing actions |
| Administrative actions |
Cloud console and API calls by privileged identities, key management operations |
| Security tooling |
Malware detection, scanner findings, loss prevention events, perimeter firewall denials |
| Operations |
Backup job results, job failures, service start and stop |
4.2 Log content. Each record carries a timestamp in Coordinated Universal Time, the source system, the identity acting, the action, the object acted on, the outcome and the source address where available. Logs never contain passwords, keys, session tokens or payment card numbers, and contain personal data only where needed to identify the actor or the object.
4.3 Clock synchronisation. All systems synchronise to the same trusted time source. The platform team checks drift monthly and corrects any system more than one second adrift.
4.4 Centralisation and protection. Logs are forwarded to the central log store within fifteen minutes of generation. The store is append-only for the retention period, held in an account or tenancy separate from the systems it monitors, and readable only by the security role and auditors. Administrators of a system cannot alter or delete that system's logs in the central store. Loss of a log feed for more than one hour raises an alert.
4.5 Retention. Security logs are kept online and searchable for 90 days and retained for twelve months, or longer where GOV-REG-04 or a contract requires it, then deleted. Retention of logs that contain personal data is listed in PIMS-REG-07.
4.6 Alerting and triage. The Information Security Manager maintains a documented list of alert use cases, each with a priority and an owner. Priority 1 alerts (for example a successful login to a break-glass account, malware on a server, a mass download of Restricted data) are acknowledged within 15 minutes during supported hours and by the on-call engineer outside them; Priority 2 within four hours; Priority 3 by the next working day. The analyst records the triage outcome (true positive, benign, false positive, needs tuning) against the alert. A true positive becomes an incident under GOV-PRO-07.
4.7 Review cadence. The analyst clears the alert queue every working day. The Information Security Manager reviews privileged activity and break-glass use weekly, reviews alert tuning and feed health monthly, confirms quarterly that every in-scope system in GOV-REG-24 is sending logs, and reports alert volumes, triage times and coverage gaps to the Head of Engineering monthly.
4.8 Privacy limits. Monitoring is limited to the purposes of security, service operation and legal compliance. Staff are told what is monitored through GOV-POL-02. No individual is monitored beyond the standard use cases unless the Privacy Officer and the human resources lead approve a written request stating the legal basis, scope and duration. Access to monitoring data for an investigation is granted per case, logged and time-limited. Monitoring data is not used for performance management.
4.9 Onboarding. A new system is connected to the central log store, with its event list and alert use cases confirmed, before it goes live (PB-07, GOV-REG-29).
5. Records and evidence
- The logging standard with the event list per system.
- The alert use case list and triage records.
- Weekly privileged activity reviews, monthly tuning and feed health reviews, quarterly coverage confirmations.
- Clock drift checks.
- Approvals for targeted monitoring and investigation access.
6. Exceptions
A system that cannot produce an event in 4.1 is recorded with the gap and a compensating control (for example a daily configuration comparison) under a risk acceptance in GOV-PRO-24.
7. Review and maintenance
The Information Security Manager reviews this procedure annually, after any incident where logs were missing or insufficient, after an audit finding, when the log platform changes, and when the law on workplace monitoring changes. Changes follow GOV-PRO-01.
8. Related documents
- GOV-PRO-07 Information security incident management procedure
- GOV-POL-02 Acceptable use policy
- GOV-REG-24 Software and hardware inventory
- GOV-REG-04 Legal, regulatory and contractual register
- PIMS-REG-07 Retention schedule
- GOV-PRO-24 Exception and risk acceptance procedure
- GOV-PRO-10 Access management procedure
- PB-07 Playbook: the go-live security and privacy gate
- GOV-REG-29 Go-live gate checklist
Secure Development Lifecycle Procedure
How security and privacy are built into software from requirements to release, covering threat modelling, the coding standard, peer review, pipeline checks, secrets, test data, environment separation, release approval and open source licences.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 8.25; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 8.26; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 8.27; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 8.28; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 8.29; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 8.30; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 8.31; SOC 2 CC8.1. Owner: Head of Engineering.
1. Purpose
This procedure builds security and privacy into software that [Organisation] develops or has developed for it, so that vulnerabilities are prevented or found before production and every release is traceable to reviewed, tested code.
2. Scope
It applies to all software developed by or for [Organisation] that runs in production or handles [Organisation] data: applications, interfaces, infrastructure definitions, automation scripts, data pipelines and machine learning components. It binds staff, contractors and outsourced developers. Configuration changes to third party software are covered by GOV-PRO-09.
3. Roles and responsibilities
| Role |
Responsibility |
| Head of Engineering |
Owns this procedure and the secure coding standard, approves exceptions to merge rules. |
| Product owner |
Records security and privacy requirements in the backlog and accepts them as done. |
| Developers |
Follow the standard, review peers' changes, fix findings. |
| Security champion (one per team) |
Runs threat modelling, triages pipeline findings, liaises with the Information Security Manager. |
| Information Security Manager |
Sets the analysis tooling requirements, reviews threat models for high risk systems, tracks findings in GOV-REG-14. |
| Privacy Officer |
Reviews personal data requirements under PIMS-PRO-06 and approves test data exceptions. |
4. Procedure
4.1 Security requirements. At the start of a new service or significant feature, the product owner records as backlog items with acceptance criteria: the classification of data handled, the authentication and authorisation model, logging per GOV-PRO-14, encryption per GOV-PRO-20, input validation, rate limiting, privacy requirements from PIMS-PRO-06, and legal or contractual requirements from GOV-REG-04. The feature is not accepted until these items pass.
4.2 Threat modelling. The security champion runs a threat modelling session for every new service, every new external interface, and every change to authentication, authorisation or data flows. The session draws the data flows and trust boundaries, lists threats per element using a recognised category list, decides a control or an accepted risk for each, and records the result with the design. Threat models for systems holding Restricted data are reviewed by the Information Security Manager and revisited annually.
4.3 Secure coding standard. Developers follow the standard maintained by the Head of Engineering, which covers at least: validate all input on the server; encode output for its context; use parameterised queries; use the platform's authentication and session frameworks rather than custom code; authorise every request on the server for the specific object requested; fail closed; handle errors without exposing internals; pin and verify dependencies; keep secrets out of code; log per GOV-PRO-14. Developers complete secure coding training at induction and annually (GOV-PRO-08).
4.4 Peer review. Every change to a production branch goes through a merge request that at least one developer other than the author approves after reading the change against the standard. Protected branch rules block direct pushes and merges without approval and passing checks. Changes to authentication, cryptography, payment or personal data handling are also reviewed by the security champion.
4.5 Pipeline checks. Every build runs static analysis, dependency vulnerability analysis, secret detection and licence checking. A Critical or High finding blocks the merge unless the Head of Engineering approves a time-limited exception recorded in GOV-REG-14. Findings are triaged within the deadlines in GOV-PRO-11.
4.6 Secrets management. Application secrets are generated and stored in the approved secrets store, injected at runtime, rotated per GOV-PRO-20, and never committed to a repository, placed in a ticket or shared in chat. A secret found in a repository is treated as compromised: it is rotated within one working day and the event is recorded in GOV-REG-14.
4.7 Test data. Non-production environments use synthetic or anonymised data. Production personal data may be used only with the Privacy Officer's written approval for a stated purpose and period, under the same access controls as production, and is deleted at the end of the period with the deletion recorded.
4.8 Separation of environments. Development, test and production run in separate accounts or network segments with separate credentials. Developers hold no standing write access to production. Deployments run through the pipeline under an approved change (GOV-PRO-09). Production data does not flow to lower environments except under 4.7.
4.9 Security testing. Dynamic application testing runs before each major release. A penetration test by a party independent of the development team is performed before go-live of an internet-facing service and at least annually afterwards. Findings go to GOV-REG-14 and are retested after the fix.
4.10 Release approval. A release is a change under GOV-PRO-09 and requires passing pipeline checks, peer approval, test evidence and a rollback plan. A new system also passes the go-live gate in PB-07, with the verdict recorded on GOV-TPL-12. The release record lists the components and versions deployed.
4.11 Open source and third party components. Developers use components only under licences on the approved list maintained by the Head of Engineering; copyleft and unknown licences require review before use. A component inventory is produced for every release and retained with it. Components are kept on supported versions and tracked in GOV-REG-24.
4.12 Outsourced development. Contracts with external developers require this procedure or an equivalent, [Organisation]'s ownership of the code and the right to review and test it, delivery through [Organisation]'s repositories and pipelines, and supplier management under GOV-PRO-06.
5. Records and evidence
- Backlog items with security and privacy acceptance criteria and their acceptance.
- Threat models and their reviews.
- Merge request approvals, protected branch settings and pipeline results.
- GOV-REG-14 entries for pipeline, test and penetration findings, and merge exceptions.
- Test data approvals and deletion records.
- Release records with component inventories and GOV-TPL-12 verdicts.
6. Exceptions
Merge blocking exceptions follow 4.5 and test data exceptions follow 4.7. Any other departure from this procedure requires a risk acceptance under GOV-PRO-24.
7. Review and maintenance
The Head of Engineering reviews this procedure annually, after any incident caused by a software defect, after an audit finding, and when a new language, platform or pipeline is adopted. Changes follow GOV-PRO-01.
8. Related documents
- GOV-PRO-09 Change management procedure
- GOV-PRO-11 Vulnerability and patch management procedure
- GOV-REG-14 Vulnerability register
- GOV-PRO-14 Logging, monitoring and alert handling procedure
- GOV-PRO-20 Cryptography and key management procedure
- PIMS-PRO-06 Privacy by design and by default procedure
- GOV-PRO-08 Security and privacy awareness and training procedure
- PB-07 Playbook: the go-live security and privacy gate
- GOV-TPL-12 Readiness verdict note
- GOV-PRO-06 Supplier and third party security procedure
- GOV-REG-24 Software and hardware inventory
- GOV-REG-04 Legal, regulatory and contractual register
- GOV-PRO-24 Exception and risk acceptance procedure
Asset management, classification and handling procedure
How [Organisation] keeps an inventory of information and the assets that hold it, assigns owners, classifies information into four levels, labels and handles it by level, recovers assets from leavers, and wipes or destroys media.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 5.9; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 5.10; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 5.11; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 5.12; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 5.13; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 5.14; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 7.10; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 7.14; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 8.10; SOC 2 CC6.1; SOC 2 C1.1; SOC 2 C1.2. Owner: Information Security Manager.
1. Purpose
This procedure keeps an accurate record of [Organisation]'s information and of the assets that store, process or transmit it, gives each one an accountable owner, classifies information by the harm its loss would cause, and sets the handling rules that follow from each classification.
2. Scope
It covers information in every form, including data in systems, documents, messages, recordings and printed material, and the assets that hold it: hardware, software, cloud services, storage media and paper. It applies to all staff, contractors and supplier personnel who handle [Organisation] information.
3. Roles and responsibilities
| Role |
Responsibility |
| Asset Owner |
Accountable for an asset, classifies its information, approves access, sets handling, reviews the register entry yearly. |
| Custodian |
Operates the asset day to day on the owner's instructions, for example an administrator, a team or a provider. |
| Information Security Manager |
Keeps GOV-REG-10, checks completeness, runs the yearly reconciliation. |
| IT Manager |
Keeps GOV-REG-24 current for hardware and software, issues and recovers devices, carries out disposal. |
| All staff |
Label and handle information by its level, return assets on request and on leaving. |
4. Procedure
4.1 Inventory. The Information Security Manager keeps GOV-REG-10 for information assets and the IT Manager keeps GOV-REG-24 for hardware and software. Every entry names an Asset Owner who is a role, a custodian, the location or system, the classification and the date of last review. New assets are registered before use: a new system at design, a new device at issue, a new cloud service at contract signature.
4.2 Valuation. The Asset Owner rates each information asset 1 to 3 for confidentiality, integrity and availability. The asset value is the highest of the three, as in GOV-PRO-05, and drives the classification and the risk assessment in GOV-REG-05.
4.3 Classification levels. Information is classified into one of four levels.
| Level |
Definition |
Typical examples |
| Public |
Approved for release. Disclosure causes no harm. |
Published website content, marketing material, published policies. |
| Internal |
For use inside [Organisation]. Disclosure causes minor inconvenience or embarrassment but no material harm. |
Internal procedures, organisation charts, general project plans. |
| Confidential |
Disclosure causes material harm to [Organisation], a customer or an individual, or breaches a contract or law. |
Customer data, personal data, contracts, source code, financial records, open security findings. |
| Restricted |
Disclosure causes severe harm. Access is limited to named individuals. |
Credentials and keys, special category personal data, incident details, unremediated test results, strategic plans. |
4.4 Classifying. The Asset Owner classifies information when it is created or received. Unlabelled information is treated as Internal. A collection is classified at the level of its most sensitive element. Information received from a customer carries the customer's label, or Confidential if it has none. Only the Asset Owner may lower a classification, and the change is recorded in GOV-REG-10.
4.5 Labelling. Confidential and Restricted documents carry the level in the header or footer, emails carry it at the start of the subject line, and physical media carry it on a label. Systems carry their classification in GOV-REG-10. Public and Internal items need no label on the item itself.
4.6 Handling rules. Each level is handled as follows. Detailed transfer channels are in GOV-PRO-23.
| Rule |
Public |
Internal |
Confidential |
Restricted |
| Access |
Anyone |
All staff |
Named roles approved by the owner |
Named individuals approved by the owner, reviewed quarterly |
| Storage |
Any |
Approved systems |
Approved systems, access controlled, encrypted at rest |
Approved systems, encrypted at rest, no local or personal copies |
| Transmission |
Any channel |
Organisation email and approved tools |
Encrypted in transit, approved channels only |
Encrypted in transit and at rest, approved channels, recipient verified |
| External sharing |
Free |
With a business reason |
Under contract or confidentiality agreement, owner approval, access-controlled link |
Owner's written approval per recipient, time-limited link, access logged |
| Printing |
Free |
Allowed, collect immediately |
Avoid, collect immediately, store locked |
Only with owner approval, logged, shredded the same day |
| Disposal |
Ordinary waste |
Delete, confidential waste for paper |
Secure deletion, cross-cut shredding, media logged in GOV-REG-20 |
Verified secure deletion or destruction with certificate, logged in GOV-REG-20 |
4.7 Use of assets. Daily rules for devices, accounts, media and services are in GOV-POL-02, remote working in GOV-POL-05 and clear desk in GOV-POL-04.
4.8 Return of assets. A leaver or a contractor at the end of an engagement returns every device, token, key, card and document by the last working day. The line manager checks the return against GOV-REG-24 under GOV-CHK-01 and reports anything unreturned to the Information Security Manager within two working days; the IT Manager wipes an unreturned device remotely under GOV-PRO-22. Information on a personal device is removed and the person confirms this in writing.
4.9 Secure deletion and media disposal. Before reuse or disposal, storage media is wiped by a method suited to it (cryptographic erase for encrypted media, overwrite for other magnetic media) or physically destroyed, and paper is cross-cut shredded. Data in a cloud service is deleted through the provider's documented process and the confirmation kept. Each disposal of a device or medium that held Confidential or Restricted information is recorded in GOV-REG-20 with method, date, person, witness and, for third party destruction, the certificate reference. Equipment leaves the premises for disposal only after wiping or in a locked container under a contract that requires destruction and a certificate.
4.10 Software and hardware lifecycle. GOV-REG-24 records for each product the version, patch cycle, support status and end-of-support date. Software or hardware that will reach end of support within twelve months receives an upgrade or replacement plan recorded against the entry. Unsupported software in use needs a risk acceptance under GOV-PRO-24.
4.11 Reconciliation. Each year the Information Security Manager reconciles GOV-REG-24 against an export from the device management and discovery tools and GOV-REG-10 against the list of systems in scope. Differences are corrected within thirty days and the result is reported at management review.
5. Records and evidence
- GOV-REG-10 Information asset register with owner, classification and value.
- GOV-REG-24 Software and hardware inventory with assignment, patch cycle and end-of-support dates.
- GOV-REG-20 Media and equipment disposal log and destruction certificates.
- Signed return confirmations from leavers in GOV-CHK-01.
- The yearly reconciliation report.
6. Exceptions
A one-off departure from a handling rule needs the Asset Owner's written approval, recorded against the asset. A standing departure needs a risk acceptance under GOV-PRO-24. Classification is never lowered to avoid a handling rule.
7. Review and maintenance
The Information Security Manager reviews this procedure annually, after an incident involving mishandled or lost information, and after a change in law or contract that affects classification. Changes follow GOV-PRO-01.
8. Related documents
- GOV-REG-10 Information asset register
- GOV-REG-20 Media and equipment disposal log
- GOV-REG-24 Software and hardware inventory
- GOV-POL-02 Acceptable use policy
- GOV-POL-04 Clear desk and clear screen policy
- GOV-PRO-05 Risk assessment and treatment methodology
- GOV-PRO-22 Endpoint and mobile device security procedure
- GOV-PRO-23 Information transfer and data loss prevention procedure
- GOV-CHK-01 Onboarding and offboarding security checklist
- PIMS-POL-02 Data retention and disposal policy
Physical and environmental security procedure
How [Organisation] protects its premises, secure areas, equipment and supporting utilities against unauthorised entry, damage and interference, including what still applies when the organisation runs entirely on cloud services.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 7.1; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 7.2; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 7.3; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 7.4; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 7.5; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 7.6; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 7.7; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 7.8; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 7.9; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 7.10; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 7.11; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 7.12; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 7.13; SOC 2 CC6.4; SOC 2 CC6.5. Owner: Information Security Manager.
1. Purpose
This procedure protects [Organisation]'s information and equipment from unauthorised physical access, theft, damage and environmental failure, by defining zones, controlling who enters them, siting and maintaining equipment properly and protecting the utilities it depends on.
2. Scope
It applies to every location where [Organisation] information or equipment is kept: offices, server and network rooms, storage areas, co-working spaces, home workplaces and temporary sites, and to equipment that moves between them. Data centres run by cloud providers are outside [Organisation]'s own physical controls and are assured under GOV-PRO-06 and GOV-PRO-26.
3. Roles and responsibilities
| Role |
Responsibility |
| Facilities Manager |
Operates entry controls, the visitor process and environmental systems, keeps maintenance records, co-runs the yearly inspection. |
| Information Security Manager |
Defines zones, approves secure area access lists, reviews GOV-REG-19 monthly, co-runs the yearly inspection. |
| Zone owner |
A role accountable for a secure area who keeps its access list current and approves work inside it. |
| Reception or host |
Registers visitors, issues badges, escorts, confirms sign-out. |
| All staff |
Wear badges visibly, challenge or report unbadged persons, escort their own visitors, follow GOV-POL-04. |
4. Procedure
4.1 Zones. The Information Security Manager classifies each area into one of four zones and records them on a floor plan held by the Facilities Manager: Public (reception and meeting rooms open to visitors), Office (general working areas), Secure (server and network rooms, records stores, any room where Restricted information is routinely handled) and Service (power, telecommunications entry and plant rooms). Each Secure and Service zone has a named zone owner.
4.2 Entry controls. Entry to the Office zone requires a personal badge or fob. Doors close and lock automatically and are never propped open. Secure zones require a second factor at the door (a PIN or a second badge read) and carry no external sign describing their contents. The access control system logs every entry and the logs are kept for [Number] months. A lost badge is reported within one hour and disabled on report. Zone owners review their access lists quarterly and record the review in GOV-REG-12 with the physical access system as the system reviewed.
4.3 Visitors. A host pre-registers every visitor. Reception records the visitor's name, organisation, host, purpose, time in, badge number and time out in GOV-REG-19 and checks photographic identity for entry beyond the Public zone. Visitors wear a badge that is visibly different from staff badges and are escorted at all times outside the Public zone. A visitor entering a Secure zone is recorded with the zone and the reason. Contractors with repeated work receive a time-limited badge only after the host confirms the need with the Information Security Manager. Deliveries are received in the Public zone.
4.4 Working in secure areas. Only people on the zone owner's list work unescorted in a Secure zone. Photography and recording need the zone owner's written approval. Third parties are supervised throughout. Food and drink are kept away from equipment. The area is locked whenever it is unattended, and anyone working alone in it tells the Facilities Manager before starting and after finishing.
4.5 Equipment siting. Servers and network equipment are installed in locked racks inside a Secure zone. Screens are positioned so that they cannot be read from windows, corridors or the Public zone. Equipment is kept away from water, heat sources and direct sunlight. Printers used for Confidential output sit in the Office zone with pull printing where the device supports it. Every item carries the asset tag recorded in GOV-REG-24.
4.6 Cabling. Power and data cables run in trunking, under floors or above ceilings, labelled at both ends. Patch panels sit in locked cabinets. Network points in the Public zone are disabled unless in use. Cabling is checked during the yearly inspection.
4.7 Supporting utilities. Equipment in Secure zones runs on an uninterruptible power supply that the Facilities Manager tests quarterly. Fire detection and suppression suitable for electrical equipment, temperature and humidity monitoring with alerts to the Facilities Manager, and water detection where pipework runs nearby are installed and serviced by competent contractors. Test and service dates are recorded.
4.8 Maintenance. Equipment is serviced to the manufacturer's schedule by authorised personnel, who are escorted in Secure zones. Storage media is removed or wiped under GOV-PRO-16 before equipment leaves the premises for repair, unless the repair contract requires confidentiality and the media is encrypted. Maintenance records are kept against the GOV-REG-24 entry.
4.9 Off-site assets. Equipment leaves the premises only when assigned to a named person in GOV-REG-24. Laptops and phones travel as hand luggage, are never left visible in a vehicle and are locked away at home. The rules in GOV-POL-05 apply. Loss or theft is reported within one hour under GOV-PRO-07 and handled under GOV-PRO-22.
4.10 Clear desk and disposal. GOV-POL-04 applies in every zone. Equipment and media awaiting disposal are stored in a Secure zone and disposed of under GOV-PRO-16.
4.11 Inspection. The Information Security Manager and the Facilities Manager inspect every zone yearly against this procedure, record the findings, and raise corrective actions under GOV-PRO-04.
4.12 Cloud-only and small organisations. Where [Organisation] has no server room and runs on cloud services, the following still apply: entry control, visitor registration and clear desk in the office; locked storage for paper and spare devices; encryption, asset registration and loss reporting for laptops and phones; the home working rules in GOV-POL-05; and provider data centre assurance obtained under GOV-PRO-26 and recorded in GOV-REG-07. In a shared co-working space the whole space is treated as a Public zone: [Organisation] relies on device and screen controls, keeps no Restricted paper there, and uses a lockable locker for anything left on site.
5. Records and evidence
- GOV-REG-19 Physical access and visitor log.
- Access control system logs and the quarterly access list reviews in GOV-REG-12.
- Utility test and maintenance records.
- The yearly inspection report and resulting corrective actions.
- Provider assurance records in GOV-REG-07 for cloud data centres.
6. Exceptions
Emergency services enter any zone without registration during an emergency and the Facilities Manager records the event afterwards. Unescorted access for a contractor is granted only in writing by the Information Security Manager for a stated period and is noted in GOV-REG-19. No other exception applies.
7. Review and maintenance
The Information Security Manager reviews this procedure annually, after any physical security incident, and before and after a move or change of premises. Changes follow GOV-PRO-01.
8. Related documents
- GOV-REG-19 Physical access and visitor log
- GOV-REG-12 Access review log
- GOV-REG-24 Software and hardware inventory
- GOV-POL-04 Clear desk and clear screen policy
- GOV-POL-05 Remote and mobile working policy
- GOV-PRO-16 Asset management, classification and handling procedure
- GOV-PRO-22 Endpoint and mobile device security procedure
- GOV-PRO-26 Cloud services security procedure
- GOV-PRO-07 Information security incident management procedure
Human resources security procedure
How [Organisation] screens people before they join, binds them to security and confidentiality obligations, handles breaches through a fair disciplinary process, and manages security at change of role and departure, with contractors held to the same standard.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 6.1; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 6.2; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 6.4; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 6.5; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 6.6; SOC 2 CC1.1; SOC 2 CC1.4; SOC 2 CC1.5. Owner: Human Resources Manager.
1. Purpose
This procedure makes sure that the people who work for [Organisation] are suitable for their roles, understand their security and privacy obligations before they start, are held to them fairly while they work, and leave without taking information or access with them.
2. Scope
It applies to employees, contractors, agency staff, temporary staff and interns, from the point an offer is made until obligations after departure expire. Supplier personnel are covered through the supplier contract under GOV-PRO-06.
3. Roles and responsibilities
| Role |
Responsibility |
| Human Resources Manager |
Owns this procedure, runs screening, issues contracts, keeps GOV-REG-23, runs the disciplinary process. |
| Hiring manager |
Sets the screening level with the Information Security Manager, confirms the role's access needs. |
| Information Security Manager |
Agrees screening levels, investigates suspected security breaches with Human Resources, confirms leaver access removal. |
| Privacy Officer |
Confirms that screening and monitoring are lawful and that candidates and staff receive the right privacy notices. |
| Line manager |
Reinforces obligations, reports suspected breaches, completes the mover and leaver steps. |
| Individual |
Provides accurate screening information, signs and follows the terms, returns assets and keeps confidentiality after leaving. |
4. Procedure
4.1 Screening level. Before recruitment starts, the hiring manager and the Information Security Manager assign the role a screening level, recorded in the job description: Standard, or Enhanced where the role has privileged access, routine access to Restricted information or financial authority.
4.2 Screening. Human Resources completes screening before the start date, in proportion to the level and within what local law permits. Standard screening verifies identity, the right to work, employment history for the past [Number] years, qualifications the role relies on, and two references. Enhanced screening adds a criminal record check and, for roles with financial authority, a credit check, each only where lawful. The candidate receives the applicant privacy notice (GDPR-TPL-03) and gives any consent the law requires. Human Resources keeps the results and shares only the outcome with the hiring manager. If screening cannot finish before the start date, the person is limited to Internal information until it does, and Human Resources records the decision with the Information Security Manager's agreement.
4.3 Terms and conditions. Every contract of employment or engagement includes a confidentiality obligation that survives departure, the duty to follow [Organisation] policies, the acceptable use terms in GOV-POL-02, intellectual property terms, the duty to return assets, notice of monitoring as described in GDPR-TPL-02, and the consequences of a breach. The contract is signed before the first working day.
4.4 Confidentiality agreements. A contractor, agency worker or visitor who will see Confidential or Restricted information signs a confidentiality agreement before access. The agreement names the information covered, its duration, and the duty to return or destroy information at the end. Human Resources, or the engaging manager for a short engagement, records the signed agreement in GOV-REG-23. Agreements are reviewed when the scope of access changes and at least every [Number] years.
4.5 Policy acknowledgement. Each person acknowledges the information security policy (GOV-POL-03), the acceptable use policy (GOV-POL-02) and the other policies that apply to their role at induction, after a material change to any of them, and yearly with the refresher training under GOV-PRO-08. Human Resources records each acknowledgement in GOV-REG-23 and chases any that is overdue after ten working days.
4.6 During employment. Line managers set security duties in objectives for roles that have them, release staff for the training in GOV-PRO-08, and act on the monthly overdue training list. Human Resources tells the Information Security Manager of every change of role or line manager on the day it is agreed.
4.7 Disciplinary process. A suspected breach of a security or privacy policy is reported to Human Resources and the Information Security Manager. Human Resources opens a case, the Information Security Manager preserves evidence under GOV-PRO-07, and the person is told of the allegation and given a chance to respond. Access may be suspended during the investigation where the Information Security Manager judges the risk warrants it. Outcomes are graded: informal guidance, written warning, final warning, dismissal, and referral to law enforcement where a law appears broken. The outcome weighs intent, whether the person had been trained, whether it is a repeat, and the impact. Human Resources records the case and outcome and tells the person in writing. An honest, promptly reported mistake is handled as a learning event unless it is repeated.
4.8 Change of role. When a person moves role, Human Resources notifies the line managers and the access administrator so that the mover step in GOV-PRO-10 runs within five working days. If the new role carries a higher screening level, the additional checks are completed before the new access is granted. Confidentiality obligations from the old role continue.
4.9 Termination. Human Resources notifies the Information Security Manager, the line manager, the IT Manager and the access administrator of the leaving date as soon as it is known, and the line manager runs the offboarding tasks in GOV-CHK-01. At the exit meeting Human Resources reminds the person in writing of the obligations that continue after departure and obtains confirmation that all assets and information have been returned under GOV-PRO-16. For a dismissal, or a leaver with privileged access, access is removed at or before notification under GOV-PRO-10.
4.10 Contractor equivalence. Contractors and agency staff follow every step in this procedure. The engaging manager performs the line manager duties, and the agency or contractor's own company confirms in writing before the start date that screening equivalent to the role's level has been completed. A contractor who cannot show equivalent screening is screened by Human Resources.
4.11 Records. Human Resources keeps screening records, signed contracts, confidentiality agreements, acknowledgements and disciplinary records for the periods in PIMS-POL-02 and handles them under GDPR-PRO-02.
5. Records and evidence
- GOV-REG-23 Policy acknowledgement register, including confidentiality agreements.
- Completed GOV-CHK-01 checklists for each starter and leaver.
- Screening records and the screening level in each job description.
- Signed contracts and exit confirmations.
- Disciplinary case records.
6. Exceptions
A person may start before screening is complete only with the written agreement of the Human Resources Manager and the Information Security Manager, with access limited as in 4.2 and the exception recorded on the person's file. Screening checks that local law does not permit are omitted and the omission is recorded.
7. Review and maintenance
The Human Resources Manager reviews this procedure annually with the Information Security Manager, after an incident caused by an insider, after a disciplinary case that exposed a gap, and after a change in employment or data protection law. Changes follow GOV-PRO-01.
8. Related documents
- GOV-CHK-01 Onboarding and offboarding security checklist
- GOV-REG-23 Policy acknowledgement register
- GOV-PRO-08 Security and privacy awareness and training procedure
- GOV-PRO-10 Access management procedure (joiners, movers, leavers, privileged access, reviews)
- GOV-PRO-16 Asset management, classification and handling procedure
- GOV-POL-02 Acceptable use policy
- GOV-PRO-07 Information security incident management procedure
- GDPR-TPL-02 Employee privacy notice template
- GDPR-TPL-03 Job applicant privacy notice template
- GDPR-PRO-02 HR data handling procedure
- PIMS-POL-02 Data retention and disposal policy
Capacity and Availability Management Procedure
What is monitored, the thresholds that trigger action, how demand is forecast, how redundancy is designed and tested, and how capacity problems link to incident handling.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 8.6; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 8.14; SOC 2 A1.1. Owner: Head of Engineering.
1. Purpose
This procedure keeps [Organisation]'s services available and performing within agreed levels, by monitoring capacity against thresholds, forecasting demand before it becomes a problem, and designing and testing redundancy for critical systems.
2. Scope
It applies to production systems and the shared services they depend on: compute, memory, storage, database capacity, network bandwidth, message queues, licence counts, provider quotas and rate limits, certificate validity, and the on-call capacity of the teams that operate them.
3. Roles and responsibilities
| Role |
Responsibility |
| Head of Engineering |
Owns this procedure, approves capacity investment, reviews the quarterly report. |
| System Owner |
Sets the availability target and thresholds for their system, owns its forecast and its monthly entry in GOV-REG-17. |
| Platform team |
Operates monitoring, responds to threshold alerts, performs scaling changes, calculates monthly availability. |
| Information Security Manager |
Confirms that resilience decisions match the risk register and the continuity objectives. |
4. Procedure
4.1 Targets. The System Owner records for each production system an availability target (for example 99.9 percent measured monthly), the indicators that define the service as working (latency, error rate, throughput), and the recovery objectives from GOV-TPL-07. Targets promised to customers are taken from the contract.
4.2 Monitoring and thresholds. The platform team monitors every component against a warning and a critical threshold and routes critical alerts through the triage process in GOV-PRO-14. Default thresholds, which the System Owner may tighten, are:
| Metric |
Warning |
Critical |
| Processor utilisation, sustained 15 minutes |
70 percent |
85 percent |
| Memory utilisation |
75 percent |
90 percent |
| Storage used |
75 percent |
90 percent |
| Database connections or queue depth |
70 percent of limit |
90 percent of limit |
| Error rate against target |
Half the error budget consumed |
Error budget exhausted |
| Provider quota or licence count |
80 percent |
95 percent |
| Certificate validity |
30 days to expiry |
7 days to expiry |
4.3 Forecasting. Each month the System Owner reviews utilisation trends and business plans (customer onboarding, feature launches, seasonal peaks) and records in GOV-REG-17 the months of headroom at the current trend. Any component forecast to reach its critical threshold within six months gets an action with an owner and date. The Head of Engineering reviews a consolidated capacity report quarterly and approves procurement or architecture changes.
4.4 Redundancy and resilience. Critical systems, as rated in the business impact analysis, have no single point of failure within the approved strategy (GOV-PRO-13): at least two instances across separate failure zones, load balancing with health checks, replicated storage, and provider services configured for the availability tier the target needs. Failover is tested at least annually and recorded in GOV-REG-16.
4.5 Scaling. Where the platform supports it, automatic scaling rules are configured with upper limits that protect cost and downstream systems. Manual scaling and changes to the limits are changes under GOV-PRO-09.
4.6 Demand management. Public interfaces enforce rate limits and request size limits. Batch and reporting jobs run outside peak hours. Abusive traffic is blocked at the edge and the event is reported under GOV-PRO-14.
4.7 Measurement. The platform team calculates availability and performance against target each month from monitoring data, excluding only maintenance windows announced under GOV-PRO-09, and records the result in GOV-REG-17. A missed target triggers a review by the System Owner within ten working days, with actions recorded.
4.8 Incident link. A critical threshold breach that degrades service is handled as an incident under GOV-PRO-07. The post-incident review states whether capacity or resilience was a cause; resulting actions are recorded in GOV-REG-17 and, where they need investment, as a risk in GOV-REG-05.
4.9 Reclamation. Idle instances, unused capacity and expired licences identified in the monthly review are released through GOV-PRO-09.
5. Records and evidence
- GOV-REG-17 Capacity and availability log: monthly results, headroom and actions per system.
- Monitoring dashboards and alert history.
- The quarterly capacity report and the Head of Engineering's decisions.
- Failover test records in GOV-REG-16.
- Missed target reviews and their actions.
6. Exceptions
A system may run without redundancy only where its business impact rating is below the critical tier and the System Owner records the decision as a risk in GOV-REG-05.
7. Review and maintenance
The Head of Engineering reviews this procedure annually, after any availability incident at one of the two highest severity levels, after a target is missed in two consecutive months, and when the hosting platform changes. Changes follow GOV-PRO-01.
8. Related documents
- GOV-REG-17 Capacity and availability log
- GOV-PRO-14 Logging, monitoring and alert handling procedure
- GOV-PRO-13 Business continuity and ICT readiness procedure
- GOV-REG-16 Business continuity exercise log
- GOV-TPL-07 Business impact analysis worksheet
- GOV-PRO-09 Change management procedure
- GOV-PRO-07 Information security incident management procedure
- GOV-REG-05 Information security risk register
- GOV-REG-18 Cryptographic key and certificate inventory
Cryptography and Key Management Procedure
Which cryptographic methods are used for which purpose, and how the keys and certificates behind them are generated, stored, used, rotated, revoked and destroyed.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 8.24; SOC 2 CC6.1; SOC 2 CC6.7. Owner: Information Security Manager.
1. Purpose
This procedure sets the cryptographic methods [Organisation] uses for each purpose and the lifecycle of the keys and certificates behind them, so that encryption protects data in practice and keys are never the weakest point.
2. Scope
It applies to all uses of cryptography in [Organisation]'s systems: encryption of data at rest and in transit, password storage, digital signatures, message authentication, key exchange, application secrets, and public and private certificates, wherever the keys are held: cloud key management services, hardware security modules, secrets stores, certificate stores and devices.
3. Roles and responsibilities
| Role |
Responsibility |
| Information Security Manager |
Owns the approved algorithm list and this procedure, approves exceptions, reconciles GOV-REG-18 quarterly. |
| Key custodian (named per key store) |
Generates, rotates, backs up and destroys keys, under dual control where 4.4 requires it. |
| System Owner |
Identifies the cryptographic needs of their system and owns its keys and certificates in GOV-REG-18. |
| Platform team |
Operates key management services, certificate automation and expiry monitoring. |
| Developers |
Use approved libraries and the secrets store; never implement cryptographic primitives. |
4. Procedure
4.1 Approved methods by purpose. Only the following families are used. The specific algorithms, modes and parameters are chosen from current public guidance and listed in the approved algorithm list maintained by the Information Security Manager. Custom or modified algorithms are never used.
| Purpose |
Approved family |
Not permitted |
| Data at rest |
Symmetric block cipher with a key of at least 256 bits in an authenticated mode |
Unauthenticated modes, electronic codebook mode |
| Data in transit |
TLS 1.2 or later with forward-secret key exchange and authenticated cipher suites, TLS 1.3 preferred |
SSL, TLS 1.0 and 1.1, export and null ciphers |
| Hashing and integrity |
SHA-2 or SHA-3 family, and keyed hashing built on them |
MD5, and SHA-1 for any security purpose |
| Password storage |
Memory-hard or adaptive password hashing with a unique salt per password |
Fast general purpose hashes, reversible encryption |
| Digital signatures |
RSA of at least 3072 bits, or elliptic curve signatures on approved curves |
RSA below 2048 bits, DSA |
| Key exchange |
Ephemeral elliptic curve or finite field exchange of approved size |
Static or anonymous key exchange |
| Random numbers |
Cryptographically secure generators provided by the platform |
Application level pseudo-random functions |
4.2 Key generation. Production keys are generated inside the key management service or hardware security module, or by an approved library using the platform's secure random source, at the length in the approved list. Keys are never generated on a workstation, typed by hand, or derived from a password, except to protect a single user's device or archive.
4.3 Storage and access. Keys live in the key management service, hardware security module, secrets store or managed certificate store, under access roles granted through GOV-PRO-10. Private keys are not exportable unless the purpose requires it, and an exported copy is wrapped by a key of equal or greater strength. Keys and secrets never appear in source code, repository configuration, tickets, chat, email or documents. Applications receive secrets at runtime from the secrets store.
4.4 Separation of duties. Key administration roles are separate from the data administration roles of the systems the keys protect. Generation, export, destruction and recovery of root, master and key-encryption keys require two custodians acting together, each recorded. No single person holds both parts of a split secret or both factors of a recovery credential.
4.5 Rotation.
| Key or certificate |
Rotation |
| Data encryption keys |
Annually, or sooner at the volume limit of the mode |
| Key-encryption and master keys |
Every three years, with re-wrapping of dependent keys |
| Public TLS certificates |
Before expiry, with validity no longer than the public certificate authority limit, renewed by automation where possible |
| Internal certificates |
Validity no longer than one year |
| Application secrets, API keys and service credentials |
Every 90 days, and within one working day of a custodian leaving or a suspected exposure |
| Signing keys |
Every two years |
Any key is rotated at once when compromise is suspected, when a custodian leaves, or when its algorithm is withdrawn from the approved list.
4.6 Certificate lifecycle. The System Owner requests a certificate from the approved internal or public authority with the exact names needed. The platform team validates control of the names, installs the certificate, records it in GOV-REG-18 and enrols it in expiry monitoring, which alerts at 30, 14 and 7 days. A certificate whose private key is exposed is revoked within one working day and replaced. Expired or revoked certificates are removed from every endpoint.
4.7 Inventory. GOV-REG-18 records every key and certificate with purpose, system, algorithm and length, location, owner, custodian, creation date, rotation due, expiry and status. The Information Security Manager reconciles it quarterly against exports from the key management service and certificate store.
4.8 Backup, recovery and destruction. Data encryption keys and key-encryption keys are backed up in a separate protected location so that encrypted backups stay readable for their retention period (GOV-PRO-12). Keys are destroyed under dual control when the data they protect reaches the end of its retention, and the destruction is recorded. Destroying the key is an accepted method of deleting the data (GOV-PRO-16).
4.9 Compromise. A suspected key compromise is an incident under GOV-PRO-07: the key is revoked or rotated, data protected by it is re-encrypted where exposure is possible, and dependent certificates are reissued.
4.10 Legal constraints. Export, import and lawful access requirements for cryptography in the countries where [Organisation] operates are recorded in GOV-REG-04 and respected in product and deployment decisions.
5. Records and evidence
- GOV-REG-18 Cryptographic key and certificate inventory, and the quarterly reconciliation.
- The approved algorithm list and its review record.
- Dual control records for generation, export, destruction and recovery.
- Expiry alerts and renewal records.
- Key compromise incident records in GOV-REG-08.
6. Exceptions
A legacy protocol or algorithm required by an external party is permitted only under a risk acceptance in GOV-PRO-24 with compensating controls (isolation, monitoring) and an end date, recorded against the item in GOV-REG-18.
7. Review and maintenance
The Information Security Manager reviews this procedure annually, when public guidance withdraws an algorithm or parameter in use, after a key compromise, and after any outage caused by an expired certificate. Changes follow GOV-PRO-01.
8. Related documents
- GOV-REG-18 Cryptographic key and certificate inventory
- GOV-PRO-10 Access management procedure
- GOV-PRO-12 Backup and restore testing procedure
- GOV-PRO-16 Asset management, classification and handling procedure
- GOV-PRO-07 Information security incident management procedure
- GOV-REG-08 Incident register
- GOV-PRO-24 Exception and risk acceptance procedure
- GOV-REG-04 Legal, regulatory and contractual register
- GOV-PRO-21 Network security and remote access procedure
- GOV-PRO-15 Secure development lifecycle procedure
Network Security and Remote Access Procedure
How networks are segmented, how traffic is allowed by exception rather than by default, how management interfaces and remote access are protected, and how firewall rules are reviewed.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 8.20; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 8.21; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 8.22; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 8.23; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 6.7; SOC 2 CC6.6; SOC 2 CC6.7. Owner: Head of Engineering.
1. Purpose
This procedure protects [Organisation]'s networks and the services on them by segmenting them into zones, allowing only documented traffic, protecting management interfaces, requiring a multi-factor gateway for remote access, and keeping the rule base current.
2. Scope
It applies to all networks that [Organisation] controls: cloud virtual networks and security groups, office networks, wireless networks, management networks, site-to-site and remote access connections, and the edge services (load balancers, gateways, content delivery and name resolution) that expose [Organisation]'s services. Home and public networks used by staff are governed by GOV-POL-05 and by the device requirements in GOV-PRO-22.
3. Roles and responsibilities
| Role |
Responsibility |
| Head of Engineering |
Owns the network architecture and approves changes to the zone model. |
| Network or platform administrator |
Implements and documents rules, operates gateways, runs the quarterly rule review. |
| Information Security Manager |
Approves security-relevant rule changes, runs the monthly exposure review, co-signs the quarterly rule review. |
| System Owner |
Owns the rules that serve their system and confirms them at review. |
| All staff and contractors |
Connect to internal resources only through the approved remote access method. |
4. Procedure
4.1 Architecture and zones. The Head of Engineering maintains a network diagram and zone model that separates at least: public edge, application, data, management, corporate user, guest and non-production. Each zone has a written purpose and allowed traffic directions. The diagram is reviewed twice a year and after any change under GOV-PRO-09. Flows that cross zones or organisations are recorded in GOV-REG-25.
4.2 Default deny. Every firewall, security group and network access list denies inbound traffic by default and allows only documented flows. Outbound traffic from the data and management zones is restricted to named destinations. Each rule records its owner, business justification, the change reference and, for a temporary rule, an expiry date. Rules with an unrestricted source or destination on a sensitive zone are not permitted.
4.3 Segmentation. Production is separated from corporate and non-production networks with no shared credentials and no routing beyond the defined flows. Systems holding Restricted data sit in a zone reachable only from the application tier. Systems out of vendor support (GOV-PRO-11) and any operational technology are isolated in a dedicated zone with monitored access.
4.4 Management interfaces. Administrative interfaces (consoles, remote shells, database administration ports, hypervisor and cloud provider APIs) are never exposed to the internet. Administrators reach them through a bastion or privileged access gateway that requires multi-factor authentication, records sessions, and accepts connections only from managed devices. Default credentials are changed before a device is connected, management protocols are encrypted, and management traffic is logged under GOV-PRO-14.
4.5 Remote access. Staff and contractors reach internal resources only through the approved gateway (a virtual private network or an identity-aware proxy) that enforces multi-factor authentication per GOV-POL-06, checks device compliance per GOV-PRO-22, ends idle sessions after [Number] minutes, and logs every session. Access is scoped to the resources the role needs. Third party remote access is granted per engagement, limited in time, supervised or recorded, and removed on completion (GOV-PRO-10).
4.6 Wireless. Corporate wireless uses enterprise authentication with per-user credentials or device certificates and current encryption standards. Guest wireless is isolated from corporate networks and rate limited. The administrator checks offices for unauthorised access points quarterly.
4.7 Filtering. Managed devices and corporate networks resolve names through a filtering resolver that blocks known malicious domains and the categories listed in GOV-POL-02. Blocking events are logged, and staff are told about filtering through GOV-POL-02.
4.8 Edge protection. Internet-facing services sit behind a load balancer or gateway with denial-of-service protection, and behind a web application firewall where the service accepts user input. Only the ports and protocols the service needs are open. Transport encryption follows GOV-PRO-20.
4.9 Exposure review. The Information Security Manager reviews monthly the inventory of public addresses, open ports and public storage against the approved list, and records any unapproved exposure as a High finding in GOV-REG-14.
4.10 Quarterly rule review. The administrator exports every firewall and security group rule each quarter. Each System Owner confirms, removes or re-justifies their rules; expired temporary rules are deleted; the Information Security Manager co-signs the review. The record names the reviewers, the date, and the rules removed and changed.
4.11 Changes. All rule and topology changes are changes under GOV-PRO-09. A change that opens a new inbound flow from the internet, a new zone-crossing flow or a new third party connection is security-relevant and requires the Information Security Manager's approval.
5. Records and evidence
- The network diagram and zone model with review dates.
- The rule base with owner, justification and change references.
- Quarterly rule review records.
- Monthly exposure reviews and the resulting GOV-REG-14 findings.
- Remote access and management session logs.
- GOV-REG-25 Data flow and interface inventory.
6. Exceptions
The Information Security Manager may approve a temporary rule outside the model for at most 30 days, with the expiry set in the rule itself. Anything longer requires a risk acceptance under GOV-PRO-24.
7. Review and maintenance
The Head of Engineering reviews this procedure annually, after any incident that used a network path, after a redesign of the cloud network, and after an audit finding. Changes follow GOV-PRO-01.
8. Related documents
- GOV-PRO-09 Change management procedure
- GOV-PRO-14 Logging, monitoring and alert handling procedure
- GOV-PRO-20 Cryptography and key management procedure
- GOV-PRO-22 Endpoint and mobile device security procedure
- GOV-PRO-10 Access management procedure
- GOV-POL-05 Remote and mobile working policy
- GOV-POL-06 Authentication, password and multi-factor policy
- GOV-POL-02 Acceptable use policy
- GOV-REG-25 Data flow and interface inventory
- GOV-REG-14 Vulnerability register
- GOV-PRO-11 Vulnerability and patch management procedure
- GOV-PRO-24 Exception and risk acceptance procedure
Endpoint and Mobile Device Security Procedure
The baseline every laptop, desktop, phone and tablet must meet before it accesses [Organisation] information, how compliance is enforced, the conditions for personal devices, and what happens when a device is lost.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 8.1; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 8.7; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 8.9; SOC 2 CC6.8. Owner: Head of Engineering.
1. Purpose
This procedure keeps the devices that access [Organisation]'s information in a known secure state, enforces that state through device management, and defines the response when a device is lost, stolen or leaves the organisation.
2. Scope
It applies to every endpoint that accesses [Organisation] systems or data: devices owned by [Organisation], devices supplied by a contractor, and personal devices used under the conditions in 4.8. Servers and network devices are covered by GOV-CHK-02 and GOV-PRO-21.
3. Roles and responsibilities
| Role |
Responsibility |
| Head of Engineering |
Owns the endpoint baseline and the device management platform. |
| Endpoint administrator |
Enrols devices, enforces the baseline, reviews compliance, performs remote lock and wipe. |
| Information Security Manager |
Approves the baseline, reviews compliance monthly, leads lost device incidents. |
| Line manager |
Approves device issue and personal device use for their staff. |
| Device user |
Keeps the device under their control, applies updates when prompted, reports loss immediately. |
4. Procedure
4.1 Baseline. Every managed device meets the workstation baseline in GOV-CHK-02 before it accesses data. Minimum settings: full disk encryption with the recovery key escrowed in the management platform; screen lock after at most 10 minutes of inactivity with authentication to resume; host firewall enabled; malware protection active; automatic operating system and application updates; the user works without administrative rights; only software from the approved list; a managed browser; remote lock and wipe enabled; the device recorded in GOV-REG-24 with its user.
4.2 Enrolment. The endpoint administrator enrols each device in the device management platform at issue, applies the baseline profile and records the device in GOV-REG-24. Sign-in to [Organisation] services is permitted only from a device the platform reports as compliant.
4.3 Malware protection. Malware protection runs continuously on every device, updates its detection data at least daily, reports to a central console, and raises alerts into the triage process in GOV-PRO-14. Detected malware is handled under GOV-PRO-07. Removable media are scanned on connection where their use is permitted (GOV-PRO-23).
4.4 Updates. Operating system and application updates install automatically; users may defer for at most [Number] days. Critical updates follow the deadlines in GOV-PRO-11. A device running an operating system version no longer supported by its vendor is blocked until upgraded or replaced.
4.5 Administrative rights. Users hold no standing local administrator rights. Elevation for an approved task is granted just in time through the management platform, expires with the session and is logged. Developers who need elevated rights for their work receive them on a separate account or under a managed exception recorded in GOV-REG-13.
4.6 Phones and tablets. Managed phones and tablets require a passcode of at least six digits or a biometric with passcode fallback, device encryption, automatic updates, and a work profile or application container controlled by the management platform. Devices with vendor restrictions removed are refused.
4.7 Compliance monitoring. The endpoint administrator reviews the compliance report weekly and contacts the user of any non-compliant device. A device that stays non-compliant for seven days is blocked until corrected. The Information Security Manager reviews compliance figures monthly and reconciles the management platform against GOV-REG-24.
4.8 Personal devices. A personal device may access [Organisation] email, calendar and collaboration tools only when the user accepts the conditions in GOV-POL-02, enrols the work profile or container in the management platform, meets the passcode, encryption and supported-version requirements, and consents to remote wipe of the work container. Personal devices do not access systems holding Restricted data, do not store Confidential data outside the container, and are removed from the platform when the person leaves (GOV-CHK-01). [Organisation] wipes only the work container, never personal content.
4.9 Lost or stolen device. The user reports a lost or stolen device immediately, and within one hour at most, through the incident channel in GOV-PRO-07. The endpoint administrator locks the device remotely at once and wipes it if it is not recovered within [Number] hours or if it held Confidential or Restricted data. The Information Security Manager resets the user's credentials and tokens, assesses what data the device held and whether encryption was active, updates GOV-REG-24, and starts the personal data breach assessment under PIMS-PRO-04 where personal data may be affected.
4.10 Return and disposal. At the end of use the device is returned per GOV-CHK-01, wiped through the management platform, and either reissued after a fresh baseline or disposed of under GOV-PRO-16 with the record in GOV-REG-20.
5. Records and evidence
- GOV-REG-24 entries per device with user and compliance status, and the monthly reconciliation.
- Device management compliance reports and weekly follow-up records.
- GOV-CHK-02 workstation baseline with version history and the Information Security Manager's approval.
- Lost device incident records, wipe confirmations and breach assessments.
- Personal device acceptance records.
6. Exceptions
A device that cannot run the management agent (for example a test rig) is recorded in GOV-REG-24 with compensating controls, isolated per GOV-PRO-21, and covered by a risk acceptance under GOV-PRO-24.
7. Review and maintenance
The Head of Engineering reviews this procedure annually, after any incident involving an endpoint, when the management platform changes, and when a major operating system release changes the available controls. Changes follow GOV-PRO-01.
8. Related documents
- GOV-CHK-02 Secure configuration baseline checklist
- GOV-REG-24 Software and hardware inventory
- GOV-PRO-11 Vulnerability and patch management procedure
- GOV-PRO-14 Logging, monitoring and alert handling procedure
- GOV-PRO-07 Information security incident management procedure
- GOV-PRO-23 Information transfer and data loss prevention procedure
- GOV-POL-02 Acceptable use policy
- GOV-POL-05 Remote and mobile working policy
- GOV-CHK-01 Onboarding and offboarding security checklist
- GOV-PRO-16 Asset management, classification and handling procedure
- GOV-REG-20 Media and equipment disposal log
- GOV-REG-13 Privileged account register
- PIMS-PRO-04 Personal data breach assessment and notification procedure
- GOV-PRO-21 Network security and remote access procedure
- GOV-PRO-24 Exception and risk acceptance procedure
Information Transfer and Data Loss Prevention Procedure
Which channels may carry each classification of information, how external sharing is approved and reviewed, the controls on email, removable media and printing, and how exfiltration channels are monitored within privacy limits.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 5.14; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 8.12; SOC 2 C1.1; SOC 2 C1.2. Owner: Information Security Manager.
1. Purpose
This procedure controls how information leaves a system or the organisation, so that each classification travels only by a channel that protects it, external sharing is deliberate and time-limited, and loss through everyday channels is detected.
2. Scope
It applies to all transfers of [Organisation] information between people, systems and organisations by email, file sharing, messaging, system interfaces, removable media, printing and physical delivery, by staff, contractors and suppliers. Classification levels are defined in GOV-PRO-16. Transfers of personal data outside the home jurisdiction also follow PIMS-POL-03.
3. Roles and responsibilities
| Role |
Responsibility |
| Information owner (System Owner or document owner) |
Approves transfers of Confidential and Restricted information and sets the sharing conditions. |
| Information Security Manager |
Maintains the approved channel list, configures and tunes loss prevention rules, reviews alerts and sharing reports. |
| Collaboration or platform administrator |
Implements email, sharing and media controls and produces the quarterly reports. |
| Privacy Officer |
Reviews monitoring rules for proportionality and transfers of personal data. |
| All staff |
Use only approved channels and report a misdirected or unauthorised transfer within one hour. |
4. Procedure
4.1 Approved channels by classification.
| Classification |
Permitted channels |
Conditions |
| Public |
Any channel |
The owner has approved publication |
| Internal |
Corporate email, collaboration platform, corporate file sharing |
Links limited to the organisation; no personal accounts |
| Confidential |
Corporate email with transport encryption, named-recipient sharing links, approved customer or supplier portals |
Named recipients, link expiry of at most 30 days, download controls where available, owner aware |
| Restricted |
Approved secure transfer service, an encrypted file with the key sent by a separate channel, or an authenticated system interface |
Owner's written approval per transfer or per standing arrangement, recipient under contract, transfer logged |
4.2 External sharing. Sharing links default to internal. A link for an external party requires a named recipient, an expiry date and, for Confidential or above, the owner's approval recorded in the sharing platform or a ticket. Guest accounts on collaboration platforms are reviewed quarterly under GOV-PRO-10 and removed when the engagement ends. Standing transfers to a supplier or customer are covered by a contract or data processing terms (GOV-PRO-06) and listed in GOV-REG-25.
4.3 Email controls. The administrator enforces transport encryption for outbound mail, configures sender authentication for [Organisation]'s domains, warns users when a recipient is external, blocks automatic forwarding to external addresses, and blocks attachments matching Restricted data patterns unless they are encrypted. A sender who misdirects mail reports it immediately and it is handled under GOV-PRO-07.
4.4 Removable media. Writing to removable media is disabled on managed devices by default. Where a role needs it, the Information Security Manager approves the exception, the device encrypts the media automatically, and the media is recorded, returned and disposed of under GOV-PRO-16 with the record in GOV-REG-20.
4.5 Printing. Confidential documents are printed only with secure release at the printer and collected at once. Restricted documents are printed only with the owner's approval, numbered where practical, and shredded after use. Printing at home follows GOV-POL-05.
4.6 Messaging and personal services. Staff do not send [Organisation] information to personal email, consumer messaging services or personal cloud storage. Use of external AI tools follows AI-POL-01. Approved messaging platforms are configured for retention and export so that records can be produced.
4.7 Physical transfer. Media and paper carrying Confidential or Restricted information travel encrypted or sealed, by tracked courier or in the personal custody of a staff member, with a chain of custody record signed at each handover.
4.8 System interfaces. Automated transfers between systems or to third parties use authenticated, encrypted interfaces (GOV-PRO-20), are recorded in GOV-REG-25 with owner, data classification and review date, and are reviewed annually by the owner.
4.9 Monitoring of exfiltration channels. The Information Security Manager runs loss prevention rules on email, file sharing and managed endpoints for Restricted data patterns (for example payment card numbers, national identifiers, bulk exports of personal data) and for anomalous volumes. Alerts are triaged under GOV-PRO-14. Each rule is documented with its purpose; the Privacy Officer reviews the rules annually; staff are told these channels are monitored through GOV-POL-02. Content inspection is limited to what the rule needs and is not used for any other purpose.
4.10 Agreements. Before a recurring transfer with another organisation begins, the information owner confirms a signed agreement covering confidentiality, permitted use, security measures, personal data terms where relevant, incident notification, and return or deletion at the end of the relationship.
5. Records and evidence
- The approved channel list and the loss prevention rule documentation with the Privacy Officer's annual review.
- External sharing reports and quarterly guest account reviews.
- Removable media exception approvals and disposal records in GOV-REG-20.
- GOV-REG-25 Data flow and interface inventory with annual reviews.
- Chain of custody records.
- Alert triage records and misdirected transfer incidents in GOV-REG-08.
6. Exceptions
A one-off transfer outside the table in 4.1 requires the Information Security Manager's approval and a record of what was sent, to whom and how. A standing deviation requires a risk acceptance under GOV-PRO-24.
7. Review and maintenance
The Information Security Manager reviews this procedure annually, after any data loss incident, when a collaboration or email platform changes, and when a law on data transfer changes. Changes follow GOV-PRO-01.
8. Related documents
- GOV-PRO-16 Asset management, classification and handling procedure
- PIMS-POL-03 International transfer policy
- GOV-PRO-10 Access management procedure
- GOV-PRO-06 Supplier and third party security procedure
- GOV-REG-25 Data flow and interface inventory
- GOV-PRO-07 Information security incident management procedure
- GOV-REG-08 Incident register
- GOV-REG-20 Media and equipment disposal log
- GOV-POL-05 Remote and mobile working policy
- GOV-POL-02 Acceptable use policy
- AI-POL-01 Acceptable use of AI tools policy
- GOV-PRO-20 Cryptography and key management procedure
- GOV-PRO-14 Logging, monitoring and alert handling procedure
- GOV-PRO-24 Exception and risk acceptance procedure
Exception and risk acceptance procedure
How a deviation from a policy or control, or the acceptance of a risk above appetite, is requested, assessed, limited in time, approved by the right authority, recorded and reviewed before it expires.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 6.1.3; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 8.3; SOC 2 CC3.2; SOC 2 CC5.1. Owner: Information Security Manager.
1. Purpose
Controls sometimes cannot be applied as written, and some risks cannot be treated at once. This procedure makes every such case visible, time-limited and owned, so that an exception is a recorded decision rather than a quiet gap.
2. Scope
It applies to any request to deviate from a policy, procedure or control in the management system, and to any acceptance of a residual risk in the High or Critical band under GOV-PRO-05. It does not cover changes to the documents themselves, which follow GOV-PRO-01, or changes to systems, which follow GOV-PRO-09.
3. Roles and responsibilities
| Role |
Responsibility |
| Requester |
The manager responsible for the system or process. Completes GOV-TPL-06, implements compensating controls, closes or renews before expiry. |
| Information Security Manager |
Assesses the request, rates the risk, records it in GOV-REG-06, runs the expiry review, approves Low and Medium band requests. |
| Privacy Officer |
Co-assesses any request involving personal data. |
| Executive sponsor |
Approves High band requests. |
| Chief Executive Officer |
Approves Critical band requests. |
| Internal Auditor |
Samples GOV-REG-06 at each audit for expired or unreviewed entries. |
4. Procedure
4.1 When an exception is required. A requester raises an exception before a control is bypassed, a policy statement is not followed, or a High or Critical risk is left untreated. A deviation discovered after the fact is logged as a nonconformity under GOV-PRO-04 and may then be regularised through this procedure.
4.2 Request. The requester completes GOV-TPL-06 with the requirement being deviated from, the systems and data affected, the business reason, the compensating controls proposed, the duration requested and the plan for returning to full conformity. A request without a return plan is accepted only as a risk acceptance, not as an exception.
4.3 Assessment. Within five working days the Information Security Manager, with the Privacy Officer where personal data is involved, rates the risk using the scales in GOV-PRO-05 twice: once as it would stand without the compensating controls and once with them in place. Both bands are recorded on the form. The Information Security Manager also checks whether the deviation breaches an obligation in GOV-REG-04 or a customer commitment, in which case the request is refused unless the customer or regulator has agreed in writing.
4.4 Compensating controls. The requester implements the compensating controls and shows evidence that they operate before approval is given. A compensating control must reduce the band of the risk; a control that merely detects the problem after the fact is recorded as such and does not count as a band reduction unless detection leads to a response within a defined time.
4.5 Time limit. An exception or acceptance is granted for a fixed period of no more than twelve months. A Critical band acceptance is granted for no more than ninety days. There is no automatic renewal.
4.6 Approval. The authority for the band after compensating controls approves or refuses the request in writing on GOV-TPL-06.
| Band after compensating controls |
Approver |
| Low |
Information Security Manager |
| Medium |
Information Security Manager and the requester's head of function |
| High |
Executive sponsor |
| Critical |
Chief Executive Officer |
4.7 Register entry. On approval the Information Security Manager enters the exception in GOV-REG-06 with its reference, type, linked risk ID, bands before and after, approver, approval date, duration and expiry date, and sets the status to Active. The linked entry in GOV-REG-05 is updated to show the acceptance and the review date. The requester informs the owners of the affected controls.
4.8 Expiry review. Thirty days before expiry the Information Security Manager notifies the requester. The requester then does one of three things: closes the exception because the control is now implemented, with evidence; submits a new request under 4.2 with a fresh assessment; or escalates to the approver with the reason the return plan has slipped. An exception that reaches its expiry date without one of these outcomes is set to Expired, reported to the steering committee at its next meeting, and treated as a nonconformity under GOV-PRO-04.
4.9 Early review. An active exception is reassessed before expiry when the affected system changes materially, an incident touches it, or a related audit finding is raised.
4.10 Quarterly reporting. The Information Security Manager reports the number of active, expiring and expired exceptions by band to the steering committee each quarter and to management review.
5. Records and evidence
- GOV-TPL-06 Risk acceptance and exception forms, signed by the approver.
- GOV-REG-06 Risk acceptance and exception register, showing status and expiry for every entry.
- Evidence that compensating controls operate.
- Steering committee minutes recording expired exceptions.
6. Exceptions
This procedure has no exceptions. An urgent operational need is handled as an emergency change under GOV-PRO-09, followed by a request under 4.2 within five working days.
7. Review and maintenance
The Information Security Manager reviews this procedure annually and after any audit finding about exceptions or risk acceptance. Changes follow GOV-PRO-01.
8. Related documents
- GOV-TPL-06 Risk acceptance and exception form
- GOV-REG-06 Risk acceptance and exception register
- GOV-REG-05 Information security risk register
- GOV-PRO-05 Risk assessment and treatment methodology
- GOV-PRO-04 Nonconformity and corrective action procedure
- GOV-PRO-09 Change management procedure
- GOV-REG-04 Legal, regulatory and contractual register
Legal, regulatory and contractual compliance procedure
How [Organisation] identifies the laws, regulations, contracts and scheme rules that apply to its information, records them, maps each to controls and evidence, watches for change, protects intellectual property and records, and has its compliance independently reviewed.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 5.31; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 5.32; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 5.33; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 5.34; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 5.35; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 5.36; SOC 2 CC1.1; SOC 2 CC2.3; GDPR Article 24. Owner: Privacy Officer.
1. Purpose
An organisation cannot show it is compliant until it can list what it must comply with. This procedure builds and maintains that list, ties every obligation to the control and the evidence that satisfies it, and makes sure someone notices when the obligations change.
2. Scope
It covers obligations that affect information security, privacy and the records of the organisation: data protection law, sector regulation, intellectual property and licensing law, records retention duties, employment law as it touches monitoring and screening, export and sanctions rules as they touch technology, customer and supplier contract terms, and the rules of the certification and attestation schemes the organisation has joined.
3. Roles and responsibilities
| Role |
Responsibility |
| Privacy Officer |
Owns this procedure and GOV-REG-04, leads identification and change monitoring, advises on personal data obligations. |
| Information Security Manager |
Maps obligations to controls and evidence, raises gaps as risks or corrective actions. |
| Legal counsel (internal or external) |
Confirms the interpretation of each obligation and reviews contract clauses. |
| Obligation owner |
A manager named for each row of GOV-REG-04. Operates the controls and keeps the evidence. |
| Head of Engineering |
Owns software licensing and open source compliance. |
| Internal Auditor |
Performs the independent review in 4.9. |
4. Procedure
4.1 Identify by jurisdiction. The Privacy Officer lists every jurisdiction where the organisation is established, employs people, sells, hosts or stores data, or has customers who impose their own law by contract. For each, with legal counsel, the Privacy Officer identifies the obligations in the categories in section 2.
4.2 Identify by role. For each processing activity in PIMS-REG-01 the Privacy Officer records whether the organisation acts as controller, processor or both, because the obligations differ. Obligations that attach only to one role are marked accordingly in GOV-REG-04.
4.3 Record. Each obligation is entered in GOV-REG-04 with a reference, a plain description of what it requires, its source, the jurisdiction, whether it applies as Controller, Processor, Both or not at all, the obligation owner, and the review frequency. One row per distinct requirement, not one row per law.
4.4 Map to controls and evidence. The Information Security Manager names, for each row, the kit documents and the ISMS-REG-01 controls that satisfy it and the evidence that proves it, and sets the status: Compliant, Partial, Gap or Not assessed. A Gap or Partial status creates either a risk in GOV-REG-05 or a corrective action in GOV-REG-03 within ten working days, with the reference recorded in the row.
4.5 Contracts. Before a customer or supplier contract is signed, the Information Security Manager reviews its security, privacy and audit clauses. Commitments the organisation accepts are recorded in GOV-REG-04, and the supplier's obligations to the organisation are recorded in GOV-REG-07. A commitment the organisation cannot meet is refused or negotiated; it is never signed and left unrecorded.
4.6 Monitor change. The Privacy Officer subscribes to the publications of the relevant regulators, professional bodies and legal counsel, reviews GOV-REG-04 twice a year, and assesses any change in law, regulation, guidance or contract within thirty days of learning of it. A change that affects a control triggers a review of the relevant document under GOV-PRO-01 and, where needed, a risk reassessment under GOV-PRO-05.
4.7 Intellectual property. The organisation uses software, content and data only under a valid licence. The Head of Engineering keeps the licence inventory in GOV-REG-24 current, checks open source licences during development under GOV-PRO-15, and removes unlicensed software within ten working days of discovery. The organisation's own intellectual property is classified and handled under GOV-PRO-16, and staff and contractor agreements under GOV-PRO-18 assign rights in work product to the organisation.
4.8 Protection of records. Records that the law, a regulator or a contract requires are listed in the retention schedule PIMS-REG-07 with their period and trigger. The obligation owner protects them against loss, destruction, falsification and unauthorised access for that period, in a format that remains readable, and places them under legal hold when litigation or an investigation is reasonably expected. Disposal follows PIMS-POL-02.
4.9 Independent review. At least once a year, and after any significant change to the business, the law or the systems, the Internal Auditor or an external reviewer who is independent of the areas reviewed examines whether the approach to managing information security and privacy, and its implementation, still meets the obligations in GOV-REG-04 and the organisation's own policies. The result is reported to the executive sponsor and to management review, and findings follow GOV-PRO-04.
4.10 Compliance with policies in each area. Each head of function reviews, at least annually, whether their area follows the policies and procedures that apply to it, using the evidence named in those documents, and records the result. Nonconformities are raised under GOV-PRO-04.
4.11 Personal data. Obligations about personal data are met through PIMS-POL-01 and the procedures it names. The Privacy Officer confirms twice a year that every processing activity in PIMS-REG-01 has a lawful basis, a notice, a retention period and, where required, a DPIA in PIMS-REG-08.
4.12 Reporting. The Privacy Officer reports the status distribution of GOV-REG-04, open gaps and changes assessed since the last report to the steering committee quarterly and to management review.
5. Records and evidence
- GOV-REG-04 Legal, regulatory and contractual register, with status and evidence for every obligation.
- Contract review records and the clauses accepted.
- Change assessments with dates and outcomes.
- GOV-REG-24 Software and hardware inventory with licence information.
- Independent review reports and the resulting GOV-REG-03 entries.
- Area compliance review records from heads of function.
6. Exceptions
An obligation may be marked Not assessed for no more than ninety days after it is identified. A decision not to comply with an obligation is not an exception under this procedure; it is a risk accepted by the Chief Executive Officer under GOV-PRO-24 with legal advice recorded.
7. Review and maintenance
The Privacy Officer reviews this procedure annually, after any regulatory enquiry or contractual dispute about compliance, and when the organisation enters a new jurisdiction or sector. Changes follow GOV-PRO-01.
8. Related documents
- GOV-REG-04 Legal, regulatory and contractual register
- GOV-PRO-05 Risk assessment and treatment methodology
- GOV-PRO-04 Nonconformity and corrective action procedure
- GOV-PRO-24 Exception and risk acceptance procedure
- GOV-PRO-06 Supplier and third party security procedure
- GOV-REG-07 Supplier register
- GOV-REG-24 Software and hardware inventory
- GOV-PRO-15 Secure development lifecycle procedure
- GOV-PRO-16 Asset management, classification and handling procedure
- GOV-PRO-18 Human resources security procedure
- PIMS-POL-01 Privacy information management policy
- PIMS-POL-02 Data retention and disposal policy
- PIMS-REG-01 Personal data processing inventory
- PIMS-REG-07 Retention schedule
- PIMS-REG-08 DPIA register
- GDPR-GDE-02 Guide: GDPR articles mapped to kit documents and registers
Cloud Services Security Procedure
How cloud services are used securely, covering shared responsibility, account structure, region and residency decisions, identity federation, the areas that must be proved with evidence, and provider exit.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 5.23; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 8.9; SOC 2 CC6.1; SOC 2 CC9.2. Owner: Head of Engineering.
1. Purpose
This procedure sets how [Organisation] uses cloud services securely: who is responsible for what, how accounts are structured and administered, where data may be located, how identities are federated, which areas must be proved with evidence before and during use, and how the organisation would leave a provider.
2. Scope
It applies to all infrastructure, platform and software services consumed from cloud providers for [Organisation]'s business, in every account, subscription, project and tenancy that [Organisation] owns or administers, including trials and sandboxes. Assessment of the provider as a supplier follows GOV-PRO-06; this procedure covers configuration and operation of the services.
3. Roles and responsibilities
| Role |
Responsibility |
| Head of Engineering |
Owns the account structure, the guardrails and this procedure. |
| Cloud platform team |
Administers the organisation root, the landing zone, identity federation and posture monitoring. |
| System Owner |
Owns the accounts and services for their system and the evidence for the must-prove areas. |
| Information Security Manager |
Approves region decisions, reviews posture findings monthly, verifies evidence at go-live and annually. |
| Privacy Officer |
Confirms residency and processing decisions for personal data. |
4. Procedure
4.1 Shared responsibility. For each cloud service in use, the System Owner records which party is responsible for each layer: physical, host and hypervisor, network, operating system, platform, application, identity and access, data, logging and backup. The provider's assurance report (GOV-PRO-06) evidences the provider's side; this procedure and GOV-CHK-02 evidence [Organisation]'s side. The record is kept with the system's entry in GOV-REG-10.
4.2 Account structure. The cloud platform team operates a management or root account used only for organisation settings and billing, with separate accounts, subscriptions or projects for production, non-production, security and logging, and sandbox. Root or global administrator credentials are held under break-glass control: hardware-backed multi-factor authentication, credentials in a sealed store, every use alerting under GOV-PRO-14 and recorded in GOV-REG-13. Organisation-level guardrails prevent disabling audit logging, deploying outside approved regions and creating public storage without an approved exception.
4.3 Region and residency. The System Owner proposes the regions for each system from the residency obligations in GOV-REG-04, the privacy requirements in PIMS-POL-03 and customer contracts; the Information Security Manager and the Privacy Officer approve. Unapproved regions are disabled by guardrail where the provider allows it. Approved regions are recorded per system in GOV-REG-10, and provider services that replicate or process data outside the approved region are listed in GOV-REG-25 as external processing.
4.4 Identity federation. All human access to consoles and APIs comes through [Organisation]'s central identity provider with single sign-on and multi-factor authentication per GOV-POL-06. Local cloud users are limited to break-glass and documented service identities. Roles follow least privilege, privileged roles are time-bound and approved per use, and access is reviewed quarterly under GOV-PRO-10 with results in GOV-REG-12. Workloads use short-lived role credentials; any long-lived key is recorded in GOV-REG-18 and rotated under GOV-PRO-20.
4.5 Must-prove areas. Before a system goes live, and at least annually afterwards, the System Owner produces the evidence below and the Information Security Manager verifies it under the gate in PB-07 using GOV-REG-29. Each item of evidence shows the account, region, date and the identity that captured it (PB-09).
| Area |
What must be true |
Evidence to capture |
| Account and region |
Workloads run only in approved accounts and regions |
Account list from the organisation; region settings export |
| Privileged access and multi-factor |
Every privileged identity is federated with multi-factor enforced; break-glass sealed |
Identity provider policy export; privileged role membership; last break-glass use record |
| Exposure |
No unapproved public storage, addresses, ports or shared snapshots |
Posture report; public resource inventory against the approved list |
| Encryption and keys |
Storage and databases encrypted at rest; customer-managed keys for Restricted data; TLS on every endpoint |
Encryption settings export; GOV-REG-18 entries; endpoint scan |
| Logging and retention |
Audit logging on in every account and region, delivered to the central store, retained per GOV-PRO-14 |
Logging configuration export; central store retention setting |
| Backups and restore |
Backups configured per GOV-PRO-12 in a separate account and restore tested |
Backup policy export; latest GOV-REG-15 entry |
| External processing |
Every provider service and sub-processor that receives data is known and contracted |
GOV-REG-25 rows; provider sub-processor list; GOV-REG-07 entry |
4.6 Baseline and posture. Accounts meet the cloud account checks in GOV-CHK-02. A posture monitoring service evaluates configuration continuously; findings are triaged under GOV-PRO-11 with the same deadlines. Infrastructure is defined in code reviewed under GOV-PRO-15; manual console changes in production are changes under GOV-PRO-09 and are reconciled against the definitions weekly.
4.7 Tagging and ownership. Every account and resource carries tags for owner, system, environment and data classification. Untagged resources are reported weekly and removed after 30 days if unclaimed.
4.8 New services and discovery. A new cloud service or provider requires the System Owner's request, a review against this procedure and GOV-PRO-06, and the Information Security Manager's approval before any data is placed in it. The cloud platform team reviews billing and identity provider sign-in records quarterly to detect unapproved services.
4.9 Provider exit. For each critical provider the System Owner documents the data and configuration to export and in what format, the export procedure and who runs it, the provider's retention and deletion commitments after termination, and the alternative arrangement. The export procedure is tested annually on a sample and recorded in GOV-REG-16.
5. Records and evidence
- Shared responsibility records per service.
- Account structure and guardrail configuration exports.
- Region approvals per system.
- Must-prove evidence packs per system with the verification record (GOV-TPL-12).
- Posture findings in GOV-REG-14 and the monthly review.
- Quarterly discovery reviews and annual provider exit tests.
6. Exceptions
A public resource or a region outside the approved list is permitted only under a time-limited risk acceptance in GOV-PRO-24 approved by the Head of Engineering and the Information Security Manager, with the guardrail exception documented and set to expire.
7. Review and maintenance
The Head of Engineering reviews this procedure annually, after a provider incident affecting [Organisation], when a new provider is adopted, and when a residency obligation changes. Changes follow GOV-PRO-01.
8. Related documents
- GOV-PRO-06 Supplier and third party security procedure
- GOV-REG-07 Supplier register
- GOV-CHK-02 Secure configuration baseline checklist
- GOV-REG-10 Information asset register
- GOV-PRO-14 Logging, monitoring and alert handling procedure
- GOV-REG-13 Privileged account register
- GOV-REG-04 Legal, regulatory and contractual register
- PIMS-POL-03 International transfer policy
- GOV-REG-25 Data flow and interface inventory
- GOV-POL-06 Authentication, password and multi-factor policy
- GOV-PRO-10 Access management procedure
- GOV-REG-12 Access review log
- GOV-REG-18 Cryptographic key and certificate inventory
- GOV-PRO-20 Cryptography and key management procedure
- PB-07 Playbook: the go-live security and privacy gate
- PB-09 Playbook: evidence management
- GOV-REG-29 Go-live gate checklist
- GOV-TPL-12 Readiness verdict note
- GOV-PRO-11 Vulnerability and patch management procedure
- GOV-PRO-15 Secure development lifecycle procedure
- GOV-PRO-09 Change management procedure
- GOV-PRO-12 Backup and restore testing procedure
- GOV-REG-15 Backup and restore test log
- GOV-REG-16 Business continuity exercise log
- GOV-REG-14 Vulnerability register
- GOV-PRO-24 Exception and risk acceptance procedure
Threat Intelligence and Vulnerability Disclosure Handling Procedure
How threat and vulnerability information is collected, triaged, turned into action and shared, and how vulnerability reports from outside the organisation are received, acknowledged, validated, fixed and credited under a safe harbour.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 5.7; SOC 2 CC7.1; SOC 2 CC2.3. Owner: Information Security Manager.
1. Purpose
This procedure keeps [Organisation] informed about the threats and vulnerabilities that matter to it, turns that information into action within defined times, and gives outside researchers a safe and predictable way to report a vulnerability in [Organisation]'s systems.
2. Scope
It applies to threat and vulnerability information from any source about the technologies, suppliers and sector in which [Organisation] operates, and to reports about [Organisation]'s own systems, products and services received from customers, researchers, suppliers, authorities or the public.
3. Roles and responsibilities
| Role |
Responsibility |
| Information Security Manager |
Owns both processes, maintains the sources, triages intelligence and external reports, issues bulletins. |
| Security analyst |
Monitors the sources, performs first triage, keeps the reporter informed. |
| System Owner |
Confirms relevance to their system and remediates under GOV-PRO-11. |
| Head of Engineering |
Receives the monthly summary and allocates remediation effort. |
| Communications lead and legal adviser |
Approve the published disclosure policy and any public statement or credit. |
4. Procedure
Threat intelligence
4.1 Sources. The Information Security Manager maintains a source list matched to the inventory in GOV-REG-24 and the suppliers in GOV-REG-07: vendor and provider security advisories for every product in use, the national computer emergency response team, a sector information sharing group where one exists, published vulnerability databases, reputable research publications, and [Organisation]'s own incident and monitoring data. The list is reviewed quarterly and when a product or supplier is added.
4.2 Collection. The analyst reviews the sources at least weekly, and advisories marked critical or actively exploited on the day they are published. Each item is recorded with source, date, affected technology and an initial relevance rating.
4.3 Triage. For each item the analyst answers four questions: do we run the affected technology or version; is it exposed to the internet or to untrusted users; does it hold Confidential or Restricted data; is exploitation reported. A relevant item becomes one or more of: a finding in GOV-REG-14 with its severity and deadline under GOV-PRO-11; a detection rule or search under GOV-PRO-14; an update to a risk in GOV-REG-05; a supplier query under GOV-PRO-06; an awareness message to staff under GOV-PRO-08. The decision and the action reference are recorded against the item.
4.4 Dissemination. Urgent items (critical and exploitable in [Organisation]'s environment) go to the Head of Engineering and the affected System Owners within 24 hours of receipt. A monthly summary of relevant threats, actions taken and open items goes to the Head of Engineering and the steering committee. Intelligence received under a sharing agreement is handled according to the sharing marking it carries and is not forwarded beyond the permitted audience.
4.5 Outbound sharing. The Information Security Manager may share indicators and lessons with the sector group or the national team after removing customer and personal data, and records what was shared and when.
Vulnerability disclosure handling
4.6 Published policy. [Organisation] publishes a vulnerability disclosure policy stating: the systems in scope; how to report, through a monitored security contact and a machine-readable security contact file at the recognised location; what to include in a report; what the reporter can expect and when; the safe harbour statement in 4.7; and the testing that is out of bounds (denial of service, social engineering, physical intrusion, and access to other users' data beyond what proves the issue).
4.7 Safe harbour. The policy states, in plain words, that [Organisation] will not pursue legal action against, or report to authorities, a person who finds and reports a vulnerability in good faith, stays within the policy's scope and rules, avoids privacy violations and service disruption, does not exploit the issue beyond what is needed to demonstrate it, and allows [Organisation] a reasonable time to fix it before publishing. The legal adviser approves the wording.
4.8 Receiving a report. The analyst acknowledges every report within three working days, records it in GOV-REG-14 with the source External report and the reporter's reference, and retains all correspondence. A report containing personal data or credentials is handled as Restricted.
4.9 Validation. Within ten working days the analyst reproduces or disproves the issue with the System Owner, assigns severity under GOV-PRO-11 and tells the reporter the outcome. A report revealing an existing compromise becomes an incident under GOV-PRO-07 at once.
4.10 Remediation and updates. The System Owner fixes the issue within the deadline for its severity. The analyst updates the reporter at least every 30 days until closure and confirms the fix to them. Reporters are offered public credit on request. A monetary reward is given only where a formal programme exists.
4.11 Coordinated publication. Where a vulnerability affects customers or other organisations, the Information Security Manager coordinates notification under contractual commitments and GOV-PRO-07, and agrees a publication date with the reporter, by default no later than 90 days after validation unless both parties agree otherwise.
4.12 Measures. Quarterly the Information Security Manager reports: reports received, time to acknowledge, time to validate, time to fix by severity, and intelligence items turned into actions, alongside the vulnerability metrics in GOV-PRO-11.
5. Records and evidence
- The source list and its quarterly review.
- The intelligence log with triage decisions and action references.
- Monthly threat summaries and urgent bulletins.
- The published disclosure policy with legal approval and version history.
- GOV-REG-14 entries for external reports and the correspondence archive.
- Quarterly measures.
6. Exceptions
A report outside the published scope is still acknowledged and triaged; the safe harbour applies only within scope. No other exception applies.
7. Review and maintenance
The Information Security Manager reviews this procedure annually, after any report that was handled late or published before the fix, and when a law on coordinated disclosure or product security changes. Changes follow GOV-PRO-01.
8. Related documents
- GOV-PRO-11 Vulnerability and patch management procedure
- GOV-REG-14 Vulnerability register
- GOV-PRO-14 Logging, monitoring and alert handling procedure
- GOV-REG-05 Information security risk register
- GOV-PRO-06 Supplier and third party security procedure
- GOV-REG-07 Supplier register
- GOV-PRO-08 Security and privacy awareness and training procedure
- GOV-PRO-07 Information security incident management procedure
- GOV-REG-24 Software and hardware inventory
Top management commitment statement
A one-page statement in which the leadership of [Organisation] commits to resourcing, integrating, directing and improving the information security and privacy management system.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 5.1; ISO/IEC 27701 clause 5.3; SOC 2 CC1.1. Owner: Chief Executive Officer.
1. Statement
The leadership of [Organisation] regards the protection of information, and of the people whose personal data we process, as a condition of doing business, not an addition to it. We have established an information security and privacy management system covering the scope in ISMS-STM-01, and we hold ourselves accountable for its results.
2. What leadership commits to
- Direction. We have approved GOV-POL-03 and the objectives in ISMS-PLN-01, and we will keep both consistent with the strategy and risk appetite of the organisation.
- Resources. We will fund and staff the management system each financial year, including the people, training, tools and external support needed to treat the risks recorded in GOV-REG-05 within the agreed dates.
- Integration. Security and privacy requirements form part of how we plan projects, select suppliers, develop software, hire people and run operations. They are not handled by a separate team after the fact.
- Roles. We have appointed an Information Security Manager and a Privacy Officer, given them the authority described in GOV-POL-01, and we expect every manager to carry the responsibilities assigned to them.
- Review. We will attend management review under GOV-PRO-03 at least once a year, consider every mandatory input, and record our decisions and the resources we assign.
- Improvement. We will act on audit results, incidents, measurement results and nonconformities through GOV-PRO-04, and we will not accept a risk above appetite without recording who accepted it and why.
- Compliance. We will identify and meet our legal, regulatory and contractual obligations as recorded in GOV-REG-04.
- Culture. We will lead by example, complete the same training as everyone else, and support anyone who reports a weakness or an incident in good faith.
3. How this commitment is demonstrated
Auditors and interested parties may test this statement against the approved budget, steering committee minutes, management review minutes (GOV-TPL-03), the action tracker (GOV-REG-22) and the objectives tracker (GOV-REG-21).
4. Signature
| Role |
Name |
Signature |
Date |
| Chief Executive Officer |
[Name] |
[Signature] |
[Date] |
| Executive sponsor, if different |
[Name] |
[Signature] |
[Date] |
This statement is reviewed annually and re-signed after any change in the signatories.
Internal audit report template
The report the Internal Auditor issues after every internal audit under GOV-PRO-02, structured so that each finding states the requirement, the evidence, the gap and the grade, and so that the counts can be copied straight into GOV-REG-02.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 9.2.2; SOC 2 CC4.1; SOC 2 CC4.2. Owner: Information Security Manager.
Guidance notes are in italics. Delete them from the issued report. Issue the report within ten working days of the closing meeting and record its reference in GOV-REG-02.
1. Audit reference
| Field |
Entry |
| Audit reference |
[Audit ID from GOV-REG-02] |
| Report version |
[Number] |
| Date of issue |
[Date] |
| Lead auditor |
[Role] |
| Distribution |
See section 12 |
2. Scope and criteria
| Field |
Entry |
| Areas, processes and systems audited |
[Scope] |
| Locations |
[Location or "remote"] |
| Period of records examined |
[Date] to [Date] |
| Criteria |
[Clauses, Annex A controls, SOC 2 criteria and kit documents audited, for example ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 9.2, Annex A 5.15 to 5.18, GOV-PRO-10] |
| Exclusions from this audit and reason |
[Text or "none"] |
3. Audit team and auditees
| Name |
Role |
Audit role |
| [Name] |
[Role] |
Lead auditor |
| [Name] |
[Role] |
Auditor or technical expert |
| [Name] |
[Role] |
Auditee |
Confirm that no auditor audited work they performed or managed. If an external auditor was used, state the engagement reference.
4. Dates
| Activity |
Date |
| Audit plan issued |
[Date] |
| Opening meeting |
[Date] |
| Fieldwork |
[Date] to [Date] |
| Closing meeting |
[Date] |
| Report issued |
[Date] |
5. Method
State how evidence was gathered: documents reviewed, people interviewed by role, activities observed, systems inspected, and the sampling applied. For each sampled control give the population size, the sample size and how the sample was selected. Reference the completed ISMS-REG-04 checklist.
| Control or process |
Population |
Sample size |
Selection method |
| [Control] |
[Number] |
[Number] |
[Random, every nth item, risk based] |
6. Summary of conformity
One paragraph on the overall state of the area against the criteria, followed by the counts. The counts must match section 7 and are copied into GOV-REG-02.
| Grade |
Count |
| Major nonconformity |
[Number] |
| Minor nonconformity |
[Number] |
| Observation |
[Number] |
| Opportunity for improvement |
[Number] |
7. Findings
One row per finding. Write the statement of nonconformity in four parts: the requirement, the evidence seen, the gap and the grade. Each major and minor finding becomes a GOV-TPL-02 form and a row in GOV-REG-03.
| Finding ID |
Clause or control |
Grade |
Evidence seen |
Requirement |
Statement of nonconformity |
| [Audit ID]-01 |
[Reference] |
[Major, Minor, Observation, Opportunity] |
[What was examined, with record identifiers and dates] |
[The requirement in the organisation's words, with the document ID] |
[The gap between requirement and evidence] |
| [Audit ID]-02 |
|
|
|
|
|
8. Positive observations
Practices that work well and should be kept. These are not findings and need no action, but they help management review and are useful when the same control is audited again.
9. Opportunities for improvement
Ways a conforming process could be made more effective or efficient. Each one is logged in GOV-REG-03 with a decision to act or not act.
10. Follow-up of previous findings
| Previous finding ID |
Status at this audit |
Evidence of closure |
| [ID] |
[Closed, Open, Recurred] |
[Evidence] |
11. Conclusion
State whether the area conforms to the criteria, with or without nonconformities, whether the controls are effectively implemented and maintained, and whether any finding requires escalation to the executive sponsor. State the date by which the auditee must respond to the findings under GOV-PRO-02 (ten working days, or five for a major nonconformity).
12. Distribution and sign-off
| Recipient |
Role |
Date sent |
| [Name] |
Auditee |
[Date] |
| [Name] |
Information Security Manager |
[Date] |
| [Name] |
Executive sponsor |
[Date] |
| Role |
Name |
Signature |
Date |
| Lead auditor |
[Name] |
[Signature] |
[Date] |
| Auditee acknowledgement |
[Name] |
[Signature] |
[Date] |
13. Related documents
- GOV-PRO-02 Internal audit procedure
- GOV-REG-02 Audit programme and findings
- GOV-TPL-02 Corrective action request form
- GOV-REG-03 Corrective action log
- ISMS-REG-04 Internal audit checklist
Corrective action request form
The single form that follows a nonconformity from the moment it is raised, through correction, root cause analysis and corrective action, to verification of effectiveness and closure, as required by GOV-PRO-04.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 10.1; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 10.2; SOC 2 CC4.2; SOC 2 CC5.3. Owner: Information Security Manager.
Guidance notes are in italics. One form per nonconformity. The reference is assigned by the Information Security Manager from GOV-REG-03. Attach evidence rather than describing it.
1. Corrective action request
| Field |
Entry |
| Reference |
[CAR ID from GOV-REG-03] |
| Source |
[Internal audit, External audit, Incident, Management review, Complaint, Monitoring, Supplier review, Other] |
| Source reference |
[Audit ID, incident ID, review date or complaint reference] |
| Raised by |
[Name], [Role] |
| Date raised |
[Date] |
| Grade |
[Major, Minor, Observation, Opportunity] |
| Area, system or process affected |
[Text] |
| Statement of nonconformity |
What was observed, where and when. State facts, not opinions. One nonconformity per form. |
| Evidence |
Record identifiers, screenshots, log extracts or interview notes that show the nonconformity. Attach, do not paraphrase. |
| Requirement breached |
The clause, control, criterion or kit document statement, quoted by reference, for example GOV-PRO-10 step 4.6 or ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 5.18. |
| Personal data involved |
[Yes or No]. If Yes, the Privacy Officer co-owns this form and decides whether PIMS-PRO-04 applies. |
| Action owner |
[Name], [Role] |
| Immediate correction |
What was done to contain the problem and restore the control. Within five working days for a major, twenty for a minor. |
| Correction date |
[Date] |
| Corrective action required? |
[Yes or No]. Reasons: could it recur, has it occurred before, could the same cause exist elsewhere, what would recurrence cost. A major always requires corrective action. |
| Root cause analysis method |
[Five whys, Fishbone, Other] |
| Root cause |
The cause the organisation can act on. "Human error" is not a root cause; say why the error was possible and not caught. |
| Same cause elsewhere? |
[Yes or No]. If Yes, list the linked GOV-REG-03 references raised for the other areas. |
| Corrective action plan |
Numbered actions. For each: what, who, by when, resources needed. Due within thirty days of raising for a major, ninety for a minor, unless an extension is approved below. |
| Plan owner |
[Name], [Role] |
| Due date |
[Date] |
| Extension approved by and reason |
[Name], [Role], [Date], [Reason] or "none" |
| Documents and risks updated |
Kit document IDs changed under GOV-PRO-01 and GOV-REG-05 risk IDs updated. |
| Implementation evidence |
Attach evidence for each completed action, with dates. |
| Implementation complete date |
[Date] |
2. Verification of effectiveness
Performed by someone other than the action owner, after at least ninety days of operation or three operating cycles.
| Field |
Entry |
| Verifier |
[Name], [Role] |
| Verification date |
[Date] |
| Method |
Records sampled (population and sample size), interviews held, configuration or output inspected. |
| Has the nonconformity recurred? |
[Yes or No], with evidence |
| Does the control now operate as intended? |
[Yes or No], with evidence |
| Result |
[Effective, Not effective]. Not effective returns the form to root cause analysis. |
3. Closure
| Field |
Entry |
| Closed by |
[Name], [Role]. Information Security Manager for a minor, executive sponsor for a major. |
| Closure date |
[Date] |
| Signature |
[Signature] |
| GOV-REG-03 status set to |
Closed |
4. Related documents
- GOV-PRO-04 Nonconformity and corrective action procedure
- GOV-REG-03 Corrective action log
- GOV-PRO-02 Internal audit procedure
- GOV-TPL-01 Internal audit report template
- PIMS-PRO-04 Personal data breach assessment and notification procedure
Management review minutes template
The minutes of a management review held under GOV-PRO-03, with one section per mandatory input, each recording a summary, a decision and any action, and an outputs table that feeds GOV-REG-22.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 9.3; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 9.3.3; SOC 2 CC1.2. Owner: Information Security Manager.
Guidance notes are in italics. The secretary issues the minutes within five working days of the review and the chair approves them within a further five. Every action is copied to GOV-REG-22 within two working days.
1. Meeting details
| Field |
Entry |
| Review date |
[Date] |
| Period covered |
[Date] to [Date] |
| Type |
[Scheduled annual, Scheduled interim, Additional after event] |
| Chair |
[Name], Chief Executive Officer or named deputy |
| Secretary |
[Name], Information Security Manager |
| Input pack circulated on |
[Date] |
2. Attendance
| Name |
Role |
Present or apologies |
| [Name] |
Chief Executive Officer |
[Present] |
| [Name] |
Information Security Manager |
[Present] |
| [Name] |
Privacy Officer |
[Present] |
| [Name] |
Head of Engineering |
[Present or apologies] |
| [Name] |
Head of Operations |
[Present or apologies] |
| [Name] |
Head of Human Resources |
[Present or apologies] |
| [Name] |
Internal Auditor |
[Present or apologies] |
The review is valid when the chair or deputy, the Information Security Manager, the Privacy Officer and at least half of the heads of function attend. Record here whether that condition was met.
3. Status of actions from previous reviews
Source: GOV-REG-22. List each open action with its status.
- Summary: [Number] actions carried from the last review; [Number] completed, [Number] in progress, [Number] overdue.
- Decision: [Accept, act, investigate]
- Action: [Action], owner [Role], due [Date]
4. Changes in external and internal issues and interested parties
Source: ISMS-PRO-01, ISMS-REG-03. New laws, markets, technologies, customers, structure, threats.
- Summary: [Text]
- Decision: [Text]
- Action: [Action], owner [Role], due [Date]
5. Nonconformities and corrective actions
Source: GOV-REG-03, GOV-PRO-04 trend analysis. Counts by grade and source, overdue actions, repeated root causes.
- Summary: [Text]
- Decision: [Text]
- Action: [Action], owner [Role], due [Date]
6. Monitoring and measurement results
Source: ISMS-PRO-04, GOV-REG-21. Measures against targets, with trend.
- Summary: [Text]
- Decision: [Text]
- Action: [Action], owner [Role], due [Date]
7. Audit results
Source: GOV-REG-02, GOV-TPL-01 reports, external audit reports. Coverage against the programme, findings by grade, status of closure.
- Summary: [Text]
- Decision: [Text]
- Action: [Action], owner [Role], due [Date]
8. Fulfilment of objectives
Source: GOV-REG-21, ISMS-PLN-01. Each objective with status Green, Amber or Red and the reason.
- Summary: [Text]
- Decision: [Text, including objectives confirmed or set for the next period]
- Action: [Action], owner [Role], due [Date]
9. Feedback from interested parties
Source: ISMS-REG-03, customer questionnaires, complaints, data subject requests, regulator contact.
- Summary: [Text]
- Decision: [Text]
- Action: [Action], owner [Role], due [Date]
10. Risk assessment results and risk treatment status
Source: GOV-REG-05, GOV-REG-06. Risks by band, movement since the last review, treatment plan progress, active and expired acceptances, confirmation of risk appetite.
- Summary: [Text]
- Decision: [Text, including appetite confirmed or changed]
- Action: [Action], owner [Role], due [Date]
11. Incidents and personal data breaches
Source: GOV-REG-08, PIMS-REG-03. Counts by severity, notifications made, lessons.
- Summary: [Text]
- Decision: [Text]
- Action: [Action], owner [Role], due [Date]
12. Supplier performance and compliance obligations
Source: GOV-REG-07, GOV-REG-04. Supplier reviews due and done, assurance gaps, obligation status, changes in law or contract.
- Summary: [Text]
- Decision: [Text]
- Action: [Action], owner [Role], due [Date]
13. Opportunities for continual improvement
Raised by any attendee.
- Summary: [Text]
- Decision: [Text]
- Action: [Action], owner [Role], due [Date]
14. Outputs
Every decision on improvement, change to the management system and resources. A decision to provide no additional resource is still recorded with its reason.
| Output type |
Decision |
Owner |
Due date |
| Continual improvement |
[Decision] |
[Role] |
[Date] |
| Change to policy, scope or objectives |
[Decision] |
[Role] |
[Date] |
| Resources (budget, people, external support) |
[Decision] |
[Role] |
[Date] |
15. Sign-off
| Role |
Name |
Signature |
Date |
| Chair |
[Name] |
[Signature] |
[Date] |
| Secretary |
[Name] |
[Signature] |
[Date] |
16. Related documents
- GOV-PRO-03 Management review procedure
- GOV-REG-22 Management review action tracker
- GOV-REG-21 Security objectives and measures tracker
- GOV-REG-03 Corrective action log
- GOV-REG-05 Information security risk register
Supplier Security and Privacy Questionnaire
The questions a supplier answers before it is given information or access, with space for its evidence and a scoring method that produces an approval outcome under GOV-PRO-06.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 5.19; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 5.20; ISO/IEC 27701 clause 7.2.6; SOC 2 CC9.2; GDPR Article 28. Owner: Information Security Manager.
1. How to use this questionnaire
Send sections 2 and 3 to the supplier. The supplier owner sets the tier under GOV-PRO-06 step 4.1 first: Tier 1 and Tier 2 suppliers answer every question; Tier 3 suppliers answer domains 3.1, 3.3, 3.6 and 3.11 only. The supplier writes its answer in the Answer column and names the document, export or screenshot it attaches in the Evidence column. An answer without evidence scores lower than an answer with it. The reviewer completes sections 4 and 5. Questions marked with an asterisk are critical: a score of 0 on a critical question blocks approval for Tier 1 and Tier 2 until the gap is remediated or an exception is accepted under GOV-PRO-24.
2. Supplier and service details
| Field |
Entry |
| Supplier legal name |
[Supplier] |
| Service to be provided |
[Service] |
| Supplier owner at [Organisation] |
[Role] |
| Tier assigned |
[Tier] |
| Information the supplier will hold or access |
[Classification and description] |
| Personal data involved |
Yes / No. If yes, section 3.10 is mandatory and processor terms are required before any data is shared. |
| Supplier contact completing this questionnaire |
[Role] |
| Date returned |
[Date] |
3. Questions
3.1 Organisation and governance
| No. |
Question |
Answer |
Evidence |
| 1* |
Do you have an approved information security policy, and who in your management is accountable for information security? |
|
|
| 2 |
Do you have a named person or role responsible for data protection, and how can [Organisation] contact them? |
|
|
| 3 |
How do you screen staff and contractors before they are given access to client information, and what confidentiality obligations do they sign? |
|
|
| 4 |
How often do your staff complete security and privacy training, and how do you record completion? |
|
|
3.2 Certifications and independent assurance
| No. |
Question |
Answer |
Evidence |
| 5* |
Which independent certifications or attestation reports do you hold that cover the service you will provide, and what is the scope and expiry of each? |
|
|
| 6 |
When was the service last tested by an independent penetration tester, and were all high and critical findings closed? |
|
|
| 7 |
Do you run an internal audit programme over your security controls, and how are findings tracked to closure? |
|
|
| 8 |
Will you provide [Organisation] with renewed certificates or reports each year, and on request after a significant change? |
|
|
3.3 Access control
| No. |
Question |
Answer |
Evidence |
| 9* |
Is multi-factor authentication enforced for all your staff access to systems that hold client information, including administrative and remote access? |
|
|
| 10* |
How do you restrict your staff's access to [Organisation]'s information to those who need it for their role, and how often is that access reviewed? |
|
|
| 11 |
How quickly is access removed when a member of your staff leaves or changes role? |
|
|
| 12 |
How does the service separate [Organisation]'s data and users from those of your other clients? |
|
|
| 13 |
Does the service support single sign-on from [Organisation]'s identity provider and role-based permissions that [Organisation] administers? |
|
|
3.4 Encryption
| No. |
Question |
Answer |
Evidence |
| 14* |
Is all client data encrypted in transit using current protocol versions, with obsolete versions disabled? |
|
|
| 15* |
Is all client data, including backups and snapshots, encrypted at rest? |
|
|
| 16 |
How are encryption keys generated, stored, rotated and protected, and who can access them? |
|
|
| 17 |
Can [Organisation] hold or control its own keys, and what happens to encrypted data when a key is revoked? |
|
|
3.5 Logging and monitoring
| No. |
Question |
Answer |
Evidence |
| 18 |
Which security events do you log for the service, and for how long are logs retained? |
|
|
| 19 |
Who reviews logs and alerts, how often, and is monitoring in place outside working hours? |
|
|
| 20 |
Can [Organisation] obtain audit logs of actions on its own data and users, and in what format? |
|
|
| 21 |
How do you detect and respond to vulnerabilities in the service, and what are your remediation timescales by severity? |
|
|
3.6 Incident management
| No. |
Question |
Answer |
Evidence |
| 22* |
Within how many hours of becoming aware will you notify [Organisation] of a security incident or personal data breach affecting its information? |
|
|
| 23 |
Do you have a documented incident response procedure with defined severities and roles, and when was it last exercised? |
|
|
| 24 |
What information will your notification contain, and who at your organisation will be the point of contact during an incident? |
|
|
| 25 |
Have you had a security incident affecting client data in the last three years, and what changed as a result? |
|
|
3.7 Business continuity and resilience
| No. |
Question |
Answer |
Evidence |
| 26 |
What availability commitment do you give for the service, and how has it performed over the last twelve months? |
|
|
| 27* |
How often is client data backed up, where are backups stored, and when was a restore last tested? |
|
|
| 28 |
Do you have a business continuity and disaster recovery plan for the service, with recovery time and recovery point objectives, and when was it last tested? |
|
|
| 29 |
What single points of failure exist in the service, including dependence on your own suppliers? |
|
|
3.8 Sub-processors and supply chain
| No. |
Question |
Answer |
Evidence |
| 30* |
Which third parties, including hosting providers, will access or process [Organisation]'s information in delivering the service? |
|
|
| 31 |
How do you assess those third parties before use, and do your contracts with them flow down the obligations you owe to [Organisation]? |
|
|
| 32 |
How will you notify [Organisation] before adding or changing a third party, and can [Organisation] object? |
|
|
| 33 |
How do you manage the security of the software components and open source libraries used in the service? |
|
|
3.9 Data location and transfers
| No. |
Question |
Answer |
Evidence |
| 34* |
In which countries or regions will [Organisation]'s information be stored, processed and accessed, including for support and backups? |
|
|
| 35 |
Can [Organisation] restrict storage and processing to a named region, and is that restriction contractual? |
|
|
| 36 |
Where information leaves the region, which transfer mechanism applies, and will you support a transfer impact assessment? |
|
|
3.10 Personal data handling
| No. |
Question |
Answer |
Evidence |
| 37* |
Will you sign processor terms that meet GDPR Article 28, or provide your own terms for review, before any personal data is shared? |
|
|
| 38 |
Do you use client personal data for any purpose of your own, including analytics, product improvement or training of models? |
|
|
| 39 |
How will you assist [Organisation] with requests from individuals, such as access, correction, deletion and export, and within what time? |
|
|
| 40 |
How do you apply retention and deletion to personal data in the service, including in backups and logs? |
|
|
| 41 |
Do you maintain a record of your processing activities for this service and can you provide the relevant extract? |
|
|
3.11 Exit and data return
| No. |
Question |
Answer |
Evidence |
| 42* |
At the end of the contract, in what format and within what time will you return [Organisation]'s information? |
|
|
| 43* |
How and when will you delete [Organisation]'s information, including backups, and will you certify deletion in writing? |
|
|
| 44 |
What notice do you give before discontinuing the service or changing its terms materially? |
|
|
| 45 |
Can [Organisation] export its data at any time during the contract without your assistance? |
|
|
4. Scoring note
The reviewer scores each question from 0 to 3.
| Score |
Meaning |
| 0 |
Control not in place, no answer, or answer contradicted by evidence |
| 1 |
Control described as partly in place, no evidence provided |
| 2 |
Control described as in place, evidence described but not provided or not conclusive |
| 3 |
Control in place and supported by evidence the reviewer has seen |
Mark a question Not applicable only where the reviewer agrees, and remove it from the denominator. Domain score is the sum of scores divided by three times the number of applicable questions, as a percentage. Overall score is the average of the domain percentages, so that each domain weighs equally. Outcome: 80 per cent or more is Approved; 60 to 79 per cent is Conditional, with a remediation plan and dates written into the contract; below 60 per cent is Not approved. Any critical question scored 0 overrides the percentage for Tier 1 and Tier 2 and blocks approval until it is remediated or an exception is accepted.
5. Reviewer assessment
| Domain |
Score (per cent) |
Critical gaps |
Notes |
| 3.1 Organisation and governance |
|
|
|
| 3.2 Certifications and assurance |
|
|
|
| 3.3 Access control |
|
|
|
| 3.4 Encryption |
|
|
|
| 3.5 Logging and monitoring |
|
|
|
| 3.6 Incident management |
|
|
|
| 3.7 Business continuity |
|
|
|
| 3.8 Sub-processors |
|
|
|
| 3.9 Data location |
|
|
|
| 3.10 Personal data |
|
|
|
| 3.11 Exit |
|
|
|
| Overall |
|
|
|
| Field |
Entry |
| Outcome |
Approved / Conditional / Not approved |
| Conditions and dates |
[Conditions] |
| Exceptions accepted (GOV-REG-06 reference) |
[Reference] |
| Processor terms required |
Yes / No. Reference PIMS-TPL-02 or the supplier's terms reviewed. |
| Reviewed by |
Information Security Manager, [Date] |
| Privacy review by |
Privacy Officer, [Date] |
| GOV-REG-07 entry updated |
[Date] |
| Next review due |
[Date] |
Incident Report Form
The single record kept for each incident from first report to closure, holding its facts, classification, actions, timeline, notifications and evidence under GOV-PRO-07.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 5.24; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 5.26; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 5.28; SOC 2 CC7.3; SOC 2 CC7.4. Owner: Information Security Manager.
1. How to use this form
The first responder opens this form when the Incident Lead declares an incident under GOV-PRO-07 step 4.2, using the reference already assigned in GOV-REG-08. The Incident Lead keeps it current throughout the response. Write facts and times, not opinions; record the source of every fact in the timeline. Times use one time zone, stated once in section 2. Keep the completed form in the restricted evidence location, not in email.
2. Incident identification
| Field |
Entry |
| Incident reference |
[Prefix]-[Year]-[Number] |
| Current status |
Open / Contained / Resolved / Under review / Closed |
| Incident Lead |
[Role] |
| Reported by |
[Role or external party] |
| Reporter contact |
[Contact] |
| How detected |
Staff report / Monitoring alert / Supplier notice / Client report / Audit / Other |
| Date and time detected |
[Date] [Time] |
| Date and time reported |
[Date] [Time] |
| Date and time incident declared |
[Date] [Time] |
| Time zone used in this form |
[Time zone] |
3. Description
Three to ten sentences: what happened, how it was discovered, what is known and what is not yet known. Update the "current state" line as the response progresses.
| Field |
Entry |
| What happened |
|
| How it was discovered |
|
| Current state |
|
| Suspected cause |
|
4. Affected assets and information
| Asset or system |
Owner |
Classification |
Information types involved |
Approximate records or individuals |
| [System name] |
[Role] |
Public / Internal / Confidential / Restricted |
|
[Number] |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
5. Classification
| Field |
Entry |
| Incident type |
Malware / Phishing or social engineering / Unauthorised access / Data exposure / Lost or stolen device / Denial of service / Misconfiguration / Supplier incident / Insider misuse / Physical / Other |
| Severity (GOV-PRO-07 step 4.3) |
1 Critical / 2 High / 3 Medium / 4 Low |
| Severity changes |
Record each change with time and reason. |
| Personal data involved |
Yes / No / Under assessment |
| Privacy Officer informed at |
[Date] [Time] |
| PIMS-PRO-04 started |
Yes / No. If yes, the time of awareness recorded there must match the time above. |
| [Organisation] acts as |
Controller / Processor / Both / Not applicable |
| Client-facing service affected |
Yes / No |
| Supplier involved |
Yes / No. Name the GOV-REG-07 entry. |
| AI system involved |
Yes / No. If yes, AI-PRO-03 applies. |
6. Actions taken
One row per action. Containment, eradication and recovery actions are all recorded here. Emergency changes are also recorded under GOV-PRO-09.
| Date and time |
Phase |
Action |
By whom |
Result |
|
Containment / Eradication / Recovery |
|
[Role] |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
7. Timeline
A chronological record of what happened and what the team learned, including events before detection as they become known. Name the source of each entry: a log, an alert, a person, a supplier notice.
| Date and time |
Event |
Source |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
8. Notifications
Internal escalations and every external notification. Nothing leaves [Organisation] without the executive sponsor's approval recorded here.
| Recipient |
Required by |
Deadline |
Approved by |
Sent at |
Reference |
| Executive sponsor |
GOV-PRO-07 |
|
|
|
|
| Privacy Officer |
GOV-PRO-07 step 4.4 |
|
|
|
|
| Supervisory authority |
PIMS-PRO-04, GDPR-TPL-10 |
|
|
|
|
| Affected individuals |
PIMS-PRO-04 |
|
|
|
|
| Clients |
Contract (GOV-REG-04) |
|
|
|
|
| Controller (where processor) |
Contract |
|
|
|
|
| Insurer / law enforcement / other |
|
|
|
|
|
9. Evidence collected
Collect before remediation alters anything. Record a hash value for every file and keep the chain of custody.
| Item |
Location |
Hash value |
Collected by |
Date and time |
|
|
|
[Role] |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
10. Closure
| Closure criterion |
Confirmed (Yes / No) |
Note |
| Cause removed and persistence checked |
|
|
| Service recovered and confirmed by the system owner |
|
|
| All notifications complete |
|
|
| Evidence stored in the restricted location with hashes |
|
|
| GOV-REG-08 updated with times, root cause and lessons |
|
|
| Post-incident review required (Severity 1 or 2, or selected) |
|
GOV-TPL-11 reference |
| Corrective actions raised |
|
GOV-REG-03 references |
| Field |
Entry |
| Date and time contained |
[Date] [Time] |
| Date and time resolved |
[Date] [Time] |
| Root cause (one sentence) |
|
| Closed by |
Incident Lead, [Date] |
Risk acceptance and exception form
The form used under GOV-PRO-24 to request a deviation from a policy or control, or the acceptance of a risk above appetite, showing the risk before and after compensating controls, the duration, the approver for the band and the review date.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 6.1.3; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 8.3; SOC 2 CC3.2; SOC 2 CC5.1. Owner: Information Security Manager.
Guidance notes are in italics. One form per exception or acceptance. The Information Security Manager assigns the reference from GOV-REG-06. Approval is valid only with the signature of the approver for the band after compensating controls.
1. Request
| Field |
Entry |
| Reference |
[Reference from GOV-REG-06] |
| Type |
[Exception from a policy or control, Acceptance of a risk above appetite] |
| Requested by |
[Name], [Role] |
| Date of request |
[Date] |
| Requirement deviated from |
Document ID and statement or step, for example GOV-POL-06 statement 4.4, or Annex A control reference. |
| Linked risk |
[GOV-REG-05 risk ID], or "new risk to be created" |
| Systems, data and processes affected |
[Text] |
| Personal data affected |
[Yes or No]. If Yes, the Privacy Officer co-assesses. |
| Customer or legal obligation affected |
[Yes or No]. If Yes, reference the GOV-REG-04 row and attach the written agreement of the customer or regulator. |
| Business reason |
Why the requirement cannot be met now. State the cost or consequence of full conformity. |
| Compensating controls proposed |
Each control, who operates it, and the evidence that it is in place. Detective controls count only if they lead to a response within a stated time. |
| Duration requested |
[Number] months. Maximum twelve. Maximum three for a Critical band. |
| Return to conformity plan |
The actions and dates that will remove the need for the exception. A request without a plan can only be a risk acceptance. |
2. Assessment
Completed by the Information Security Manager, with the Privacy Officer where personal data is affected, within five working days, using the scales in GOV-PRO-05.
| Field |
Without compensating controls |
With compensating controls |
| Likelihood (1 to 5) |
[Number] |
[Number] |
| Impact (1 to 5) |
[Number] |
[Number] |
| Score |
[Number] |
[Number] |
| Band |
[Low, Medium, High, Critical] |
[Low, Medium, High, Critical] |
| Field |
Entry |
| Assessor |
[Name], [Role] |
| Assessment date |
[Date] |
| Compensating controls verified as operating |
[Yes or No], evidence reference |
| Assessor's recommendation |
[Approve, Approve with conditions, Refuse], with reasons |
| Conditions |
[Text or "none"] |
3. Approval
The approver is determined by the band with compensating controls: Low, Information Security Manager; Medium, Information Security Manager and the requester's head of function; High, executive sponsor; Critical, Chief Executive Officer.
| Field |
Entry |
| Decision |
[Approved, Refused] |
| Approver |
[Name], [Role] |
| Second approver (Medium band) |
[Name], [Role] or "not required" |
| Approval date |
[Date] |
| Expiry date |
[Date]. Approval date plus duration; never more than twelve months. |
| Review date |
[Date]. Thirty days before expiry. |
| Signature |
[Signature] |
4. Review and closure
| Field |
Entry |
| Review performed by |
[Name], [Role] |
| Review date |
[Date] |
| Outcome |
[Closed: control implemented, Renewed: new request reference, Escalated: reason, Expired] |
| Evidence of closure |
[Reference] |
| GOV-REG-06 status set to |
[Closed, Expired, Active under new reference] |
| Signature |
[Signature] |
5. Related documents
- GOV-PRO-24 Exception and risk acceptance procedure
- GOV-REG-06 Risk acceptance and exception register
- GOV-REG-05 Information security risk register
- GOV-PRO-05 Risk assessment and treatment methodology
- GOV-REG-04 Legal, regulatory and contractual register
Business Impact Analysis Worksheet
The worksheet a process owner completes to record dependencies, impact over time, recovery objectives and minimum resources for one business process, feeding the continuity plan.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 5.30; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 5.29; SOC 2 A1.2. Owner: Information Security Manager.
1. How to use this worksheet
Complete one worksheet per business process, with the process owner and the owners of the systems it depends on present. Rate impact at each point in time on the 1 to 5 scale in section 4, using the impact definitions in GOV-PRO-05 so that continuity and risk speak the same language. Return the completed worksheet to the business continuity coordinator, who consolidates all worksheets under GOV-PRO-13. Guidance notes are in italics and are deleted from the completed copy.
2. Process identification
| Field |
Entry |
| Process name |
[Process] |
| Process owner (role) |
[Role] |
| Description (two sentences) |
|
| Service or customers it supports |
|
| Peak periods when disruption hurts most |
|
| Worksheet completed by (role) |
[Role] |
| Date completed |
[Date] |
3. Dependencies
List everything the process cannot run without, one row per dependency. "Workaround" is what you would do if the dependency failed today.
| Dependency type |
Name |
Owner |
Workaround |
Single point of failure |
| System or application |
[System name] |
[Role] |
|
Yes / No |
| Data set |
|
|
|
|
| People or skill |
|
|
|
|
| Supplier or provider |
|
|
|
|
| Facility or equipment |
|
|
|
|
| Other process |
|
|
|
|
4. Impact over time
Score each category 1 negligible, 2 minor, 3 moderate, 4 major, 5 severe, using the impact definitions in GOV-PRO-05. The highest score at each time point is the overall impact.
| Impact category |
4 hours |
1 day |
3 days |
1 week |
| Financial (lost revenue, penalties, cost of recovery) |
|
|
|
|
| Legal, regulatory and contractual |
|
|
|
|
| Reputation and customer trust |
|
|
|
|
| Operational (other processes stopped) |
|
|
|
|
| Harm to individuals, including through personal data |
|
|
|
|
| Overall (highest score) |
|
|
|
|
5. Recovery objectives
The maximum tolerable period of disruption is the point at which the overall impact reaches 4. The recovery time objective must be shorter than that. The recovery point objective is the most data you can afford to lose, expressed as time.
| Objective |
Value |
Reason |
| Maximum tolerable period of disruption |
[Number] hours or days |
|
| Recovery time objective |
[Number] hours or days |
|
| Recovery point objective |
[Number] minutes or hours |
|
| Minimum service level during recovery (what must work first) |
|
|
| Priority tier (1 highest to 4 lowest) |
|
|
6. Minimum resources to operate
| Resource |
Normal |
Minimum during recovery |
Source if the primary is lost |
| People (number and roles) |
|
|
|
| Systems and access |
|
|
|
| Data and the most recent acceptable copy |
|
|
|
| Suppliers and services |
|
|
|
| Workplace, equipment and connectivity |
|
|
|
| Communication channels |
|
|
|
7. Current readiness
| Question |
Answer |
| Does a recovery runbook exist for each dependent system? |
Yes / No / Partial |
| Were the data sets restore-tested in the last 12 months (GOV-REG-15)? |
|
| When was this process last exercised (GOV-REG-16)? |
|
| Known gaps against the objectives above |
|
| Risks raised in GOV-REG-05 as a result |
|
8. Summary row for the consolidated list
The coordinator copies this row into the consolidated priority list.
| Process |
Recovery time objective |
Recovery point objective |
Maximum tolerable disruption |
Owner |
| [Process] |
|
|
|
[Role] |
9. Sign-off
| Role |
Signature |
Date |
| Process owner |
|
[Date] |
| Business continuity coordinator |
|
[Date] |
| Head of Engineering, for ICT dependencies |
|
[Date] |
10. Records and review
The completed worksheet is a record under GOV-PRO-13, retained with the business continuity plan. It is reviewed annually and when the process, its systems or its suppliers change. Changes to this template follow GOV-PRO-01.
11. Related documents
- GOV-PRO-13 Business continuity and ICT readiness procedure
- GOV-PRO-05 Risk assessment and treatment methodology
- GOV-PRO-12 Backup and restore testing procedure
- GOV-REG-15 Backup and restore test log
- GOV-REG-16 Business continuity exercise log
- GOV-REG-05 Information security risk register
Change Request Form
The form, or the field set for a change ticket, that records a change from request through assessment, approval, implementation and post-implementation review under GOV-PRO-09.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 8.32; SOC 2 CC8.1. Owner: Head of Engineering.
1. How to use this form
One form per change. Where a change tracking system is used, its ticket must carry every field below and this form is the fallback. Fields marked with an asterisk are mandatory before approval. Attach test evidence and the rollback plan rather than summarising them. Record the completed form's reference in GOV-REG-11.
2. Request
| Field |
Entry |
| Change reference * |
[Number] |
| Date raised * |
[Date] |
| Requester (name and role) * |
|
| Change type * |
Standard / Normal / Emergency |
| Standard change catalogue entry, if Standard |
|
| Title * |
|
| Description of the change * |
State what will be different afterwards. |
| Reason and expected benefit * |
|
| Systems, services and components affected * |
Use the names in GOV-REG-24. |
| Data classification touched * |
Public / Internal / Confidential / Restricted |
| Security-relevant * |
Yes / No, per GOV-PRO-09 section 4.3 |
| Related references |
Incident, GOV-REG-14 finding, risk, project or supplier notice |
3. Risk and impact assessment
| Field |
Entry |
| Users or customers affected (number and type) * |
|
| Expected downtime or degradation * |
|
| Reversibility * |
Easy / Possible with effort / Not reversible |
| Dependencies and other changes in the same window |
|
| Security controls affected and how * |
|
| Personal data processing changed |
Yes / No, refer to PIMS-PRO-06 if Yes |
| Risk rating * |
Low / Medium / High |
| Assessment completed by (role) |
|
4. Test evidence
| Field |
Entry |
| Test environment |
|
| Test plan reference * |
|
| Tests performed and results * |
Attach output and state pass or fail per test. |
| Tester, not the implementer * |
|
| Peer review of configuration or code (reference) * |
|
| Residual issues accepted, and by whom |
|
5. Rollback plan
| Field |
Entry |
| Rollback trigger (success criteria not met by what time) * |
|
| Rollback steps * |
|
| Time needed to roll back * |
|
| Backup or snapshot taken before the change (reference) * |
|
| Rollback tested * |
Yes / No |
| Person authorised to call rollback * |
|
6. Communication and scheduling
| Field |
Entry |
| Proposed window (start and end) * |
|
| Within a published maintenance window |
Yes / No |
| Who is notified, when and how |
|
| Customer notice required by contract |
Yes / No |
| Service desk briefed |
Yes / No |
7. Approvals
Approval authority follows the rating table in GOV-PRO-09 section 4.4. The approver is never the implementer.
| Approver role |
Name |
Decision |
Conditions |
Date |
| System Owner |
|
Approved / Rejected / More information |
|
|
| Head of Engineering (Medium and High) |
|
|
|
|
| Information Security Manager (security-relevant) |
|
|
|
|
| Change advisory group (High) |
|
|
|
|
8. Implementation record
| Field |
Entry |
| Implementer |
|
| Actual start |
|
| Actual end |
|
| Steps followed as approved |
Yes / No, describe any deviation and who approved it |
| Result |
Successful / Rolled back / Partially implemented / Failed |
| Verification performed after the change |
|
| Documentation updated (GOV-REG-24, GOV-REG-25, diagrams, runbooks) |
|
| Emergency change: retrospective record completed within two working days |
Yes / No / Not applicable |
9. Post-implementation review
| Field |
Entry |
| Review date (within five working days for High and emergency) |
|
| Reviewer (System Owner) |
|
| Purpose achieved |
Yes / Partly / No |
| Incidents or problems caused |
|
| Lessons and process improvements |
|
| Corrective action raised (GOV-REG-03 reference) |
|
| Change closed in GOV-REG-11 on |
[Date] |
10. Records and review
The completed form is a record under GOV-PRO-09, retained for at least three years and indexed in GOV-REG-11. This template is reviewed annually with GOV-PRO-09 and whenever the change tracking system changes. Changes to this template follow GOV-PRO-01.
11. Related documents
- GOV-PRO-09 Change management procedure
- GOV-REG-11 Change log
- GOV-REG-24 Software and hardware inventory
- GOV-REG-25 Data flow and interface inventory
- GOV-REG-14 Vulnerability register
- GOV-REG-03 Corrective action log
- PIMS-PRO-06 Privacy by design and by default procedure
Access request and approval form
The form used to request, justify, approve and record every grant, change and removal of access to [Organisation] systems under GOV-PRO-10.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 5.15; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 5.18. Owner: Information Security Manager.
1. How to use this form
Complete one form per person. List every system in section 3. The line manager completes sections 2 to 4, each System Owner approves their own row in section 5, and the access administrator completes section 6 after granting. Quote the request reference in GOV-REG-12 when the access is reviewed and in GOV-REG-13 for any privileged account. A request without a business justification or without the required approvals is not actioned.
2. Request details
| Field |
Entry |
| Request reference |
[Number] |
| Request type |
New starter / Change of role / Additional access / Temporary access / Removal |
| Name of person |
[Name] |
| Employment type |
Employee / Contractor / Supplier personnel / Temporary |
| Job role and team |
[Role] |
| Line manager |
[Role] |
| Date access is needed |
[Date] |
| Screening complete |
Yes / No / In progress |
| Induction training recorded in GOV-REG-09 |
Yes / No (access to Confidential or Restricted information is activated only when Yes) |
| Requested by and date |
[Role], [Date] |
3. Access requested
| System |
Access role |
Permissions beyond the standard role |
Duration or end date |
| [System name] |
[Role] |
None / [describe] |
Permanent / [Date] |
| [System name] |
[Role] |
None / [describe] |
Permanent / [Date] |
| [System name] |
[Role] |
None / [describe] |
Permanent / [Date] |
4. Business justification
State what the person will do that needs this access. If permissions beyond the standard role are requested, explain why the standard role is not enough. For Restricted information, name the data owner who agreed.
| Field |
Entry |
| Justification |
|
| Data owner agreement (Restricted information only) |
[Role], [Date] |
| Related ticket, project or contract |
|
5. Approvals
An approver never approves access for themselves. The administrator who grants the access does not approve it.
| Approver |
Role |
Decision |
Date |
Signature |
| Line manager |
[Role] |
Approved / Declined |
[Date] |
|
| System Owner for [System name] |
[Role] |
Approved / Approved with changes / Declined |
[Date] |
|
| System Owner for [System name] |
[Role] |
Approved / Approved with changes / Declined |
[Date] |
|
| Information Security Manager (required for privileged access and for permissions beyond the standard role) |
[Role] |
Approved / Declined |
[Date] |
|
6. Provisioning record
| Field |
Entry |
| Access administrator |
[Role] |
| Date granted |
[Date] |
| Account identifiers created or changed |
|
| One-time credential delivered through a separate channel |
Yes / No / Not applicable |
| Multi-factor authentication enrolled |
Yes / No / Not applicable |
| Privileged account recorded in GOV-REG-13 |
Yes / Not applicable |
| Expiry set for temporary access |
[Date] / Not applicable |
| Grant checked against the request by a second person |
[Role], [Date] |
7. Change and removal record
Use this section whenever the access on this form is changed, removed or expires, so that the form shows the full life of the grant.
| Date |
Action |
Performed by |
Reason |
Confirmation reference |
| [Date] |
Changed / Removed / Expired |
[Role] |
|
|
| [Date] |
Changed / Removed / Expired |
[Role] |
|
|
8. Related documents
- GOV-PRO-10 Access management procedure (joiners, movers, leavers, privileged access, reviews)
- GOV-REG-12 Access review log
- GOV-REG-13 Privileged account register
- GOV-POL-06 Authentication, password and multi-factor policy
- GOV-CHK-01 Onboarding and offboarding security checklist
Awareness session record and acknowledgement
The record a trainer completes for every live security or privacy awareness session, with the content delivered, the attendance and acknowledgement of each attendee, assessment results and sign-off.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 7.2; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 7.3. Owner: Information Security Manager.
1. How to use this record
The trainer completes sections 2 to 6 for every live or facilitated awareness session and returns the record to the Information Security Manager within five working days. Attendees sign section 4 in person or confirm electronically. The Information Security Manager enters each attendee's completion and result in GOV-REG-09 and files this record with the annual training plan. For online modules the learning platform's completion report replaces this form.
2. Session details
| Field |
Entry |
| Session reference |
[Number] |
| Session title |
|
| Module from the annual training plan |
Induction / Annual refresher / Role-based / Exercise / Other |
| Role group targeted |
All staff / Developers / System administrators / Personal data handlers / Managers / Incident responders |
| Date |
[Date] |
| Duration |
[Number] minutes |
| Delivery method |
In person / Video call / Recording with live questions |
| Location or platform |
|
| Trainer |
[Role] |
| Number invited |
[Number] |
3. Content outline
List the topics in the order delivered and the policy or procedure each one teaches. Attach or reference the slides or handout with their version.
| Order |
Topic |
Document taught |
| 1 |
|
|
| 2 |
|
|
| 3 |
|
|
| 4 |
|
|
| 5 |
|
|
| Field |
Entry |
| Materials used and version |
|
| Changes from the approved content |
None / [describe] |
| Questions raised that need a follow-up answer |
|
4. Attendance and acknowledgement
By signing or confirming, each attendee states that they attended the full session, understood the content and know where to find the documents it referenced.
| Name |
Role or team |
Signature or electronic confirmation |
Quiz result |
Follow-up needed |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
5. Assessment summary
| Field |
Entry |
| Number attended |
[Number] |
| Number absent (names passed to line managers) |
[Number] |
| Assessment used |
Quiz of [Number] questions / Exercise / None |
| Pass mark |
[Number] per cent |
| Number passed |
[Number] |
| Average score |
[Number] per cent |
| Questions most often answered wrongly |
|
| Attendees needing a retake or a targeted module |
|
| Attendee feedback in summary |
|
6. Trainer sign-off
| Field |
Entry |
| Trainer declaration |
I confirm that the session was delivered as described above and that the attendance record is accurate. |
| Trainer name and role |
[Role] |
| Signature and date |
[Date] |
| Received by the Information Security Manager on |
[Date] |
| Entered in GOV-REG-09 on |
[Date] |
7. Related documents
- GOV-PRO-08 Security and privacy awareness and training procedure
- GOV-REG-09 Training and awareness register
- GOV-REG-23 Policy acknowledgement register
Post-Incident Review Template
The structured review held within ten working days of closing a significant incident, recording the timeline, what worked, what did not, the root cause, the measured response times and the actions that follow.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 5.27; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 10.1; SOC 2 CC7.5; SOC 2 CC4.2. Owner: Information Security Manager.
1. How to use this template
The Incident Lead chairs the review within ten working days of closure for every Severity 1 and Severity 2 incident, and for any Severity 3 incident selected under GOV-PRO-07 step 4.11. Invite the technical lead, the system owner, the Privacy Officer where personal data was involved, and anyone whose decision appears in the timeline. The purpose is to improve controls, not to assign blame; write what the organisation will change, not who was at fault. Complete sections 2 to 5 before the meeting from GOV-TPL-05, and sections 6 to 11 during and after it.
2. Review details
| Field |
Entry |
| Incident reference |
[Prefix]-[Year]-[Number] |
| Incident type and severity |
|
| Date closed |
[Date] |
| Date of review |
[Date] |
| Held within ten working days of closure |
Yes / No. If no, state the reason. |
| Chair |
Incident Lead, [Role] |
| Attendees |
[Roles] |
| Personal data breach |
Yes / No. If yes, PIMS-REG-03 reference. |
3. Summary of the incident
Three to five sentences a reader outside the response team can follow: what happened, how it was found, what the impact was, how it was resolved.
4. Timeline
Copy the agreed timeline from GOV-TPL-05 and mark where time was lost. The phase column lets the review see how long each stage took.
| Date and time |
Event |
Phase |
Delay or gap noted |
|
|
Occurrence |
|
|
|
Detection |
|
|
|
Reporting |
|
|
|
Triage |
|
|
|
Containment |
|
|
|
Eradication |
|
|
|
Recovery |
|
|
|
Notification |
|
|
|
Closure |
|
5. Metrics
Targets come from GOV-PRO-07 step 4.3 for the severity assigned. Record the value in hours, or in days for the review itself.
| Metric |
Measured from and to |
Value |
Target |
Met (Yes / No) |
| Time to detect |
Occurrence to detection |
|
|
|
| Time to report |
Detection to report |
|
One hour |
|
| Time to triage |
Report to severity assigned |
|
One hour |
|
| Time to contain |
Detection to containment |
|
|
|
| Time to recover |
Detection to service restored |
|
Recovery time objective |
|
| Time to notify authority (if required) |
Awareness to notification |
|
72 hours |
|
| Time to notify clients (if required) |
Awareness to notification |
|
Contract |
|
| Review held |
Closure to review |
|
Ten working days |
|
6. What worked
List the controls, decisions and people that limited the impact. These are candidates for positive observations in the next internal audit and for keeping when budgets are reviewed.
7. What did not work
List the control failures, delays, missing information and decisions that would be made differently. Be specific: "the alert fired but was routed to an unmonitored mailbox" rather than "monitoring was weak".
8. Root cause analysis
| Field |
Entry |
| Method used |
Five whys / Cause and effect diagram / Other |
| Direct cause |
The technical or human action that produced the incident. |
| Contributing causes |
Conditions that made it possible or made it worse. |
| Root cause |
The underlying reason the direct cause could occur, usually a missing, weak or unfollowed control. |
| Why existing controls did not prevent it |
|
| Why existing controls did not detect it sooner |
|
| Was the risk in GOV-REG-05 before the incident |
Yes, rated [Band] / No |
9. Actions
Every action needs an owner and a date and is raised in GOV-REG-03 under GOV-PRO-04 so that it is tracked to closure and its effectiveness verified. Corrections fix this incident; corrective actions remove the root cause; improvements reduce impact or response time.
| Action |
Type |
Owner |
Due |
GOV-REG-03 reference |
|
Correction / Corrective action / Improvement |
[Role] |
[Date] |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
10. Updates required
| Record or document |
Update needed (Yes / No) |
Owner |
Done |
| GOV-REG-05 Information security risk register |
|
|
|
| ISMS-REG-01 Statement of Applicability or control status |
|
|
|
| GOV-REG-07 Supplier register |
|
|
|
| GOV-REG-14 Vulnerability register |
|
|
|
| Policies or procedures (name them) |
|
|
|
| Awareness content under GOV-PRO-08 |
|
|
|
| Monitoring rules under GOV-PRO-14 |
|
|
|
| Continuity plans under GOV-PRO-13 |
|
|
|
11. Sign-off
| Role |
Confirmation |
Date |
| Incident Lead |
Review complete and actions raised |
[Date] |
| Information Security Manager |
Actions accepted into GOV-REG-03 |
[Date] |
| Privacy Officer (where personal data involved) |
Breach record complete |
[Date] |
| Executive sponsor (Severity 1) |
Reviewed |
[Date] |
Readiness Verdict Note
The one page record that closes a go-live security and privacy gate, stating the verdict, the reasons, what was verified, what remains open and who signed.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 8.1; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 5.8; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 8.32; SOC 2 CC8.1; GDPR Article 25. Owner: Information Security Manager.
1. How to use this note
The reviewer writes this note at the end of the gate described in PB-07, after the GOV-REG-29 checklist for the system is complete. Keep it to one page. A reader who sees nothing else must understand whether the system may go to production, under what conditions, and what evidence the verdict rests on. File it in the evidence folder and reference it in GOV-REG-11 against the go-live change.
2. Project and environment
| Field |
Entry |
| Project or system |
[System name] |
| Environment reviewed |
Production / Pre-production configured identically to production |
| Review reference |
[Reference] |
| Checklist used |
GOV-REG-29 copy dated [Date] |
| Evidence folder |
[Location] |
| Submitting team lead |
[Role] |
| Reviewer |
[Role] |
| Review period |
[Date] to [Date] |
| Planned go-live |
[Date] |
3. Verdict
Select one. The decision table in PB-07 section 7 determines which applies.
| Verdict |
Meaning |
Selected |
| Approved |
Every blocker is Verified and every other check is Verified or agreed Not applicable. Production use may begin. |
|
| Approved with conditions |
Every blocker is Verified. One or more non-blocking checks are To confirm or Not implemented, each with an owner, a ticket and a due date within [Number] days. Production use may begin and the conditions are tracked in GOV-REG-03. |
|
| Stop |
At least one blocker is not Verified, or a blocker was marked Not applicable without the reviewer's agreement. Production use may not begin until the blocker is Verified and this note is reissued. |
|
4. Reasons
Three to six sentences. State the facts that drove the verdict and cite the evidence references from GOV-REG-29. Name any open blocker.
5. Verified areas
| Area |
Status |
Evidence reference |
Note |
| Scope and residency |
Verified / To confirm / Not implemented / Not applicable |
|
|
| External processing |
|
|
|
| Data flow |
|
|
|
| Access |
|
|
|
| Network |
|
|
|
| Encryption |
|
|
|
| Logging |
|
|
|
| Backups |
|
|
|
| Contractual |
|
|
|
| Privacy |
|
|
|
6. Open items
Every check that is not Verified. An open blocker means the verdict is Stop.
| GOV-REG-29 row |
Blocker |
Owner |
Due |
Condition for production use |
GOV-REG-03 reference |
|
Yes / No |
[Role] |
[Date] |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
7. Access list reference
The reviewer used read-only accounts to verify the evidence. Record where the list of those accounts is held and confirm their removal, so that the gate itself leaves no standing access behind.
| Field |
Entry |
| Access list location |
[Location] |
| Accounts used by the reviewer |
[Number] |
| All reviewer access removed on |
[Date], confirmed by [Role] |
8. Signatures
| Role |
Statement |
Name and date |
| Reviewer |
The checks were verified as recorded and the verdict follows the decision table. |
[Name], [Date] |
| Submitting team lead (Head of Engineering or delegate) |
The evidence submitted is complete and accurate and the open items are accepted with their dates. |
[Name], [Date] |
| Information Security Manager |
The verdict is accepted and the conditions are entered in GOV-REG-03. |
[Name], [Date] |
| Privacy Officer (where personal data is processed) |
The privacy checks are verified. |
[Name], [Date] |
| System owner |
The residual risk recorded in GOV-REG-05 is accepted. |
[Name], [Date] |
Playbook: start here, how to use this kit
What the kit is, who it is for, how to adopt it, and the rules that keep it safe to use. Read this before anything else.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 7.5; SOC 2 CC5.3. Owner: Information Security Manager.
1. What this kit is
This is a set of original templates and guidance for building and running an information security, privacy and AI governance programme. It holds policies, procedures, plans, forms, registers and playbooks, mapped to ISO/IEC 27001:2022, ISO/IEC 27701, SOC 2, GDPR and AI governance. The documents are written once and shared across the frameworks, so a single control set can serve several certifications and obligations at the same time.
2. What this kit is not
It is not a certification, an attestation or legal advice. Adopting these documents does not make an organisation compliant; following them and keeping the evidence does. It is not a copy of any standard: the kit cites clause, control, criterion and article numbers and leaves the authoritative text to the standard itself. Buy ISO/IEC 27001 and ISO/IEC 27701 from your national standards body, read the SOC 2 criteria from the AICPA, and read the GDPR text from the official source.
3. Who it is for
It is for the person who has been asked to stand up or tidy up a security or privacy programme in a small or growing organisation, and who wants a complete, consistent starting point rather than a folder of unrelated templates. You do not need to be a specialist. The playbooks assume you will learn as you go.
4. How to adopt it
4.1 Choose your path. If you are heading for ISO/IEC 27001, start with PB-02. For SOC 2, start with PB-03. For GDPR, start with PB-04. To add privacy management to an existing information security management system, use PB-05. For United States health data, use PB-11. You can run more than one; PB-10 explains how the frameworks share one control set.
4.2 Measure where you are. Fill the readiness questionnaire (GOV-REG-28) honestly, as PB-08 describes. It gives you a score by domain and a list of gaps. Every unknown becomes a line with an owner and a due date.
4.3 Put the backbone in place. Issue the governance framework (GOV-POL-01), the information security policy (GOV-POL-03) and the document control procedure (GOV-PRO-01), and open the master list of documents (GOV-REG-01). These set who decides, what the rules are and how documents are kept.
4.4 Know what you have. Build the asset register (GOV-REG-10), then run the risk method (GOV-PRO-05) on your most important systems and complete the Statement of Applicability (ISMS-REG-01) or the control matrix (SOC-REG-01).
4.5 Adopt the controls that match your risks. Take the operating procedures and topic policies that your risks and your framework call for, give each a single owner, and start the evidence calendar (SOC-REG-02 or your own).
4.6 Customise every document. Replace every item in square brackets, remove what does not apply, set the roles to your own, and have the approver sign. The documents ship as templates; they are only yours once you have done this.
5. The rules that keep it safe
- A template proves nothing. Keep filled registers, evidence, screenshots and anything that names your organisation in your own controlled storage, never in a public fork of this kit.
- Do not claim to be certified or compliant because you adopted the documents. Say what is true: that you have implemented the management system and are maintaining evidence.
- Follow the no-assumption rule from PB-09: every unknown becomes a line with an owner and a due date, and every gap becomes a corrective action.
- Name real, analyst-driven work in your evidence, and describe what your systems actually do. Do not overstate scope or coverage.
6. How it fits together
A policy says what must be true. A procedure says how it is done. A register records what happened. Evidence proves it. The kit gives you the first three; you produce the fourth by running the programme. The playbooks tell you the order of work; the guides explain each framework; the crosswalk (GOV-REG-27) shows where one control answers several frameworks at once.
7. Keeping the kit current
When you change a document, change it in your own copy and record the change in your master list. When the standards change, read the change and update the documents it affects. Review the whole set at least annually, and after any audit finding, incident or significant change.
8. Related documents
- PB-02 ISO/IEC 27001 in twelve steps
- PB-03 SOC 2 Type 2 readiness in 90 days
- PB-04 GDPR operations in ten steps
- PB-08 Running a readiness assessment
- PB-09 Evidence management
- PB-10 Combining frameworks
- PB-11 HIPAA readiness
Playbook: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 implementation in twelve steps
A twelve step route from the decision to certify to the certification audit, with inputs, activities, outputs, kit documents and typical duration for each step, and a 26 week timeline for an organisation of up to about one hundred people.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 4.1; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 5.1; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 6.1.2; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 6.1.3; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 8.1; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 9.2; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 9.3. Owner: Information Security Manager.
1. Before you start
This playbook is for the person who has been asked to get [Organisation] certified and needs an order of work. It assumes you have read PB-01, that you will use the registers in this kit, and that someone with authority has agreed to spend money and people's time. If that last point is not true, step 1 is where you make it true.
Durations assume an organisation of 20 to 100 people, one main product or service, cloud hosted, with one person spending about half their time on the programme and others contributing a few hours a week. Larger or more complex organisations should double the figures; very small ones can compress steps 5 to 7 into a fortnight. The one duration you cannot compress is step 10, because auditors need to see the system operating.
Track the work in ISMS-REG-05, which holds the tasks below with planned weeks, owners and status. Keep GOV-REG-01 from day one so that the master list grows as you go rather than being reconstructed at the end.
2. The twelve steps
Step 1. Management support and charter
Inputs. The reason certification matters (a customer, a market, a regulator), a rough budget, the names of the people who will carry the work.
Activities. Write a one page business case. Agree who the Information Security Manager will be and how much of their time the programme gets. Form the steering committee with a charter, quorum and monthly cadence using GOV-POL-01. Have the Chief Executive Officer sign GOV-STM-01. Agree the target date for stage 1 and the budget for the certification body.
Outputs. Signed commitment statement, steering committee charter and first meeting minutes, named roles, budget line.
Kit documents. GOV-STM-01, GOV-POL-01, GOV-TPL-03 for the committee minutes.
Typical duration. Two weeks. Longer if the budget needs a board cycle; start that conversation first.
Step 2. Scope and context
Inputs. The org chart, the list of products and services, the list of offices and hosting regions, current customer contracts with security clauses.
Activities. Run the context workshop in ISMS-PRO-01 and fill ISMS-REG-03 with the interested parties and their requirements. Draft the scope in ISMS-STM-01, including the shared responsibility split with your providers and any exclusions with reasons. Confirm the scope with the steering committee.
Outputs. Approved scope statement, interested parties register, issues analysis.
Kit documents. ISMS-PRO-01, ISMS-REG-03, ISMS-STM-01.
Typical duration. Two to three weeks, overlapping with step 1.
Step 3. Gap analysis
Inputs. The approved scope, access to the people who run each area, the Annex A tables in ISMS-GDE-01.
Activities. Work through GOV-REG-28 with the owners of each domain and through the Annex A tables control by control. Mark each item as exists and evidenced, exists informally, or missing. Turn every gap into a task in ISMS-REG-05 with an owner and a planned week. Report the result to the steering committee with the three largest risks you can already see.
Outputs. Completed readiness questionnaire, populated project plan, a gap summary for leadership.
Kit documents. GOV-REG-28, PB-08, ISMS-GDE-01, ISMS-REG-05.
Typical duration. Two weeks.
Step 4. Policy and governance
Inputs. The gap list, the kit's policy and procedure sources, the roles agreed in step 1.
Activities. Set up document control with GOV-PRO-01 and GOV-REG-01 first; everything else is then issued through it. Adapt and approve the top level policy GOV-POL-03, the governance framework GOV-POL-01, and the topic policies that apply (GOV-POL-02, GOV-POL-04, GOV-POL-05, GOV-POL-06). Issue the management procedures for audit, review, corrective action and exceptions (GOV-PRO-02, GOV-PRO-03, GOV-PRO-04, GOV-PRO-24). Issue the communication plan ISMS-PLN-02. Do not issue operational procedures yet; they depend on the risk assessment.
Outputs. Approved and published policies and management procedures, master list showing their versions, acknowledgement records starting in GOV-REG-23.
Kit documents. GOV-PRO-01, GOV-REG-01, GOV-POL-03, GOV-POL-01, GOV-POL-02, GOV-POL-04, GOV-POL-05, GOV-POL-06, GOV-PRO-02, GOV-PRO-03, GOV-PRO-04, GOV-PRO-24, ISMS-PLN-02.
Typical duration. Four to five weeks, running alongside steps 5 and 6.
Step 5. Competence and awareness
Inputs. The roles table, the headcount list, any existing training.
Activities. Complete the competence matrix in ISMS-PRO-02 and assess the people in security roles against it. Plan the gap closing actions. Set up GOV-REG-09 and schedule the all staff awareness session under GOV-PRO-08; run it before step 10 begins so that the acknowledgement records exist when operation starts. Identify who will be the internal auditor and arrange their training or an external auditor now, because step 11 is closer than it looks.
Outputs. Assessed competence matrix, training plan, first awareness session delivered and recorded, internal auditor named.
Kit documents. ISMS-PRO-02, GOV-PRO-08, GOV-REG-09, GOV-TPL-10, GOV-REG-23.
Typical duration. Three to four weeks, overlapping.
Step 6. Assets
Inputs. Exports from the identity provider, device management, cloud accounts and the finance asset list.
Activities. Build GOV-REG-10 with every information asset in scope, an owner and a classification using GOV-PRO-16. Build GOV-REG-24 for hardware and software with end of support dates. Build GOV-REG-07 with every supplier and a provisional tier. Build GOV-REG-25 for data flows across the scope boundary. These four registers are the raw material for the risk assessment; a risk assessment without them produces generic risks.
Outputs. Four populated registers, reconciled against the source exports.
Kit documents. GOV-PRO-16, GOV-REG-10, GOV-REG-24, GOV-REG-07, GOV-REG-25.
Typical duration. Three to four weeks, overlapping with steps 4 and 5.
Step 7. Risk method
Inputs. The gap summary, the steering committee's view of appetite, GOV-PRO-05 as the starting text.
Activities. Adapt GOV-PRO-05: confirm the scales, the matrix bands, who may accept risk in each band, and the review triggers. Approve it at the steering committee. Set up GOV-REG-05 and GOV-REG-06. Brief the risk owners on the scenario method so that the workshop in step 8 is productive.
Outputs. Approved risk methodology, empty risk and acceptance registers, briefed risk owners.
Kit documents. GOV-PRO-05, GOV-REG-05, GOV-REG-06, GOV-TPL-06.
Typical duration. One to two weeks.
Step 8. Risk assessment
Inputs. The asset registers, the issues analysis, incident history, the briefed risk owners.
Activities. Run risk workshops by area (product and infrastructure, people and access, suppliers and cloud, offices and devices, corporate systems). For each asset group imagine the incident, how it would be detected and by whom, then the causes and the existing controls. Score raw risk, agree treatment options, and record each risk in GOV-REG-05 with its owner. Have each owner confirm their rows. Present the heat map and the risks above appetite to the steering committee.
Outputs. Populated risk register with raw scores and treatment decisions, committee minute accepting the assessment.
Kit documents. GOV-PRO-05, GOV-REG-05.
Typical duration. Three to four weeks including owner confirmation.
Step 9. Treatment and Statement of Applicability
Inputs. The risk register, the Annex A tables, the gap list.
Activities. For each risk above appetite, define treatment actions with an owner and date and record them against the risk. Complete ISMS-REG-01 for all 93 controls: Applicable, justification, status, implementing documents. Make sure every control referenced by a treatment is Applicable, and every Not applicable has a reason tied to a risk or a scope fact. Load the treatment actions and the Planned or Partial controls into ISMS-REG-02 as implementation tasks. Now issue the operational procedures that the applicable controls need (GOV-PRO-06 to GOV-PRO-23, GOV-PRO-25 to GOV-PRO-27 as applicable) and the operational planning procedure ISMS-PRO-03. Set the objectives in ISMS-PLN-01 and the measures in ISMS-PRO-04.
Outputs. Risk treatment plan, Statement of Applicability version 1.0, control tracker with tasks, approved operational procedures, approved objectives and measures.
Kit documents. ISMS-REG-01, ISMS-REG-02, ISMS-PRO-03, ISMS-PLN-01, ISMS-PRO-04, GOV-REG-21, the operational procedures above.
Typical duration. Three to four weeks for the Statement of Applicability and procedures; the treatment actions themselves continue into step 10.
Step 10. Operate and measure
Inputs. Approved procedures, the control tracker, the measurement set.
Activities. Run the system. Implement the treatment actions and attach evidence in ISMS-REG-02. Perform the recurring events at least once each: access review (GOV-REG-12), vulnerability cycle (GOV-REG-14), changes through GOV-PRO-09 (GOV-REG-11), restore test (GOV-REG-15), supplier review (GOV-REG-07), an incident exercise (GOV-REG-16, GOV-REG-08), awareness refresher where due, quarterly performance report under ISMS-PRO-04, monthly operations review under ISMS-PRO-03, steering committee meetings with minutes. Book the certification body during this step; lead times are long. Use PB-09 to organise the evidence so that nothing has to be hunted for in step 12.
Outputs. At least one complete cycle of every recurring control with records; one quarterly report; a booked stage 1 date.
Kit documents. ISMS-PRO-03, ISMS-PRO-04, ISMS-REG-02, PB-09, all operational registers.
Typical duration. Twelve weeks minimum. This is the floor set by the need for operating evidence, not a target.
Step 11. Internal audit and management review
Inputs. Three months of records, the trained or contracted internal auditor, the audit programme in ISMS-PLN-03.
Activities. Run the full system internal audit under GOV-PRO-02 with ISMS-REG-04, covering clauses 4 to 10 and every applicable control, with an auditor independent of each area. Record findings in GOV-REG-02, raise corrective actions in GOV-REG-03 using GOV-TPL-02, and close or plan all of them. Then hold the management review under GOV-PRO-03 with every mandatory input, minute it with GOV-TPL-03, and track the decisions in GOV-REG-22. Run GOV-CHK-03 and fix what it shows.
Outputs. Internal audit report, corrective action log with root causes, management review minutes with decisions, readiness checklist result.
Kit documents. GOV-PRO-02, ISMS-PLN-03, ISMS-REG-04, GOV-TPL-01, GOV-TPL-02, GOV-REG-02, GOV-REG-03, GOV-PRO-03, GOV-TPL-03, GOV-REG-22, GOV-CHK-03, PB-06.
Typical duration. Three to four weeks, including the time to close findings.
Step 12. Certification
Inputs. Everything above, the booked dates, a room or a call line, the evidence folders.
Activities. Stage 1: present the documented system, answer the readiness questions, receive the concerns list and address each within the time the auditor sets. Stage 2: make the right people available, provide records from the registers, walk the auditor through configurations and offices, and record every finding in GOV-REG-03 as it is raised. After stage 2 submit the corrective action plans, obtain the certificate, update ISMS-PLN-02 external communications with the scope wording, and move the system onto its annual calendar as described in ISMS-GDE-03.
Outputs. Stage 1 report and responses, stage 2 report, corrective action plans accepted, certificate, surveillance dates in the calendar.
Kit documents. ISMS-GDE-03, GOV-REG-03, ISMS-PLN-02, ISMS-STM-01.
Typical duration. Stage 1 and stage 2 are usually four to eight weeks apart, and the certificate follows stage 2 by four to eight weeks.
3. The 26 week timeline
The table shows one workable arrangement. Steps overlap deliberately; the steering committee meets monthly throughout. Week numbers match the planned start and end weeks prefilled in ISMS-REG-05.
| Weeks |
Steps running |
Milestones |
Outputs due |
| 1 to 2 |
1 |
Commitment signed; committee formed; Information Security Manager named |
GOV-STM-01, GOV-POL-01 charter, first minutes |
| 2 to 4 |
2 |
Context workshop held; scope approved |
ISMS-REG-03, ISMS-STM-01 |
| 4 to 6 |
3 |
Gap analysis complete; project plan loaded |
GOV-REG-28, ISMS-REG-05 |
| 5 to 9 |
4, 5, 6 |
Document control live; policies approved; asset registers built; competence assessed |
GOV-REG-01, GOV-POL-03, topic policies, GOV-REG-10, GOV-REG-24, GOV-REG-07, ISMS-PRO-02 matrix |
| 9 to 10 |
7 |
Risk method approved |
GOV-PRO-05, GOV-REG-05 ready |
| 10 to 13 |
8 |
Risk workshops held; register confirmed by owners |
GOV-REG-05 populated |
| 13 to 16 |
9 |
Statement of Applicability 1.0; operational procedures issued; objectives set |
ISMS-REG-01, ISMS-REG-02, ISMS-PRO-03, ISMS-PLN-01, ISMS-PRO-04 |
| 14 to 26 |
10 |
System operating; certification body booked by week 16; first quarterly report by week 22 |
Operational registers filling, ISMS-REG-02 evidence, quarterly report |
| 21 to 24 |
11 |
Internal audit; corrective actions; management review; readiness checklist |
GOV-TPL-01, GOV-REG-03, GOV-TPL-03, GOV-CHK-03 |
| 25 to 26 |
12 |
Stage 1 audit; concerns addressed |
Stage 1 report and responses |
| After 26 |
12 |
Stage 2 audit four to eight weeks after stage 1; certificate |
Stage 2 report, certificate |
If the certification body cannot offer stage 1 by week 26, keep operating; more evidence never hurts. If the organisation wants stage 2 inside the 26 weeks, the only way is to start step 10 earlier by issuing the operational procedures that do not depend on the risk assessment (access, change, vulnerability, backup) in week 9 rather than week 13, and accept that the Statement of Applicability may be revised once the assessment finishes.
4. Roles through the programme
| Role |
Steps where they carry the work |
| Chief Executive Officer |
1 (commitment, budget), 2 (scope approval), 8 (risk acceptance above appetite), 11 (chairs management review), 12 (opening and closing meetings) |
| Information Security Manager |
Every step; owns ISMS-REG-05 and the registers |
| Steering committee |
Monthly from step 1; approves scope, policies, risk method, Statement of Applicability, objectives |
| Head of Engineering |
6 (asset exports), 8 (product and infrastructure risks), 9 and 10 (technical controls and evidence) |
| Head of People |
5 (competence and training), 6 (headcount), 10 (joiner and leaver records) |
| Head of Operations |
6 and 10 (suppliers, continuity exercise) |
| Privacy Officer |
2 (data subject and regulator requirements), 8 (privacy risks), 9 (controls 5.34 and 8.10) |
| Internal Auditor |
5 (trained), 11 (audit) |
| All staff |
5 (awareness), 10 (following the procedures), 12 (interviews) |
5. Signs you are off track
- Policies are being written before the gap analysis is complete. Stop and finish step 3.
- The risk register has fewer than twenty risks or none specific to your product. Rerun the step 8 workshops with the asset registers open.
- The Statement of Applicability has controls marked Implemented with no evidence in ISMS-REG-02. Change them to Partial until evidence exists.
- Week 18 has arrived and no access review, restore test or change record exists. Step 10 has not really started; push stage 1 back.
- The internal auditor also wrote the procedures. Find another auditor; the finding at stage 2 is certain otherwise.
- The management review minutes contain information and no decisions. Reconvene and decide something about resources or objectives.
6. Related documents
- PB-01 Playbook: start here, how to use this kit
- ISMS-REG-05 Implementation project plan
- ISMS-GDE-01 Guide to the 93 Annex A controls
- ISMS-GDE-02 Guide to mandatory documented information and records
- ISMS-GDE-03 Guide to the certification journey
- GOV-PRO-05 Risk assessment and treatment methodology
- ISMS-REG-01 Statement of Applicability
- ISMS-REG-02 Control implementation tracker
- GOV-CHK-03 Pre-audit readiness checklist
- PB-06 Playbook: running your first internal audit cycle
- PB-09 Playbook: evidence management that survives an audit
Playbook: SOC 2 Type 2 readiness in 90 days
How to get a small organisation ready for a SOC 2 Type 2 examination in about ninety days, then run the observation period the auditor samples.
Serves: SOC 2 CC4.1; SOC 2 CC1.2. Owner: Information Security Manager.
1. Purpose
This playbook takes a team with little formal structure to the point where a SOC 2 Type 2 examination can begin. It explains the difference between design and operation, the ninety days of preparation, and the observation period that follows, which is where the real evidence is made.
2. What SOC 2 is, in one paragraph
SOC 2 is a report, not a certificate, written by a licensed accounting firm against the Trust Services Criteria. A Type 1 report says the controls are suitably designed at a point in time. A Type 2 report says they also operated over a period, usually three to twelve months. Security is always in scope; availability, confidentiality, processing integrity and privacy are added only if you commit to them. The report reader, often a customer's security team, drives the scope.
3. Roles
| Role |
In this effort |
| Project owner |
Runs the readiness work and the evidence calendar. |
| Chief Executive Officer |
Owns commitments, approves policies, chairs governance. |
| Engineering and operations leads |
Produce technical evidence and fix technical gaps. |
| People lead |
Produces onboarding, training and background-check evidence. |
| Auditor |
The accounting firm, engaged once design is in place. |
4. The phases
4.1 Scope and categories (about days 0 to 10). Decide which Trust Services categories the report covers, based on what customers ask for. Define the system: the product, the people, the locations, the technology and the supporting corporate systems. Draft the system description with SOC-TPL-01.
4.2 Gap assessment (about days 10 to 25). Fill the readiness checklist (SOC-REG-03) and map every criterion to a control in the matrix (SOC-REG-01). Each gap becomes a corrective action in GOV-REG-03 with an owner and a date.
4.3 Remediation (about days 25 to 60). Close the gaps. Adopt the policies and procedures the criteria need, turn on the technical controls, and make sure each control has a named owner and a place where its evidence lands.
4.4 Evidence collection begins (about days 60 to 90). Start the evidence calendar (SOC-REG-02). From here on, every recurring control must produce evidence for every occurrence. This is the habit the Type 2 period depends on.
4.5 The observation period (three to twelve months). The controls operate and produce evidence continuously. Access reviews, vulnerability scans, change approvals, backups and training all run on their cadence, and each occurrence is kept. A Type 1 report at the ninety-day mark is an optional milestone that proves design while the period runs.
4.6 Audit fieldwork and report. The auditor samples the period, holds walkthroughs, inspects evidence and writes the report. Gaps found here are expensive, which is why the evidence calendar matters more than any single document.
5. The evidence calendar is the backbone
The single most useful tool is the recurring-events calendar (SOC-REG-02): the daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly and annual control events, each with an owner and the evidence it produces. A common monthly discipline is to spot-check one-twelfth of the controls, so that the whole set is reviewed once a year outside the audit.
6. What good evidence looks like
Evidence is a system export, a ticket, an approval or a dated screenshot, named as PB-09 describes, showing who did what and when. A blank template is not evidence. An empty register is not evidence. Back-dating is never evidence. If a control did not run, record that it did not and open a corrective action.
7. Common gaps to expect
Governance and HR evidence (board minutes, job descriptions, background checks, training records), a complete system description, a populated vendor inventory with assurance, and proof that recurring technical controls actually ran. Start these early; they take the longest to produce.
8. Related documents
- SOC-GDE-01 SOC 2 in plain words
- SOC-TPL-01 System description template
- SOC-REG-01 Trust Services Criteria control matrix
- SOC-REG-02 Evidence calendar
- SOC-REG-03 Readiness checklist
- PB-08 Running a readiness assessment
- PB-09 Evidence management
Playbook: GDPR operations for a product team in ten steps
Ten steps that turn GDPR from a one-off project into an operating habit for a team that builds or runs a product handling personal data.
Serves: GDPR Article 24; GDPR Article 30. Owner: Privacy Officer.
1. Purpose
This playbook makes GDPR operational. It assumes a small team that processes personal data through a product or service and wants accountability to run as part of normal work, not as a box-ticking exercise before an audit that never comes.
2. The idea in one paragraph
GDPR is an accountability law. It asks for four things: a map of the personal data you process, the operating processes that handle it, the evidence that those processes ran, and consistent statements to the outside world. Everything below builds those four things and keeps them current.
3. The ten steps
3.1 Secure management commitment. Agree who owns privacy, give them time and authority, and adopt the data protection policy (GDPR-POL-01). Decide whether a data protection officer is required.
3.2 Define roles. Record who is responsible for the processing inventory, who approves external statements, who handles requests and who leads a breach. Determine for each activity whether you are a controller or a processor (PIMS-PRO-01).
3.3 Map the data. Build the processing inventory (PIMS-REG-01) and the data flow map (GDPR-REG-02): what personal data you hold, why, on what basis, who receives it, where it goes and how long you keep it. This is the record of processing and the source for everything else.
3.4 Set lawful bases and notices. Record a lawful basis for every activity. Publish clear privacy notices (GDPR-TPL-01 to GDPR-TPL-03) and, where you rely on consent, capture and record it so you can prove it and honour withdrawal (PIMS-PRO-05).
3.5 Stand up the rights process. Put in place a route for people to exercise their rights, with the one-month clock tracked and the response letters ready (PIMS-PRO-03, GDPR-TPL-05). Log every request (PIMS-REG-02).
3.6 Prepare for impact assessments. Set the triggers and the method for a data protection impact assessment (PIMS-PRO-02, PIMS-TPL-01), and run one before any high-risk processing goes live.
3.7 Be ready for a breach. Adopt the breach procedure (PIMS-PRO-04) with the seventy-two hour clock, the risk assessment to individuals, and the notification form (GDPR-TPL-10). Record every breach, whether or not it was notified.
3.8 Govern suppliers and transfers. Keep the processor register (PIMS-REG-06) with Article 28 terms in place, and the transfer register (PIMS-REG-05) with a lawful mechanism and an impact assessment for each crossing outside the region.
3.9 Apply retention and deletion. Run the retention schedule (PIMS-REG-07) and make sure deletion reaches primary storage, derived data, backups and logs, not just the front-end record.
3.10 Review on a cadence. Work the habit: weekly for requests, incidents and supplier changes; monthly to export evidence and check retention; quarterly to refresh assessments; annually to review the whole programme. Every unknown becomes a line with an owner and a due date.
4. Safe wording
Never say "fully compliant" or "GDPR certified". Say what is true: that you process personal data under a recorded basis, that you keep a record of processing, and that you have the processes and evidence to meet your obligations. The gap assessment (GDPR-REG-01) tells you honestly where you stand.
5. Related documents
- GDPR-GDE-01 A GDPR operating model for a product team
- GDPR-GDE-02 GDPR articles mapped to the kit
- PIMS-REG-01 Personal data processing inventory
- PIMS-PRO-03 Data subject rights handling
- PIMS-PRO-04 Personal data breach handling
- GDPR-REG-01 GDPR gap assessment
- PB-05 Adding privacy management to an ISMS
Playbook: adding ISO/IEC 27701 privacy management to an existing ISMS
How an organisation that already runs an ISO/IEC 27001 management system extends it to personal data and prepares for ISO/IEC 27701 certification, in eight steps, with the evidence an auditor will ask for and the findings that most often go wrong.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27701 clause 5.2.1; ISO/IEC 27701 clause 5.2.3; ISO/IEC 27701 clause 5.4.1.3; ISO/IEC 27701 Annex A; ISO/IEC 27701 Annex B; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 4.3; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 6.1.3. Owner: Privacy Officer.
1. What you are adding, and what you are not
If you already operate an information security management system, the privacy extension is not a second system. It is the same scope decision, the same risk method, the same Statement of Applicability, the same audit programme and the same management review, each widened so that personal data and the people it describes are inside them. The work is in four places: the facts you do not yet have written down (which processing you do, in which role, on what basis), the controls you do not yet operate (rights handling, breach assessment, consent, transfers, processor terms), the documents that must say "and privacy" where they now say "security", and the evidence that all of this runs for long enough to be audited.
What you are not adding is legal compliance by certificate. ISO/IEC 27701 is a management system standard; it asks you to identify the privacy law that applies and run processes that meet it, and the auditor tests the processes. It does not certify that you comply with any particular law, and you should never say that it does. The GDPR documents in the kit, such as GDPR-GDE-01 and GDPR-REG-01, deal with the law itself; this playbook deals with the management system that carries it.
Expect the extension to take three to six months for an organisation with a working ISMS, most of it in steps 3 to 6, plus the operating period in step 7 before an audit is worth booking.
2. What changes in the ISMS
| Area |
Before the extension |
After the extension |
| Scope |
ISMS-STM-01 names services, systems and locations |
It also names the processing of personal data covered and the role of [Organisation] for each |
| Context and interested parties |
Customers, regulators and staff in ISMS-REG-03 |
Individuals whose data is processed, privacy regulators and client controllers are added with their requirements, and privacy law is in GOV-REG-04 |
| Policy |
GOV-POL-03 commits to information security |
PIMS-POL-01 commits to the privacy principles beside it, and GOV-POL-03 refers to it |
| Roles |
Information Security Manager accountable |
A Privacy Officer is named in GOV-POL-01 with independence, resources and a reporting line to the top |
| Risk |
GOV-REG-05 scores impact on the organisation |
GOV-PRO-05 also scores severity for individuals, PIMS-PRO-02 screens every processing activity, and PIMS-REG-08 records assessments |
| Statement of Applicability |
ISMS-REG-01 covers the 93 controls |
It also covers Annex A, Annex B or both, justified per processing role, using PIMS-GDE-01 |
| Controls |
Security procedures |
The privacy procedures PIMS-PRO-01 to PIMS-PRO-07, the policies PIMS-POL-02 and PIMS-POL-03 and the agreement PIMS-TPL-02, plus privacy additions to training, classification, backups, logs, test data, suppliers and incidents |
| Registers |
GOV and ISMS registers |
PIMS-REG-01 to PIMS-REG-08 are added and existing registers gain privacy columns |
| Competence |
Security training |
Privacy training for all staff and role-based training for handlers, developers and responders, recorded in GDPR-REG-05 |
| Measurement, audit and review |
ISMS-PRO-04, ISMS-PLN-03, GOV-PRO-03 |
PIMS-PRO-07 adds privacy measures, the audit plan adds the annexes and clause 5, and the Privacy Officer attends management review |
3. The eight steps
Step 1: decide the roles and the scope
Start with PIMS-PRO-01, not with the standard. For every service you run and every data set you hold, decide whether [Organisation] is a controller, a processor or both, and write the reasoning down. Most product companies are both: controller for their own customers, employees, applicants and marketing, and processor for the data their customers put into the product. The answer decides whether Annex A, Annex B or both apply, which procedures carry the most weight, and what your contracts must say.
Then revise ISMS-STM-01 so that it names the processing of personal data that is inside the scope and the role for each. A scope that says "all processing" is honest only if the inventory in step 3 supports it. Record the two decisions in GOV-REG-01 as a scope change and have the approver sign it.
Inputs: service list, contracts, ISMS-STM-01. Outputs: role decisions in PIMS-REG-01, revised ISMS-STM-01. Duration: two weeks.
Step 2: appoint the Privacy Officer and change governance
Name the Privacy Officer in GOV-POL-01 with the responsibilities in PIMS-POL-01: independence in how the role performs its tasks, direct access to the Chief Executive Officer, a seat at the steering committee and at management review, and the resources to run the procedures. Decide whether the role is a formal data protection officer under the law in GOV-REG-04; the kit uses one role name for both cases. Approve PIMS-POL-01, add it to the mandatory policies list in GOV-POL-03, communicate it under ISMS-PLN-02 and collect acknowledgements in GOV-REG-23.
Update ISMS-REG-03 with the new interested parties and their requirements, and GOV-REG-04 with the privacy law and the client contract clauses that apply. These two registers are what the auditor reads first to see whether you know what you are being measured against.
Outputs: approved PIMS-POL-01, updated GOV-POL-01, ISMS-REG-03, GOV-REG-04. Duration: two weeks, in parallel with step 1.
Step 3: build the processing inventory
PIMS-REG-01 is the foundation that every other privacy control refers to. Build it with the workshop method in GDPR-PRO-01: one session per function, listing every activity in which personal data is used, with purpose, lawful basis, data items, individuals, recipients, transfers, retention and the systems involved. Map the flows in GDPR-REG-02 and GOV-REG-25 at the same time. Give every row a Processing Owner, not a department.
Three traps. First, internal processing (HR, recruitment, access logs, monitoring, building access) is forgotten because the privacy conversation starts with customers. Second, processors and sub-processors are listed from memory rather than from GOV-REG-07, so a tool someone signed up for last year is missed. Third, retention is written as "as long as necessary", which PIMS-POL-02 forbids; put a period and a trigger in every row even if the first value is a best estimate marked for review.
Outputs: PIMS-REG-01 complete, GDPR-REG-02, PIMS-REG-06 and PIMS-REG-05 populated, PIMS-REG-07 drafted. Duration: four to six weeks.
Step 4: extend the risk assessment to individuals
Your risk method already exists in GOV-PRO-05. The extension is to assess, for every processing activity, the harm to the individuals as well as to [Organisation], using the severity scale in PIMS-PRO-02 step 4.8, and to screen every activity for a full assessment under PIMS-PRO-02 step 4.1. Record screening outcomes in PIMS-REG-08 even when the answer is "not required", because the auditor will ask how you know an assessment was not needed. Complete a full assessment on PIMS-TPL-01 for every activity that triggers one, and carry every medium or higher residual risk into GOV-REG-05 with a cross-reference.
Do not run a separate privacy risk register. One register with a column for harm to individuals keeps the treatment plan, the acceptances and the review cycle in one place, which is what clause 5 of the standard expects.
Outputs: PIMS-REG-08 with every activity screened, completed assessments, GOV-REG-05 extended. Duration: three to four weeks.
Step 5: extend the Statement of Applicability
Add the Annex A and Annex B rows to ISMS-REG-01 using the tables in PIMS-GDE-01. For each row decide Applicable Yes or No, write a justification that names the processing role and the risk or requirement, set the implementation status honestly, and name the kit documents you use. A processor-only organisation marks Annex A not applicable with that reason; a controller-only organisation does the same for Annex B; an organisation that is both applies both and says for which activities.
Walk the clause 5 and clause 6 table in section 4 of PIMS-GDE-01 at the same time and list the existing documents that need "and privacy" added: the training content, the classification scheme, the backup and logging procedures, the test data rules, the supplier procedure and the incident procedure. Raise a GOV-REG-03 action for each.
Outputs: ISMS-REG-01 extended, ISMS-REG-02 extended, a gap list in GOV-REG-03. Duration: two weeks.
Step 6: implement the privacy procedures
Issue and operate, in this order, because each depends on the one before: PIMS-PRO-05 (consent and notices, so that what you tell people matches PIMS-REG-01); PIMS-POL-02 and PIMS-REG-07 (retention, configured in systems); PIMS-PRO-03 and PIMS-REG-02 (rights handling, with GDPR-TPL-05 letters ready); PIMS-PRO-04 and PIMS-REG-03 (breach assessment, wired into GOV-PRO-07 step 4.4, with GDPR-TPL-10 ready); PIMS-TPL-02 and PIMS-REG-06 (processor terms, signed with every processor and offered to every client); PIMS-POL-03 and PIMS-REG-05 (transfers, with GDPR-TPL-08 assessments for every transfer that relies on contractual safeguards); PIMS-PRO-06 (privacy by design, wired into GOV-PRO-15 and PB-07). Close the "and privacy" gaps from step 5 under GOV-PRO-01.
Then train. All staff get the privacy module under GOV-PRO-08; request handlers, developers, support staff and incident responders get role-based sessions; record everything in GDPR-REG-05. A procedure nobody has been trained on is a document, not a control.
Outputs: every PIMS procedure issued and acknowledged, registers live, training records. Duration: six to ten weeks.
Step 7: operate and collect evidence
Run the extended system for at least three months before the audit, and preferably through one full quarter of PIMS-PRO-07 reporting. The auditor wants to see processes that have happened, not processes that could happen: requests received and answered on time in PIMS-REG-02, a breach exercise or a real event assessed under PIMS-PRO-04, assessments approved before go-live in PIMS-REG-08, retention checks with results in PIMS-REG-07, processor terms signed and sub-processor notices sent, and a quarterly report presented at management review.
File the evidence under PB-09 so that every register row points to an artefact. If no request or breach has occurred, run a tabletop exercise of each and keep the record; an exercise is evidence that the procedure works, silence is not.
Outputs: one quarter of records across every register, one PIMS-PRO-07 report, management review minutes in GOV-TPL-03 covering privacy. Duration: three months minimum.
Step 8: audit, review and certify
Extend ISMS-PLN-03 so that clause 5, the clause 6 additions and every applicable annex control are audited within the cycle, and add privacy questions to ISMS-REG-04. Run the internal audit under GOV-PRO-02 with an auditor who did not build the extension, raise findings in GOV-REG-03 and close them with verified effectiveness. Hold a management review under GOV-PRO-03 with the privacy report as an input and minute the decisions.
Certification follows the path in ISMS-GDE-03: the privacy extension is audited either with the next ISO/IEC 27001 surveillance or recertification visit, or as a separate extension audit, and the certification body decides which edition of ISO/IEC 27701 it audits against, so confirm the numbering with them before the Statement of Applicability is final (PIMS-GDE-01 section 5).
Outputs: audit report in GOV-TPL-01, closed findings, management review minutes, certification audit booked. Duration: six to eight weeks.
4. The evidence an auditor asks for
| Area |
What is asked for |
Where it is |
| Roles and scope |
The role decision for each service and the scope statement that reflects it |
PIMS-REG-01 reasoning notes, ISMS-STM-01, GOV-REG-01 approval |
| Governance |
The Privacy Officer's appointment, reporting line and attendance at management review |
GOV-POL-01, GOV-TPL-03 attendance |
| Inventory |
A complete record of processing with purpose, basis, data, recipients, retention and transfers |
PIMS-REG-01, GDPR-REG-02 |
| Risk |
Screening of every activity, completed assessments, residual approval, risks in the register |
PIMS-REG-08, PIMS-TPL-01 documents, GOV-REG-05 |
| Applicability |
Annex A and Annex B rows with justification and status |
ISMS-REG-01, ISMS-REG-02 |
| Transparency and consent |
Notices matching the inventory, consent records, withdrawal tests |
PIMS-REG-04, published notice versions in GOV-REG-01 |
| Rights |
Requests logged, verified, answered on time, refusals reasoned |
PIMS-REG-02, correspondence, GDPR-TPL-05 letters |
| Breaches |
Time of awareness, assessment, decision, notification or reasons for none |
PIMS-REG-03, GDPR-TPL-10, GOV-REG-08 |
| Processors and transfers |
Signed terms, sub-processor list and notices, transfer mechanisms and assessments |
PIMS-REG-06, PIMS-TPL-02 agreements, PIMS-REG-05, GDPR-TPL-08 |
| Retention |
The schedule, configuration evidence, check results, disposal records |
PIMS-REG-07, GOV-REG-20 |
| Design |
Checklists and gate reviews for recent changes |
PIMS-PRO-06 review records, GOV-REG-29 |
| Competence |
Training completion for all staff and role-based sessions |
GDPR-REG-05, GOV-REG-09 |
| Performance |
Quarterly measures, control grades, management review input |
GOV-REG-21, PIMS-PRO-07 reports, GOV-TPL-03 |
| Audit and improvement |
Internal audit coverage of the extension, findings and their closure |
ISMS-PLN-03, GOV-TPL-01, GOV-REG-03 |
5. Common findings and how to avoid them
| Finding |
Why it happens |
Avoid it by |
| Role not decided, or decided differently in the contract and the inventory |
Sales labelled the organisation a processor to close a deal; the facts say controller |
Run PIMS-PRO-01 before signature and let the legal adviser align the wording (step 4.10) |
| Scope statement silent on personal data |
The ISMS scope was copied forward |
Revise ISMS-STM-01 in step 1 and approve the change |
| Inventory misses internal processing |
Workshops started with customers |
Hold one workshop per function, including HR, finance, facilities and IT |
| Retention "as long as necessary" |
Nobody wanted to commit to a number |
PIMS-POL-02 statement 4.4: a period and a trigger in every row |
| Assessments missing or done after go-live |
Screening was left to the developer |
Screening at concept stage in PIMS-PRO-02 step 4.1, gate 3 before production |
| Statement of Applicability does not cover the annexes |
The team treated the annexes as guidance |
Clause 5 makes them normative; add the rows in step 5 |
| Notice does not match the inventory |
Notice written by marketing, inventory by the Privacy Officer, never compared |
Annual check in PIMS-PRO-05 step 4.11, and change control from register changes |
| No evidence of requests or breaches |
None occurred during the operating period |
Tabletop exercises with records, as step 7 says |
| Processor terms missing for small tools |
The tool was free or signed up by one person |
GOV-PRO-06 step 4.3 and the supplier register as the only source of truth |
| Transfers without an assessment |
The clauses were signed and the assessment assumed |
PIMS-POL-03 statement 4.4; PIMS-REG-05 has no mechanism column without an assessment reference |
| Training not role-based |
One generic module for everyone |
GOV-PRO-08 role sessions for handlers, developers, support and responders |
| Privacy Officer not independent |
The role sits inside the team it must challenge |
Reporting line and independence written into GOV-POL-01 in step 2 |
6. Related documents
- PIMS-GDE-01 Guide: ISO/IEC 27701 Annex A and Annex B controls and where the kit covers each
- PIMS-POL-01 Privacy information management policy
- PIMS-PRO-01 Determining controller and processor roles
- PIMS-PRO-02 Privacy risk and data protection impact assessment procedure
- PIMS-PRO-07 Privacy control effectiveness monitoring procedure
- ISMS-STM-01 ISMS scope statement
- ISMS-REG-01 Statement of Applicability
- ISMS-GDE-03 Guide: the certification journey from decision to recertification
- GDPR-PRO-01 Data mapping and records of processing procedure
- GDPR-GDE-01 Guide: a GDPR operating model for a product or service team
- PB-02 Playbook: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 implementation in twelve steps
- PB-04 Playbook: GDPR operations for a product team in ten steps
- PB-09 Playbook: evidence management that survives an audit
Playbook: running your first internal audit cycle
A practical walk through the first internal audit cycle, from preparing the programme and the checklist to interviewing, sampling, writing findings in four parts, running the closing meeting, raising corrective actions and following them up, for the person who has to do it for the first time.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 9.2; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 9.2.1; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 9.2.2; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 10.2; SOC 2 CC4.1; SOC 2 CC4.2. Owner: Information Security Manager.
1. What a first cycle has to achieve
The first internal audit cycle has three jobs. It must cover every clause 4 to 10 requirement and every control declared applicable in ISMS-REG-01 before the certification audit. It must produce findings that are true, specific and written well enough for someone to act on. And it must show the corrective action loop in GOV-PRO-04 working end to end, because that loop is what the external auditor reads first.
Expect findings. A first implementation is never clean, and an internal audit report with nothing in it tells an external auditor that the audit did not look. Ten to twenty findings across a first cycle, most of them minor or observations, is normal.
The rules are in GOV-PRO-02; this playbook shows how to apply them. The same cycle serves a SOC 2 programme as the separate evaluation that CC4.1 and CC4.2 ask for.
2. Six things to have in place before the first audit
- An approved plan. ISMS-PLN-03 names the audits, their scope, auditor, auditee and quarter, and GOV-REG-02 has one row per audit with Status Planned. An audit without a programme behind it is itself a nonconformity against clause 9.2.
- A competent auditor. GOV-PRO-02 step 4.3 sets the bar. If nobody inside meets it, engage an external auditor for the first cycle and have your intended auditor shadow them. The person who runs the management system cannot audit it.
- An independence map. Write down who may not audit what, using the table in ISMS-PLN-03 section 5, and record the arrangement in the Notes column of GOV-REG-02 before each audit.
- Three months of records. Audits test operation, not intention. Before a control has run for a quarter you can only audit its design, and the report should say so.
- An evidence folder you can read. Set it up as PB-09 describes and give the auditor read access to the whole period. Evidence requested one file at a time doubles the fieldwork.
- Warned auditees. The schedule goes out at the start of the cycle under ISMS-PLN-02, and each audit plan ten working days ahead. Surprise audits produce defensive interviews and missing people.
3. Planning one audit
The audit plan is one page: the scope area and the systems in it; the criteria (clause numbers, control numbers and the kit documents that implement them, as listed in ISMS-PLN-03); the dates and the day-by-day timetable; the people to interview, by role; the records to have available; the ISMS-REG-04 rows you will use; and how confidential material will be handled. Send it, get the confirmation, then read every document in the criteria before day one and pre-fill the Evidence to request column of your checklist copy. Fieldwork is for seeing evidence, not for discovering what it is called.
| When |
What you do |
| Ten working days before |
Issue the plan; book rooms and calls; request read access to the systems you will inspect |
| Three working days before |
Receive the confirmation; chase anyone missing |
| The day before |
Read the documents; prepare the checklist copy; list the populations you will sample and request the exports |
| Day one, first twenty minutes |
Opening meeting: scope, timetable, grading scale, how evidence will be shared, who to call if something cannot be found |
| Fieldwork |
Interviews of forty-five to sixty minutes; evidence inspection between them; keep one third of the time free for chasing evidence |
| Last hour |
Closing meeting (section 9) |
| Within ten working days |
Report on GOV-TPL-01 |
Budget one to three days of fieldwork per audit and never more than four interviews in a day.
4. Using ISMS-REG-04
The checklist has about one hundred and thirty rows: around thirty for clauses 4.1 to 10.2 and one for each Annex A control. Each row carries a question you can answer yes or no, the evidence to ask for and the role to ask. The first three columns are fixed; the rest are yours.
Work from a copy per audit, named for the audit reference, and keep only the rows in that audit's criteria. For controls marked Not applicable in ISMS-REG-01, set Result to Not applicable and write the Statement of Applicability justification in Notes, so the row shows that you checked the exclusion rather than skipped it. Add rows for your own policy statements where the kit question does not reach them.
The question is the way in, not a script. Ask it, ask to be shown, then follow what you see. Four rules keep the completed checklist usable as a record:
- One row, one conclusion. If a control conforms on one system and fails on another, split the row.
- No blank rows. Every row ends as Conforms, Minor, Major, Observation or Not applicable.
- Conforms needs evidence. Write the file names you saw, named as PB-09 requires, in Evidence seen; never write "seen" or "discussed".
- Notes hold the population, the sample size, how the sample was chosen and the exact words of any statement you rely on.
File the completed copy in area 11 of the evidence folder with the report. A checklist with evidence beside every row is what persuades an external auditor that the cycle was real.
5. Interviewing
Interview the role holders named in the plan, and at least two staff you choose on the day for the awareness questions under clause 7.3. Say at the start that you are auditing the process, not the person.
| Type |
Purpose |
Example |
| Open |
Get the person to describe the process in their own words |
Walk me through what happens from the day someone resigns to the day their access is gone |
| Probing |
Test a detail or a boundary |
What happens when the line manager is on leave that week |
| Show me |
Convert a statement into evidence |
Open the record for the most recent leaver and show me the removal date |
| Closing |
Find what the person already knows is weak |
If you could fix one thing about this process, what would it be |
Three habits matter. Separate what should happen from what did happen: "we usually" is answered with "show me the last one". Do not lead; "you do review access quarterly, don't you" produces a yes and no evidence. Write down the exact words of any statement a finding may rest on, with the role and the time, so the closing meeting discusses what was said rather than what was remembered.
When the answer is "someone else handles that", note the role and follow it the same day. When nobody can say, the row becomes To confirm with an owner and a due date, as PB-09 section 2 requires; if it is still unconfirmed when you write the report, it is a finding.
6. Sampling: how many and which
The minimum sample sizes are set in GOV-PRO-02 step 4.6 and are not negotiable downwards.
| Control frequency |
Minimum sample |
Typical population |
| Annual |
1 |
Management review, risk assessment, policy review, supplier annual review |
| Quarterly |
2 |
Access reviews per system, restore tests, steering committee minutes |
| Monthly |
3 |
Vulnerability scan cycles, metrics reports, change log exports |
| Weekly |
5 |
Backup verification, alert review notes |
| Daily or continuous |
25 |
Change tickets, access grants, alert triage, leaver removals |
| Any |
Whole population |
Where the population is smaller than the minimum |
How you choose matters as much as how many. Get the full population first, as a system export covering the audit period, and choose the items yourself: spread them across the period and include the cases most likely to break the control, such as an emergency change, a leaver with privileged access or a Tier 1 supplier. Never accept items the auditee has picked.
Sample from the system of record, not from the register. For access grants that means accounts created in the identity provider, traced back to GOV-TPL-09 forms; for changes it means deployments or tickets, traced to GOV-REG-11; for leavers it means the leaver list from the Head of People, traced to GOV-CHK-01 and to the account disable dates. A difference between the register and the system is itself a finding against the register.
When a sample contains one exception, double the sample. When it contains a second, stop: the control is failing systematically, which is the definition of a major nonconformity in GOV-PRO-02 step 4.7. Record population, selection method, items and exceptions in Notes; GOV-TPL-01 asks for the same facts in the method section.
7. Writing a finding in four parts
A finding is four sentences in a fixed order. Anything else is an opinion.
- Requirement. What the criteria require, cited by clause or control number and by the section of your own document that implements it. Quote your own document, never the standard.
- Evidence. What you saw: the files, the counts, the dates, the system, the sample.
- Gap. The difference between the two, in one sentence.
- Grade. Major, minor, observation or opportunity, using GOV-PRO-02 step 4.7.
Three examples:
Minor. GOV-PRO-10 section 4 requires a quarterly access review of every Restricted system, recorded in GOV-REG-12. GOV-REG-12 holds two reviews for [System name] in the last four quarters, dated in the first and third quarters, and none for the second or fourth. Two of the four required reviews were not performed. Minor nonconformity.
Major. GOV-PRO-12 section 4 requires a restore test for every critical system each quarter, recorded in GOV-REG-15 with the time taken. GOV-REG-15 contains no restore test entries for the audit period; the Head of Engineering stated that backups are monitored but restores have not been attempted since the service was set up. The control is not operating for any critical system. Major nonconformity.
Observation. GOV-PRO-01 section 4.5 requires an acknowledgement to name the document version acknowledged. GOV-REG-23 records acknowledgements of GOV-POL-02 but the version column is empty for the twenty entries made before the current version was issued. It cannot be shown which version those staff acknowledged; the current version is being acknowledged correctly. Observation.
Do not write names, solutions or "the team failed to", and do not pad the gap sentence with how serious you think it is; the grade says that.
8. Grading well
Grade the control, not the effort of the people running it, and not the ease of the fix. A ten minute fix to a control that has not operated all year is still a major nonconformity. Several minor findings with the same cause are one major, written once with the examples as evidence. An observation is evidence of weakness without a breached requirement; an opportunity for improvement is a better way of doing something that already conforms, and should be rare in a first cycle, because most of what looks like an opportunity is a weakness you have not finished investigating. When the auditee disputes a grade, record the disagreement and refer it to the executive sponsor as GOV-PRO-02 step 4.8 provides.
9. The closing meeting
Thirty to forty-five minutes, on the last day of fieldwork, with the auditee and the people who gave the main evidence.
- Thank the people who took part, and restate the scope and the grading scale.
- Read every finding aloud in its four parts. For each, ask one question: is the evidence correct. Correct the facts if they are wrong; do not debate the grade.
- State the positive observations: controls that worked well and the evidence that showed it. They go in the report and are the part the auditee will remember.
- Record any disagreement in the auditee's own words.
- State the next steps and dates: the report within ten working days, corrective action responses within ten working days of it (five for a major), re-audit of any major within ninety days.
No finding is raised after the closing meeting. Anything you discover while writing the report goes into the next audit of that area or, if serious, into a short additional audit agreed with the Information Security Manager.
10. The report and corrective actions
Write the report on GOV-TPL-01 within ten working days and send it to the auditee, the Information Security Manager and the executive sponsor. Enter the finding counts by grade and the report reference in GOV-REG-02 and set the audit to Reported. End the report with the evidence footer from PB-09 section 10.
The auditee raises one GOV-TPL-02 for each major and minor nonconformity and the Information Security Manager logs them in GOV-REG-03. Three responses arrive in every first cycle and none is a corrective action: "we retrained the person", "we updated the document" and "we reminded everyone". Each is a correction at best. Send them back with the question GOV-PRO-04 asks: why did the process allow this, and what change to the process stops it happening to the next person. The answer is usually a missing trigger, a missing owner or a missing record, and the corrective action is to add it. Observations and opportunities are logged with a decision to act or not act; not acting is acceptable when the reason is written down.
11. Follow-up and closing the cycle
Closure needs evidence that the changed process has operated, not a promise that it will: for a quarterly control, at least one review performed under the new process; for a daily control, a sample of items after the change date. Verify it yourself, record the result in GOV-REG-03, and re-audit any major within ninety days of the report. Set an audit to Closed in GOV-REG-02 only when every nonconformity it raised is Verified or Closed.
At the end of the year, reconcile coverage as ISMS-PLN-03 section 4.3 requires: every clause 4.1 to 10.2 and every applicable control in ISMS-REG-01 must appear in the criteria of an audit that was Reported or Closed, and anything missing goes into the first quarter of the next plan. Summarise the cycle for the steering committee each quarter and for the management review under GOV-PRO-03: audits done against plan, findings by grade, open and overdue corrective actions, and the controls that failed most often. Write next year's ISMS-PLN-03 from what you learned, and keep the whole folder for the external auditor: plan, completed checklist, evidence index, report, corrective action forms and closure evidence.
12. Ten mistakes first cycles make
- Auditing documents instead of operation, and reporting a conforming system that has no records.
- Letting the Information Security Manager audit the management system they run.
- Accepting samples chosen by the auditee.
- Writing "seen" in the evidence column.
- Grading down because the fix is easy, or because the person was helpful.
- Writing findings as advice rather than as requirement, evidence, gap and grade.
- Copying the standard's wording into the requirement sentence.
- Accepting "retrained the person" as a corrective action.
- Closing a finding on a promise or a document change, with no evidence of operation.
- Running the whole cycle in the last month before certification, so that nothing can be closed in time.
13. Related documents
- GOV-PRO-02 Internal audit procedure
- ISMS-PLN-03 Annual internal audit plan
- ISMS-REG-04 Internal audit checklist
- GOV-REG-02 Audit programme and findings
- GOV-TPL-01 Internal audit report template
- GOV-TPL-02 Corrective action request form
- GOV-REG-03 Corrective action log
- GOV-PRO-04 Nonconformity and corrective action procedure
- GOV-PRO-03 Management review procedure
- ISMS-REG-01 Statement of Applicability
- PB-09 Playbook: evidence management that survives an audit
- GOV-CHK-03 Pre-audit readiness checklist
Playbook: The Go-Live Security and Privacy Gate for a Software Project
How to run a short, evidence-based gate before a new system or major release goes to production, so that what the management system promises is true of the system being launched.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 8.1; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 5.8; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 8.32; SOC 2 CC8.1; GDPR Article 25. Owner: Information Security Manager.
1. Why a gate exists even in a certified organisation
A management system describes how the organisation works. A project is where the organisation does something new. Between the two there is drift. The certificate says that a set of controls exists and was sampled; it does not say that the system your team built last quarter has multi-factor authentication on its administrative console, or that its backups have ever been restored. Projects are built under deadline pressure by people who did not write the policies. Cloud defaults are permissive. Items marked "after launch" are forgotten once launch happens. Internal audit samples after the fact, so by the time it looks, the system has carried real data for months with the gap in place.
The gate is the point where the control set meets the new system before it carries real data, real users and real contractual promises. It is also the cheapest moment to fix anything, because nothing depends on the system yet.
A gate is short. The submitting team spends one to two days spread over two weeks; the reviewer spends two to three days. If a gate takes longer than that, either the project is not ready or the checklist has grown beyond the must-prove areas. Resist adding checks. Everything that is not a must-prove item belongs in the secure development lifecycle under GOV-PRO-15, where it is cheaper to catch.
2. The two-step model: the team submits, compliance verifies
The gate has two steps and two parties. The project team knows the system; the reviewer is independent of it. Neither does the other's job.
Step 1, submission. Two weeks before the planned go-live, the project lead receives a copy of GOV-REG-29 for the system. For each of the 30 checks the team sets a status, writes an evidence reference that points to a file in the evidence folder (built as PB-09 describes), and names an owner. The team may set three statuses: To confirm (evidence attached, awaiting verification), Not implemented (the control is absent and a ticket exists) or Not applicable (with the reason in Notes). The team never sets Verified. Verified is the reviewer's word.
Step 2, verification. The reviewer, normally the Information Security Manager or a delegate who has not worked on the project, opens every evidence reference and, wherever possible, observes the control directly using a read-only account provisioned for the gate. The reviewer sets each row to Verified, leaves it at To confirm with a note saying exactly what evidence would suffice, sets it to Not implemented, or agrees Not applicable. The reviewer never fixes anything. A reviewer who configures a setting to make a check pass has stopped being a reviewer.
Blockers first. The order of work follows the Blocker column, in both steps. The team completes the 22 blocking checks before the 8 others. The reviewer opens the blockers on the day of submission and tells the project lead the same day if any blocker is Not implemented or has no evidence. Nobody waits until the end of the review to learn that go-live is at risk.
3. The must-prove areas
GOV-REG-29 groups its checks into ten areas. Each area has a question the reviewer must be able to answer with evidence, not with a conversation.
| Area |
What must be shown |
Where it is recorded |
| Scope and residency |
The exact accounts, subscriptions or tenants that make up the system, the regions where data rests and is processed, and that these match what clients and privacy notices were told |
GOV-REG-10, ISMS-STM-01, GOV-REG-04 |
| External processing |
Every third party that receives data from the system, including analytics, email, error reporting, support, payment and AI services, each approved for its tier with a contract that permits the use |
GOV-REG-07, PIMS-REG-06, AI-REG-01 |
| Data flow |
A current diagram of stores, interfaces and endpoints with a classification per flow, and test environments that hold no production personal data |
GOV-REG-25, GDPR-REG-02 |
| Access |
Named accounts through the central identity provider, multi-factor authentication on every administrative path, an approved administrator list, a link to the leaver process and a first access review scheduled |
GOV-REG-13, GOV-REG-12, GOV-PRO-10 |
| Network |
The complete list of internet-facing endpoints, each intended and authenticated, with management interfaces and data stores unreachable from the internet |
GOV-CHK-02, GOV-PRO-21 |
| Encryption |
Current transport protocols, encryption at rest on every store including backups and snapshots, and keys and secrets held in a managed vault and absent from code |
GOV-REG-18, GOV-PRO-20 |
| Logging |
Authentication, privilege use, administrative actions, changes and restricted data access logged to a central store the system's administrators cannot alter, with alerts tested |
GOV-PRO-14 |
| Backups |
Backups configured at the agreed frequency in a separate account or location, a restore performed within the last 90 days, and recovery objectives the configuration meets |
GOV-REG-15, GOV-TPL-07 |
| Contractual |
The security and availability commitments made to clients for this system, each mapped to a control, plus licence compliance and supplier service levels |
GOV-REG-04, GOV-REG-24 |
| Privacy |
A completed impact assessment or a screening record showing none is needed, a processing inventory entry, an accurate notice, configured retention and the ability to fulfil rights requests |
PIMS-REG-08, PIMS-REG-01, PIMS-REG-07 |
4. Status vocabulary
The gate uses four statuses and no others. "In progress", "Partially" and "Planned" are not statuses: a partially implemented control is Not implemented with a note.
| Status |
Definition |
Who may set it |
| Verified |
The reviewer saw the control operating in the named environment on the recorded date, and the evidence reference points to proof that would satisfy an auditor without the reviewer present |
Reviewer only |
| To confirm |
Evidence is missing or insufficient. The row has an owner and a due date. It is an unknown, not a gap |
Team or reviewer |
| Not implemented |
The control is absent, shown by evidence of its absence, with a ticket, an owner and a due date |
Team or reviewer |
| Not applicable |
The check does not apply to this system, the reason is written in Notes, and the reviewer has agreed. On a blocking check the reviewer's agreement is written in Notes as well |
Team proposes, reviewer agrees |
An unknown on a blocker is treated as a gap when the verdict is decided. That rule is what keeps To confirm honest: it is a work item with a date, not a place to park an awkward question.
5. The gap evidence rule
A screenshot of the absence plus a ticket is a valid answer.
The gate measures truth, not perfection. A team that shows the reviewer the backup configuration page with no schedule on it, together with a ticket that names an owner and a date, has given a complete and honest answer. The reviewer marks the row Not implemented and moves to the next check. The review is not blocked by the gap; production use is blocked, if the check is a blocker. Those are different things, and keeping them separate is what makes teams tell the truth.
Without this rule, teams hide gaps as To confirm, delay submission to buy time, or argue about scope. With it, the fastest route through the gate is to state every gap plainly on day one. Evidence of absence follows the same rules as evidence of presence in PB-09: the account, environment and date are visible, and an export is preferred to a screenshot where one exists.
The verdict then follows the decision table mechanically. Nobody has to negotiate it.
6. Running the gate: a two-week timeline
| Day |
Who |
What happens |
| 0 |
Project lead, Information Security Manager |
The go-live change is raised with GOV-TPL-08 under GOV-PRO-09. The reviewer is named. The evidence folder is created with the PB-09 structure. Read-only reviewer accounts are requested with GOV-TPL-09 and listed in the access list |
| 1 to 5 |
Project team |
Step 1. Blockers first. Each check gets a status, an evidence file and an owner. Gaps get tickets |
| 5 |
Project lead, reviewer |
Submission. The reviewer opens every blocker the same day and reports any Not implemented or unevidenced blocker to the project lead immediately |
| 6 to 9 |
Reviewer, project team |
Step 2. The reviewer verifies, sending questions to the team in one batch per day. The team may close To confirm rows during this window |
| 10 |
Reviewer, signatories |
The reviewer writes GOV-TPL-12. A thirty minute sign-off meeting is held. Conditions are entered in GOV-REG-03. Reviewer accounts are removed and the removal is recorded |
| Go-live plus [Number] days |
Information Security Manager |
Conditions fall due. A missed condition is a nonconformity under GOV-PRO-04 |
For a system that processes personal data the Privacy Officer joins on day 6 for the privacy area and signs the verdict note.
7. The verdict decision table
| Blocking checks |
Non-blocking checks |
Verdict |
| All Verified, or Not applicable with the reviewer's written agreement |
All Verified or Not applicable |
Approved |
| All Verified |
One or more To confirm or Not implemented, each with an owner, a ticket and a due date within [Number] days (30 is the recommended maximum) |
Approved with conditions |
| All Verified |
Any To confirm or Not implemented without an owner or a date |
Stop until the rows are complete, usually a one day fix |
| Any To confirm |
Any |
Stop. An unknown on a blocker is a gap |
| Any Not implemented |
Any |
Stop |
| Any Not applicable without the reviewer's agreement |
Any |
Stop |
There is no override by seniority. If management decides to launch despite a Stop, that decision is a risk acceptance under GOV-PRO-24 by the authority for the risk band, recorded in GOV-REG-06, and the verdict note still reads Stop with the acceptance reference beside it. The gate records what is true; management records what it decided. Both records survive, and an auditor reading them later sees an organisation that knew what it was doing.
8. Outputs
A completed gate leaves these behind:
- The completed GOV-REG-29 copy for the system, dated and kept. The next major release of the same system starts from it and re-verifies only what changed.
- The signed GOV-TPL-12 verdict note.
- The evidence folder, with the evidence footer described in PB-09 on the verdict note.
- The access list of reviewer accounts and the confirmation of their removal.
- Conditions entered as actions in GOV-REG-03 with owners and dates.
- Register updates made during the gate: the system in GOV-REG-10, its interfaces in GOV-REG-25, any new supplier in GOV-REG-07, new or changed risks in GOV-REG-05, the processing entry in PIMS-REG-01 and the assessment in PIMS-REG-08, and evidence references against the relevant controls in ISMS-REG-02.
- The go-live change in GOV-REG-11 referencing the verdict note.
- Gate metrics for GOV-REG-21: gates run, verdicts by type, blockers found at submission, and days from submission to verdict.
9. Patterns that cause a Stop, and where to catch them earlier
| Pattern seen at the gate |
Where it should have been caught |
| Multi-factor authentication enforced for staff but not for the break-glass account or the vendor support account |
Design review under GOV-PRO-15; GOV-POL-06 |
| Backups configured, never restored |
GOV-PRO-12 quarterly test, scheduled at project start |
| Logs stored in the same account the system administrators control |
Architecture review; GOV-PRO-14 |
| "Test data" that is a copy of production personal data |
GOV-PRO-15 test data rules; PIMS-PRO-06 |
| An analytics, error reporting or AI service added in the final sprint with no supplier entry |
GOV-PRO-06 at the moment the dependency is added |
| Secrets present in repository history even after removal from the current code |
GOV-PRO-15 secrets scanning |
| "A DPIA is not needed" decided by the developer rather than screened under PIMS-PRO-02 |
Project kick-off; PIMS-PRO-02 screening triggers |
| Data resting in a region nobody chose because a managed service defaulted there |
GOV-PRO-26 region and residency decision at account creation |
Each of these is a design-time control that the gate merely confirms. A team that runs GOV-CHK-02 and the GOV-PRO-15 checks during the build arrives at the gate with nothing to hide and leaves in a day.
10. Related documents
- GOV-REG-29 Go-live gate checklist
- GOV-TPL-12 Readiness verdict note
- PB-09 Playbook: evidence management that survives an audit
- GOV-PRO-09 Change management procedure
- GOV-TPL-08 Change request form
- GOV-PRO-15 Secure development lifecycle procedure
- GOV-PRO-26 Cloud services security procedure
- GOV-PRO-06 Supplier and third party security procedure
- GOV-PRO-24 Exception and risk acceptance procedure
- GOV-PRO-04 Nonconformity and corrective action procedure
- PIMS-PRO-02 Privacy risk and data protection impact assessment procedure
- PIMS-PRO-06 Privacy by design and by default procedure
- GOV-CHK-02 Secure configuration baseline checklist
Playbook: Running a Readiness Assessment with the Questionnaire
How to run the 60 question readiness questionnaire in GOV-REG-28, score it, read the result honestly and turn every gap into an owned action.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 4.1; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 9.1; SOC 2 CC4.1. Owner: Information Security Manager.
1. What the questionnaire is, and what it is not
GOV-REG-28 holds 60 questions in ten domains, six per domain. It measures two things at once: how much of a working security and privacy programme exists, and how much of it can be proved. Each question comes with a sentence on why it matters, so that the person answering understands what the question is for rather than guessing what the asker wants to hear.
It is not an audit. An audit samples records against the clauses of a standard; ISMS-REG-04 does that. It is not a legal gap assessment; GDPR-REG-01 does that for the GDPR. It is not a certification and produces nothing you can show a client as one. It is a structured conversation with evidence attached, and its output is a scored picture of where you stand and a list of actions.
Use it at four moments: at the start, as the baseline before PB-02, PB-03 or PB-04; three months before an external audit, alongside GOV-CHK-03; when a client or a board asks how mature the programme is; and once a year, so that the trend is visible.
2. Before you start
Four decisions, made by the executive sponsor and the Information Security Manager before anyone answers a question.
Scope. The whole organisation, or one business unit, or one service. If a scope statement already exists in ISMS-STM-01, use the same boundary so that the result is comparable with the audit.
Roles. A coordinator, usually the Information Security Manager, who runs the sessions and keeps the register. A reviewer for each domain who did not answer it. An executive sponsor who will receive the result and own the action list. Nobody scores their own domain; that rule is what makes the result worth reading.
Time. Two to three weeks elapsed. Each respondent spends about a day, split across a preparation hour, a ninety minute session and the time to find evidence. The coordinator spends four to five days.
The copy. Take a dated copy of GOV-REG-28 for this assessment. Never answer in the master. The dated copies are the trend.
3. The ten domains and who answers
| Domain |
Typical respondent |
Typical reviewer |
| Governance |
Chief Executive Officer or executive sponsor |
Internal Auditor |
| Scope and context |
Information Security Manager |
Internal Auditor |
| Risk |
Information Security Manager and risk owners |
Internal Auditor |
| Policies and documents |
Information Security Manager and document owners |
Internal Auditor |
| People |
Head of human resources [Role] |
Information Security Manager |
| Access |
Head of Engineering or head of IT [Role] |
Information Security Manager |
| Assets and data |
System owners and the Privacy Officer |
Information Security Manager |
| Technology and cloud |
Head of Engineering |
Information Security Manager |
| Suppliers |
Procurement [Role] and supplier owners |
Privacy Officer |
| Incidents and continuity |
Information Security Manager and operations lead [Role] |
Internal Auditor |
Where the same person holds several roles, which is normal in a small organisation, the reviewer for that person's domains must be someone else, even an external adviser or a board member. The respondent answers; the reviewer sets maturity and status.
4. The three answer types
Every question is prefilled with a suggested answer type. The type says what kind of thing counts as an answer.
Policy. Point to the approved document that states the rule: its identifier, version and approval date. "Yes, we have a policy" is not an answer; "GOV-POL-06 version 1.0, approved [Date], acknowledged by all staff in GOV-REG-23" is. A Policy answer earns maturity 3 only when there is also evidence that the rule is followed, so a Policy question often needs a register or proof reference as well.
Register. Point to the rows of the kit register that hold the record: for example, the access review rows in GOV-REG-12 for the last two quarters. The register must be live, with dated entries and named owners. A register that is still the blank template is a maturity 0 answer with good intentions.
Proof. Attach an artefact that shows the control operating: a system export, a screenshot that meets the rules in PB-09, a signed record, a closed ticket, a test result. One artefact per question is enough if it is the right one.
The respondent may propose a different type where a better form of answer exists; the reviewer decides. Three things are never an answer whatever the type: a sentence with no reference ("we do this"), a plan ("we will do this next quarter"), and the name of a product on its own.
5. Scoring: maturity 0 to 3
The reviewer scores each question after seeing the answer and the evidence.
| Maturity |
Meaning |
What the reviewer saw |
| 0 |
Nothing in place, or the respondent does not know |
No document, no record, no artefact |
| 1 |
Done informally or occasionally, without a document or record, or with a document nobody follows |
A verbal account, a draft, a stale record |
| 2 |
Documented and performed, but the records are incomplete, irregular or not independently checked |
An approved document and a partly filled register |
| 3 |
Documented, performed at the stated frequency, records complete, verified by the reviewer |
Document, live register and proof, all consistent |
The Status column carries the reviewer's confidence in the score. Verified means the reviewer saw the evidence and the maturity is final. To confirm means evidence was requested, an owner and due date are set, and the maturity is provisional. Not implemented means the maturity is 0 or 1 and an action is needed. Not applicable means the reviewer agrees the question does not apply, and the row leaves the arithmetic.
The arithmetic is deliberately simple. The Score column in GOV-REG-28 divides maturity by three for every applicable row. A domain percentage is the average Score across the domain's applicable rows, which is the same as the sum of maturity divided by three times the number of applicable questions. The overall percentage is the average of the ten domain percentages, so that every domain weighs the same however many rows were excluded. Report one more number beside the percentages: the count of Verified rows out of 60, the proof ratio. It separates "we have it" from "we can prove it", and auditors live on the second.
6. Running the sessions
Run one session per respondent, sixty to ninety minutes, with the register open on a shared screen.
- The coordinator reads the question and the "why it matters" line aloud. The second line stops the conversation turning into a debate about what the question means.
- The respondent names the answer. The coordinator records the answer type, the answer and the evidence reference in the row immediately. Nothing is written up afterwards from memory.
- Anything without a reference becomes To confirm, with the respondent as owner and a due date inside five working days. This is the no-assumption rule from PB-09 and it applies to every row without exception.
- Evidence is filed in the evidence folder under the numbered area that matches the domain, named as PB-09 describes, so that the reference in the register points to something that exists.
- Within five working days of the last session the reviewer for each domain opens every reference, sets maturity and status, and writes one sentence in Reviewer notes saying what was seen or what is missing. A reviewer note that says only "OK" is not a review.
- The coordinator closes To confirm rows as evidence arrives, and escalates any row still open after its due date to the sponsor. A To confirm row is never quietly extended.
7. Reading the result
| Overall percentage |
Reading |
What it means for the next step |
| 0 to 39 |
Foundation |
The programme does not yet exist in a provable form. Start at the first four steps of PB-02, or the opening phases of PB-03 or PB-04. Do not book an external audit |
| 40 to 69 |
Developing |
Rules exist but evidence is patchy. Concentrate on live registers and records. An internal audit now will find major nonconformities, which is useful if the organisation can hear it |
| 70 to 89 |
Established |
The programme operates. Close the specific gaps, run the first internal audit cycle under PB-06, and plan the external audit three to six months out |
| 90 to 100 |
Audit-ready |
Run GOV-CHK-03 four weeks before the certification audit or the start of the SOC 2 observation period, and keep the evidence habit |
Read the shape as well as the number. Any domain below 40 is a priority whatever the overall figure, because a certification audit fails on the weakest clause, not on the average. A high score on Policy questions beside a low proof ratio is a paper programme: the documents exist and the work does not. A domain with many To confirm rows is an ownership problem rather than a control problem, and the fix is a name beside each row, not a new procedure.
Give the sponsor three answers, not a spreadsheet: the lowest domain and why, the largest gap between what is written and what is proved, and how many rows have no owner.
8. Turning gaps into actions
Every row whose status is Not implemented, and every row Verified at maturity 0 or 1, becomes one action in GOV-REG-03 under GOV-PRO-04. The description is the question text plus what is missing. The source is "Readiness assessment, [Date]". The owner is the row owner. The action names the kit document that closes the gap, taken from the table below, and the due date follows priority.
| Domain |
Kit documents that close the common gaps |
| Governance |
GOV-POL-01, GOV-POL-03, GOV-PRO-03, GOV-REG-21, GOV-REG-01 |
| Scope and context |
ISMS-STM-01, ISMS-PRO-01, ISMS-REG-03, GOV-PRO-25, GOV-REG-04 |
| Risk |
GOV-PRO-05, GOV-REG-05, ISMS-REG-01, GOV-PRO-24, GOV-REG-06 |
| Policies and documents |
GOV-PRO-01, GOV-REG-01, GOV-REG-23 |
| People |
GOV-PRO-18, GOV-PRO-08, GOV-REG-09, GOV-CHK-01 |
| Access |
GOV-PRO-10, GOV-POL-06, GOV-REG-12, GOV-REG-13 |
| Assets and data |
GOV-PRO-16, GOV-REG-10, PIMS-REG-01, GDPR-REG-02, PIMS-POL-02, PIMS-REG-07, GOV-REG-20 |
| Technology and cloud |
GOV-CHK-02, GOV-PRO-11, GOV-PRO-09, GOV-PRO-14, GOV-PRO-20, GOV-PRO-12, GOV-REG-15 |
| Suppliers |
GOV-PRO-06, GOV-REG-07, GOV-TPL-04, PIMS-TPL-02 |
| Incidents and continuity |
GOV-PRO-07, GOV-REG-08, PIMS-PRO-04, GOV-TPL-11, GOV-PRO-13, GOV-TPL-07, GOV-REG-16 |
Priority order: first anything that is a legal duty regardless of framework, which in practice means processor terms, the breach process and the processing inventory; then the blockers for the framework you are heading towards; then everything else from the lowest maturity upwards. The sponsor reviews the action list once, approves the dates and resources, and the list goes to the next management review under GOV-PRO-03 with the domain percentages beside it.
9. Repeating the assessment
Repeat annually and before each external audit. Keep every dated copy and compare domain percentages, not individual answers. Do not carry answers forward: a Proof answer older than twelve months is stale and is re-verified, and a Register answer is re-opened to check that entries continued after the last assessment. Put the overall percentage and the proof ratio into GOV-REG-21 as measures, so that the trend reaches management review without anyone having to remember to bring it.
10. Related documents
- GOV-REG-28 Readiness questionnaire
- GOV-REG-03 Corrective action log
- GOV-PRO-04 Nonconformity and corrective action procedure
- GOV-CHK-03 Pre-audit readiness checklist
- ISMS-REG-04 Internal audit checklist
- GDPR-REG-01 GDPR gap assessment
- GOV-REG-21 Security objectives and measures tracker
- PB-09 Playbook: evidence management that survives an audit
Playbook: Evidence Management That Survives an Audit
How to collect, name, protect and present the evidence that proves controls operate, so that an auditor, a reviewer or an investigator can rely on it without the person who collected it in the room.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 7.5.3; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 9.2; SOC 2 CC4.1. Owner: Information Security Manager.
1. What evidence is for
Evidence is the proof that a control operated at a point in time. Three audiences depend on it. The auditor, internal or external, who tests a control by sampling its records. The reviewer at a gate or a readiness assessment, who must set a status without taking anyone's word for it. And the organisation itself after an incident, when it has to show what was configured, who had access and when a change was made. To all three, a control without evidence is a control that did not operate. That is not cynicism; it is the only position a person can take who was not there.
Good evidence shares five properties. It is dated by the system that produced it. It shows where it came from: the account, the environment, the tenant or region. It is complete rather than illustrative: a population rather than one example. It is unaltered, and you can show that it is. And it is findable by someone other than the person who filed it.
2. The no-assumption rule
Every unknown becomes To confirm, plus an owner, plus a due date.
Never write "assumed", "should be", "probably", "I believe" or "as far as we know" in a register, a review or a report. If you did not see it, it is To confirm. This applies in GOV-REG-28, in GOV-REG-29, in ISMS-REG-02, in audit preparation and in every incident timeline. The reason is practical. An assumption converts into an audit finding at the worst possible moment; a To confirm row converts into a task today. The two cost the same to write and behave completely differently afterwards.
The rule has a corollary. A To confirm row that passes its due date is escalated to the sponsor or the Information Security Manager, not quietly extended. Extended unknowns are assumptions wearing a different label.
3. The evidence folder structure
One root folder per period: the audit cycle year for the management system, or one per project for a gate. Under the root, numbered areas. The first ten match the ten domains of GOV-REG-28 so that a readiness assessment, an internal audit and an external audit all file in the same place.
| Area |
Holds |
| 01 Governance |
Steering minutes, management review packs and minutes, objectives reports, policy approvals |
| 02 Scope and context |
Scope statement, context analysis, interested parties, legal register extracts |
| 03 Risk |
Risk assessment exports, treatment plans, acceptances and exceptions, Statement of Applicability |
| 04 Policies and documents |
Approved versions, review records, acknowledgement exports |
| 05 People |
Screening confirmations, training completion exports, induction records, leaver checklists |
| 06 Access |
Access request approvals, access review exports, privileged account lists, multi-factor settings |
| 07 Assets and data |
Asset register exports, classification records, processing inventory, retention checks, disposal records |
| 08 Technology and cloud |
Configuration exports, vulnerability scan exports, change tickets, backup and restore records, log retention settings |
| 09 Suppliers |
Questionnaires, certificates, assurance reports, contracts, review notes, exit confirmations |
| 10 Incidents and continuity |
Incident records, post-incident reviews, breach assessments, exercise records, continuity plans and test results |
| 11 Audit and review |
Internal audit plans and reports, corrective action records, external audit correspondence |
| 12 Projects and gates |
One subfolder per gate with its GOV-REG-29 copy, evidence and GOV-TPL-12 note |
Inside each area, split by system or by control only when volume demands it. Every area carries two files: an index, which is a simple table of file name, what it proves, which control or question it serves, the date collected and who collected it; and a hash list, described in section 7. The folder is classified Confidential, because evidence routinely contains names, account identifiers and configuration detail. Read access is for reviewers and auditors, write access for collectors, and nobody deletes except the Information Security Manager under the retention schedule.
4. File naming
Name every file as date, system, area, what, joined with underscores and in lower case:
YYYYMMDD_system_area_what.ext
YYYYMMDD_identityprovider_access_mfa-policy-export.csv
YYYYMMDD_backupservice_backups_restore-test-result.pdf
YYYYMMDD_cloudaccount_logging_retention-setting-01.png
The date is the date the evidence was collected, not the date it was filed, and it comes first so that a folder sorts into a timeline. The system is one word that anyone in the organisation would recognise. The area matches the folder. The "what" says what the file proves in two or three words. Add a two digit sequence number when several screenshots make up one proof. Never use "final", "new", "latest", "v2" or a person's name in a file name; the index records who collected it, and the date already says which is latest.
5. What a screenshot must show
A screenshot is admissible only when it answers four questions without the collector present: who was logged in, where, when, and what is being shown.
- Account. The signed-in user is visible, usually in the top corner of the console. An auditor needs to know the setting was read with an account entitled to see the whole picture.
- Environment. The tenant, subscription, account identifier or region is visible, or the navigation path makes it unambiguous. Production and staging consoles look identical; the identifier is the only difference.
- Date and time. The operating system clock or the page's own timestamp is in the frame. A file's modification date is not enough, because files are copied.
- The whole window. Include the address bar or the navigation path and the page title. A cropped widget proves nothing about where it came from.
- One fact per image. If a proof needs three settings, take three numbered screenshots, not one scrolled composite.
- Masking. Mask secrets, keys, passwords and personal data of individuals who are not needed for the proof, with a solid block so that the masking is obvious. Never blur, never crop to hide, never edit anything else.
A screenshot that fails any of these is To confirm until retaken.
6. Exports over screenshots
Where the system can export, export. A system export is complete where a screenshot is a sample; it is dated and attributed by the system; it can be filtered, counted and reconciled; and it is far harder to fabricate. Auditors sample from populations, so give them populations.
| Control |
Prefer this export |
Not this |
| Access review |
The full user and role list for the system as a dated file, with the reviewer's decisions beside each row in GOV-REG-12 |
A screenshot of the first page of users |
| Change management |
The change ticket export for the audit period |
Three example tickets chosen by the team |
| Backup |
The job history export showing every run and result for the period |
A screenshot of a green status tile |
| Training |
The completion export from the training record with names and dates, filed against GOV-REG-09 |
An email saying everyone finished |
| Vulnerability management |
The scan result export with severities and dates, reconciled to GOV-REG-14 |
A dashboard summary |
| Logging |
The retention configuration export and a log query result for a known event |
A screenshot of a log viewer |
Screenshots remain right for settings pages with no export and for events that are visual by nature, such as an alert arriving in the monitored channel.
7. Integrity: hashing and protection
Compute a hash value, using a current algorithm such as SHA-256, for every file at the moment of collection. Record it in the area's hash list with the file name, the collector and the date. Keep a copy of every hash list in a location the collectors cannot modify: the evidence index held by the Information Security Manager, or storage with a write-once setting. Re-verify the hashes before an audit and after any migration of the folder, and record that the verification was done.
This answers two questions before they are asked. From an auditor: how do you know this file was not altered after the fact. From an investigator after an incident: is this the configuration that was in place on that date. In both cases the answer is a hash list in a place the person who filed the evidence could not reach.
8. Retention and access
Keep evidence for at least one full certification cycle, three years for ISO/IEC 27001, or for the SOC 2 examination period plus the following examination, whichever is longer. Where client contracts require longer, GOV-REG-04 holds the period. Evidence that contains personal data follows PIMS-POL-02 and the schedule in PIMS-REG-07 as well: export only the columns the proof needs, and when the retention period ends, delete the evidence and record the deletion in the area index.
Review who has access to the evidence folder quarterly, as part of the access reviews in GOV-REG-12. Auditors receive read access to the period under audit for the duration of the audit, and that access is removed and recorded when the audit closes, exactly as reviewer accounts are removed after a gate under PB-07.
9. What auditors reject
Each of these has cost an organisation a finding. None of them is about the control; all of them are about the evidence.
- Undated screenshots, or screenshots whose only date is the file's modification time.
- Screenshots that show neither the account nor the environment, so that production cannot be distinguished from staging.
- Cropped images with no page context.
- A policy document offered as proof that the control operates. A policy proves the rule exists; a record proves it was followed.
- Evidence from outside the audit period, however good.
- A single example where a population was requested, or examples chosen by the team rather than sampled by the auditor.
- Evidence produced during the audit for a control that should have operated months earlier. The evidence may be genuine; the control was not operating.
- A file whose creation date contradicts its content.
- Exports that have been opened and saved in a spreadsheet application, losing the original format and gaining an edit history.
- A ticket closed with no record of what was done or who verified it.
- A register that is still the blank template, or has entries that stop three months ago.
- A signed acknowledgement that does not say which version of which policy was acknowledged, or when.
- An email that says "confirmed" with nothing attached.
If you recognise one of your own files in this list, mark its row To confirm today and collect it properly. It costs an hour now and a finding later.
10. The evidence footer
Every artefact that draws a conclusion ends with three lines. Audit reports, review minutes, risk assessments, gate verdict notes, readiness results, supplier assessments and post-incident reviews all qualify.
Evidence used: [file names or index references the conclusions rest on]
Evidence missing: [items that were To confirm when this was written, each with owner and due date]
Owner: [the role that holds this artefact and will update it]
The footer does two things. It lets a reader separate what the author saw from what the author believed, which is the difference between a finding and an opinion. And it turns every artefact into the to-do list for the next cycle, because the missing evidence is written down where the next person will look. An artefact with an empty "Evidence missing" line is making a strong claim; the author should be sure it is true.
11. Building the habit: evidence by frequency
Evidence collected on the day a control runs costs minutes. Evidence reconstructed before an audit costs days and is often rejected under section 9. Attach the collection to the control's own rhythm.
| Frequency |
Evidence produced at the time |
Filed against |
| Daily |
Alert triage notes under GOV-PRO-14 |
08 Technology and cloud |
| Weekly |
Vulnerability scan export, backup job history export |
GOV-REG-14, GOV-REG-15 |
| Monthly |
Incident metrics report, change log export, training completion export |
GOV-REG-08, GOV-REG-11, GOV-REG-09 |
| Quarterly |
Access review exports with decisions, restore test record, Tier 1 supplier review notes, steering committee minutes |
GOV-REG-12, GOV-REG-15, GOV-REG-07, 01 Governance |
| Annually |
Risk assessment export, management review minutes, internal audit report, policy acknowledgement export, continuity exercise record, supplier annual reviews |
GOV-REG-05, GOV-TPL-03, GOV-TPL-01, GOV-REG-23, GOV-REG-16, GOV-REG-07 |
Organisations heading for SOC 2 keep the same rhythm in SOC-REG-02, which is the calendar form of this table. Whichever form you use, the test is the same: on any given day, could an auditor open the folder and find last month's evidence without asking anyone.
12. Related documents
- GOV-PRO-01 Document control procedure
- GOV-REG-28 Readiness questionnaire
- GOV-REG-29 Go-live gate checklist
- GOV-TPL-12 Readiness verdict note
- PB-07 Playbook: the go-live security and privacy gate for a software project
- PB-08 Playbook: running a readiness assessment with the questionnaire
- GOV-PRO-02 Internal audit procedure
- ISMS-REG-02 Control implementation tracker
- SOC-REG-02 Evidence calendar
- PIMS-POL-02 Data retention and disposal policy
Playbook: one control set, several certifications
How to run one set of controls, one set of registers and one evidence folder so that ISO/IEC 27001, ISO/IEC 27701, SOC 2, the GDPR and NIST CSF 2.0 are served together through the crosswalk GOV-REG-27, with a plain account of where the frameworks genuinely differ and what cannot be shared between them.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 4.2; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 6.1.3; ISO/IEC 27701 clause 5.4.1.3; SOC 2 CC4.1; GDPR Article 24; GDPR Article 32; NIST CSF 2.0 GV.OC. Owner: Information Security Manager.
1. The idea
An organisation that reviews access quarterly does one piece of work. ISO/IEC 27001 calls it an Annex A control, SOC 2 calls it a control activity under two criteria, the GDPR calls it a technical and organisational measure, and NIST CSF 2.0 calls it a subcategory outcome. The work, the record and the evidence are the same. Everything that differs is how each framework asks about them.
So the kit holds one control set, described in its procedures and declared in ISMS-REG-01, and GOV-REG-27 records for each control which criteria, articles and categories it serves. Registers carry framework tags rather than being duplicated. Evidence is collected once, to the strictest standard any framework imposes, and filed once. The audits, attestations and inspections then read from the same system, and the cost of the second and third framework is mostly the parts that cannot be shared, which section 7 lists.
2. What each framework is
| Framework |
What it is |
Who checks and what you get |
| ISO/IEC 27001:2022 |
A management system standard: requirements for how you govern security (clauses 4 to 10) plus a reference list of controls (Annex A) you compare your own choice against |
An accredited certification body audits and issues a certificate for a three year cycle with annual surveillance |
| ISO/IEC 27701 |
An extension to ISO/IEC 27001 that adds privacy requirements and controller and processor controls; it cannot be certified on its own |
The same certification body extends the certificate scope |
| SOC 2 |
An attestation framework: you write a system description and state your controls, and a licensed accountancy firm tests them against the Trust Services Criteria |
A report with the auditor's opinion, either at a point in time (Type 1) or over a period, usually six to twelve months (Type 2) |
| GDPR |
Law: obligations on controllers and processors of personal data about individuals in the European Union, enforced by supervisory authorities and courts |
No certificate in normal practice; the test is whether you can demonstrate compliance when asked, and the consequence of failure is enforcement |
| NIST CSF 2.0 |
A voluntary framework of outcomes in six functions, used to describe current and target posture and to talk to boards and partners |
Self-assessed, or assessed by a consultant; produces profiles and tiers, not a certificate |
3. Where they genuinely differ
Treating the frameworks as interchangeable is the mistake that costs most. They differ on five dimensions, and each difference changes what an assessor will accept.
| Dimension |
Management system (ISO/IEC 27001 and 27701) |
Attestation (SOC 2) |
Law (GDPR) |
Framework (NIST CSF 2.0) |
| What is assessed |
The system: scope, risk, objectives, review, audit, improvement, and the controls it chose |
The controls you stated in your description, and whether they met the criteria |
Each processing activity: lawful, transparent, limited, secure, demonstrable |
Outcomes achieved, measured against a target profile |
| Who decides the controls |
You, from your risk assessment, checked against Annex A and justified in the Statement of Applicability |
You, against the criteria; the auditor tests what you claim |
The law sets the obligations; you choose the measures and must justify them |
You, through the profile you set |
| Time dimension |
A point of certification, then a cycle; records must show the system has operated |
A defined period; every control must have operated throughout it, and the sample is drawn from the period |
Always; an obligation applies at the moment it applies, with fixed clocks for notification and rights |
A snapshot, repeated when you choose |
| What failure looks like |
Nonconformities that must be closed before the certificate is issued or kept |
Exceptions written into the report, which readers see |
Complaints, investigations, orders and fines |
A gap between current and target profile |
| Scope language |
A scope statement naming locations, services and systems |
A system description naming services, components, boundaries and subservice organisations |
The processing activities in your records of processing |
The organisation or the part you chose to profile |
Two consequences follow. First, a SOC 2 auditor cannot accept the ISO certificate as evidence of operation, because the certificate says nothing about the period or the sample; and an ISO auditor cannot accept a SOC 2 report as proof of a management system, because the report never looked for one. Second, the GDPR is not a control set. Security controls satisfy one article; the lawful basis, the notices, the records of processing, the rights process and the breach clock are obligations no security framework will give you.
4. How GOV-REG-27 works
GOV-REG-27 has one row for each of the 93 Annex A controls, carrying the theme in the kit's own words, the SOC 2 criteria the control contributes to, the GDPR articles it helps satisfy, the NIST CSF 2.0 categories whose outcomes it supports, the kit documents that implement it, a note, and a status for your own review of the mapping.
Read a row from left to right as a chain of questions. Take the control for access grant and review. The theme reminds you what the control is. The SOC 2 column says that this one piece of work contributes to the criteria on user registration and removal and on role-based access with periodic review. The GDPR column says it is one of the measures that answer the security obligation. The CSF column points at the identity and access category. The kit column names GOV-PRO-10, GOV-TPL-09 and GOV-REG-12 as the procedure, the form and the record. The same evidence folder entry, a dated access review export with the reviewer's decisions, is what all four assessors will be shown.
Four rules govern the register:
- Mapping is partial, and the notes say where. A criterion listed against a control means the control contributes to it, not that it satisfies it alone. Most SOC 2 criteria draw on several controls and on the management system clauses as well.
- A mapping is never evidence. The crosswalk tells you which evidence to show to whom. The assessor then tests it to their own rules.
- "none" means none. Where a framework has no requirement a control serves, the cell says so. Do not fill the gap with the nearest sounding criterion; an assessor will read it as not understanding their framework.
- The register is reviewed annually and when any framework changes edition. Set the Status column to To review for every row at that point and confirm each mapping before resetting it to Confirmed.
The clause 4 to 10 requirements of ISO/IEC 27001 are not in the crosswalk because they have no Annex A number. Their SOC 2 relatives are the CC1 to CC5 criteria and the criteria on monitoring; ISMS-GDE-02 lists the mandatory items and SOC-GDE-03 maps the criteria to the kit.
5. The tag approach: one register, framework tags
Never keep two risk registers, two corrective action logs or two audit programmes. Add a Frameworks column to each shared register and fill it with tags: ISO27001, ISO27701, SOC2, GDPR, CSF. The registers that take tags are GOV-REG-05 for risks, ISMS-REG-02 for controls, GOV-REG-03 for corrective actions, GOV-REG-02 for audits, GOV-REG-04 for obligations and the evidence index in each area of the evidence folder.
Tags come from GOV-REG-27 and from GOV-REG-04, never from memory. A control row in ISMS-REG-02 inherits the tags of its crosswalk row. A risk inherits the tags of the controls that treat it. A corrective action inherits the tags of the control or clause it was raised against. An audit in GOV-REG-02 lists the tags of the criteria it covered.
What the tags buy you:
- A filter. When the SOC 2 auditor sends the request list, filter every register on SOC2 and you have the population they will sample from. When the certification auditor arrives, filter on ISO27001.
- One audit programme. ISMS-PLN-03 already covers every applicable control; the SOC 2 criteria ride on the same audits through the tags, and GOV-PRO-02 names them as criteria.
- One corrective action loop. A SOC 2 exception, an ISO nonconformity and a GDPR gap all become GOV-REG-03 rows and are closed the same way.
- One steering report. The quarterly report under ISMS-PRO-04 shows measures by tag, so the committee sees the SOC 2 period and the ISO cycle in the same table.
The frequency rule: a control is operated and tested at the strictest frequency any tagged framework needs, and only once. If the SOC 2 period needs quarterly evidence of a control that ISO would accept annually, it is quarterly, and the ISO auditor receives four records instead of one.
6. Evidence reuse
The same artefact answers a different question for each assessor. Collect it so that it answers all of them.
| Artefact |
ISO asks |
SOC 2 asks |
GDPR asks |
CSF asks |
| Quarterly access review export with decisions, GOV-REG-12 |
Does the control exist, apply, and operate as the procedure says |
Did it operate every quarter of the period; sample two and trace the removals |
Is access to personal data limited to those who need it, and can you show it |
Is the identity and access outcome achieved and improving |
| Change ticket export, GOV-REG-11 |
Are changes controlled per the procedure, including emergency changes |
For a sample of twenty-five changes across the period, were approval and testing recorded before deployment |
Were changes to processing assessed for privacy impact where needed |
Is platform change managed as an outcome |
| Incident record and post-incident review, GOV-REG-08 and GOV-TPL-11 |
Was the incident process followed and were lessons fed to improvement |
Was each incident in the period evaluated, responded to and communicated |
Was the breach assessed within the notification clock and documented even when not notified |
Were detection, response and recovery outcomes met |
| Training completion export, GOV-REG-09 |
Is competence and awareness evidenced for the roles |
Did every person in the period complete the training the policy requires |
Were staff handling personal data made aware of their obligations |
Is the awareness outcome achieved |
The collection rules in PB-09 already meet the strictest reader. Three additions matter when frameworks combine. Date coverage: SOC 2 samples are drawn across the whole period, so evidence that exists only for the month before the ISO audit fails the SOC 2 test; collect on the control's own rhythm, every time. Population exports: SOC 2 auditors sample from populations they choose, so keep the full export, not the items you think are interesting. Retention: keep evidence for the longest of the ISO cycle, the SOC 2 period plus the next period, and any contract term in GOV-REG-04.
7. What cannot be shared
Some artefacts belong to one framework and have no equivalent in another. Budget for them separately and do not try to make one document do two jobs.
- The SOC 2 system description and the management assertion. Written in the form SOC-TPL-01 sets out, signed by management, and read word for word by the auditor and by every customer who receives the report. ISMS-STM-01 is a source for it, not a substitute.
- The SOC 2 auditor's own tests. You cannot hand the attestation firm your internal audit and expect it to be relied on. Your internal audit is evidence of monitoring under the criteria; their tests are theirs.
- The mandatory ISO records. The scope statement, the risk assessment method and results, the Statement of Applicability, the objectives, the management review minutes and the internal audit records are required by clauses 4 to 10. SOC 2 does not ask for a Statement of Applicability and the GDPR does not ask for a management review; neither excuses you from producing them for the certificate.
- The ISO/IEC 27701 layer. The controller or processor role decision under PIMS-PRO-01, the applicability of the Annex A and Annex B controls, and the privacy extensions to risk and to the Statement of Applicability. PB-05 covers adding them.
- The GDPR obligations that are not controls. The lawful basis for each processing activity, the records of processing in PIMS-REG-01, impact assessments under PIMS-PRO-02, the notices from GDPR-TPL-01 to GDPR-TPL-04, the rights process under PIMS-PRO-03, the breach clock under PIMS-PRO-04, processor terms from PIMS-TPL-02 and transfer mechanisms under PIMS-POL-03. A certificate and a clean SOC 2 report together leave every one of these untouched.
- The CSF profile. Current and target profiles and the tier are a separate exercise in describing posture; they reuse the evidence but are not produced by any audit.
- The assessors and their rules. A certification body works under accreditation rules; an attestation firm under professional standards; a supervisory authority under the law. None of them will adopt another's sampling, period or conclusion.
- The words you may use. "Certified to ISO/IEC 27001" needs a certificate with the scope wording from ISMS-STM-01. A SOC 2 report is "has obtained a SOC 2 Type 2 report for the period", never "SOC 2 certified". Nothing is "GDPR certified" unless an approved certification scheme says so. ISMS-PLN-02 section 3 holds the safe wording.
8. Adding a framework to a set you already run
| Starting point |
What you already have |
What you add |
Kit documents |
| ISO/IEC 27001 certified, adding SOC 2 |
Policies, procedures, risk register, controls with evidence, internal audit, corrective actions |
The system description and assertion; a control matrix stated against the criteria; a period with continuous evidence; a control testing and sampling procedure; the subservice organisation review |
SOC-TPL-01, SOC-REG-01, SOC-REG-02, SOC-PRO-01, SOC-PRO-02, PB-03 |
| SOC 2 report in hand, adding ISO/IEC 27001 |
Controls with period evidence, a change and incident history, vendor reviews |
Scope and context, a risk method and assessment, the Statement of Applicability, objectives and measures, competence records, the internal audit cycle and the management review |
ISMS-STM-01, ISMS-PRO-01, GOV-PRO-05, ISMS-REG-01, ISMS-PLN-01, ISMS-PRO-02, GOV-PRO-02, GOV-PRO-03, PB-02 |
| Either, adding the GDPR |
Security measures and evidence, supplier register, incident process |
The processing inventory, lawful bases, notices, rights process, breach assessment, processor terms, retention schedule, transfer assessments |
PIMS-REG-01, GDPR-PRO-01, PIMS-PRO-03, PIMS-PRO-04, PIMS-TPL-02, PIMS-POL-02, GDPR-TPL-08, PB-04 |
| ISO/IEC 27001, adding ISO/IEC 27701 |
The management system |
Privacy scope and roles, privacy risk, Annex A and Annex B applicability, the privacy registers |
PIMS-POL-01, PIMS-PRO-01, PIMS-PRO-02, PIMS-GDE-01, PB-05 |
| Any, describing posture with NIST CSF 2.0 |
Everything above |
A current and target profile and a tier, drawn from ISMS-REG-02 through the CSF column of GOV-REG-27 |
GOV-REG-27, ISMS-REG-02 |
In every case the order is the same: tag what exists, from GOV-REG-27 and GOV-REG-04; list what the new framework needs that nothing serves; create only those items; run one calendar.
9. One calendar
The management system runs on a calendar, and a second framework adds events to it rather than a second calendar. ISMS-PLN-03 fixes the audits, SOC-REG-02 fixes the recurring evidence events for a SOC 2 period, and ISMS-PLN-02 fixes the communications. Put all three in one shared calendar with an owner per event. The quarterly rhythm that satisfies every framework at once is: access reviews, restore tests, Tier 1 supplier reviews, steering committee with the measures report, vulnerability closure review, privacy measures review under PIMS-PRO-07, and the audit for that quarter. The annual rhythm adds the risk assessment, the management review, the policy reviews, the awareness refresher, the continuity exercise, the crosswalk review and the SOC 2 period close.
10. Mistakes to avoid
- Treating a mapping as compliance. A row in GOV-REG-27 proves nothing; the evidence behind the control does.
- Mapping at the level of titles. Two requirements with similar names often test different things; map requirement to requirement and write the partial cases in the notes.
- Answering a SOC 2 request with "covered by our ISO certificate". The auditor needs the period evidence, not the certificate.
- Keeping a risk register per framework. One register, tagged, or the two will disagree in front of an auditor.
- Keeping an evidence folder per framework. One folder, indexed by control and tagged, as PB-09 describes.
- Writing a policy per framework. One policy per topic; the frameworks are listed in its control block.
- Treating the GDPR as a control set and forgetting the obligations in section 7.
- Forgetting the period. A control switched on the month before the ISO audit is a SOC 2 exception for every earlier month.
- Claiming a certification that a crosswalk suggests you deserve. Only a certificate, a report or a scheme supports a claim.
- Letting the crosswalk go stale when a framework changes edition.
11. Related documents
- GOV-REG-27 Framework crosswalk
- GOV-POL-01 Information security and privacy governance framework
- ISMS-REG-01 Statement of Applicability
- ISMS-REG-02 Control implementation tracker
- ISMS-GDE-01 Guide to the 93 Annex A controls
- ISMS-GDE-02 Guide to mandatory documented information and records
- SOC-GDE-03 Guide to Trust Services Criteria mapped to kit documents
- GDPR-GDE-02 Guide to GDPR articles mapped to kit documents
- PIMS-GDE-01 Guide to ISO/IEC 27701 Annex A and Annex B controls
- ISMS-PLN-03 Annual internal audit plan
- SOC-REG-02 Evidence calendar
- PB-09 Playbook: evidence management that survives an audit
- PB-02 Playbook: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 implementation in twelve steps
- PB-03 Playbook: SOC 2 Type 2 readiness in 90 days
- PB-04 Playbook: GDPR operations for a product team in ten steps
- PB-05 Playbook: adding ISO/IEC 27701 privacy management to an existing ISMS
Playbook: HIPAA readiness for a small team
The order of work for a covered entity or business associate to meet the HIPAA Security, Privacy and Breach Notification Rules, built on the kit's existing controls.
Serves: HIPAA 45 CFR 164.308; HIPAA 45 CFR 164.404. Owner: Information Security Manager.
1. Purpose
This playbook takes a small team that handles protected health information to the point where it can show it meets HIPAA. Most of the work is the kit's ordinary security and privacy controls applied to health data; the HIPAA set adds the pieces that are specific to the law.
2. First, know your role
Decide whether you are a covered entity, a business associate, or both. A covered entity is a health plan, clearinghouse or provider that transmits health data electronically. A business associate handles protected health information on behalf of a covered entity. The duties overlap heavily, but the Privacy Rule obligations are heavier for a covered entity, and a business associate works under a business associate agreement. HIPAA-GDE-01 explains the distinction.
3. The steps
3.1 Appoint the officials. Name the security official and the privacy official (one person may hold both in a small team). This is a required Security Rule standard.
3.2 Find the health data. List every place electronic protected health information is created, received, maintained or transmitted, in the asset register (GOV-REG-10). You cannot protect or assess what you have not located.
3.3 Run the security risk analysis. Perform the analysis required by the Security Rule (HIPAA-PRO-01), feeding the risk register (GOV-REG-05). This is the foundation; everything else flows from it, and no other step substitutes for it.
3.4 Work the safeguard matrix. Open HIPAA-REG-01. For each required specification, confirm the kit control that implements it is in place. For each addressable specification, record whether it is reasonable and appropriate, and implement it or an equivalent alternative, or document why neither is required. Encryption of health data at rest and in transit is almost always the reasonable measure.
3.5 Adopt the policies. Issue the HIPAA security policy (HIPAA-POL-02) and, if you are a covered entity, the privacy policy (HIPAA-POL-01) and a notice of privacy practices.
3.6 Govern business associates. Put a business associate agreement (HIPAA-TPL-01) in place with every vendor that handles protected health information, and record them in HIPAA-REG-02. If you are a business associate, make sure your own subcontractors are bound.
3.7 Prepare for a breach. Adopt the breach notification procedure (HIPAA-PRO-02). Know the sixty-day clock, the four-factor risk assessment, and when HHS and the media must be told. Open the breach register (HIPAA-REG-03).
3.8 Honour individual rights. Where you are a covered entity, stand up the process for access, amendment, accounting of disclosures, restrictions and confidential communications (HIPAA-POL-01), reusing the rights process in PIMS-PRO-03.
3.9 Train and document. Train the workforce, keep the documentation for six years, and review it as things change. The Documentation standard is required.
3.10 Evaluate. Periodically evaluate your safeguards against the rule through internal audit (GOV-PRO-02), and update the risk analysis after any significant change or incident.
4. What HIPAA does not change
HIPAA does not ask for a different security programme. Access control, encryption, logging, incident response, backups, continuity, training, vendor management and risk management are the kit's existing controls. Point them at protected health information, add the business associate agreement, the breach rule and the required-versus-addressable judgement, and keep the documentation. That is HIPAA readiness.
5. Related documents
- HIPAA-GDE-01 HIPAA in plain words
- HIPAA-GDE-02 HIPAA Security Rule mapped to the kit
- HIPAA-PRO-01 Security risk analysis procedure
- HIPAA-REG-01 HIPAA Security Rule safeguard matrix
- HIPAA-TPL-01 Business associate agreement
- PB-09 Evidence management
Master list of documents and records
The index of every controlled document and record in the management system. One row per document, with its current version, owner, approver, location and review dates. Updated whenever a document is issued, changed or withdrawn.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 7.5; SOC 2 CC2.2.
Columns:
- Document ID: The permanent identifier
- Title
- Type
- Framework
- Owner (role)
- Approver (role)
- Version
- Status
- Effective date
- Next review
- Location: The single approved location of the current version.
- Notes
Framework crosswalk
One row per Annex A control of ISO/IEC 27001:2022, recording the SOC 2 Trust Services Criteria the control contributes to, the GDPR articles it helps satisfy, the NIST CSF 2.0 categories whose outcomes it supports and the kit documents that implement it. Used to tag the shared registers and the evidence folder so that one control set serves every framework, as PB-10 describes; a mapping shows which evidence to present to whom, never that a requirement is met.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 6.1.3; SOC 2 CC4.1; GDPR Article 24; GDPR Article 32; NIST CSF 2.0 GV.OC.
Columns:
- Annex A control
- Theme: The same plain words as ISMS-REG-01. Read the standard for the authoritative text.
- SOC 2 criteria: Criteria the control contributes to
- GDPR articles: Articles the control helps satisfy. Security controls mostly serve Article 32; none means the regulation has no requirement this control serves.
- NIST CSF 2.0 category: Category identifiers in the form of function and category
- Kit documents: Kit IDs separated by semicolons
- Notes: Where a mapping is partial or conditional.
- Status: Your own review of the row. Set every row to To review when a framework changes edition.
- Last reviewed
Audit programme and findings
The internal audit programme for the whole cycle, one row per audit, from planning to closure. It shows what was audited, by whom, when, and how many findings of each grade the report raised, so that coverage of every clause and applicable control can be demonstrated.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 9.2; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 9.2.1; SOC 2 CC4.1.
Columns:
- Audit ID: One per audit, for example IA followed by year and sequence number.
- Period: The quarter or month in which the audit is planned.
- Scope: Areas, processes and systems covered.
- Criteria: Clauses, Annex A controls, SOC 2 criteria and kit documents audited.
- Auditor (role): Must be independent of the area audited.
- Auditee (role)
- Start date
- End date
- Status
- Major: Count of major nonconformities in the report.
- Minor
- Observation
- Opportunity
- Total findings
- Report reference: Reference of the GOV-TPL-01 report and where it is stored.
- Notes: Postponement approvals, independence arrangements, follow-up dates.
Corrective action log
Every nonconformity, observation and opportunity from any source, followed from raising to verified closure under GOV-PRO-04. One row per GOV-TPL-02 form, so that overdue actions, repeated root causes and the effectiveness of corrections can be reported.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 10.1; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 10.2; SOC 2 CC4.2; SOC 2 CC5.3.
Columns:
- CAR ID: Assigned by the Information Security Manager; matches the GOV-TPL-02 form.
- Source
- Source reference: Audit ID, incident ID, review date or complaint reference.
- Raised date
- Raised by (role)
- Description: The statement of nonconformity: what was observed against which requirement.
- Grade
- Root cause: The cause the organisation can act on, from the five whys or fishbone analysis.
- Corrective action: Summary of the plan on the form.
- Owner (role)
- Due date: Within 30 days of raising for a major, 90 for a minor, unless an extension is recorded in Notes.
- Status
- Effectiveness check date: At least 90 days after implementation, by someone other than the owner.
- Effectiveness result
- Closed by (role): Information Security Manager for a minor; executive sponsor for a major.
- Closed date
Legal, regulatory and contractual register
The list of obligations that apply to the organisation's information, privacy and records, one row per distinct requirement, maintained under GOV-PRO-25. Each row ties the obligation to the controls and documents that satisfy it, the evidence that proves it, and a status that shows where gaps remain.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 5.31; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 5.34; SOC 2 CC2.3; GDPR Article 24.
Columns:
- Reference: Sequential reference used in ISMS-REG-01 justifications and risk entries.
- Obligation: What is required, in plain words. One requirement per row.
- Source: The law, regulation, contract, scheme rule or guidance, with article or clause.
- Jurisdiction
- Applies as
- Owner (role)
- Controls and documents: Kit document IDs and Annex A controls that satisfy the obligation.
- Evidence: The record or export that proves compliance and where it is kept.
- Status
- Review frequency
- Last review
- Next review
- Linked risk or action: GOV-REG-05 or GOV-REG-03 reference raised for a Gap or Partial status.
- Notes
Information security risk register
Every information security and privacy risk scenario identified under GOV-PRO-05, with its raw and residual ratings, treatment decision, owner and review dates. The score and band columns calculate from the 1 to 5 scales so that two assessors produce the same result and acceptance goes to the right authority.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 6.1.2; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 6.1.3; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 8.2; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 8.3; ISO/IEC 27701 clause 5.4.1.2; SOC 2 CC3.1; SOC 2 CC3.2; GDPR Article 32.
Columns:
- Risk ID: Permanent reference, never reused.
- Asset or process: The asset from GOV-REG-10 or the process at risk.
- Risk scenario: A named threat exploits a named vulnerability on the asset, with the consequence.
- Threat: Environmental, technical failure, human error, insider misuse, external attack, supplier failure, legal change.
- Vulnerability: Technical weakness, missing or weak control, process gap, skill gap, physical exposure, contractual gap.
- Existing controls: Controls in place and operating today.
- Likelihood (1 to 5): Per the GOV-PRO-05 scale, with existing controls.
- Impact (1 to 5): Worst credible consequence per the GOV-PRO-05 scale.
- Score
- Band
- Treatment option
- Treatment plan and SoA references: Actions, the Annex A controls applied and the kit documents that implement them, and the target band.
- Risk owner (role)
- Due date: Date by which the treatment is to be implemented.
- Residual likelihood (1 to 5): Expected once the treatment is implemented and verified.
- Residual impact (1 to 5)
- Residual score
- Status
- Last review
- Next review: Monthly for Critical, quarterly for High, twice a year for Medium, annually for Low.
Risk acceptance and exception register
Every approved deviation from a policy or control and every acceptance of a risk above appetite, recorded under GOV-PRO-24 with its approver, duration and expiry. The expiry and days-to-expiry columns calculate from the approval date and duration so that nothing runs past its limit unnoticed.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 6.1.3; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 8.3; SOC 2 CC3.2; SOC 2 CC5.1.
Columns:
- Reference: Matches the GOV-TPL-06 form.
- Type
- Linked risk ID: The GOV-REG-05 entry.
- Description: What is being deviated from or accepted, and why.
- Requirement deviated from: Document ID and statement, or Annex A control.
- Compensating controls
- Band before: Without compensating controls.
- Band after: With compensating controls; determines the approver.
- Requested by (role)
- Approver (role): Low: Information Security Manager. Medium: plus head of function. High: executive sponsor. Critical: Chief Executive Officer.
- Approval date
- Duration (months): Maximum 12. Maximum 3 for a Critical band.
- Expiry date
- Days to expiry
- Status
- Review outcome: Closed with evidence, renewed under a new reference, escalated, or expired.
Security objectives and measures tracker
The information security and privacy objectives approved under ISMS-PLN-01, each with its measure, target, owner and latest value. It is updated at the frequency set for each measure and reported to the steering committee and management review.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 6.2; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 9.1; SOC 2 CC1.2.
Columns:
- Objective ID
- Objective: Measurable, consistent with GOV-POL-03, resourced.
- Measure: What is counted or measured.
- Method or formula: How the value is calculated and from which source.
- Target: The value and direction that means the objective is met.
- Frequency
- Owner (role)
- Latest value
- Measured on
- Status: Green on target; Amber within the tolerance set in ISMS-PLN-01; Red outside it.
- Linked risk: GOV-REG-05 ID the objective addresses, if any.
- Notes: Reason for Amber or Red and the action taken.
Management review action tracker
Every decision and action from management review under GOV-PRO-03, with its owner, due date and evidence of completion. It is the first input to the next review and the record that shows leadership decisions were carried out.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 9.3; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 9.3.3; SOC 2 CC1.2.
Columns:
- Action ID
- Review date: The management review that raised the action.
- Input or output area
- Decision or action
- Owner (role)
- Due date
- Status
- Completed date
- Evidence of completion: Reference to the record that shows the action was done.
- Notes: Escalations, reasons for carrying forward.
Training and awareness register
One row per person per training item, covering induction, annual refreshers, role-based modules, phishing simulations and exercises, with due and completion dates and the result. Maintained under GOV-PRO-08 so that completion rates and overdue training can be reported by module and role group.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 7.2; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 6.3; SOC 2 CC1.4.
Columns:
- Record ID
- Person: Name or staff identifier.
- Role group
- Module: The module name from the annual training plan.
- Training type
- Delivery method
- Assigned date
- Due date
- Completed date
- Result
- Score (per cent)
- Session record reference: The GOV-TPL-10 reference or the platform report name.
- Trainer
- Status
- Notes
Information asset register
One row per information asset with its owner, custodian, location, classification and the confidentiality, integrity and availability ratings from which the asset value is calculated. Maintained under GOV-PRO-16 and used as the asset list for the risk assessment in GOV-REG-05.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 5.9; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 5.12; SOC 2 CC6.1.
Columns:
- Asset ID
- Asset name
- Asset type
- Owner (role)
- Custodian
- Location or system
- Classification
- Personal data
- Confidentiality (1 to 3)
- Integrity (1 to 3)
- Availability (1 to 3)
- Asset value: The highest of the three ratings. Calculated.
- Linked risks: Risk IDs from GOV-REG-05.
- Last review
- Next review
- Status
Access review log
One row per access review of a system, including privileged account reviews and physical badge reviews, with the counts of accounts reviewed, removed and changed and the location of the export used as evidence. Maintained under GOV-PRO-10 so that every system can be shown to have been reviewed on its cycle.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 5.18; SOC 2 CC6.2; SOC 2 CC6.3.
Columns:
- Review ID
- System
- Review period: For example the quarter or year covered.
- Review type
- Reviewer (role)
- Accounts reviewed
- Accounts removed
- Accounts changed
- Privileged accounts reviewed
- Evidence reference: Where the account export taken on the review date is stored.
- Export date
- Completed date
- Changes applied date
- Status
- Notes
Privileged account register
One row per administrative, service, built-in, supplier and break-glass account with its holder or owner, justification, approval, multi-factor status, credential storage and rotation and review dates. Maintained under GOV-PRO-10 and reviewed quarterly.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 8.2; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 5.16; SOC 2 CC6.1.
Columns:
- Account ID
- Account name
- Account type
- System
- Holder or owner (role)
- Privilege level
- Justification
- Approved by (role)
- Approval date
- Multi-factor
- Credential storage
- Last rotation
- Last review
- Next review
- Status
- Notes
Physical access and visitor log
One row per visitor, contractor, delivery or unbadged person entering [Organisation] premises, with the host, purpose, zone, badge and times in and out. Maintained at reception under GOV-PRO-17 and reviewed monthly by the Information Security Manager.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 7.2; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 7.6; SOC 2 CC6.4.
Columns:
- Entry ID
- Date
- Name of person
- Organisation
- Entry type
- Host (role)
- Purpose
- Zone accessed
- Time in
- Time out
- Badge number
- Identity checked
- Escorted
- Status
- Notes
Media and equipment disposal log
One row per device, storage medium or batch of paper that held Confidential or Restricted information and was wiped, destroyed or returned, with the method, the people involved and the certificate reference. Maintained under GOV-PRO-16 as the proof that information did not leave with the hardware.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 7.10; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 7.14; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 8.10; SOC 2 CC6.5.
Columns:
- Disposal ID
- Asset ID: The GOV-REG-24 reference where one exists.
- Item description
- Media type
- Highest classification held
- Serial number
- Method
- Performed by
- Witnessed by
- Date
- Certificate reference
- Verification
- Status
- Notes
Policy acknowledgement register
One row per person per document acknowledged, including policies at induction, re-acknowledgements after changes and yearly, and signed confidentiality agreements. Maintained by Human Resources under GOV-PRO-18 so that a current acknowledgement can be shown for every person with access.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 6.2; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 6.6; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 7.3; SOC 2 CC1.1.
Columns:
- Record ID
- Person
- Employment type
- Document ID: The policy or agreement acknowledged, for example GOV-POL-02.
- Document version
- Acknowledgement type
- Method
- Due date
- Date acknowledged
- Evidence location
- Recorded by (role)
- Status
- Notes
Software and hardware inventory
One row per device, software product, component and cloud service with its assignment, owner, patch cycle, end-of-support date and encryption status. Maintained by the IT Manager under GOV-PRO-16 and reconciled yearly against device management and discovery exports.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 5.9; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 8.8; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 8.19; SOC 2 CC6.1; SOC 2 CC7.1.
Columns:
- Asset ID
- Asset name
- Category
- Vendor or publisher
- Model or version
- Serial or licence reference
- Assigned to (role or system)
- Owner (role)
- Location
- Classification of data held
- Patch cycle
- End of support date
- Encrypted
- Last verified
- Status
- Notes
Supplier register
One row per supplier, contractor or cloud service that can reach the organisation's information or systems, with its tier, the data it holds, its contract and processor terms, the assurance relied on and the review dates. Maintained under GOV-PRO-06 from first contact to exit.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 5.19; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 5.20; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 5.22; ISO/IEC 27701 clause 7.2.6; SOC 2 CC9.2; GDPR Article 28.
Columns:
- Supplier ID: A permanent reference assigned in sequence and never reused.
- Supplier
- Service provided
- Tier: The highest tier whose criteria apply under GOV-PRO-06 step 4.1.
- Data accessed: The highest classification the supplier can reach.
- Personal data
- Location: Country or region where the service and its data are hosted
- Contract reference
- Processor terms: Yes only when terms meeting GDPR Article 28 are signed.
- Assurance type
- Last review
- Next review
- Owner (role)
- Status
- Notes: Open gaps
Incident register
Every reported security event and declared incident, with the times that drive the response metrics, its type and severity, whether personal data was involved, the root cause and the corrective action it produced. Kept by the first responder and the Incident Lead under GOV-PRO-07.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 5.24; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 5.25; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 5.26; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 5.27; SOC 2 CC7.3; SOC 2 CC7.4; SOC 2 CC7.5.
Columns:
- Incident ID: Reference in the form prefix
- Date reported: Date and time the report reached the organisation.
- Date detected: Date and time the event was first noticed or alerted.
- Type
- Severity: From the matrix in GOV-PRO-07 step 4.3.
- Summary
- Personal data breach: Yes starts PIMS-PRO-04 and a PIMS-REG-03 entry.
- Date contained
- Date resolved
- Hours to contain: Detected to contained.
- Hours to resolve: Detected to resolved.
- Root cause
- Corrective action reference: The GOV-REG-03 entry raised from the post-incident review.
- Lessons learned
- Status
Readiness questionnaire
Sixty questions in ten domains that measure how much of a security and privacy programme exists and how much of it can be proved, each scored 0 to 3 by an independent reviewer. Run as PB-08 describes, with one dated copy per assessment so that the trend is visible.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 4.1; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 9.1; SOC 2 CC4.1.
Columns:
- Domain
- Question
- Why it matters
- Answer type: Suggested form of answer. Change it if a better form exists.
- Answer: The document identifier and version
- Evidence reference: File name in the evidence folder
- Owner (role)
- Maturity: Set by the reviewer. 0 nothing
- Status
- Due: Required when Status is To confirm or Not implemented.
- Reviewer notes: One sentence on what was seen or what is missing.
- Score: Maturity divided by three. Average by domain for the domain percentage.
Go-live gate checklist
The thirty checks a system must pass before it carries production data, in ten must-prove areas, with the blocking checks marked. One copy per system or major release, completed by the project team and verified by an independent reviewer as PB-07 describes.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 clause 8.1; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 5.8; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 8.32; SOC 2 CC8.1; GDPR Article 25.
Columns:
- Area
- Check
- Blocker: Yes means production use may not begin until the check is Verified.
- Status: Verified is set by the reviewer only.
- Evidence reference: File name in the evidence folder
- Owner (role)
- Due: Required when Status is To confirm or Not implemented.
- Notes: Reason for Not applicable
Change log
One row per change to a production system, configuration or security control, from request to closure. It is the index that proves every change was assessed, approved by the right authority, tested and reviewed under GOV-PRO-09.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 8.32; SOC 2 CC8.1.
Columns:
- Change ID: Sequential reference. Matches the change request form.
- Date raised
- Requester (role)
- Type
- Summary
- Systems affected: Use the names in GOV-REG-24.
- Risk rating
- Security relevant
- Approver (role)
- Approval date
- Planned window: Start and end of the agreed window.
- Implemented date
- Result
- Status
- Post-implementation review: Date and outcome, or the review reference.
- Notes
Vulnerability register
Every technical vulnerability found by scanning, dependency analysis, configuration assessment, advisories, penetration tests or external reports, with its severity, owner and deadline. The SLA due date is calculated from the severity and the found date using the deadlines in GOV-PRO-11, and the SLA position shows what is overdue.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 8.8; SOC 2 CC7.1.
Columns:
- Finding ID
- Source
- Asset: Host, image, repository, account or service, as named in GOV-REG-24.
- Description: Public vulnerability identifier if one exists, and what it allows.
- Severity
- CVSS score: Base score 0.0 to 10.0 from the source, after any approved adjustment.
- Found date: The date the source first reported the finding, not the triage date.
- SLA due: Calculated. Critical 7 days, High 30, Medium 90, Low 180.
- Owner (role)
- Status
- Fixed date
- Verification
- Verification date
- Exception reference: GOV-REG-06 entry when the deadline is not met.
- SLA position: Calculated from the status and the SLA due date.
- Notes
Backup and restore test log
A record of every restore test and operational restore under GOV-PRO-12, with the time taken against the recovery objectives. It proves that backups can be restored, not only that backup jobs ran.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 8.13; SOC 2 A1.2.
Columns:
- Test ID
- Test date
- System or data set
- Backup type
- Backup taken date: Date of the backup copy that was restored.
- Restore target
- Tester (role)
- Integrity check
- Time to restore (hours)
- RTO (hours): Recovery time objective from GOV-TPL-07.
- RTO met
- RPO met
- Result
- Corrective action reference: GOV-REG-03 entry for a failed or partial test.
- Status
- Notes
Business continuity exercise log
Every continuity exercise, technical recovery test and real activation under GOV-PRO-13, with the objectives, the recovery time achieved and the findings. It shows that plans are exercised on the required cadence and that lessons become actions.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 5.29; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 5.30; SOC 2 A1.3.
Columns:
- Exercise ID
- Date
- Type
- Scenario
- Plans and systems in scope
- Participants (roles)
- Facilitator (role)
- Objectives
- Objectives met
- Recovery time achieved (hours)
- RTO (hours)
- RTO met
- Findings
- Actions reference: GOV-REG-03 entries raised.
- Next exercise due
- Status
Capacity and availability log
Monthly capacity and availability results per system or component under GOV-PRO-19, with headroom forecasts and the actions they trigger. It gives management review a single view of where capacity or resilience is at risk.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 8.6; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 8.14; SOC 2 A1.1.
Columns:
- Entry ID
- Period: Month and year the entry covers.
- System or component
- Metric
- Threshold: The critical threshold for this metric.
- Peak value
- Average value
- Availability achieved (%)
- Availability target (%)
- Target met
- Headroom (months): Months until the critical threshold at the current trend.
- Action required
- Action
- Owner (role)
- Status
- Notes
Cryptographic key and certificate inventory
Every key, certificate and long-lived secret that protects [Organisation] data, with its purpose, algorithm, location, custodian and rotation dates under GOV-PRO-20. Rotation due and days to expiry are calculated so that nothing expires unnoticed.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 8.24; SOC 2 CC6.1; SOC 2 CC6.7.
Columns:
- Item ID
- Type
- Name or identifier: Key alias, certificate common name or secret name. Never the key material.
- Purpose
- System
- Algorithm and length
- Location
- Owner (role)
- Custodian (role)
- Created date
- Rotation period (days)
- Rotation due: Calculated from the created date and the rotation period.
- Expiry date: Certificate or secret expiry where one exists.
- Days to expiry
- Status
- Notes
Data flow and interface inventory
Every system-to-system interface and recurring transfer that moves [Organisation] data between systems or organisations, with its classification, protocol, encryption and authentication. It supports GOV-PRO-23 and GOV-PRO-26, feeds the personal data flow map, and is the list reviewed at the go-live gate.
Serves: ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 5.14; ISO/IEC 27001:2022 Annex A 8.12; SOC 2 C1.1; GDPR Article 30.
Columns:
- Interface ID
- Interface name
- From system
- To system
- Direction
- Internal or external
- Data description
- Data classification
- Personal data
- Protocol: For example HTTPS API, SFTP, message queue, database replication.
- Encryption in transit
- Authentication method: For example mutual TLS, signed token, API key, SSH key, federated identity.
- Frequency
- Owner (role)
- Review date
- Status